Designer User's Guide v4x

RSWire Designer
TM
User’s Guide
Contacting Rockwell Technical Support Telephone—1–440–646–7800
Software Technical Support Fax—1–440–646–7801
World Wide Web—www.software.rockwell.com
Copyright Notice © 2000 Rockwell Software Inc. wishes to ackknowledge the use of copyrighted material provided under
license from ECT International, Inc.
Printed in the United States of America
Portions copyrighted by Allen–Bradley Company,LLC, a Rockwell Automation company.
This manual and any accompanying Rockwell Software products are copyrighted by Rockwell Software Inc.
Any reproduction and/or distribution without prior written consent from Rockwell Software Inc. is strictly
prohibited. Please refer to the license agreement for details.
Trademark Notices The Rockwell Software logo, RSAlarm, RSAnimator, RSAssistant, RSBatch, RSBreakerBox, RSButton,
RSChart, RSCompare, RSControlRoom, RSData, RSDataPlayer, RSEventMaster, RSGauge, RSJunctionBox,
RSLogix Emulate 5, RSLogix Emulate 500, RSGuardian, RSHarmony, RSKeys, RSLadder, RSLadder 5,
RSLadder 500, RSLibrary Builder, RSLinx, RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500, RSLogix Frameworks, RSLogix SL5,
RSMailman, RSNetWorx for ControlNet, RSNetWorx for DeviceNet, RSPortal, RSPower, RSPowerCFG,
RSPowerRUN, RSPowerTools, RSRules, RSServer32, RSServer, RSServer OPC Toolkit, RSSidewinderX,
RSSlider, RSSnapshot, RSSql, RSToolbox, RSToolPak I, RSToolPak II, RSTools, RSTrainer, RSTrend,
RSTune, RSVessel, RSView32, RSView, RSVisualLogix, RSWheel, RSWire, RSWorkbench, RSWorkshop,
SoftLogix 5, A.I. Series, Advanced Interface (A.I.) Series, AdvanceDDE, AutomationPak, ControlGuardian,
ControlPak, ControlView, INTERCHANGE, Library Manager, Logic Wizard, Packed DDE, ProcessPak,
View Wizard, WINtelligent, WINtelligent LINX, WINtelligent LOGIC 5, WINtelligent Series, WINtelligent
VIEW, WINtelligent RECIPE, WINtelligent VISION, and WINtelligent VISION2 are trademarks of Rock-
well Software Inc., a Rockwell Automation company.
Data Highway Plus, DH+, DHII, DTL, MicroLogix, Network DTL, PLC, PLC–2, PLC–3, PLC–5, Power-
Text, Pyramid Integrator, PanelBuilder, PanelView, PLC–5/250, PLC–5/20E, PLC–5/40E, PLC–5/80E, SLC,
SLC 5/01, SLC 5/02, SLC 5/03, SLC 5/04, SLC 5/05, and SLC 500 are trademarks of the Allen–Bradley
Company, LLC, a Rockwell Automation company.
Microsoft, MS–DOS, Windows, and Visual Basic are registered trademarks, and Windows NT, Windows 98,
Microsoft Access, and Visual SourceSafe are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation.
ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International.
DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendors Association.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Digital Equipment Corporation, Intel, and Xerox Corporation.
Pentium is a registered trademark of the Intel Corporation.
Adobe and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. AIX, PowerPC, Power Se-
ries, RISC System/6000 are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/
Open Company Limited.
AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.
Warranty This Rockwell Software product is warranted in accord with the product license. The product’s performance
will be affected by system configuration, the application being performed, operator control and other related
factors.
The product’s implementation may vary among users.
This manual is as up–to–date as possible at the time of printing; however, the accompanying software may
have changed since that time. Rockwell Software reserves the right to change any information contained in
this manual or the software at anytime without prior notice.
The instructions in this manual do not claim to cover all the details or variations in the equipment, procedure,
or process described, nor to provide directions for meeting every possible contingency during installation,
operation, or maintenance.
Technical Support:
Rockwell Software provides technical support to RSWire Designer users

currently under warranty or support contracts. Technical support is available
Monday through Friday from 8 am to 5 pm Eastern Standard Time.
Phone (440) 646–7800 Fax (440) 646–7801
Please have your RSWire Designer serial number available when contacting
Rockwell Software Technical Support.
For Additional Support Services such as support contract renewal and

product information, contact the following:
440–646–7700 SW Services Phone

440–646–7701 SW Services Fax
440–646–7777 AutoFax Product Info
Email: info@software.rockwell.com
Information on RSWire training courses is available by contacting:
414–321–8000 Chris Sessions

Chris.Sessions@software.rockwell.com
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
1 Installation and Start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Starting RSWireTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Exiting From RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
VBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Load Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Unload Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Run Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Load Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Reference Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
2 Introduction to RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

RSWire Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
The RSWire Concept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
RSWire Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Manual Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Manual Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Menus and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Optional Software Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Using RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
3 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Project Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Create New Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Project Preselect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Lock and Unlock Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13
Delete Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Copy Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Modify Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
i
Table of Contents
Rename Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Project List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Backup a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Backup a Symbol Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-22
Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Project Reorganize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Project Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
4 Page Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Page Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Page Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Save Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Automatic Page Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Save As Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
New Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Page Break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16
Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Delete Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18
Copy Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20
Modify Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Modify Page Variables Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Modify Page Variables in Title Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Rename Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Move Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Viewing Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Browse Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Page List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
Delete Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Copy Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40
Rename Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Navigator Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43
Page Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
5 Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Wire/Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Drawing Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Symbol Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
ii
Table of Contents
Multiple Placement of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Search Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Parent and Child Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Macro Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Entering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Text Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
Invisible Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
Foreign Language Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47
Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52
Circles and Arcs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Signal Cross Reference – JIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Signal Cross Reference – IEC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-65
Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Automatic Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66
Manual Wire Number Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-72
Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-75
Changing Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-76
Deleting Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-77
Repositioning Wire Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-78
Part Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-79
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-83
Drawing a Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-85
Text File on Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-88
Edit Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Edit Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-92
Modify Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-94
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-105
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-106
Replace Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-108
Clear Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Replace Device IDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-110
Replace Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-114
Replace Symbol Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-115
Edit Part Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-118
Replace Part Number Globally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-119
Deleting Wire Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-120
I/O Device ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-121
Linetype Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-122
Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-123
iii
Table of Contents
Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124

Layer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-125
RSWire Layer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-127
List Object Function (for drawing elements) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-132
6 Create Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Create Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Symbol Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Symbol Libraries and Directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Symbol Creation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment) . . . . 6-18
Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
DXF Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
Symbol Creation Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Creating an Example Parent Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Creating an Example Child Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
Creating an Example Device Type Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Creating an Example Terminal Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-63
Creating Pin Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Creating Form C Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72
Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-77
Create Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-81
Create Title Block Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-83
Create Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89
Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-95
Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96
Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97
Multiline Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100
7 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Grid Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Report Format Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
iv
Table of Contents
Printer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

Command Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Address File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
General Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
Page Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
Page Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29
Programmable Controller Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37
Terminal and Plug ID Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-40
Device ID Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-43
Object Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Terminal Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Pin–Plug Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47
Object Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Symbol Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Macro Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Wire/Line Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Text Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-49
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-52
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-53
Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61
Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64
Preferences (Standalone Version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69
8 Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Plot Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Plot Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Plotting to Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
PLT Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
DWF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
DWG Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
DXF Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
Plotting Selected Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Creating and Selecting Layer Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
Defining Custom Drawing Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
v
Table of Contents
9 Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Printing Lists from RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
Project Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Project Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Project Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Installations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Page Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
Page Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
Library Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Device Type Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Device Type Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Foreign Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Page Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
Connections Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Wire List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Wire Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Cable List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Field Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18
Terminals Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
Terminal Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-19
PLC–List Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20
Parts Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Compile Parts File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
Master List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
Bill of Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
Purchase Order List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24
Job Costing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
Dimension List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-27
MS Access Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28
Comma Separated Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29
Error Checking Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Unreferenced Signals Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
Device Without Parent Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
vi
Table of Contents
10 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Preliminary Panel Layout Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Panel Layout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
Creating a Panel Layout Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9
11 Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Terminal Plan Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Steps of Terminal Plan Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Internal/External Connections and Jumpers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3
Terminal Plan Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5
Terminal Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6
Editor Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8
Terminal Editing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9
Graphical Terminal Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Graphical Terminal Plan Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-20
Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24
Graphical Terminal Plan Generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-30
Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Pin–Plug Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31
12 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Assigning a Cable in the Schematic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-7
Creating a Cable Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8
Creating a Cable Device Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14
Cable Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
13 Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

MS–Access Database Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
UI.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3
ARTICLE.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10
TDB.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14
USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-17
Accessing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18
Parts Database Edit Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19
Database Data Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20
Add a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23
Delete a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-24
vii
Table of Contents
Find a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

Edit a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-27
Table View of Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28
Database Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-29
Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Editing the Database Outside of RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-30
Changing Field Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32
Adding Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34
Database Complete Restructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36
Previewing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-37
Printing the Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
Printing from MS–Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-39
Printing from RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-40
14 List Generator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Assigning List Generator Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3
List File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6
Sort Criteria Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-11
Using Variable Data in Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-14
List Data Formatting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15
Arithmetic Operations With Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
String Manipulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-22
Static Filter for Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-23
Tab Formatting in Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-28
List Generator Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-29
Project Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-32
Database Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-34
Wire Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-36
Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-37
Field Wiring Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-41
Error Checking Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-45
15 Alternate Search Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
A RSWire Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
B RSWire Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
C Creating Symbol Icon Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Index
viii
Installation and Start–up
1 Installation and Start–up

Unpacking
The following items are included in the RSWireTM Designer package. When
unpacking, if any of these items are missing or damaged, contact Rockwell Software
or your RSWire distributor.
Package contents:
Software CD
Activation Floppy Disk(s) w/Serial Numbers
(Not applicable for RSWire Detailer)
Document On–Line and Resource CD
All Rockwell Software Inc. products include a serial number which identifies the
software. For RSWire , these serial numbers will be on the Activation Software
disk(s). These serial numbers are required to access technical support for your
RSWire software, so please store the serial number in a secure location.
1-1
Installation
To install the software, follow the instructions in the Installation Guide booklet.
Refer to the section of the Installation Guide that covers the version of RSWire
(AutoCAD–compatible or Standalone) that you purchased.
The installation process creates the following directory structure on your hard disk.
Some of these directories may contain additional subdirectories.
Rs Bmp (not applicable to RSWire Standalone) toolbar button bitmap files
Catalog JIC Block block definitions

(or other Device device definitions
catalog) Macro macro definitions
Wmf icon selection group files
Db Custom address files

Lg foreign language files
Logos title block logo files
Dbs Db parts database files
Fonts font directory
Menu Dialog dialog (prompt) & help files

Mnu menu files
Plot DWG and PLT plot files
Program System executables and DLL files
Project Work user’s project files
Syscon List list generator files

System configuration files
Tmp temporary (scratch) files
User user interface files (upgrades only)
Work working directory
1-2
Starting RSWire
1. In Windows you can run RSWire from the Start button menu or, if you have
created an icon (shortcut) for RSWire on the desktop, you can double click on
the icon.
2. The RSWire set of menus (File, Edit, View, Insert, Format, etc.) will appear
on the screen. RSWire is now ready to operate.
1-3
Exiting From RSWire

To exit from RSWire:
Select the Exit function in the File pull–down menu.
File
New
Open
Close
Break
Save
Save As
Next Page
Previous Page
Print/Plot
DXF Import
Backup/Restore
ACAD Menu
Exit
You will then exit from RSWire.
Exit without saving: RSWire will automatically save any changes you have made
to the current drawing page when you exit from the software using the File > Exit
function. If you wish to exit without saving the changes to the current drawing
page, execute the File > Break function before exiting with the File > Exit function.
Note In RSWire version 4.0, if you use the “X” button in the upper right corner of the
window to exit from the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, the software will ask if
you wish to save changes to the current drawing. If you select Yes, the RSWire menu
will be displayed the next time you enter AutoCAD. If this happens, you can select
the File > Exit function to return to the AutoCAD menu.
1-4
VBA
The add–on version of RSWire functions as an application inside AutoCAD. This
allows access to Visual Basic Applications (VBA) pertaining to RSWire. (The
standalone version of RSWire does not support VBA functionality.)
The Tools > VBA pull–down menu provides functions which allow a variety of
parameters to be set within VBA.
Tools VBA Load Project

Unload Project
Run Macro
Load Editor
Load Project
Provides access to VBA.
Unload Project
Takes the user out of VBA
Run Macro
Allows the user to choose a subroutine or function to run and debug its VBA code
while in VBA Run Mode.
Load Editor
Allows the user to edit and debug VBA code and to create forms while in the
Design Mode.
Reference Guide
For an explanation of VBA within RSWire, refer to the RSWire Visual Basic
Application (VBA) Reference Guide.
1-5
Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version)

Keyboard command aliases (shortcuts) are available for functions in the AutoCAD
add–on version of RSWire. To see a list of these aliases, view the ACAD.PGP file in
the RS\MENU\MNU directory.
1-6
Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version)

A graphics tablet (digitizer) can be used with the AutoCAD add–on version of
RSWire for drawing and for selecting symbols, macros, menu functions, etc.
A tablet template drawing named RSWIRETAB.DWG is provided in the

RS\WORK directory. This drawing is sized for a 11 x 11 inch tablet and contains a
variety of JIC symbols, macros, and RSWire commands. You can plot this drawing
and use it on your tablet.
Configure the Template:
1. Mount the template drawing on your tablet.
2. Open a new or existing drawing in AutoCAD (not RSWire).
3. On the command line enter the command: TABLET
4. When prompted for an option (ON/OFF/CAL/CFG), enter: CFG
5. When prompted for the number of tablet menus desired, enter: 4
6. You will be prompted to pick three points for each menu area on the template
followed by prompts for number of column and rows. Pick the points indicated
on the following diagram and enter the indicated column and row values.
7. When prompted to define the Screen Area, select the two points indicated in the
diagram.
1-7
MENU AREA 1
25 Columns
9 Rows
MENU
MENU AREA 2 SCREEN AREA AREA 3
11 Columns 3 Columns
8 Rows 8 Rows
MENU AREA 4
25 Columns
7 Rows
Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information on configuring tablets.
1-8
Introduction to RSWire
2 Introduction to RSWire
This section introduces RSWireTM Designer and explains the use and conventions of
this reference manual. A description of menu functions and their use is included.
RSWire Overview
The RSWire Concept
RSWireTM Designer is an advanced productivity tool for designers of electrical

control systems. Because of its customizable, open architecture, RSWire can also be
adapted to other applications such as hydraulics, pneumatics, and process control.
RSWire allows schematic diagrams to be rapidly constructed using pre–defined

symbols and macros. Wires are automatically broken at symbol connection points
and sections of drawings can be cut and pasted to save time. Many functions are
performed automatically by the software including the generation of unique device
IDs for each symbol, cross referencing of related symbols (such as contacts and
coils), and numbering of wires.
RSWire recognizes logical interconnections between devices in a schematic. A wire

is recognized as a wire and not just a graphic line. The system can check for errors
such as duplicate device IDs while the schematic is being created. The software can
perform automatic cross referencing and wire numbering. In combination with a
parts database,the software can automatically generate a variety of support
documentation such as terminal diagrams, cable plans, panel layouts, bills of
material, and a job costing analysis. Because work is divided into projects, many
related drawing pages can be included in these automatic functions.
The AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire runs as an application inside AutoCAD to

take advantage of that software’s drawing capabilities. There are add–on versions
for AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000.
RSWire Standalone is a self–contained software system: it does not run inside

another CAD software package. There are standalone versions that incorporate the
AutoCAD “OEM engines” for AutoCAD Release 14 and AutoCAD 2000, offering
DWG file compatibility with the corresponding RSWire add–on versions.
2-1
RSWire Functionality
This chart shows the interrelationship of RSWire functions.
RSWire CUSTOMIZE:
Page Format
STRUCTURE Title Block
Dialog Boxes
Project Pull–down Menus
Installations Language Lists
Locations List Formats
Symbol Libraries
SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS LISTS

CREATE
TERMINAL / CABLE Master Parts List
Symbols PLAN Quantified Parts (PO) List
Device Types
Bill of Material
Lines
Job Costing List
Macros
Wiring List
Fields
Labels
Cross References
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
LAN Operation
CAD Software (DXF, DWG Files)
PLC Programming Software
2-2
Using This Manual
Purpose
This manual is a reference for the operation of the RSWire system. Information
provided in this manual is sufficient for learning how to use the majority of the
software’s operating functions and advanced customization capabilities. However, to
realize the full potential of RSWire it is recommended that you participate in the
training programs offered by Rockwell Software. These training programs are
accelerated learning courses designed to ensure quick startup for users, and mastery
of the software’s advanced customizing and interfacing features for system
administrators and key operators.
Manual Organization
The sections of this manual are organized into four main groups:
I. INSTALLATION / INTRODUCTION
1. Installation and Start–up
2. Introduction to RSWire
II. PROJECTS AND SCHEMATICS
3. Project Management
4. Page Management
5. Schematic Elements
6. Create Schematic Elements
7. Settings
8. Plotting
III. LAYOUTS, LISTINGS, TERMINAL PLANS AND CABLES
9. Reports
10. Panel Layout
11. Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
12. Cables
IV. CONFIGURATION AND CUSTOMIZATION
13. Parts Database
14. List Generator Configuration
15. Alternate Search Paths
2-3
Manual Conventions
RSWire Functions
Various functions are available from pull–down menus at the top of the screen.
They are accessed by pointing the cursor and clicking the mouse button. In this
manual, the first reference to a pull–down menu function is shown as a series of
commands in bold type separated by arrows that indicate different levels of the
menu. For example:
Draw Wire 3 Phase
The above command indicates that one should go to the Draw pull–down menu,
select the Wire function and then select the 3 Phase function on the submenu.
Draw
Continuous
Wire
Center
Text Dashed
Logical Box 3 Phase
Field 90 Degree Down
Graphic 90 Degree Up
Dimension Multiline
Hatch... Repeat Last
Keyboard Use
If a specific key on the keyboard is to be pressed. The name of the key will be
shown enclosed in < > characters. For example:
<Enter> (press the Enter key)
2-4
Menus and Functions

RSWire functions are accessible through pull–down menus at the top of the screen.
Functions can also be activated by selecting them in dialog boxes. The AutoCAD
add–on version of RSWire also allows functions to be entered on the command line.
These command line functions are listed in the RSWire help file under Commands.
Pull–down menu functions are shown on the following page. The numbers
following the first level menu functions indicate which submenu will appear.
In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, some of these functions are also
displayed as side menu functions to provide faster access during work sessions. The
initial side menu is:
MAIN
Sym–Crea the Manage > Symbol (create) submenu

Symbol the Insert > Symbol by Name function
Macro the Insert > Macro by Name function
Icon the Insert > Select Icon function
Continuous the Draw > Wire > Continuous function

Wire 3 the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function
Text the Draw > Text function
Box functions from Draw > Graphic > Box and
Draw > Logical Box menus
Field the Draw > Field function
Delete the Modify > Delete function

Move the Modify > Move function
Stretch the Modify > Stretch function
Copy the Modify > Copy function
System the Tools > System Settings function
Sym–Edit the Modify > Symbol function

Page functions from Manage > Page menus
Undo the Edit > Undo function
Zoom the View > Zoom > Window function
You can return to the initial side menu from one of the other side menus by selecting
the MAIN menu header.
2-5
Pulldown Menus:
Below are the main pulldown menus and their submenus.
File Edit View Insert Format Draw Modify Manage Tools Reports Help
File Edit
New --------------> Page Undo
Open Project Cut to Clipboard
Close Copy Clipboard
Break Paste
Save Paste Special
Save As Preview... Browse Copy...
Next Page Plot Config...
Previous Page Current Page...
Print/Plot --------------> Multiple Pages...
DXF Import ------------------------------------> Save Current Page
Backup/Restore New DXF Page...
ACAD Menu DXF Import...
Exit Save as DWG...
Save as Block...
View Insert
Refresh Page Select Icon...
Redraw Symbol by Name...
Regen Macro by Name...
Zoom -------------------------------------------> Real Time Text On Drawing... Insert... Raster Image...
Pan ----------------------> Real Time Previous Block --------------------> Explode Modify...
Aerial View Point Window Image... -------------------------------------> Frame
Quadrant... Left Dynamic Image Clip
Navigator Right Scale
List Up Center
Command Dispatch Down In
Toolbars... Out
All
Extents
2-6
Format Draw Modify

Layer... Wire -----------------------------------------------------------> Continuous Power-Editor
Color... Text... Create Center Symbol
Linetype... Logical Box ---> Conn. Point Dashed Line
Text Style Field Delete Conn. Point 3 Phase Text
Dimension Style... Graphic ------------------------------------> Line 90 Degree Down Field
Multiline Style... Dimension ---------> Linear Polyline 90 Degree Up Wire Number
Hatch... Aligned Box Empty Multiline Delete
Ordinate Box Filled Repeat Last Copy
Radius Arc Move
Diameter Circle Stretch
Angular Ellipse Properties...
Baseline
Continue
Leader
Tolerance
Center Mark
Oblique
Align Text
Style
Override
Update
Manage
Project 1>
1> 2> 3> 4> 5>
Installation 2>
Delete... Delete Clear New/Modify... New/Modify...
Page 3>
Copy... Copy Delete Reference Point Reference Point
Symbol 4>
Modify... Rename Copy Device ID Select Items
Macro 5>
Rename... Rename Connection Point Save
Device Type 6>
Project Preselect Move Delete Conn. Point Cancel
Parts Database 7>
Page Count... Modify Cross Ref. Position Delete...
Foreign Language 8>
Reorganize Page Variables Save Copy...
Update Cancel Rename...
Delete...
Copy...
6> 7> 8> Rename...
New/Modify... Edit Form... New...
Delete... Edit Table... Delete...
Copy... Duplicates Check... Edit Phrases...
Rename...
2-7
Tools
Project Settings...
System Settings...
Wire Number ------------------------------------------------------------> Automatic...
Terminal/Pin-Plug Plan ---> Edit Terminals/Pin-Plugs... Manual...
Panel Layout... Generate Graphical Plan... Delete...
Wiring Diagram Layout
Create Icon
I/O Device ID
Replace --------------------------------------------------------> Part Number...
Osnap Wire Number...
VBA * -------------------------> Load Project Symbol...
Install Tablet Unload Project Text...
Customize Menus... Run Macro Symbol Text...
Preferences... Load Editor Device ID...
* Not in Standalone version
Reports
Project 1> 1> 2> 3>
Libraries 2> Project Full... Macros... Wire List...
Connections 3> Project Brief... Symbols... Wire Labels...
Terminals 4> Installations... Device Type Full... Cable List..
PLC-List... Page Full... Device Type Brief... Field Wire...
Parts 5> Page Brief... Parts Signals...
MS Access Reports 6> Table of Contents... Foreign Languages...
Comma Separated 7> Page Formats... 8>
Error Checking 8> 5> 7> Unreferenced Signals...
Compile Parts File Project Device Without Parent...
4>
Terminals... Master List... Libraries 9>
Terminal Strips... Bill of Materials... Connections Master List...
Purchase Order... Terminals Bill of Materials...
6> Job Costing... PLC-List... Purchase Order...
Preview... 9> Dimension List... Parts Job Costing...
Print... 9> Error Checking Dimension List...
Help
RSWire Help
AutoCAD Help
Connect to Internet
About RSWire...
2-8
Third Mouse Button Menu
If your mouse has a third (middle) button configured to function in Windows, you
can press the third button to display the following pop–up menu. This menu
includes a selection of functions found in the pull–down menus. (On Standalone
systems, this menu appears when the right mouse button is clicked – the third button
activates the pan function.)
Delete
Move
Copy
Modify Symbol
Select Icon...
Navigator
Browse Copy...
Open
New Page...
Refresh Page
Pan
Window
Zoom Extents
OSNAP >
Note If the third button menu does not appear, enter the command mbuttonpan on the
AutoCAD command line. Then enter the value 0. (Entering a value of 1 makes the
third button activate the Pan function.)
Toolbars
Toolbars are groups of buttons that can be positioned along the edge of the drawing
area or as floating “palettes.” These buttons allow a variety of RSWire functions to
be accessed more quickly than using a pull–down menu. When you place the cursor
over one of these buttons and pause for a few seconds, a label will appear describing
the function.
Toolbar
Toolbar Handle
2-9
Each toolbar has a handle. By placing the cursor on the handle, you can drag the
toolbar to different positions at the edge of the drawing area. You can also drag a
toolbar into the drawing area to create a floating toolbar.
Once the toolbars are positioned you can set the position so that the toolbars will
always appear in the same place. Use the Tools > Preferences function. Select the
Profiles tab, make sure the RSWire profile is highlighted and then select the Set
Current button.
Command Line / Text Window
The command line is an area at the bottom of the drawing screen where the most
recently executed commands are displayed. The software also displays prompts here
for certain functions.
By placing the cursor on its border, the command line area can be dragged to the top
of the drawing screen or out onto the desktop to become a floating text window. The
floating window can display more lines and therefore is useful for such functions as
View > List. You can drag the floating window back to the drawing screen to
reattach it. You can also display a floating text window without moving the
command line by pressing the <F2> key.
AutoCAD Text Window

Edit
Regenerating drawing.
Command: ECS_START
Text
Window Command:
Command:
Command:
Command All/Center/Dynamic/Extents/Left/Previous/Vmax/W
Line First corner: Other corner:
Command:
2-10
Help Screens
Online help information is available to describe RSWire functions. Many of the

dialog boxes displayed by RSWire have a Help button which can be selected to
display information.
Windows Help
File Edit Bookmark Options Help
Contents Index Back Print
Device Types
A device type is a definition that specifies how
many and what type of child symbols are
associated with a parent symbol. For example, 2
normally open and 2 normally closed contacts for
a 4 pole relay. The device type can also specify a
cross reference symbol to indicate contact usage
near the parent symbol.
The following buttons are available in the Windows help screens:
Contents – Select a topic from the help table of contents.

Index – View a list of indexed topics in the help file.
Back – Display the previously selected help screen.
Print – Print the current help screen.
The help file can also be accessed through the “Help” pull–down menu in the upper
right corner of the screen. This provides a function called RSWire Help which
displays the main help file screen (from which you can select the Contents or Index
tab).
Help
RSWire Help
AutoCAD Help
Connect to Internet
About RSWire
2-11
Dialog Boxes
When the software requires information from you, a dialog box will be displayed
that contains fields for the appropriate data. For example, the following
New/Modify Symbol dialog box allows you to specify various parameters for a new
symbol.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XCAB4REF List...

Radio Button
Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Checkbox
Snapmode: Endpoint
Data Field
Description:
Example cable cross reference symbol
Search Language Text...
Symbol Group:
CS3 Cable Cross Reference Symbol
Buttons
OK Cancel Help...
You can select a data field by pointing the cursor and clicking the button. You can
also move from field to field by pressing the <Tab> key.
Radio button and checkbox functions within a dialog box have only two states: on
or off, selected or de–selected, etc. Radio buttons are selected) when they contain a
dark center. Checkboxes are selected when they contain a checkmark.
Buttons are provided in the dialog boxes to confirm information that has been
entered, or to provide additional selections. Generally, selecting the OK button will
confirm the information that has been entered, load it into the system and close the
dialog box. In many (but not all) dialog boxes, pressing the <Enter> key has the
same effect as selecting OK. Selecting the Cancel button will abandon the
information that was entered and will exit the current function. In many (but not all)
dialog boxes, pressing the <Esc> (Escape) key has the same effect as selecting
Cancel. Selecting the Help button will display descriptive text about the functions in
the current dialog box.
2-12
You can change the label text that appears in the dialog boxes by editing the file
Rs\Menu\Dialog\Dcl_eng.txt (for English versions).
2-13
Optional Software Modules

RSWire is available as a base system to which optional modules are added.
RSWire Base System
Functions include:
Schematic creation and editing
Single and 3 phase lines (wires)
Logical and drawing lines
Move and modify routines
Real time cross referencing
Real time error checking
Auto device ID assignment
Auto wire break
Parent/child symbol relationships
Fields (remote location areas)
Electrical symbol library
Macro library
Multi–page view (Cut & Paste) function
Text on drawing function
Programmable Controller List
Automatic wire number assignment
Multiple language text
DWG and DXF file support
2-14
Optional Modules
Parts Database – Parts database functions and panel layout
Allows access to the parts database and master list function.
Allows assignment of part numbers to device IDs.
Auto generation of: Master parts list, Bill of materials, P.O. list, Job costing list.
Allows creation and editing of language text database.
Panel Layout mode. Prompts the user with layout symbols for creation of panel
layout drawings based on schematics.
Wire List – Allows creation of a wire (connection) list and related output.
Point to point wire list
Wire labels
Terminal Plans – Edit and graphically display terminal information.

Terminal plan editor
Graphical terminal plan drawings
Cable list
Field wiring list
Terminal connection list
Wiring Diagram/Shortest Distance Generator – Generates wiring diagrams based

on schematics. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separate instructions
provided.
Wiring diagrams
Connection list on wiring diagram
Shortest distance on wire list
DeviceNet Module – Allows generation of DeviceNet layout drawings and related

connection lists. Requires Parts Database and Wire List options. Separate
instructions provided.
Network layout diagrams
Symbol library
Component parts data
Connection list generator
PLC Schematic Generator – Allows automatic generation of PLC I/O module

wiring diagrams. Separate instructions provided.
Automatic PLC drawing generation
2-15
Using RSWire
Generally, doing a job with RSWire involves the following stages:
1. If the optional database is to be used to allow the automatic generation of

support documentation, component (parts) information must be entered or
imported into the database. This information includes catalog numbers,
manufacturer, price, dimensions, etc. If the same database is to be used for all
jobs, this data entry step will not be necessary for subsequent projects unless
new components are to be included. Part numbers can be assigned to symbols in
the schematics.
2. Create the schematic drawings. For the first project, most RSWire users create
custom page formats, title blocks, symbols, etc., to match existing company
standards. This customization is not necessary for subsequent projects.
3. Generate panel layout drawings. RSWire has an optional semi–automatic panel

layout mode that will prompt the user for each component in the schematic
diagram. The user then positions the component as desired in the layout
drawing.
4. Generate a connection list. This automatically generated list contains connection

information used in the terminal plan and other documentation lists.
5. Generate terminal plan. RSWire automatically places terminal connection

information on a graphical diagram page. The user can edit this plan as desired,
for example, to assign cables and conduits.
6. Generate documentation lists. Using information in the schematics and in the

database, RSWire can automatically generate other useful lists such as bills of
material, wire lists, wire labels, component labels, job cost analysis,
programmable controller lists, and so on.
2-16
Project Management
3 Project Management
This section explains the concept of projects, which is how work is organized in
RSWireTM Designer. Project organization is presented first followed by sections on
how to create, delete, copy, modify, rename and back up projects.
The following sections are included:

Project Organization
Create New Project
Project Preselect
Lock and Unlock Project
Delete Project
Copy Project
Modify Project
Renumber Project
Rename Project
Project List
Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols
Project Reorganize
Project Page Count
3-1
Project Management
Project Organization
A project is a collection of work done in RSWire, all of which relates to the same
job. This work includes both graphical drawings (schematics, layouts, etc.) and
support documentation (part lists, labels, connection information).
By associating every drawing and list with a specific project, the software is able to
recognize which information to use when performing automatic functions such as
list generation, cross referencing, wire numbering, cost analysis, and so on.
PROJECT
Drawings Documentation
Schematic diagrams Bill of materials

Panel layouts Wire list
Graphical terminal plans Terminal list
Purchase order list
Wire and device labels
Job cost analysis
etc.
Installations and Locations – Projects can be subdivided into installations and

locations. These usually correspond to physical locations. For example, the project
could consist of an entire production facility while each production line within the
facility is designated as an installation and each control cabinet on a line is a
location.
3-2
Project Management
PROJECT
INSTALLATION INSTALLATION
LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION
When graphical (drawing) pages are created, they are assigned to a specific
installation and location. (This is what creates the installation and location.) When
support documentation is generated, it can also be sorted by installation and
location.
Drawing page numbers within a single installation must be unique, even if they are
in different locations (see Project 1, Installation 2 in the following illustration – page
numbers in the second location continue from the first).
PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2
INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION 2
(No Installation
LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION or Location)
4 4 8 4
3 3 7 3
2 2 6 2
1 1 5
Drawing 1
Pages
3-3
Project Management
The use of installations and locations is optional. In Project 2 shown in the previous
figure, no installations or locations have been assigned. All drawing pages in the
project, therefore, are part of the same number sequence. Also, an installation does
not have to be divided into locations.
Some RSWire functions require an installation and location name. In these cases, if
the user has not assigned an installation or location name, the system will use the
default installation name NO_INST and location name NO_LOC.
When a project is created (see page 3-5) the system creates a directory for it in the
RS\PROJECT\WORK subdirectory. Project directories are assigned a short name
such as:
______10.EC1
______11.EC1
The file NAMES.EC2 in the RS\PROJECT\WORK directory describes which of

these directories belongs to each project. In each project’s directory, separate
subdirectories are automatically created for each installation and also for various
support documentation.
3-4
Project Management
Create New Project

To create a new project, use the File > New > Project function.
Select:
File New Project
The following New Project dialog box will appear.
New Project
Project Title Block Macro Default Page Macro
Symbol Library
JIC Select ... Select ...
Use Parameters From:

Address File
Project Description
Job Number
Drawing Number
Description... Parameter... Settings... Parts Database...
OK Cancel Help...
The following fields are provided in this dialog box:
Project – Enter the name of the project, up to 14 characters (no spaces allowed).
Symbol Library – The name of the subdirectory containing the graphic symbols to
be used in this project. The selection here will be JIC, IEC, or another library of
control symbols that exists under the RS\CATALOG directory.
3-5
Project Management
Use Parameters From – You may use parameters and settings from an existing
project. This eliminates the need to make the same settings for the new project. If
you wish to do this, select the name of the existing project from the drop–down list.
The parameters that carry over will include the Project Description, Job Number,
Drawing Number, as well as the settings from the Project Parameters and Project
Settings dialogs (see below).
Title Block Macro – The name of a macro file (a stored combination of drawing
elements) that will automatically be placed on the drawing as a title block. The
default entry is TITLED. This is one of the title block macros provided with
RSWire. The user can also create custom title block macros. Use the Select button to
display the macro list from which selections can be made (you can make wildcard
entries).
Note Before you can use the Select button you must first have opened a page that uses the
current symbol catalog. You must also remove any default entry from the Title Block
Macro field.
Default Page Macro – This field allows a macro to be named that will
automatically be placed on every page of the project. Use the Select button to
display the macro list from which selections can be made.
Address File – A text file containing information such as the user’s street address
which the software can automatically place on lists so that the user need not enter it
manually. These files can be created or edited with the Tools > System Settings
function (Address File tab).
Project Description – A brief project description (49 characters) may be entered in

this field which can be placed in title blocks of drawings and on various lists created
by the system.
Job Number, Drawing Number – These fields for project descriptions or identifiers
which can be included in drawings and documentation.
Project Description 4 through 20 – These are additional fields for project

descriptions or identifiers which can be included in drawings and documentation.
These fields are accessed through the use of the scroll bar to the right of the fields.
Search Language Text – Selecting this button accesses the language text database,
allowing you to insert language text phrases into the Project Description fields (put
the cursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text.
Four option buttons, Description, Parameters, Settings, and Parts Database are
available in the New Project dialog box. These allow additional information and
settings to be entered.
3-6
Project Management
Description Button – Selecting this button produces a dialog box with fields for
entering ten lines (49 characters per line) of additional project description. There is
also a Search Language Text button that allows you to select and enter language
text phrases (see page 5-32). Enter the desired description and select OK to
continue.
Project Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
Description
OK Cancel
Parameter Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Parameters dialog
box which allows various project–wide default values to be altered.
3-7
Project Management
Project Parameters
Default Device ID Display: Device ID – Page – Line No.

Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type: Ascending by Inst. and Pages
Default Text Size Language

Device ID 0.1250 1: English
Connection Point 0.1250
Strip/Plug Device ID 0.0000 2:
Terminal/Plug ID 0.1250
Cross Reference 0.1250 3:
Signal Cross Reference 0.1250
Default Grid
Default Text Style ROMANS
X 0.5000
Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved Y 0.5000
Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal
Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address
OK Cancel Help...
Note Values shown in inches.
The following fields are available in this dialog box:
3-8
Project Management
Default Device ID Display – This field allows the user to select the format that the
system will use to assign device IDs. By clicking on the down arrow button, the
following device ID formats will be listed:
Device ID Format Description Example

Device ID - Seq.No. Device ID tag and sequential number PB1
Device ID - Page - Line No. Device ID tag, page number, line number PB109
Page-Device ID - Line No. Page number, Device ID tag, line number 1PB09
Device ID - Continuous Line No. Device ID tag, continuous line number PB86
Group-Device ID - Seq.No. Prompt, Device ID tag, sequential number APB1
Seq.No. - Device ID Sequential number, Device ID tag 1PB
Page - Line No. - Device ID Page number, line number, Device ID tag 109PB
Page Line - Device ID - Seq. No.* Page line, Device ID tag, sequential number 10PB1
Page-Device ID - Seq. No. Page number, Device ID tag,sequential number 1PB1
* There are three versions of this format: Page Checked, Line Checked and Project
Checked. These differ in what the the software checks for duplicate IDs: the current
page, the current line, or the entire project.
Note “Device ID tag” is the mnemonic abbreviation (such as PB for pushbutton)

associated with a given type of symbol. The “Continuous Line No.” format causes
line numbering on each page to begin where the previous page ended. The “Group”
format will place a number (or other character) in front of every device ID. When
the user changes this character when placing a symbol, all similar symbols placed
thereafter (in the same work session) will have the new character in the device ID.
Signal Cross Ref. Analysis Type – This field determines how signal cross references
are analyzed. Choices include Ascending Order by installations and pages (default),
Pairs (signal cross references that exist only in pairs – page order not taken into
account), or Ascending Numbers (ascending number order for all cross references –
page order not taken into account).
Language 1, 2, 3 – Certain descriptive text strings in a drawing can be displayed in

up to three different languages simultaneously. In the Language fields, the user
selects which languages will be used. By selecting the down arrow button the
following list of languages can be selected from: English, German, French, Spanish,
Dutch, Italian.
3-9
Project Management
Default Text Style – Allows the user to define the size of various types of drawing
text. Fields are provided for Device ID, Connection Point, Strip/Plug Device ID,
Terminal Device ID, Cross Reference, and Signal Cross Reference. These values
will be used provided that the Use Text Height from Project Parameters checkbox
is set in the General Defaults dialog box (see page 7-19). If this checkbox is not set,
text heights defined for each symbol will be used.
Default Grid – Allows the user to define the default size of the grid in the drawing
area.
Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved – This checkbox determines if the
device ID of an existing symbol will be adjusted automatically if the symbol is
moved to a new position (with the Modify > Move function). This affects only
projects that use one of the device ID formats based on page and line number. Select
the checkbox to enable automatic device ID adjustment.
Note The device IDs of symbols that have a cross reference relationship are not changed
when moved. This must be done with the Modify > Symbol > Device ID function.
Wire Numbering System: Wire Number Same Over Terminal – Selects whether or
not the same wire number will be assigned before and after a terminal when wires
are numbered. When a checkmark appears in the box, the same wire number will
appear before and after the terminal symbol. If the box is empty, a different wire
number will be assigned after the terminal as shown below.
15 TB2 16
Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address – Selects whether or

not to replace PLC connection point text in the connection list with the full PLC I/O
address. For example, for input 05 of a PLC module (rack 01, module 02) selecting
this toggle will replace “05” in the connection list with “I0102/05.”
When the project parameters are entered as desired, select the OK button to enter
them and return to the New Project dialog box.
Settings Button – Selecting this button displays the Project Settings dialog box
which allows various page and display setting values to be altered. These settings
are described in Section 7 (see Page 7-19).
Parts Database Button – Selecting this button allows you to select or create an
ODBC data source name that points to database file other than the default parts
database. No setting is necessary here if you plan to use the default parts database.
3-10
Project Management
To finish creating the project, select the OK button in the New Project dialog box.
The system will create the necessary directory for the project and drawing pages can
then be created.
Immediately after creating the new project, the software will display the New Page
dialog box allowing you to begin creating drawing pages. See page 4-11.
3-11
Project Management
Project Preselect
Certain functions that affect an entire project require you to select a project so that
the software knows which project to act upon. When you open a drawing page (with
the File > Open functions) the software will treat the project to which the page
belongs as the currently selected project. However, at the beginning of a work
session before any pages have been opened, or if you have been working on one
project and wish to make settings in a different project, you can use the Manage >
Project > Project Preselect function to select another project.
Manage Project Project Preselect
The Project Preselect dialog box will appear listing the names of all the projects on
your system.
Project Preselect
Project:
TOOL
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Search...
Lock Project Unlock Project
OK Cancel Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse
button. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in
the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects
with descriptions. You can also make selections from this list.
Select the OK button to open the project, making it the currently selected project.
3-12
Project Management
Lock and Unlock Project

When operating RSWire on a network you can use the Lock Project toggle in the
Project Preselect dialog box (see previous page) to prevent another user on the
network from accessing the same project. This is important during such critical
operations as automatic wire numbering, project renumbering, project parameter
modification, project/installation deletion, or project/installation renaming.
To Lock a Project:
1. Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog box
will appear.
2. Select the desired project name from the displayed list.
3. Select the Lock Project checkbox.
4. Select the OK button to lock the project.
The project will remain locked to other users until you unlock the project.
To Unlock a Project:
1. Select the File > Project Preselect function. The Project Preselect dialog box
will appear.
2. Select the desired project name from the displayed list.
3. Select the Unlock Project checkbox.
4. Select the OK button to unlock the project.
3-13
Project Management
Delete Project
The Manage > Project > Delete function will erase a set of project files from the
system.
Warning: Deleting a project will erase all the files for the selected project from
the computer.
Select:
Manage Project Delete
The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your
system.
Select: Project
Project:
TOOL
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Search...
OK Cancel Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse
button. The selected project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in
the Project field above the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects
with descriptions. You can also make selections from this list.
3-14
Project Management
To delete the selected project, select the OK button. The message “Select OK to
delete the project:” will appear in a dialog box along with the project name. Select
the OK button in this dialog box to delete the project. Select the Cancel button to
cancel the deletion.
3-15
Project Management
Copy Project
The Manage > Project > Copy function creates a copy of an existing project under
a different name.
Select:
Manage Project Copy
The Copy Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your
system.
Copy Project
From: To:
TOOL
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Search...
OK Cancel Help...
Select the project to be copied. Its name will appear in the From field. Use the
Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions.
Enter the name that the copy of the project is to have in the To field.
Select the OK button to create a copy of the project.
3-16
Project Management
Modify Project
The Manage > Project > Modify function allows you to alter project parameters
(descriptions, device ID format, etc.) that were entered when the project was
originally created.
Select:
Manage Project Modify
The Select: Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your
system.
Select: Project
Project:
TOOL
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Search...
OK Cancel Help...
Select a project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The selected
project name will be highlighted in the list and will appear in the Project field above
the list. Use the Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions.
Select the OK button to continue. The Modify Project dialog box will appear.
3-17
Project Management
Modify Project
Title Block Macro Default Page Macro

Project
Symbol Library
JIC Select ... Select ...
Address File
No. of Pages: 1
Project Description
Job Number
Drawing Number
Description... Parameter... Settings... Parts Database...
OK Cancel Help...
This dialog box is the same as the New Project dialog box, except that the Project
name field cannot be accessed or changed. A No. of Pages field also appears. The
other fields, including those accessed with the Description, Parameter, Settings
and Parts Database buttons, will display information for the selected project, and
this may be modified. For descriptions of these fields, see page 3-5, New Project.
When the desired modifications have been made, select the OK button to put the
modifications into effect.
3-18
Project Management
Rename Project
The Manage > Project > Rename function allows you to assign a new name to an
existing project.
Select:
Manage Project Rename
The Rename Project dialog box will appear, listing all the projects currently on your
system.
Rename Project
From: To:
TOOL
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Search...
OK Cancel Help...
Select the project to be renamed. Its name will appear in the From field. Use the
Search button to display a list of projects with descriptions.
Enter the new name that the project is to have in the To field.
Select the OK button to rename the project.
3-19
Project Management
Project List
To generate a list of all the projects currently on your system, use the Reports >
Project > Project Full function.
Select:
Reports Project Project Full
For more information on this function, see page 9-4.
3-20
Project Management
Backup and Restore Projects and Symbols

The Backup/Restore function allows you to make backup copies of project files
and symbol catalogs. The backups are stored as .ZIP files. The symbol catalog
backup will also store macros and device types found in the selected symbol catalog
directory. The restore function allows you to load backed–up projects or catalogs
back into your system.
Select:
File Backup/Restore
When you select the Backup/Restore function, the Backup/Restore dialog box
appears.
Backup/Restore
Backup/Restore Path:
A: Browse
Backup Restore
Select Project Select Catalog
Selected:
Symbol Macro Device
Available for Restoring
Selected:
OK Cancel Help Save...
3-21
Project Management
Backup a Project
1. In the Backup/Restore Path field, enter the drive and path to the directory
where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse button
to locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save the
path you have entered for future work sessions.
2. Select the Backup button.
3. Pick the Select Project button.
4. The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the project that you wish to
back up and select the OK button. The name of the selected project will be
displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
Note Do not enter project names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Project
button.
5. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIP
file.
For each backup file created, a similarly named file with a .EC3 extension will be
created which contains the name of the project contained in the .ZIP file.
Important It is recommended that you only save one project per floppy disk set.
(If you backup one or more projects on a floppy disk and then do another backup
that fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restore
the last project – the other projects on the first disk will become inaccessible.)
Note Whenever project settings are saved (the various tabs under Tools > Project
Settings), configuration files are created in a Config subdirectory under the
directory for that project. These configuration files are automatically saved with a
project backup and are restored automatically when the project is restored.
Backup a Symbol Catalog
where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Select the Save button
to save the path you have entered for future work sessions.
3. Pick the Select Catalog button.
3-22
Project Management
4. The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog that you
wish to back up and select the OK button. The name of the selected catalog will
be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore dialog box.
Note Do not enter catalog names directly in the Selected field, use the Select Catalog
button.
5. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup .ZIP
file.
created which contains the name of the catalog contained in the .ZIP file.
Important It is recommended that you only save one catalog per floppy disk set.
(If you backup one or more catalogs on a floppy disk and then do another backup
that fills the first disk and extends to a second disk, you will only be able to restore
the last catalog –– the other catalogs on the first disk will become inaccessible.)
Backup Selected Symbols, Macros, or Device Types
You can back up selected symbols, macros or device types. You can then restore the
selected items on another computer or in a different symbol catalog without copying
over an entire catalog. Use the following procedure:
where the backup is to be stored. The default path is A:. Use the Browse button
to locate an existing directory on your system. Select the Save button to save the
path you have entered for future work sessions.
3. Pick the Select Catalog button.
4. The Select Path–Catalog dialog box will appear. Select the catalog from which
you wish to make the backup and select the OK button. The name of the
selected catalog will be displayed in the Selected field of the Backup/Restore
dialog box.
5. Select the Symbol, Macro or Device Type button depending on the type of item
you wish to back up. (If you are not backing up the entire catalog you must
create separate files for each type of item.)
6. The Select Files dialog box will appear, listing all the symbols, macros, or
device types in the selected catalog. Select (highlight) the items you wish to
include in the backup file. Select the OK button to continue.
3-23
Project Management
7. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to create the backup file.
created which contains the names of the symbols, macros or device types contained
in the .ZIP file.
When you restore the backed up items (see following procedure), they will be added
to the selected catalog path. Any existing item in the catalog having the same name
as an item in the backup file will be overwritten by the backed up item.
Restore a Project or Symbol Catalog
where the backup files are stored. Use the Browse button to locate an existing
directory on your system.
2. Select the Restore button.
3. Names of the available projects or catalogs will be displayed in the Available

for Restoring field. Pick the desired project or catalog. The selected name will
appear in the Selected field.
4. Select the OK button in the Backup/Restore dialog box to restore the project or
catalog.
5. If a project with the same name already exists on your system you will be
prompted “Project already exists. Overwrite?” Select the Yes button to overwrite
the existing project. Select No or Cancel to abort the restore operation.
3-24
Project Management
Project Reorganize
This function re–creates the project database file, Oldb.mdb. The function is only
needed in cases where your project data becomes corrupted.
Select:
Manage Project Reorganize
The software will display the Project Preselect dialog box. Select the project that
you wish to reorganize and select OK.
The software will open each page in the project and store the relevant information in
the project’s Oldb.mdb file.
When this process is complete the software will display a text logfile that lists all the
pages that were processed.
3-25
Project Management
Project Page Count

This function updates the total page count for the project. Ordinarily this is done
automatically, but occasionally after performing multiple page move and delete
functions, the page count can become inaccurate. If you notice an error in the page
total for a project (for example in the “page __ of __” field in a title block) use the
Manage > Project > Page Count function.
Select:
Manage Project Page Count
The software will update the total page count for the project.
3-26
Page Management
4 Page Management
This section describes functions related to RSWireTM Designer drawing pages. The
first section covers how pages are organized within the project. Other sections
describe how to display (open), create, delete and copy pages. Installation
functions allow all the pages within an installation to be copied, deleted, or
renamed as a unit.
For information on configuring page formats, see page 7-29 (Tools > Project
Settings > Page Format function).

Page Organization
Page Storage
Displaying Pages (Open, Refresh, Next Page, Previous Page)
Save Page
Save As Page
Create New Page
Quit Page
Clear Page
Delete Page
Copy Page
Modify Page
Rename Page
Move Page
Viewing Pages
Browse Copy
Page List
Delete Installation
Copy Installation
Rename Installation
Navigator Function
Page Count
4-1
Page Management
Page Organization
As described in Section 3, projects can be (optionally) divided into installations
and locations. An installation or location does not exist until a drawing page is
created and assigned to that installation and location. A page need not be assigned
to an installation or location, but it must be associated with an existing project.
Page numbering for each installation can be independent. Two locations in the
same installation can not have the same page numbers (see Project 1, Installation 2
in the illustration below).
PROJECT 1 PROJECT 2
INSTALLATION 1 INSTALLATION 2
(NO
LOCATION LOCATION LOCATION INSTALLATION
OR LOCATION)
4 4 8 4
3 3 7 3
2 2 6 2
DRAWING
1 1 5 1
PAGES
If no installations or locations have been created in a project, all the pages in the
project will be part of the same numbering series (see Project 2 in the above
illustration).
Page numbering need not be continuous; there can be “gaps.”
4-2
Page Management
Page Storage
When a RSWire drawing page is created and stored, the graphical information is
stored in a DWG file while the logical information is stored in the project’s
Oldb.mdb file.
stored as
.DWG file (graphics)
Drawing Page
Oldb.mdb file
(project logical data)
The DWG file contains the graphical information for the drawing: everything that
is seen when the drawing is plotted.
The Oldb.mdb file contains logical information about all the drawings in the
project. This data includes device IDs, wire coordinates, and connection
information and is used by various software functions. By having this information
in the Oldb.mdb file, the software is able to perform project–wide operations such
as cross referencing and list generation without having to open and analyze every
DWG file.
When changes are made in the currently open page that affect another page in the
project, the software will place the change in the Oldb.mdb file. The next time the
user opens the second drawing page, the DWG file is updated from the
information in the Oldb.mdb file.
Within the DWG file the software follows a layering standard that places different
types of information on separate layers. See page 5-125.
The Oldb.mdb and DWG files are stored in the directory for the project to which
they belong.
As each page in an installation is created, the software assigns a name to the DWG
files in the following format:
_______1.DWG
The number in the filename is incremented for each new page in the installation
that is created. When you create a new installation, the filename numbering begins
again.
4-3
Page Management
Displaying Pages (Select, Refresh, Next, Previous)
Four functions are available for displaying drawing pages. These functions are
Open, Refresh, Next Page, and Previous Page.
Open Page
The File > Open function allows an existing drawing page to be loaded into
RSWire and displayed on the screen for viewing and editing.
To open a page, select:
File Open
The Select Page dialog box will appear, listing all the currently available projects.
Select Page
Project: Installation: Page:

MACHINE1
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Search... Search... Search...
Preview
Description:
User:
Date: Online:
Format: Scale:
Page Type:
Installation:
Location:
OK Cancel Help...
4-4
Page Management
Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The
names of all the installations in the selected project will appear in the Installation
column. When you select an installation, the existing pages in that installation will
be listed in the Page column. You can then select the desired page.
When you select a page, a thumbnail view of the page will appear in the preview
area of the dialog box.
In the following example, page 1 of the installation LINE1 in the project

MACHINE1 has been selected. Information about the page appears in the lower
right corner of the dialog box.
Select Page

MACHINE1
ABACK LINE1 1
MACHINE1 LINE2 2
TOOL 3
WAREHOUSE 4
WEB 5
6
Preview
Description:
Motor Control Center
User: USER
Date: 8/10/98 Online: Off
Format: D–2COL Scale: 1
Page Type: Circuit Diagram
Installation: LINE1
Location: ENC1
OK Cancel Help...
In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of projects,
installations or pages with descriptions. You can also make selections from these
lists.
Select the OK button to proceed. The selected page will be displayed on the
screen.
4-5
Page Management
Page Name Field – There is a page name field that indicates the project name,
installation name, location name, page name, and online/offline status of the
currently displayed page. This field appears in the lower left corner of the window.
In the following example, the current page is page 1 of the project Machine1,
installation LINE1, location EN1 and the page is an online page (On). (See page
4-14 for an explanation of the Online function.) If the page is assigned to no
particular installation or location the words NO_INST and NO_LOC will appear in
this field.
....................................
LED 181
....................................
LED 182
....................................
LED 183
Command:
Page Name Field Command:
MACHINE1, LINE1, EN1, 1, On 2.5000, 0.5000
Refresh Page
If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared, selecting the View >
Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing page that was displayed.
Select:
View Refresh Page
4-6
Page Management
Next and Previous Page
The File > Next Page and Previous Page functions allow you to display the next
and previous drawing pages in numerical order without having to enter the
specific page name.
Select:
File Next Page
or
File Previous Page
4-7
Page Management
Save Page
Use the File > Save function to save (store) a drawing page onto disk.
After saving, the page remains on screen, available for further editing.
Select:
File Save
When the save operation is complete, the message “The page was saved” appears
on the command line.
Automatic Page Save
You can configure the software to automatically save the currently open page at a
regular time interval. Use the following procedure:
1. Using Notepad or another text editor, create an ASCII text file named
autosave.cfg containing a time interval value in minutes. In other words, if the
file contains the number 15, the page will be saved every 15 minutes. The file
need only contain this number.
2. Place the autosave.cfg file in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM directory.
4-8
Page Management
Save As Page
Use the File > Save As function to save an RSWire drawing as a DWG file under
another name for use outside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWG
file that is created with this function will not be saved in the project Oldb.mdb file
and therefore will not work with the RSWire logical functions (error checking,
cross referencing, etc.). It will only be a graphical view of the drawing page. You
can also save drawings as DXF or DWT files.
Therefore, do not use the Save As function to create files that you wish to use later
in RSWire. Use the Manage > Page > Copy command to make copies of pages
for use inside RSWire.
Warning: Use the Save As functions only for DWG files that will be used
outside of RSWire. The logical information for the DWG file that is created
with this function will not be saved and therefore will not work with the
RSWire logical functions if you attempt to use the new DWG file later in
RSWire.
The File > Save As function will save an AutoCAD DWG file in the following
formats: AutoCAD 2000, Release 14/LT98/LT97, AutoCAD Release 13/LT95.
You can also select to save as a Drawing Template File (*.dwt) or as a DXF file in
the following formats: AutoCAD 2000, R14/LT98/LT97, R13/Lt95, R12/LT2.
To use this command, first display the RSWire drawing page that you wish to
save.
Then, select:
File Save As
The Save Drawing As dialog box will appear.
4-9
Page Management
Save Drawing As
Save in Work
_______1.dwg
File Name: _______1.dwg Save
Save as type: AutoCAD R14/LT98 Drawing (*.dwg) Cancel
Options
In the Save in Field, select the path and folder in which you want to save the
drawing from the dropdown list.
The drawing’s current name is indicated in the File Name field. Enter the new
name under which you wish to save the drawing in this field. Do not enter the
.DWG extension; it will be added automatically.
In the Save as type: field, select the file type that you want the file saved as, from
the dropdown list.
Select the Save button to save the new DWG file.
Select Cancel to abort the Save As function.
Select Options to save proxy images of custom objects. The Export Options
dialog box will appear. If you save to the Release 14 or Release 13 file type, and
the drawing contains custom objects from another application, you can select the
Save Proxy Images of Custom Objects checkbox. Images of the custom objects are
saved in the drawing file. If you do not choose this option, a frame for each object
is saved in the drawing file. Refer to your AutoCAD manual for more
information.
4-10
Page Management
New Page
Use the File > New > Page function to create a new drawing page.
Select:
File New Page
The New Page dialog box will appear.
New Page
Project: Select... Format Name D–2COL
Select Page Format...

Installation: Select...
Scale 1: 1
Location: Select...
Online
Page: Page Type

Schematic Diagram
Title Block Page Macro Parameters

1... 2... 3... 4... 5...
Select ... Select ... 6... 7... 8... 9... 10...
OK Cancel Help...
If a project is currently active, the name of the project (and installation) will be
prompted in the Project and Installation fields. These can be changed if desired.
Project – In this field, enter the name of the project to which the page will belong.
An entry must be made in this field and the project must exist, otherwise the error
message “Project does not exist” will be displayed. Use the Select button to view
and pick from a list of existing projects.
Installation – In this field enter the name of the installation to which the drawing
page will belong. An entry in this field is optional. If the installation name entered
does not yet exist, a new installation will be created. (See page 4-2 for more
information on installations and locations.) The installation name can have up to
14 characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing
installations.
4-11
Page Management
Location – In this field enter the name of the location to which the page will
belong. An entry in this field is optional. If the location name entered does not yet
exist, a new location will be created. The location name can have up to 14
characters. Use the Select button to view and pick from a list of existing locations.
Page – In this field enter the page number (name). If you wish to be automatically
prompted for the next available page number in the specified installation, place
the cursor in the Page field, delete any existing number, and then point and click
at a different field – the next available number will then appear in the Page field.
Note Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation, location, or
page names that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These
characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause
unexpected results if entered in these fields.
Format Name – This field selects the page size format. Fifty different formats are
possible. The pre–defined formats provided with RSWire are as follows:
4-12
Page Management
Format Name Dimensions/Description

DEFAULT 1180.0 x 810.0 in. - System Default (do not modify)
A-0VCOL 8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical Without Line Numbers
A-0HCOL 11.0 x 8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal Without Line Numbers
B-0COL 17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size Without Line Numbers
C-0COL 22.0 x 17.0 in. - C Size Without Line Numbers
D-0COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Without Line Numbers
E-0COL 44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size Without Line Numbers
A-1VCOL 8.5 x 11.0 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column
A-1HCOL 11 x 8.5 in. - A Size 1 Line Number Column
B-1COL 17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 1 Line Number Column
C-1COL 22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 1 Line Number Column
D-1COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 1 Line Number Column
E-1COL 44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 1 Line Number Column
B-2COL 17.0 x 11.0 in. - B Size 2 Line Number Columns
C-2COL 22.0 x 17.0 - C Size 2 Line Number Columns
D-2COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 2 Line Number Columns
E-2COL 44.0 x 34.0 in. - E Size 2 Line Number Columns
D-3COL 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size 3 Line Number Columns
A0 1189.0 x 841.0 mm - IEC Size A0
A1 841.0 x 594.0 mm - IEC Size A1
A2 594.0 x 420.0 mm - IEC Size A2
A3 420.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A3
A4V 210.0 x 297.0 mm - IEC Size A4 vertical
A4H 297.0 x 210.0 mm - IEC Size A4 horizontal
ZONE 34.0 x 22.0 in. - Zone Cross Referencing
HEX-LAD-D1 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-D2 34.0 x 22.0 in. - D Size Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-C1 22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-C2 22.0 x 17 in. - C Size 2 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-B1 17.0x11.0 in. - B Size 1 Column Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-A1V 8.5 x 11 in. - A Size Vertical, Hexagon Ladder
HEX-LAD-A1H 11.0x8.5 in. - A Size Horizontal, Hexagon Ladder
UNDEFINED 0.0 x 0.0 - The remaining formats are undefined
4-13
Page Management
To display the list of page formats, use the Select Page Format button. This will
display a dialog box from which you can select a format.
Any formats with a width and height of 0.0 are undefined (unused) formats.
Undefined page formats are available to the user for custom page formats. These
can be set up using the Tools > Project Settings function (see page 7-29) and
selecting the Page Format tab. Existing page formats also can be re–defined using
this function.
Note You must assign a name to a page format before you can create a page with the
format.
Note Do not re–define the first (“DEFAULT”) page format. The system requires this
format in its default state for certain display functions.
You can also display or print a list of page formats with the Reports > Libraries >
Page Formats function.
Scale – This optional field specifies the drawing scale to be used for the page
being defined. This is mainly used for panel layout drawings so that symbols can
be placed at less than full size.
Online – This checkbox determines whether or not logical functions are active on
the page. When the Online checkbox is selected, the page is online, meaning that
automatic functions such as error checking and cross referencing will be
performed on the drawing. When the Online box is empty, the page is not online
(it is “offline”). The software does not recognize the connections on offline pages.
The Online checkbox should be turned off only when no logically connected
control devices will be placed on the page, such as for panel layouts, creating new
symbols, or general mechanical CAD work where no error checking or cross
referencing is required. You can change the online status of a page after it is
created by using the Manage > Page > Modify function.
Page Type – This field provides a number of page type options: Schematic
Diagram is for online schematic diagram pages. This type should be selected for
the majority of RSWire drawings. Select Panel Layout for panel layout diagrams.
The Graphical Terminal Plan is assigned to pages generated by the graphical
terminal plan function. The Graphical Contents List type is assigned to pages
generated when a report is sent as output to a project page. Select the Wiring
Diagram Layout type when creating a wiring diagram layout drawing.
Page Macro – This optional field allows a macro to be placed on the page
automatically. Unlike the Default Page Macro specified when a project is created,
the Page Macro here only applies to the page currently being created. A Select
button under the field allows the macro list to be displayed and selected from.
4-14
Page Management
Title Block – This optional field specifies the title block macro to be used only on
the page being created. A title block named on the New Page dialog box will
override the title block specified on the New Project dialog box when the project
was created. A Select button under the field allows the macro list to be displayed
and selected from.
Parameters – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through
10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page information
parameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 will
display parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated with
and stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activated
the following Page Parameter dialog box will appear.
Page Parameter 2
11. Para
12. Para
13. Para
14. Para
15. Para
16. Para
17. Para
18. Para
19. Para ,
20. Para
Search Language Text
OK Cancel Help...
Select the Search Language Text button to access the language text database,
allowing you to insert language text phrases into the page parameter fields (put the
cursor in the desired field first). See page 5-32 for more on language text.
Enter the desired information in the parameter fields and select the OK button to
continue.
When the desired information is entered in the New Page dialog box, select the
OK button to create the page. The blank page will then appear on the screen, ready
for further editing.
4-15
Page Management
Page Break
The File > Break function removes the currently active drawing page from the
screen without saving any changes that have been made since the page was
opened (or since it was last saved).
Warning: You will lose any edits that have been made since the page was last
saved.
To exit from a drawing page without saving any changes that have been made,
select:
File Break
The current drawing page will be removed from the screen without being saved.
The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the page break
function. Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the
break function.
4-16
Page Management
Clear Page
The Manage > Page > Clear function erases all drawing elements from the
currently active drawing page. The page becomes blank as if it had just been
created. This function therefore should be used with caution.
Warning: This function deletes all current page data completely.
To erase everything from the current drawing page, select:
Manage Page Clear
The software will display a dialog box asking you to confirm the Page Clear.
Select the OK button to proceed. Select the Cancel button to cancel the clear
operation.
Note If you perform Manage > Page > Clear by accident, you can recover the data by
performing the File > Break function immediately after the Manage > Page >
Clear.
4-17
Page Management
Delete Page
The Manage > Page > Delete function allows you to delete RSWire drawing
pages.
Note You can also use the Manage > Installation > Delete function to delete an entire
installation of pages.
Select:
Manage Page Delete
The following Delete Page(s) dialog box will appear. Select a project name and a
list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in
that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that you
wish to delete.
Delete Page(s)

MACHINE1
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Preview
Description:
User:
Date:
Installation: Location:
Format: Scale:
Online: Page Type:
OK Cancel Help...
installations or pages with descriptions.
4-18
Page Management
When the desired pages have been selected, select the OK button. The message
“Delete the selected pages?” will appear. Select the OK button again to delete the
pages, or select Cancel to abort the page deletion.
4-19
Page Management
Copy Page
The Manage > Page > Copy function allows you to copy drawing pages.
Note You can also use the Manage > Installation > Copy function to copy an entire
installation of pages.
Select:
Manage Page Copy
The following Copy Page(s) dialog box will appear.
Copy Page(s)
From:
ABACK
TOOL
To:
Project: Installation: Location:
TOOL
Page:
Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference

Set Pages Online
Renumber All Terminals
Modify Field Settings
Wire Numbers:
Maintain Add Prefix: Add Suffix:
OK Cancel Help...
4-20
Page Management
In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to copy. Select a project name and a
list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of pages in
that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the pages that you
wish to copy.
installations or pages with descriptions.
In the To: fields select the installation in which the copy is to reside (the “To”
project will always be the currently selected project). A location and page number
can also be specified. If you selected multiple pages to be copied, the number
entered in the To: Page field will be assigned to the lowest numbered page being
copied. The spacing of the copied pages will be maintained; in other words, if you
select pages 1 and 3 and assign a destination of page 5, the copies will become
pages 5 and 7.
The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox

determines whether device IDs on the copied pages will be automatically changed
to match the new page number. When the checkbox is selected, the device IDs
will be converted. When the checkbox is not selected, device IDs will remain the
same if the page is copied to an offline page. If you copy to an online page you
will be prompted for a new device ID for each item (see important note below).
The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will be
online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If
the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed.
Important If you turn off the Convert Device IDs... checkbox and copy to an online page
(i.e., the Set Pages Online checkbox is turned on) the software’s error checking
will detect duplicate device IDs on the copied page and will prompt you for a new
ID for each item on the page. This can be time–consuming if the schematic is
large. It may be preferable to let the system automatically convert the device IDs
(i.e., leave the Convert Device IDs checkbox on) and then manually change IDs as
needed with the Edit > Symbol function.
The Renumber All Terminals checkbox determines whether or not terminals in

the copied page will be renumbered automatically to avoid duplication. Select the
checkbox to automatically renumber terminals. If the checkbox is not selected,
you will be prompted to enter a new ID for each terminal that is duplicated within
the same installation.
The Modify Field Settings checkbox determines whether or not field settings of
the existing page will be duplicated into the copied page. If the checkbox is
selected, you will be prompted with the Field Parameters dialog box to make
modifications to the field settings of the copied page. If the checkbox is not
selected, existing field settings will copy into the copied page.
4-21
Page Management
The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wire
numbers in the copied page will be copied. Because the software considers
duplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (as
described below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied page.
The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied.
If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied.
If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the
following rules:
1. If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wire
numbers will be maintained without changes.
2. If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connecting to

an existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied
portion.
3. If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination

project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number
that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is
copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire
number will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or
suffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that
will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix will
make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unless
the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project.)
Select the OK button to copy the pages.

Note Part numbers that are assigned to device IDs on the original page will be assigned
to corresponding IDs on the copied pages.
Note Pages can only be coped into the open project.
4-22
Page Management
Modify Page
The Manage > Page > Modify function allows you to change the title block used
on an existing drawing page and also change the page parameters and turn the
Online function off and on.
To modify a drawing page, first display the page (File > Open Page) and then
select:
Manage Page Modify

The Modify Page Data dialog box will appear. This dialog box is similar to the
New Page dialog box (see page 4-11) except that only the Title Block, Page
Format, Online, and Parameters fields are accessible for modification. See pages
4-12 through 4-15 for a description of these fields.
Modify Page Data
Select Format Name D–2COL

Select
Select
Online
Page Type

1... 2... 3... 4... 5...
Select Select 6... 7... 8... 9... 10...
OK Cancel Help...
Make the desired changes to the title block, page macro, parameters and online
status and select the OK button to load the changes.
Set Page Online

When you use the Manage > Page > Modify function to turn a page from offline
to online, the page is once again subject to error checking for conditions such as
duplicate device IDs. When you select the Online checkbox in the Modify Page
Data dialog box and select OK, the following dialog box will appear.
4-23
Page Management
Online Page
Keep existing Device IDs
Rename Device IDs Automatically
OK Cancel Help...
Select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to keep device IDs as they currently
exist on the page.
De–select the Keep existing Device IDs checkbox to allow the software to change
device IDs to match the currently selected device ID format (i.e., page/line
number, sequential number, etc.).
Select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to allow the software to
change device IDs without prompting you.
De–select the Rename Device IDs Automatically checkbox to cause the software
to prompt you before changing each device ID.
Select OK to complete setting the page online.
4-24
Page Management
Modify Page Variables Globally

The Manage > Page > Page Variables function allows you to globally change
page parameter text across a range of pages, installations, or across an entire
project.
Select:
Manage Page Page Variables
The Page Variables dialog box is displayed.
Page Variables
Select Pages...
Select Text
1... 2... 3... 4... 5...
6... 7... 8... 9... 10...
OK Cancel Help...
Select the Select Pages button in the Page Variables dialog box. The Exchange
Title Block Text dialog box will appear, listing the projects on your system.
Exchange Title Block Text
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
OK Cancel Help...
4-25
Page Management
This dialog box allows you to select which pages are affected by the text change.
Select the desired project from the list by pointing the cursor and clicking. The
names of all the installations in the selected project will then appear in the
Installation column. When you select an installation, the existing pages in that
installation will be listed in the Page column. Then select the desired pages.
If you select only a project name, all pages in that project will be affected. If you
select only the installation name (and no pages) then all pages in that installation
will be affected. Select OK to continue with the change function.
Select Text – This area of the dialog box contains ten buttons labeled 1 through
10. Selecting any of these buttons will display a list of ten page information
parameters (selecting 1 will display parameters 1 through 10, selecting 2 will
display parameters 11 though 20, and so on). These parameters are associated with
and stored with the page. Some are used in title blocks. When a button is activated
the following Page Parameter dialog box will appear.
Page Parameter 2
11. Para
12. Para
13. Para
14. Para
15. Para
16. Para
17. Para
18. Para
19. Para ,
20. Para
Search Language Text
OK Cancel Help...
Enter the text that you wish to assign globally in the desired field.
Note This text will replace any existing parameter text for the selected pages.
Select the OK button when the text has been entered. You will return to the Page
Variables dialog box and a different group of parameters can be selected.
Select the OK button in Page Variables dialog box to execute the change title
block text function.
4-26
Page Management
Modify Page Variables in Title Block
You can modify the values of page variables that appear in page title blocks by
pointing the cursor at the desired value and clicking the right mouse button.
DRAWN BY PROJECT DRAWING NO.

Warehouse 900–178–01
D. Smith Unit One Storage LIne JOB NO.
178
DATE PAGE DESCRIPTION SHEET

03/04/2000 Line Cabinet A 1 OF 3
Right click on value to modify
An appropriate dialog box will appear that will allow you to edit the variable
value.
Note You can also edit the page description, page number, and project description by
right clicking on the value in the title block.
4-27
Page Management
Rename Page
The Manage > Page > Rename function allows you to rename RSWire drawing
pages within a project.
Select:
Manage Page Rename
The following Rename Page dialog box will appear.
Rename Page
From:
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
To:
Project: Installation:
Location:
Page:
Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference
OK Cancel Help...
In the From: fields, select the pages you wish to rename. First select a project
name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a list of
pages in that installation will appear. You can then select (highlight) the page that
you wish to rename.
installations or pages including descriptions.
4-28
Page Management
In the To: fields, enter the installation, location, and page number that the renamed
page is to have. The location assignment is optional.
The Convert Device ID to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox

determines whether device IDs on the renamed page will be automatically
changed to match the new page number. When a checkmark appears in the box,
the device IDs will be converted. When the box is empty, device IDs will remain
the same.
Select the OK button to rename the page.
4-29
Page Management
Move Page
The Manage > Page > Move function allows you to move drawing pages within
an installation. You may wish to move pages to rearrange the page order or to
make room for inserting new pages. Or, you may wish to move pages to close gaps
in the page order.
Note If you wish to move a page to another installation, or to another project, use the
Manage > Page > Copy function and then delete the original page.
To move a page, select:
Manage Page Move
The Move Page(s) dialog box will appear.
Move Pages(s)
From:
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
Increment Page Numbers By +/–:
Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Reference
OK Cancel Help...
Use the Project and Installation fields to identify the project and installation
containing the page(s) to be moved.
In the Page field select one or more pages to be moved.
installations or pages including descriptions.
Use the Increment Page Numbers By field to specify the number of positions
forward (+) or backward (–) you wish to move the pages. For example, enter “2”
to move the page(s) two page positions forward, or enter “–1” to move them one
position backward.
4-30
Page Management
The Convert Device IDs to New Page/Line Number Reference checkbox allows
you to select whether or not the device IDs in the moved drawings will be
automatically changed to reflect the new page number. When a checkmark
appears in the checkbox, IDs will be renamed automatically. When the checkbox
is empty, the original IDs will be retained.
Select the OK button to perform the page move operation.
Rules for Page Move:
A page cannot be moved into a position already occupied by another page. This
will cause a “Page already exists” error message to appear. A page cannot be
moved backward to a page number of less than zero. If this is attempted, the
message “Incorrect input” is displayed on the command line.
The following illustration shows an installation containing five drawing pages,

numbered 1, 2, 4, 5, and 6. There is no page 3. Pages 1 and 2 could be moved
forward one position (+1) in which case they would become pages 2 and 3,
respectively. They could not be moved forward two positions (+2) because this
would conflict with the existing page 4. However, they could be moved ahead six
positions (+6) where they would become pages 7 and 8.
Pages
6 Move Pages 1 and 2:
5
+1 Allowed
4
+2 Not Allowed
+6 Allowed
2
1 –1 Allowed
–2 Not Allowed
(+ = forward, – = backward)
Pages 1 and 2 could also be moved backward one position (–1) where they would
become pages 0 and 1. They could not be moved back any further than this.
4-31
Page Management
Viewing Pages
The View pull–down menu contains a number of functions that control the user’s
view of drawing pages.
View Refresh Page

Redraw
Regen
Zoom
Pan
Aerial View
Quadrant...
Navigator
List
Command Dispatch
Toolbars...
Refresh Page – If, during an RSWire session, the drawing screen is cleared,
selecting the View > Refresh Page function will bring back the last drawing page
that was displayed.
Redraw – Redraws the current drawing.
Regen – Regenerates the entire drawing and recomputes the screen coordinates for
all objects.
Zoom – There are a number of zoom functions:

Real Time Zoom – This option is used for interactive zooming. With this
Zoom function, you can zoom in or out of the drawing by holding down the
left button of the pointing device and moving the cursor vertically up or down.
Press <Esc> to exit this mode.
Zoom Previous – Displays the previous zoom view of the drawing.
Zoom Window – Allows the user to enlarge (zoom) the view of a selected area
of the drawing. When selected, the software prompts you to select the first
corner followed by the opposite corner. This allows you to define a rectangular
area on the drawing which will be enlarged to fill the screen.
Zoom Dynamic – Allows the user to zoom out as well as in. Selecting the
function produces a reduced view of the entire drawing with a square area
window. Position the area window and click the left button. The window can
now be re–sized as desired by moving the mouse. Click the right button to
zoom to the selected area.
4-32
Page Management
Zoom Scale – Allows you to zoom at a specified scale factor. When you select
this function you will be prompted on the command line to enter a scale factor.
Entering a value followed by “x” specifies a scale relative to the current view
(“2x” magnifies objects to twice their current size). Entering a value followed
by “xp” specifies a scale relative to paper space units (the first view is
considered 1xp).
Zoom Center – Zooms to display a window defined by a center point and a

magnification factor or height. When you select the function you will be
prompted to specify a center point and then enter a height or magnification
factor.
Zoom In – Zooms in to the drawing in 2X increments.
Zoom Out – Zooms out from the drawing in .5X increments.
Zoom All – Zooms to the smallest view that includes everything in the
drawing.
Zoom Extents – Zooms to display the drawing extents.
Pan – The following Pan functions are available:
Real Time – This option is used for interactive panning. You can pan the
drawing image to a new location by holding down the left button of the
pointing device and moving the cursor. Press <Esc> to exit this mode.
Point – Moves the view of the drawing by the specified distance.
Left – Moves the drawing to the left.
Right – Moves the drawing to the right.
Up – Moves the drawing up.
Down – Moves the drawing down.
When you are using the Real Time option of Zoom or Pan, you can right–click the
pointing device and use the cursor menu to move quickly between zooming and
panning.
Aerial View – Aerial View is a navigation tool that displays a view of the drawing
in a separate window so that you can quickly move to that area. If you keep the
Aerial View window open as you work, you can zoom and pan without selecting a
command. In the Mode menu you can choose Pan or Zoom. Pan mode allows you
to move a rectangle to the part of the drawing you wish to view. Zoom mode
allows you to define a window to move and resize the drawing at the same time.
4-33
Page Management
Quadrant – Allows you to zoom to a specific quadrant of the drawing page. The
following Select Quadrant dialog box is displayed. Select the radio button for the
desired page quadrant. Select the All radio button to display the entire page.
Select Quadrant
2–Upper Left 1–Upper Right
3–Lower Left 4–Lower Right
All
OK Cancel Help...
Navigator – The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from one
drawing page to another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal.
For more information, see page 4-43.
List – The List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in a
drawing. See page 5-132.
Command Dispatch – Displays a drop down list containing RSWire commands.

Select the desired command and then select the checkmark button to execute the
command.
Toolbars – This function allows you to select which toolbars are displayed on the
screen.
4-34
Page Management
Browse Copy
The Edit > Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to four
drawing pages. It is possible to copy portions from these pages and paste them
onto the current drawing page. The pages copied from can exist in the same or in a
different project from the current page.
To use the Browse Copy function:
1. Display the page that you wish to receive the copied items.
2. Then select the Edit > Browse Copy function.
Edit Browse Copy
The Browse Copy dialog box will appear. This dialog box operates in a similar
manner to the File > Open dialog box, except that multiple pages can be
selected that will be displayed on the screen. These selected pages must exist
in the same project and installation (however they can be in a different project
or installation from the currently active page).
3. Select the name of the Project and Installation that contains the pages you
wish to view and/or copy from. The pages in the selected installation will be
listed. In each column you can use the Search button to display a list of
projects, installations or pages including descriptions.
4. Select the page (number) of the first page that you wish to view. This page and
the three pages that follow it in numerical order will be displayed in the
Browse Copy dialog box. The number of each page is displayed above the
thumbnail view.
In the following figure, page 2 has been selected, so pages 2 through 5 are
displayed.
4-35
Page Management
Browse Copy
Project Page Preview
C2HOUSE 1 Select... Select...
C2HOUSE 2
3 2 3
EX2
EXAMPLE 4
MACHINE1 5
6
Search...
Installation
Select... Select...
LINE1 4 5
LINE1
Single Selection
Search... Search...
Maintain Device IDs As Created

Previous Next
OK Cancel Help...
Display Page To Be Copied

In This Quadrant
You can use the Next button to display the next four pages in the installation
(if any). Use the Previous button to display the previous group of four pages.
You can check the Single Selection checkbox to display individual pages in
the order they were selected in the page column. If this checkbox is not
selected, the next pages (if any) in the installation will be displayed.
5. Check the Maintain Device IDs As Created checkbox if you wish to maintain
the existing device ID of the copied portion. If this checkbox is not selected,
the device IDs will acquire the numbering sequence of the destination page.
Note If you are copying symbols within the same project, the Maintain Device ID As
Created checkbox option has no effect. RSWire will not allow duplicate device IDs
within the same project.
4-36
Page Management
6. Display the page from which you wish to copy in the upper left quadrant of
the Browse Copy dialog box. Do this by selecting the desired page number in
the Page column.
7. Select the OK button. The selected page will fill the screen.
Note You can also select a page to copy from by selecting the Select button above the
thumbnail view.
8. You will be prompted to “Define Base Point.” Select a reference point for the
copied portion.
9. Just as with the standard copy function, you will be prompted to “Select
objects.” Select the portion of the drawing that you wish to copy and click the
right mouse button (or press the <Enter> key).
Note If you want to exit this function, select Edit > Browse Copy. You will return to the
original page that you wanted to receive copied items.
10. The destination page (selected in the first step) will fill the screen. Select a
position for the copied elements.
11. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear with a device ID shown for
each copied symbol (the copied items are treated as a macro by the software).
You can accept the prompted IDs or enter new ones.
Note If you copy a field, the destination page must have an installation and location
assigned or the field will not be copied.
4-37
Page Management
Page List
To generate a list of drawing pages for a given project, use the Reports > Project
> Page Full function. See page 9-4 for more information.
Select:
Reports Project Page Full
4-38
Page Management
Delete Installation
The Manage > Installation > Delete function allows you to delete an installation
from a project.
Warning: All drawing pages in the selected installation will be deleted.
To delete an installation, select:
Manage Installation Delete
The following Select Project–Installation dialog box will appear, listing all
projects currently on your system.
Select Project – Installation
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
WEB
Search... Search...
OK Cancel Help...
When you select a project name, a list of all installations in the project will appear
in the installation column. Select the installation that you wish to delete. Use the
Search button to display a list of projects or installations including descriptions.
Select the OK button to proceed with the deletion.
The software will prompt “Delete the selected installation?” Select the OK button
to delete the installation or select Cancel to abort the deletion.
4-39
Page Management
Copy Installation
The Manage > Installation > Copy function allows you to copy an installation
(and all the drawing pages it contains).
To copy an installation, select:
Manage Installation Copy
The following Copy Installation dialog box will appear. In the From: fields, select
the installation you wish to copy. First select a project name and a list of
installations will appear. You can then select (highlight) the installation that you
wish to copy. The Search buttons display a list of projects or installations with
descriptions.
Copy Installation
From:
ABACK
TOOL
Search... Search...
To:
TOOL
Location:
Set Pages Online

Wire Numbers:
Maintain Add Prefix:
Add Suffix:
OK Cancel Help...
4-40
Page Management
In the To: fields, the current project is automatically selected as the destination.
Enter the name that the copied installation is to have. Optionally, a location can
also be assigned which will apply to all the pages in the copied installation.
The Set Pages Online checkbox determines whether the copied pages will be
online or offline. Select the checkbox to make the copied pages online pages. If
the pages are offline no error checking or cross referencing will be performed.
The Wire Numbers area of the dialog box allows you to set how existing wire
numbers in the copied installation will be copied. Because the software considers
duplicate wire numbers to be an error, the system will alter any wire numbers (as
described below) that already exist in the project receiving the copied installation.
The Maintain checkbox determines whether or not wire numbers will be copied.
If you do not select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will not be copied.
If you do select the Maintain checkbox, wire numbers will be copied under the
following rules:
1. If the copied wire numbers do not exist in the destination project, the wire
numbers will be maintained without changes.
2. If copied wire numbers are connected to a signal cross reference connected to

an existing wire number, the existing wire number will be used on the copied
portion.
3. If copied wire numbers duplicate existing wire numbers in the destination

project, the system will add a question mark (?) to any copied wire number
that duplicates an existing wire number. For example, if wire number 100 is
copied to a project that already has a wire number 100, the copied wire
number will be changed to 100?. (This can be avoided by adding a prefix or
suffix to the copied numbers. See the following paragraph.)
The Add Prefix and Add Suffix fields allow you to specify a prefix or suffix that
will be added to all copied wire numbers. The added prefix and/or suffix will
make the copied wire numbers unique, thus avoiding duplicate numbers (unless
the prefix or suffix is already used in the destination project).
Select the OK button to copy the installation.
4-41
Page Management
Rename Installation
The Manage > Installation > Rename function allows you to assign a new name
to an installation.
To rename an installation, select:
Manage Installation Rename
The following Rename Installation dialog box will appear.
Rename Installation
From:
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
Search... Search...
To:
Location:
OK Cancel Help...
In the From: fields, select the installation you wish to rename. First select a
project name and a list of installations will appear. You can then select (highlight)
the installation that you wish to rename. The Search buttons display a list of
projects or installations with descriptions.
In the To: fields, enter the new installation name. Optionally, a location can also
be assigned which will apply to all pages in the renamed installation. Select the
OK button to rename the installation.
4-42
Page Management
Navigator Function
The Navigator function allows you to move quickly from one drawing page to
another by clicking on a device ID, a cross reference or a signal. It is useful when
you wish to go from one place where a particular ID is used to another place in the
project where the same ID occurs. The Navigator can also jump from a displayed
part number to the parts database screen for that part.
To activate the Navigator, select:
View Navigator
(There is also a navigator button in the toolbar – the one with binoculars on it.)
You will then be prompted to “Select attribute,” which means you can now pick an
ID or cross reference to initiate a navigator “jump”.
You must re–activate the Navigator function for each jump that you make.
The following types of navigator jumps are possible:
Signal Cross References – By clicking on the signal cross reference you will jump
from the current page to the page where the signal continues (or originates). The
point of continuation is marked with an inverted triangle.
125 CR124 AH126
126
127
Select Signal Cross Reference
128
L1/2.01 L2/2.01
4-43
Page Management
Device Cross References – When clicking on symbol cross reference information,

the display will jump to the page containing the symbol to which the cross
reference refers. If you select the cross reference at a parent symbol you will jump
to the page containing the selected child symbol. Similarly, if you select the cross
reference at the child symbol you will jump to the page containing the parent
symbol. The parent or child symbol that is jumped to is marked with an inverted
triangle.
CR112
220
CR112 Select Cross Reference To

Parent Or Child symbol
(JIC)
112
13
A1
3 –K1
–K1 /3.2
4 14
A2
13 14
/2.6
Select Cross Reference To
21 22 Parent Or Child Symbol
(IEC)
4-44
Page Management
Schematic/Panel Layout/Wiring Diagram – Clicking on a symbol’s device ID in a

schematic page will cause the display to jump to the panel layout page or wiring
diagram page containing the same device ID. (Wiring diagrams are generated by
the optional Wiring Diagram Generator routine.) If you select the device ID on a
panel layout page or wiring diagram page, you will jump to the schematic page
containing that device ID.
PB206 WIRE WIRE

PB206
1381 1 2 1441
PB206
Schematic Drawing Panel Layout Drawing Wiring Diagram Drawing
Select Device ID (JIC)
WIRE
1381
2
–S1
–S1
1
10250T101 –51X
–S1 WIRE
1441
Schematic Drawing Panel Layout Drawing Wiring Diagram Drawing
Select Device ID (IEC)
4-45
Page Management
Terminal Device ID – By selecting a terminal device ID or number, you can jump

between the schematic, panel layout, or terminal plan pages containing that ID.
TERMINAL STRIP
Select Device ID FROM SOURCE WIRE NO. =L1+CAB1–TB2 WIRE NO.
LS101:4 W10 1 W62

W21 TB2 W73 LS103:4 W14 2 W66
4
LS105:4 W18 3 W69
LS107:4 W21 4 W73
Select Terminal Number
Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page Terminal Plan Page
JIC Terminal
TERMINAL STRIP
FROM SOURCE WIRE NO. =L1+CAB1–X2 WIRE NO.
Select Device ID
W21
LS101:4 W21 1 W21

LS103:4 W22 2 W22
LS105:4 W23 3 W23
4
–X2 LS107:4 W24 W24

4
Select Terminal Number
Schematic (or Panel Layout) Page Terminal Plan Page

IEC Terminal
When you select a terminal device ID in the schematic or panel layout pages, the
following dialog box will appear, allowing you to select which type of page you
wish to go to. (The current page type will be unavailable for selection.)
4-46
Page Management
Select Page
Schematic
Terminal Plan
Panel Layout
Wire Diagram Layout
OK Cancel Help...
When you select the terminal number in the terminal plan page, you will be
returned automatically to the schematic page.
Part Number – Another function of the Navigator is to jump from a displayed part
number to the Parts Database window. When part numbers are displayed on the
schematic screen, you can activate the Navigator, select a part number, and the
parts database will be displayed with the complete information for that part.
Select Displayed Part Number
PB118
800T–B6D2 –S1
10250T10151X
118
JIC Example IEC Example
Navigator Search – You can also use the Navigator to search for and go to any
device ID or function text in the current project. To use it, first select the
Navigator function and then click in any empty area of the drawing screen. The
following Navigator dialog box will appear.
4-47
Page Management
Navigator
Installation: Search...
Location: Search...
Device ID: Search...
Function Text: Search...
OK Cancel Help...
If you wish to narrow your choices down to a specific installation and location,
make entries in the Installation and Location fields. Use the Search button next to
each field to display a list of installations or locations from which you can pick.
(You must select an installation before you can select a location.)
When you select the Search button for Device ID, the following Select Device
dialog box will appear, listing the device IDs that currently exist.
Select Device
Installation Location Device ID Device Type Function Text OK

LINE1 BAY1 MTR110 CONVEYOR
LINE1 BAY1 TB1 Cancel
LINE1 BAY1 MTR117 PUMP MOTO
LINE1 BAY1 TB1 Help
LINE1 BAY2 MTR124 PRESS MOT
LINE1 BAY2 TB1
LINE1 BAY3 IAD247 1771-IAD
LINE1 BAY3 TB
LINE1 BAY3 CR2 22
LINE1 CAB1 CR164 22
LINE1 CAB1 CR166 40
Select the desired device ID followed by the OK button. The selected ID will
appear in the Navigator dialog box. Select OK in the Navigator dialog box to
display the page containing the selected device ID.
4-48
Page Management
Page Count
In some cases, after copying or moving pages, the software’s internal page count
for a given project will need to be updated. Use the Manage > Project > Page
Count function.
1. Select the following pull–down menu:
2. The Select: Project dialog box will appear. Select (highlight) the desired
project name(s).
3. Select the OK button. The project(s) will be internally updated.
4. Select the following pull–down menu:
5. Select the Search button. A list of all the projects with page counts will
appear.
6. Select the OK button. The Select: Project dialog box will appear.
7. Select the Cancel button. The Select: Project dialog box will close.
4-49
Page Management
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
4-50
Schematic Elements
5 Schematic Elements
This section covers schematic elements within RSWireTM Designer: the various
lines, symbols, macros, texts, and other items that make up a drawing. Included are
sections on the various types of elements as well as sections on placing, deleting,
copying, and moving the schematic elements.
See Section 6 for information on how to create custom schematic elements.
The following sections are provided:

Wire/Line
Drawing Wires
Drawing Lines
Symbol Select
Symbol Settings
Parent and Child Symbols
Macro Select
Entering Text
Text Settings
Invisible Text
Foreign Language Text
Box
Field
Circles and Arcs
Signal Cross Reference
Wire Numbers
Part Numbers
Dimensions
Text File on Drawing
5-1
Schematic Elements
Edit Schematic Elements

Edit Menu
Modify Menu
Replace Symbol
Clear Page
Replace Device IDs
Replace Text
Replace Symbol Text
Edit Part Number
Replace Part Number Globally
Deleting Wire Number
I/O Device ID
Linetype Properties
Layers
List Object Function (for drawing elements)
5-2
Schematic Elements
Wire/Line
RSWire is capable of creating two types of lines: wires and drawing lines.
Wires – Wires are lines that have logical properties. Wires must be used to connect
the symbols in schematic drawings. Wires will break automatically at symbol
connection points. Wires allow RSWire to recognize the connections between
symbols and perform other functions such as automatic wire numbering.
Drawing Lines – Drawing lines are simple graphic lines with no logical properties.
They should only be used for borders or for drawing when you create a new symbol.
They should not be used to represent wires.
Select the Draw > Wire function when you wish to create wires on the drawing
screen. (A drawing page must be active before selecting this function.)
Select the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines.
Wires
Use the Draw > Wire function to draw wires, pipes or other elements that connect
the symbols on a drawing. Wires are necessary for RSWire to recognize the from/to
connections between the symbols. When wires are drawn over symbols (or when
symbols are placed on a wire), the line is broken automatically at the symbol
connection points. When two wires are connected, the connection points are drawn
automatically.
Important You must draw wires using the Wire functions in order for RSWire to recognize
connections and perform other automatic functions. Drawing lines will not work for
this purpose.
Draw Wire Continuous

Center
Dashed
3 Phase
90 Degree Down
90 Degree Up
Multiline
Repeat Last
5-3
Schematic Elements
The following wire drawing functions are available:
The Continuous function is used when you wish to create single wire segments or
two or more connected wire segments.
The Center and Dashed functions create dash–dot and dashed wires, respectively.
The 3 Phase function allows automatic drawing of three parallel wires.
With the 90 Degree Down and 90 Degree Up functions, you can connect two points
with wire segments at a 90 degree angle in one step. The angle is either above or
below the vertical wire.
The Multiline function allows multiple parallel wires to be drawn in a single step.
Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted lines in
various colors. These are called multiline styles. You can select and customize
multiline styles using the Format > Multiline Style function. See page 6-100.
The Repeat Last function allows you to draw a wire parallel to the previously
drawn wire. Only the end point needs to be entered. For horizontal wires the X
coordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Y coordinate is
the same as for the previous wire.
To Draw a Single Wire:
Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function.
1. Locate the starting point of the wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2. Click on end point with the left mouse button.
3. Click the right mouse button to complete the wire.

Click On Start And End Points
117 PB118.1
PB118 CR118
118
119
Symbol Connection Points
(Wire Broken Automatically)
Connection Points
(Drawn Automatically)
JIC Single Wires
5-4
Schematic Elements
Click On Start Point
21
13
–S5
–K1
22
/.6
14
21 21
–S4 –S6
22 22
3
–H4 –K1
4
13 14
Click On End Point /.4
21 22
IEC Single Wires
Adjusting Wire Length – You can extend an existing parallel wire by drawing
another line and connecting it to the first. The system will treat the two wires as a
single wire. You can also adjust wire length by stretching the wire’s endpoint
(Modify > Stretch function).
Note If a wire is drawn over one or more symbols, the wire will automatically break
between symbols.
Wire/Line Coordinates Display – While wires and lines are being drawn, x–y
coordinates of the line endpoint are displayed on the status line below the drawing
area.
5-5
Schematic Elements
To Draw 3–Phase Wires:
Use the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function to automatically draw 3 parallel wires
spaced one grid unit apart. 3–phase wires are used for power circuit diagrams.
Select the Draw > Wire > 3 Phase function.
1. Locate starting point of wires by clicking left mouse button.
2. Click the left mouse button again on the desired end point.
3–Phase Drawing Example:

101
Wire Starting Point 102 PUMP
M1
T1 5 HP
103 M
T2 1000 RPM
104 7.2 AMP
T3
105
Wire End Point
106
107
Wire Starting Point

101 Wire End Point
102 PUMP
M1
T1
5 HP
103 M
T2 1000 RPM
104 7.2 AMP
T3
3–Phase Connections 105

(Drawn Automatically) 106
107
JIC 3–Phase Wires
5-6
Schematic Elements
Wire Wire Wire 3–Phase Connections

Starting Point End Point End Point (Drawn Automatically)
Wire
Starting Point
U V W PE U V W PE
M M
–M1 3~ –M1 3~
PUMP PUMP
5 HP 5 HP
7.2 AMP 7.2 AMP
1000 RPM 1000 RPM
IEC 3–Phase Wires
Note The software automatically connects two intersecting sets of 3 phase wires.
However, you must draw the second set of wires into the first set. See the above
examples.
5-7
Schematic Elements
To Draw Repeat Wires:
Use the Repeat Last function to repeatedly draw parallel wires. Once a wire is
drawn, only the end points of subsequent wires need to be defined. For horizontal
wires the X coordinate is the same as for the previous wire, for vertical wires the Y
coordinate is the same as for the previous wires. Wires or drawing lines can be
drawn using the Repeat option.
Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.
1. Draw the first wire (using the Draw > Wire > Continuous function).
2. Select the Draw > Wire > Repeat Last option.
3. Click on end points of all subsequent parallel wires.

Note The starting points for wires are along the x or y axis of the starting point of the first
wire.
Repeat Wires Example:

Y–AXIS
First Wire
Starting Point End Point
Click Here To Draw

Second Wire
Click Here To Draw
Third Wire
Click Here To Draw
Fourth Wire
To Draw Continuous Wires or Lines:
The Continuous function allows you to draw multiple, connected wire segments.
Select the Draw > Wire > Continuous function.
1. Locate starting point of the first wire by clicking the left mouse button.
2. Click on end point of first wire with the left mouse button.
3. Create second and all subsequent lines by clicking on the destination point of
each wire segment with the left mouse button.
5-8
Schematic Elements
4. Complete the last segment by clicking the right mouse button (or pressing the
<Enter> key).
Step 1 Step 2
First Segment
Step 3
Step 4
To Draw Wires Using 90 Degree Up / Down:
Use the Draw > Wire > 90 Degree Up and 90 Degree Down options to draw right
angles automatically. This allows a pair of wires to be drawn in one operation. See
examples below for procedure. “90 Degree Up” means the angle is above the
diagonal. “90 Degree Down” places the angle below the diagonal.
90 Degree Up Example:
3) Angle Drawn
1) Click On Automatically
Start Point
2) Click On
End Point
90 Degree Down Example:
1) Click On
Start Point 2) Click on
End Point
3) Angle Drawn
Automatically
5-9
Schematic Elements
Drawing Lines
Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to create drawing lines.
Note Unlike wires, RSWire does not recognize drawing lines as having any electrical or
connective properties. Drawing lines are used for mechanical layouts, device
layouts, assembly layouts, borders, etc. Connection points are not automatically
drawn.
Draw Graphic Line

Polyline
The following line drawing functions are available:
The Single function allows a single graphic line segment to be drawn by defining a
start and end point with the left mouse button. You can create multiple, connected
line segments in a manner similar to the continuous wire drawing function. Click the
right mouse button to complete the line.
The Polyline function activates the AutoCAD Polyline function.
5-10
Schematic Elements
Symbol Select
There are two functions for selecting symbols located under the Insert menu.
Insert Select Icon

Symbol By Name
Select Icon allows you to select symbols by picking a graphical representation of

the symbol.
Symbol By Name allows you to select symbols by entering the symbol name.
Both options display the following symbol selection dialog box.
5-11
Schematic Elements
Select Icon
On the lower left side of the dialog box is a list of symbol groups. Selecting one of
these groups displays graphical images of the symbols in the selected group.
Individual symbols can be selected by pointing and clicking on the icons. When you
place the cursor on one of the icons, a pop–up symbol description tag will appear.
Pull–down menus are provided in the select icon window. The Edit menu provides a
function to delete symbol groups from the list (caution: this function will delete the
WMF file for the symbol group) and a function to refresh the display. The Settings
menu gives access to the symbol and macro setting dialog boxes, and to a
background color function for the Select Icon window. The Exit menu will close the
window.
The user can create his or her own symbol groups for use in the Select Icon mode.
The procedure for creating these groups is described in an appendix. See page C-1.
Symbol by Name
If you know the symbol name, you can enter it in the Name field of the Select Icon
dialog box and select OK.
Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks

(*) in the Name or Description fields. For example, enter *PUSHBUTTON* in the
Description field to search for any symbols with the word PUSHBUTTON in the
description. If any symbols matching the search string are found they are displayed
on screen in a list which can be selected from by pointing and clicking.
You can also select the Search button to see a list of all the symbols in the current
project’s symbol catalogs. As shown in the following figure, this Symbol Database
dialog includes the symbols’ Catalog, Name, Type and Description. By clicking on
one of these column headings you can determine how the listed symbols are sorted.
In the Path field you can select which catalogs are displayed. The available
selections are those listed in the catalog path line of the ecs.cfg file in the Rs\Work
directory.
5-12
Schematic Elements
Symbol Database
Path: All Catalogs OK
Catalog Name Type Description
JIC CRNO PS2 NORMALLY OPEN CONTACT

JIC CRNC PS2 NORMALLY CLOSED CONTACT
JIC CRC PS2 CONTROL RELAY FORM C CON
JIC CR PS1 CONTROL RELAY COIL
JIC CP CP1 NECESSARY SYMBOL FOR LIB
JIC COS GS1 CABLE-OPERATED (EMERG.)
JIC CONN TS5 CHILD PIN CONNECTOR
JIC CI GS1 CIRCUIT INTERRUPTER 3PHAS
Symbol Settings
Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Symbol Settings are the current
Angle, Scale, and Mirror settings. If you wish to change these settings, click inside
the desired field. For more on these symbol settings, see page 5-23.
Placing a Symbol
Once a symbol is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursor
location. Position the symbol by pointing the cursor at the desired location and
pressing the left mouse button. The symbol is then placed in the diagram. The
reference point of the symbol will snap to the nearest grid line.
If the symbol is placed on a wire, the wire will break automatically at the symbol
connection points. If a symbol is placed first and a wire is drawn over the symbol,
the wire will also break automatically.
The symbol will be rotated automatically to match the horizontal or vertical

alignment of a wire. (For this to occur, symbol rotation must be set to 0 degrees and
the symbol reference point must be on the wire. Certain 3–phase symbols will not be
rotated automatically.)
Note No more than one wire should be connected to a single symbol connection point.
5-13
Schematic Elements
PB118 PB118
Wrong Right
Auto Device ID Assignment
Once the symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears. You can
accept the prompted device ID, or you can type a different ID in the fields provided.
A device ID can have up to 14 characters. (The drop–down list beside the Device ID
field will show all the device IDs that have been assigned in the current work
session.) The format of the device ID can consist of sequential numbers or letters, in
combination with page and/or line numbers. The device ID format is selected in the
Project Parameters dialog box when the project is created (see page 3-9). The
prompted device ID is the lowest available ID.
Device ID Assignment
Location: Search...
Device ID: Search Device ID
Suppress Device ID Duplicate Device ID Multiple Placement

Part Number
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete Search...
Addit.Part Number
OK Cancel Help...
5-14
Schematic Elements
Note Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the device ID that you enter:
# = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These characters are used for
various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected results if entered in the
device ID. (You can use dashes if you intend to use the Nested Device IDs function.
See page 7-44.)
If you wish the device ID to be hidden on the screen and on plots of the drawing,
select the Suppress Device ID checkbox. The device ID will still be assigned to the
symbol; it will simply not be shown.
Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols with
the same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicate
IDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select the
Duplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing will
appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbol
appears. If you place more than two symbols with the same ID using this method,
some of the symbols will have two cross references, one indicating the related
symbol that comes before it and one indicating the symbol that comes after it (in
page/line order). If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only
assign a part number to one of the symbols.
The Multiple Placement checkbox applies only when placing a series of similar
symbols (allows automatic placement on consecutive lines). See page 5-19.
The Search Device ID button is active when parent or child symbols are placed (see
page 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols). It allows you to search for
existing device IDs of a given type (see page 5-20).
To assign a part number to a symbol, select the Search button in the Device ID
Assignment dialog box. This will display a list of part numbers in the Assign Part
Number screen. You can select one or more of the displayed part numbers. See page
5-79 for more information on the Assign Part Number screen.
If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you can simply
use the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or, if you
know the part number, you can type the additional part number in the the Additional
Part Number field and select the Addit. Part Number button.
Selected part numbers for the current device ID are listed in the Assigned Part
No./Select to Delete field. To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have already
been assigned simply click on the part number you wish to delete.
Select the OK button to accept the device ID and any part numbers that have been
selected. This ID will be placed on the symbol in the drawing.
5-15
Schematic Elements
If the symbol has symbol text associated with it, the Symbol Text dialog box will
appear displaying the text. Symbol text is functional attribute text that is associated
with a specific symbol (rather than ordinary text which can be placed anywhere in a
drawing). If a symbol text entry is required, the text will be displayed as a “?”. Enter
the desired symbol text and select OK.
Symbol
Symbol Text:
Full load current: ? AMP
Attributes Only
Next Previous OK Cancel Help...
Note Some symbols have fixed symbol text which does not require an entry. If you only
wish to have the “?” symbol text displayed in the Symbol Text dialog box, select the
Attributes Only checkbox in the symbol text dialog box. This reduces the chance
that someone might make an entry in the wrong text field.
The system will check for duplicate device IDs unless the Online function is turned
off for the page. The online function is selected when the page is created by
activating the Online checkbox in the New Page dialog box (see page 4-14). You
can activate the Online function for an existing page through the Manage > Page >
Modify function.
If you attempt to assign a duplicate device ID (when the Online function is active),
the message “Device ID already exists” is displayed on the screen along with the ID
and page/line location of the existing symbol. After selecting the OK button, the
next available device ID will be displayed.
5-16
Schematic Elements
Parent Symbols – If the symbol you are placing is a “parent” symbol (one that may
have associated contacts elsewhere in the diagram such as a relay), you will also be
prompted to select a “Device Type.” This device type is a definition that associates a
parent symbol, one or more child symbols, and a cross reference symbol. By
selecting a device type you tell the software how many child symbols are to be
associated with this parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next
to the parent. (See page 5-25 for more on parent and child symbols.) The following
Device Type dialog box will appear.
Device Type
Device Type:
Description:
Search... OK Cancel Help...
Enter the desired device type in the Device Type field. The drop–down list in this
field will show all the device types that have been assigned in the current work
session. Select the Search button to display a list of device names and descriptions
that are associated with the symbol type you are currently placing.
After you enter the device type, the Connection Points dialog box is displayed
which lists the connection point designations for the parent symbol and its
associated child symbols.
Connection Points
Select Connection Points

Device ID: =LINE1+EN1–CR108
Device: 22
Installation Pg.Line Symbol Connection Points
CR A1 A2
CRNO 13 14
CRNO 23 24
Modification CRNC 31 32 11 12
Field CRNC 41 42 21 22
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
OK Cancel Help
5-17
Schematic Elements
This dialog box displays the connection point designations for the parent symbol
and each child symbol. If desired, you can select the parent symbol line (“CR A1
A2” in the example above) to display the connection point designations in the
modification field. These designations can be reversed if desired by entering the
designations in reverse order (“A2 A1”). The designations will then appear on the
opposite sides of the symbol.
Select the OK button to place the parent symbol in the drawing. A cross reference
box will appear next to the parent symbol which will be automatically updated as
each child symbol is placed.
Child Symbols – When placing a child symbol (such as a relay contact) the software
will prompt a device ID containing a “?”. For example, “CR?”. You must enter the
same device ID as the parent symbol to allow the software to recognize the relation
between the parent and child symbol.
After entering the child symbol device ID, the same Connection Points dialog box
shown for the parent symbol will be displayed. The connection point designations of
the first available child symbol of the selected type (CRNO or CRNC) will be
displayed in the modification field. If desired, you can select a different child
symbol of the same type if you prefer that these connection designations be assigned
to the symbol you are currently placing (for example, 23 and 24 rather than 13 and
14). You can also enter the connection designations in reverse order in the
modification field. Select the OK button to place the symbol in the drawing.
If you select the wrong child symbol type or enter connection designations that were
not defined for this symbol the error message “Connection point description not
possible” will be displayed.
As each child symbol is placed, its position (page and line number) will be
automatically placed in the cross reference box beside the parent symbol.
5-18
Schematic Elements
Multiple Placement of Symbols
When the Multiple Placement checkbox in the Device ID Assignment dialog box is
enabled you can automatically place symbols on parallel wires.
Location: Search...

Multiple
Part Number Placement
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete Search... checkbox
Addit.Part Number
OK Cancel Help...
To place multiple symbols use the following steps:
1. Select a symbol (such as X1) using the Insert > Select Icon or Insert > Symbol
By Name function.
2. Place the symbol on the first wire of the range of wires to be included.
3. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear (see above). Enter the desired
device ID in the Device ID field.
4. Select the Multiple Placement checkbox.
5. Select the OK button to continue. The symbol will appear on the wire.
6. Press the <Esc> key to end the Insert Symbol function.
5-19
Schematic Elements
7. Select the last wire in the range of wires by pointing the cursor and clicking on
the desired terminal position (do not select a symbol draw function again). If
terminal symbols are being placed, consecutively numbered terminals will
appear on all wires between the first and last selected wires. For non–terminal
symbols, a device ID will be prompted for the symbol on each wire.
–TB4 Place First Symbol Here
1
Click On Last Line

3
Terminals 2 And 3 Placed Are

Numbered Automatically
Note For terminal symbols: when grid lines are visible between wires, the device ID of
the terminal will be displayed on all terminal symbols placed with the Multiple
Placement function. When no grid line is displayed between wires then the function
will automatically suppress the device ID of all multiple terminal symbols except the
first (as shown above).
Search Device ID
Related parent and child symbols share the same device ID. Therefore, when
placing a parent or child symbol it is useful to know which device IDs have already
been used. For this purpose, a Search Device ID button is provided in the Device ID
Assignment dialog box. This button is only active when a parent or child symbol is
being placed.
5-20
Schematic Elements
Location: Search...

Search
Part Number Device ID
Search...
Button
Assigned Part No./Select to Delete
Addit.Part Number
OK Cancel Help...
When you select the Search Device ID button, the following Search Device ID
dialog box will appear.
Search Device ID
Installation:
Location:
Device ID:
Function Text:
OK Cancel Help...
The Device ID field will contain a wildcard string based on the symbol that is
currently being placed. This determines what kind of device IDs will be included in
the search. You can also narrow the search by entering installation and location
names in the Installation and Location fields. In addition the Function Text field
allows your search to be based on existing function text.
5-21
Schematic Elements
When you select the OK button, all existing device IDs that match the search
parameters will be displayed along with their installation, location, device type, and
function text. This search will cover the entire project.
If desired, you can pick one of these device IDs and it will appear in the Device ID
Assignment dialog box to be assigned to the symbol you are currently placing. If this
ID cannot be used because the parent symbol already exists or because all the child
symbols have been assigned, an error message will appear when you place the
symbol.
5-22
Schematic Elements
Symbol Settings
Various settings can be made that govern how the symbol appears on the drawing. In
general, these settings remain in effect until a different setting is made.
Symbol Scale, Rotation, and Mirroring – Use the Symbol Settings function to set
symbol scale, rotation and mirroring. (These settings do not affect symbols that
already exist on a drawing, only those symbols placed after the setting is made.)
First, right click on the desired symbol, then, from the pop–up menu, select:
Block Settings Symbol Settings
The following Symbol dialog box will be displayed.
Symbol
Scale Factor Rotate Mirror

1.000 0 None
2.000 45
5.000 60 x–axis
0.500 90
0.250 180 y–axis
Current Values
1.000 0
OK Cancel Help... Save
Note You can also make these settings in the Select Icon dialog box when placing
symbols. See page 5-13.
Scaling and rotation values can be selected from the Scale Factor and Rotate fields
by pointing and clicking. The currently selected values appear in the Current Values
fields. The Scale values allow the symbol to be reduced (0.500) or enlarged (2.000).
Rotate values allow rotation of the symbol in degrees. If desired, you can enter other
scale and rotation values in the fields (including negative rotation values) and then
select them. Use the Save button to store any values you enter in the selection fields
for future work sessions.
5-23
Schematic Elements
Note When scaling symbols with the AutoCAD R14 Add–on version of the software, do
not use a scale that results in symbol connection points being spaced at a distance
that involves units smaller than one thousandth of an inch (.001 inch). The software
cannot correctly position such symbols on a grid and will not be able to recognize
connections. The AutoCAD 2000 Add–on version of the software provides an
additional decimal place of precision (.0001 inch).
The Mirror radio buttons allow the symbol to be mirrored on the X or Y axis. Select
None for no mirroring (normal orientation).
None – No Mirroring X Axis Mirroring Y Axis Mirroring
Other Symbol Settings:
Suppressing Device ID Sign (–) – Use the Tools > Project Settings function,
Device ID Style tab to display the Device ID Style dialog box. Then turn on the
Suppress Device ID Sign checkbox to remove the leading “–” from the device ID
on the schematic drawing.
5-24
Schematic Elements
Parent and Child Symbols

Certain symbols can have a “parent” or “child” relationship with other symbols in a
schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related
contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. If child symbols are given the
same device ID as the parent, the system can automatically provide cross
referencing.
Parent Symbol
CR112
114
(Line 112)
Cross Reference To Child
Child Symbol
CR112
(Line 114)
Cross Reference To Parent
112
JIC Cross Reference
21
–K1
/.6 22
A1 Parent Symbol
3
Child Symbol
–K1
4
A2 Cross Reference To Parent
13 14
21 22 /.4
Cross Reference To Child
IEC Cross Reference
You may wonder how the system knows how many children a parent symbol has.
This is accomplished with a “Device Type” definition that establishes the type and
number of child symbols that are associated with the parent and which cross
reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol.
5-25
Schematic Elements
When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask what its device
type is. Once the system knows the device name, it can also perform error–checking
functions by keeping track of how many of the available child symbols have been
used.
The same symbol types can be assigned to different devices. For example, you can
use the CR parent symbol with various device types to represent relays with
different combinations of normally open and normally closed contacts. Or, you can
create devices for a relay and a motor starter that both use the same cross reference
symbol.
A number of device type definitions are provided with RSWire (you can list them
with the Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full function), or the user can create
custom device definitions. The example above could use the standard device type
named “20.” This device consists of a parent relay with two normally open and no
normally closed contact children. Put simply, the device type definition contains the
following information:
Device Name: 20
Parent Symbol Name: CR
Cross Reference Symbol Name: Q20
Child Symbol: CRNO
Child Symbol: CRNO
5-26
Schematic Elements
Macro Select
A macro is a collection of symbols and other elements that can be placed on a
drawing in one step. A number of macros are provided with RSWire. You can also
create your own macros. See page 6-81 for instructions on creating a macro.
To select a macro, use one of these functions.
Insert Select Icon

Macro By Name
Selecting Insert > Select Icon function allows you to select pictorial representations
(icons) of macros.
Selecting Insert > Macro By Name function allows macro selection by entering the
macro name.
Both options display the following Select Icon dialog box.
5-27
Schematic Elements
To select macros by graphical icon, select one of the macro groups from the list in
the lower left side of the dialog box. Then select one of the displayed macros by
pointing and clicking on the icons. The macro groups provided with the software
begin with the word “MACRO_”.
To select macros by name, first select the Macro radio button in the Select Icon
dialog box. Then enter the name in the Macro Name field and select OK.
Otherwise, wildcard searches can be made by making entries containing asterisks
(*) in the Name or Description fields and selecting the Search button.
For example, enter *MOTOR* in the Description field to search for any macros
with the word MOTOR in the description. If any macros matching the search string
are found, they are displayed on screen in a list which can be selected from by
pointing and clicking.
5-28
Schematic Elements
In the Macro Settings area of the Select Icon dialog box, there is a field labeled
Maintain Device IDs as Created. You can click inside this field to select between
“Yes” and “No” values. If you select “Yes,” the device IDs of any symbols in the
macro will not be automatically updated to reflect their new position (however you
will still be prompted with the original device ID). This is useful when using a
macro (such as for L1 and L2 lines) that will always have the same device IDs.
Also displayed in the Select Icon dialog box under Macro Settings are the current
Rotate and Scale settings. If you wish to change these settings, click in the desired
field and enter a value. These settings do not affect macros that already exist on a
drawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made. Scale and rotation
values are selected similar to symbol scaling and rotation (see page 5-23). No
mirroring is possible with macros.
Placing a Macro
Once a macro is selected, its outline is visible on the drawing screen at the cursor
location. Position the macro by pointing the screen cursor at the desired location and
pressing the left mouse button. The macro is then placed in the diagram and the
following Device ID Assignment dialog box appears.
Location: Search...
Suppress Device ID Duplicate Device ID

Part Number
Addit.Part Number
OK Accept All Cancel Help...
5-29
Schematic Elements
Device ID – The device IDs of the symbols within the macro are prompted one by
one in the Device ID Assignment dialog box. The prompted IDs will reflect the new
position of the symbols unless you selected the Maintain Device IDs as Created
checkbox when the macro was selected.
Select the Suppress Device ID checkbox if you wish the device ID to be hidden on
the screen and on plots of the drawing. The device ID will still be assigned to the
symbol; it simply will not be shown.
Selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox allows you to place two symbols with
the same device ID (ordinarily, the software’s error checking prevents duplicate
IDs). The two symbols must belong to the GS1 symbol group. You must select the
Duplicate Device ID checkbox when placing both symbols. Cross referencing will
appear at both symbols indicating the page and line number where the other symbol
appears. If you wish to avoid duplicate part numbers, you should only assign a part
number to one of the symbols.
Selecting the Accept All button causes all the default device IDs to be accepted and
entered in one step. You will not be prompted for symbol text.
You can assign part numbers to each symbol with the Search button. This will
display the Assign Part Number dialog box for part selection. See page 5-79.
Any special symbol text (such as Amp and horsepower values) will also be
prompted. The example dialog box shows the prompt for a text requiring an Amp
value. Simply replace the “?” with the desired value and select OK. Values entered
here can be changed with the Modify > Symbol function.
Symbol
Symbol Text:
Full load current: ? AMP
Attributes Only
Next Previous OK Cancel Help...
Macro Wire Numbers – If wire numbers were stored as part of the macro, these will
appear when the macro is placed. If the macro’s wire numbers are connected to or
duplicate existing wire numbers in the project, the existing wire numbers will take
precedence. See page 6-81 for more information.
5-30
Schematic Elements
Entering Text
Although RSWire automatically enters device IDs and other descriptive labels when
placing symbols, the user may wish to include additional text to further describe
various drawing elements. Text can be entered on a drawing by selecting the Draw
> Text function.
Draw Text
Entering Text – To enter text on a drawing, first select the Draw > Text function.
The following Text dialog box will appear.
Text
Text
Function Text
Language Text
Number: Text: Search...
Height: 0.1500 Select... Position X: 0.0000
Angle: 0 Select... Position Y: 0.0000
Slant: 0 Select... Attribute Number:
Ratio: 0.0000 Select...
Label Origin: 5 Select...
Color: 0 Select...
Object Default Settings
Font: Disable Settings
OK Cancel Help...
In the Text field, enter the desired text. Text strings up to 256 characters in length
can be entered (the text will scroll within the field).
5-31
Schematic Elements
Multi–line text – If you wish to enter multi–line text, enter a “^” character to cause a
line break. For example, the entry “EMERGENCY^STOP” will be displayed as:
EMERGENCY
STOP
The Function Text checkbox allows you to assign the text from the Text Input field
as function text to be associated with a particular device ID in the Master List.
When this checkbox is selected and you select OK to close the Text dialog box, you
will be prompted to “Select objects” on the drawing screen. Select the desired
symbol and press <Enter>. The software will prompt you to “Define point.” Select a
point near the symbol. The text that was entered in the Text Input field will appear
here. This text will then be associated with the symbol’s device ID when a Master
List is generated. For parent/child symbols, assign the function text to the parent
symbol.
If you have used the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in the Device ID Assignment
dialog box to allow a duplicate device ID, you should assign function text to only
one of the two symbols.
If you wish to place a text string more than once, you can select the down arrow
button next to the Text field to see a drop–down list of text strings that have been
entered in the current work session. You can select from this list.
Use the Language Text fields to search for entries from the RSWire language text
lists (see page 5-41). Enter either the text number in the Number field or the text
itself in the Text field (wildcard searches are permitted) and select the Search
button. Any text matching the entered value will be displayed and can be selected by
pointing and clicking. The list that is accessed will be the number 1 language
selected when the project was created.
Note If you wish to enter a language text number directly in the Text Input field, the text
number must be preceded by a tilde (~) character.
The Position X and Position Y fields indicate the coordinates of the last text to be
entered, and by making an entry you can determine the coordinates of the next text
to be entered.
The Attribute Number field is used when creating a new symbol to define a
sequence of text attributes. When you are not in the symbol–create mode, the field is
not accessible. See page 6-14 for more information.
The remainder of the dialog box consists of fields and buttons that allow various
text parameters to be set. These are described in the following subsection, Text
Settings.
5-32
Schematic Elements
Selecting the Object Default Settings checkbox will change the text parameters to
match the settings listed in the Object Defaults tab in the Project Settings dialog box
under Tools > Project Settings. If this checkbox is not selected, the text parameters
can be changed.
The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields and buttons
(Height, Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. The
figure below shows how this reduced Text dialog box will appear. The parameters
can be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which will then be
present.
Text
Text
Function Text
Position X: 23.5000 Position Y: 15.0000 Attribute No.
Language Text
Enable Settings
OK Cancel Help...
To place the text, select the OK button.
If you have not entered coordinates in the dialog box, the system will prompt,
“Define point or select parameter” allowing you to choose a point for placing text
on the drawing.
5-33
Schematic Elements
Text Settings
When you select the Draw > Text function, the Text dialog box that appears
contains fields for various text parameters. Parameters are entered with the Select
buttons that list available values for these parameters and allow selections to be
made.
The Disable Settings checkbox will remove the text parameter fields (Height,
Angle, Slant, etc.) from the Text dialog box on subsequent text entries. The
parameters can be returned by selecting an Enable Settings checkbox which will
then be present.
The following parameters are available:
Height – This option allows you to set the height of the text characters. When you
select the Choice button, the following Height dialog box appears.
Height
Text Height
Text Height 1: 0.1000
Last Selection: 0.250
This dialog box provides seven different height values which can be selected. If
desired, you can also enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save
these newly entered value so they will be available in future work sessions). To
select a value, point and click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then
select the OK button. The currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection
field.
5-34
Schematic Elements
Angle – This option sets the angle at which text strings will appear on the drawing.
Selecting Select displays the following Angle dialog box.
Angle
Text Angle
Text Angle 1: 0
Text Angle 2: 90
Text Angle 3: –90
Text Angle 4: 180
Text Angle 5: 0
Last Selection: 0
Five angle values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired, you can also
enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered
values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and
click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The
currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-35
Schematic Elements
Slant – This option selects the text slant – the angle that individual characters will
have. Selecting Select displays the following Slant dialog box.
Slant
Text Slant
Text Slant 1: 0
Text Slant 2: 15
Text Slant 3: 30
Text Slant 4: 0
Last Selection: 0
Four slant values (in degrees) are available for selection. If desired you can also
enter new values in these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered
values so they will be available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and
click so that the cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The
currently selected value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-36
Schematic Elements
Ratio – This option allows selection of a width–to–height ratio for text characters.
For example, a ratio value of 4 would produce characters 4 times wider than their
height. Selecting Select displays the following Ratio dialog box.
Ratio
Text Ratio
Text Ratio 1: 1.0000
Text Ratio 5: 0.0000 Ratio
Last Selection: 0.000
Five ratio values are available for selection. If desired, you can enter new values in
these fields (use the Save button to save any newly entered values so they will be
available in future work sessions). To select a value, point and click so that the
cursor appears in the desired field. Then select the OK button. The currently selected
value is displayed in the Last Selection field.
5-37
Schematic Elements
Label Origin – This option allows you to set where the text will appear in relation to
the reference point you select on the drawing. When you select Select, the following
Label Origin dialog box will be displayed.
Label Origin
7 Top Left 8 Top Center 9 Top Right
4 Middle Left 5 Middle Center 6 Middle Right
1 Bottom Left 2 Bottom Center 3 Bottom Right
10 Baseline Left 11 Baseline Center 12 Baseline Right
Last Selection: 5
The current label origin is shown in the Last Selection field. Select the desired label
origin by pointing and clicking on the appropriate button. Then select the OK
button. Text will be placed in relation to the origin point as shown in the following
illustration.
Top Left: Top Center: Top Right:
TEXT TEXT TEXT
Middle Left: TEXT Middle Center: TEXT Middle Right: TEXT
Baseline Left: TEXT Baseline Center: TEXT Baseline Right: TEXT
Bottom Left:
TEXT Bottom Center:
TEXT Bottom Right:
TEXT
5-38
Schematic Elements
Color – This parameter sets the color of the text. When you select the Select button,
the following Select Color dialog box appears.
Select Color
Standard Colors
Gray Shades Logical Colors
BYLAYER BYBLOCK
Full Color Palette
Color: BYBLOCK
OK Cancel Help...
Select a color either from the Standard Colors or the Full Color Palette areas. The
selected color is indicated by a square to the right of the Color: field.
The BYLAYER and BYBLOCK buttons allow selection of these two methods of
coloring. The current selection is indicated in the Color field.
Font – This field indicates the currently selected font. To set the text font, use the
Format > Text Style function and select one of the displayed fonts.
5-39
Schematic Elements
Invisible Text
It is possible to hide all or part of a text string on a drawing by beginning and ending
the text to be hidden with an “@” character. The text is otherwise entered as normal
using the Draw > Text function.
Example:
Text as entered: Main @Class B@Motor
Text as it appears on drawing: Main Motor
The hidden text will be visible only when editing the text using the Modify > Text
function.
Note Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in wire number prefixes.
5-40
Schematic Elements
Foreign Language Text

RSWire has the capability to automatically display selected text words and phrases
in multiple languages.
RSWire includes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words and
phrases in six languages (English, German, French, Spanish, Italian and Dutch). The
words and phrases in each list are numbered, and the corresponding term is given
the same number in each language list. By entering the number for the word or
phrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), the software can automatically
display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages.
The text is entered on the drawing (using the Draw > Text function) as a tilde
character “~” followed by the desired text number. For example, ~187.
The user can edit and add to any of the word lists and can create new word lists for
additional languages. Up to 20 language lists can be stored. The text in each
language is restricted to 80 characters per phrase.
Selecting Languages
To select which languages will appear in a drawing, one first specifies up to three
languages in the Language fields of the Project Parameters dialog box when
creating a project. See page 3-9. (You can change these settings with the Manage >
Project > Modify function.)
In the following Project Parameters dialog box, English has been chosen as
Language 1, French as Language 2, and German as Language 3.
5-41
Schematic Elements
Project Parameters
Default Device ID Display: Device ID – Page – Line No.

Language
Signal Cross Reference Analysis Type: Ascending by Inst. and Pages Fields
Default Text Size Language
Device ID 0.1250 1: English
Connection Point 0.1250
Strip/Plug ID 0.0000 2: French
Terminal/Plug ID 0.1250
Cross Reference 0.1250 3: German
Signal Cross Reference 0.1250
Default Grid
Default Text Style ROMANS
X 0.5000
Adjust Device ID When Symbols Are Moved Y 0.5000
Wire Numbering Mode: Wire Number Same Over Terminal
Connection List/Term. Plan: Replace CP With I/O Address
OK Cancel Help...
Placing Language Text
Text codes are placed on the drawing in the form of a number preceded by a “~”.
This text is displayed in the languages selected in the Project Parameters dialog
box.
Example:
Text number 380 is “YES/NO” in English. If the selected languages are
English–French–German as shown previously, and the text “~380” is placed on a
drawing the following text will be displayed:
YES/NO
OUI/NON
JA/NEIN
5-42
Schematic Elements
Viewing Language Lists
Functions for viewing the contents of the language lists are accessed through the
Reports > Libraries > Foreign Languages function. See page 9-7 for more
information.
5-43
Schematic Elements
Language List Phrases
To view a list of language phrases, select the Manage > Foreign Language > Edit
Phrases function.
Select:
Manage Foreign Language Edit Phrases
The contents of the language phrase lists are accessed through Microsoft Access.
The following form will appear.
TEXT: Form
Language Database
Find Text Number
Text Number 1
English: DRIVE German: ANTRIEB

French: ENTRAINEMENT Spain: DRIVE
Italy: AZIONAMENTI Dutch: AANDRIJVING
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
The dialog lists a selected text phrase in all the languages for which a translation
exists in the language text database.
To display a specific text number – Enter the number of the desired phrase in the
Find Text Number field and select the Find Text Number button (the button with
the binoculars icon). You can step forward or backward through the list in numerical
order by using the Next Record and Previous Record buttons at the bottom of the
dialog box (the buttons with the triangle icons).
To edit a phrase – Edit the displayed phrases as desired. To save your changes,
select the Save Record button (the button with the disk and pencil icon).
5-44
Schematic Elements
To add a new phrase – Select the Add Record button (the button with the triangle
and asterisk). Enter an unused text number at the prompt. Enter the desired words
for each language. Select the Save Record button (the button with the disk and
pencil icon).
Language List Additions
To add a language to the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language >
New function.
Select:
Manage Foreign Language New...
The result will be the New Language dialog box with a list of current languages.
Add the additional language(s) to the list. The list can accept up to 20 languages.
Select the OK button to save the changes.
New Language
Index Language Font Index Language Font

1. English 11.
2. German 12.
3. French 13.
4. Spanish 14.
5. Italian 15.
6. English 16.
7. 17.
8. 18.
9. 19.
10. 20.
OK Cancel Help
If desired, you can use the Font field to assign a text style for each language. This
allows you to distinguish each language on a drawing with a different font.
5-45
Schematic Elements
Language List Deletions
To delete a language from the language list, use the Manage > Foreign Language >
Delete... function.
Select:
Manage Foreign Language Delete...
The result will be the Delete Language dialog box with a list of current languages.
Select (highlight) the language(s) to be deleted from the list. Select the OK button to
save the changes.
Delete Language
Language
English
German
French
Spanish
Italian
Dutch
OK Cancel Help...
5-46
Schematic Elements
Box
You can draw two types of boxes: Logical boxes and Drawing boxes. Logical boxes
are processed like symbols and include a device ID and connection points. Drawing
boxes are simple graphic elements with no logical properties. Filled or empty
drawing boxes can be drawn.
Draw Logical Box

Graphic Box Empty
Box Filled
Logical Boxes
Logical boxes are used as symbols in a schematic drawing. Like other symbols, they
are assigned a device ID and have connection points.
Connection Point
A B Connection Point Text

D426
Device ID
Logical Box
There are a number of functions in the Draw > Logical Box submenu.
Draw Logical Box Create

Conn. Point
Delete Conn. Point
To draw a logical box, select the Draw > Logical Box > Create function. The
software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the opposite
corner.
Then the software will display the Device ID Assignment dialog box and prompt you
to enter a device ID for the logical box. The device ID is entered in the same way as
for a symbol. If desired, you can also assign a part number to the logical box.
5-47
Schematic Elements
The default position for the device ID is to the left of the logical box. It can be
moved with the Modify > Symbol function.
Next, select the Draw > Logical Box > Conn. Point function and select a
connection point by pointing and clicking. You will be prompted to select the
location for connection point text. (If you don’t want connection point text, pick any
point near the symbol.) Then you will be prompted to enter the connection point text
in the following dialog box.
Connection Point Parameters
Device ID: –D426

Device ID at Connection Point
Connection Point: ?
Height: 0.1500 Select...
Angle: 0 Select...
Color: 0 Select...
Conn.Pt. X Offset: 0.0000
Conn.Pt. Y Offset: 0.0000
Text X Offset: 0.0000
Text Y Offset: 0.0000
OK Cancel Help...
Select the Device ID at Connection Point checkbox if you wish the symbol’s device
ID to be part of the connection point label. For example, if the device ID is D426
and if you enter “A” in the Connection Point field, the full connection point label
will then be –D426:A.
Select OK to enter the connection point parameters. Enter additional connection

points as required.
Important To delete the connection point of a logical box, you must select the Draw > Logical
Box > Delete Conn. Point function. Then click directly on the connection point you
wish to delete. The Modify > Delete function will not affect these connection points.
5-48
Schematic Elements
Logical Box With Nested Symbols
It is possible to place symbols inside a logical box. This allows the symbols inside
the box to have a device ID that combines the ID of the logical box with the ID of
the nested symbol. One application of this feature would be to use the box to
represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to represent the
connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special controller module
with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module.
Symbols inside logical box LB1

can have combined
device IDs
LB1–TB1
Logical Box
LB1–TB2
Nested Symbols
LB1–TB3
To correctly display the combined device IDs of the nested symbols, you must use
the Tools > Project Settings function, select the Device ID Style tab, and then
select the Complete radio button in the Nested Device ID section.
Drawing Boxes
Drawing boxes are simple graphic objects. The software does not recognize drawing
boxes as having any logical properties. Empty or filled drawing boxes can be
created. (To change the fill color, use the Tools > Project Settings > Object
Defaults function.)
To create a drawing box, select the Draw > Graphic function and either the Box
Empty or Box Filled option.
Draw Graphic Box Empty

Box Filled
The software will prompt you to define the first corner of the box and then the
opposite corner.
5-49
Schematic Elements
Box Settings
To set the line type and fill of boxes that are not yet drawn:
1. Select the Tools > Project Settings function.
2. Select the Object Defaults tab.
3. Select the Activate Object checkbox.
4. Select “Drawing Box” from the drop down list of objects.
5. Select the desired linetype or color.
These functions display the available color and line type options which may be
selected. The color selection affects both the border and fill of the box when
drawing filled boxes.
To set the line type and fill of existing boxes:
AutoCAD 14
1. Select the Modify > Properties function.
2. Select the desired box in the drawing.
3. Select the desired color.
AutoCAD 2000
1. Select the Tools > Preferences function.
2. Select the Selection tab.
3. Select the Enable grips checkbox.
4. Select OK.
5. Select the desired box in the drawing.
6. Select the Modify > Properties function.
7. In the Properties dialog, select the desired color.
8. Close the Properties dialog.
5-50
Schematic Elements
9. Turn off the Enable grips function.
5-51
Schematic Elements
Field
RSWire software has the ability to recognize devices on a schematic that originate
from a remote location, in other words, devices that exist in a different physical
locale than the other devices on the schematic page. One way the user can identify
these remote devices is by placing them in a “field.” (Another way is to use the
Modify > Symbol function to change a symbol’s device ID to a different
installation and location.)
Overview – RSWire is an intelligent software package that can identify locations as

well as logical connections. However, in the two–dimensional schematic world, the
user must provide RSWire with the means to distinguish between real–world,
physical locations and theoretical callouts on the drawing.
To allow the software to recognize remote devices, the user can assign a field as an
area of the schematic to contain the remote devices. A different Installation and
Location can then be assigned to the field.
RSWire will associate the devices in the field with this new Installation and
Location rather than the Installation and Location of the page where the field
appears.
Rules for Field Creation:
1. Fields can only be created on a page that has been given an Installation or
Location name when created.
2. A field can be drawn around existing devices, or devices can be drawn inside an
existing field.
3. A field can be drawn within another field.
Procedure for Field Creation:
1. Select the Draw > Field function.
Draw Field
Note If you cannot select the Field function, the page may not have an installation or
location assigned. See “Rules for Field Creation” above.
2. On the command line, you will be prompted to define the first corner and
opposite corner of the field in the desired area of the drawing. A box will
indicate the field area.
5-52
Schematic Elements
3. Next a prompt will appear on the Command Line asking you to “Locate the text
position.” This means to select a point near the field where the field’s
Installation/Location name will be printed. Select the point by pointing the
cursor and clicking.
4. The following Field Parameters dialog box will then appear.
Field Parameters
Location: Search...
Rename existing symbols to Inst./Loc. of the field
Text Color: 0 Select...

Angle: 0 Select...
Slant: 0 Select...
Font:
Text–X–Offset: 0.5000
Text–Y–Offset: 0.5000
Line Color: 1 Select...
Line Type: CENTER Select...
OK Cancel Help...
At the top of this dialog box you can enter the Installation and/or Location
name to which you wish the field to be assigned. This can be an existing
installation/location, or one that has not yet been used. (The field can have the
same installation name as the drawing page where it appears, but it should have
a different location name if the field is to indicate remote devices.) Use the
Search buttons to display a list of existing installations and locations.
5-53
Schematic Elements
Note Do not use any of the following reserved characters in the installation and location
names that you enter: # = + – ^ / : ~.@ (includes spaces and periods). These
characters are used for various purposes by the software and may cause unexpected
results if entered in these fields.
The Rename existing symbols to inst/loc of the field checkbox determines

whether or not any existing symbols in the field area will be renamed
(reassigned) to the field’s installation and location. When the checkbox is on,
existing symbols are renamed.
The Text Position checkbox is only available with the Modify > Field function.
It is used to change the position of the field’s installation/location label.
There is also a set of fields for determining the characteristics of the text that
will label the field on the drawing. See page 5-34 for more information on these
text functions.
The Text–Offset values indicate the distance from the field reference point (first
corner) to the reference point (write position) of the text. These values can be
altered if desired.
The Line Color and Line Type fields allow the characteristics of the field border
line to be set.
Buttons are available on the right side of the dialog box for displaying and
selecting most of these text and line parameters.
5. When the desired values are entered, select the OK button to complete creation
of the field.
Mixed Device Assignment – In some cases, you may wish to have some devices
within a field remain associated with the Installation and Location of the drawing
page, i.e., be local rather than remote devices. In such a case, use the following
procedure:
1. Before creating the field, draw the devices that are to remain local.
2. Draw the field around the local devices. During the field creation process, set
the Rename symbols to inst/loc to name of the field checkbox to off (no
checkmark). This will cause the symbols to remain associated with the
Installation/Location of the current page.
3. Add the remote devices to the field area. Any new devices will be assigned to
the Installation/Location of the field.
5-54
Schematic Elements
Deleting a Field – To delete a field, you must select the Modify > Delete function
and then click on the border of the field.
Note The logic functions of RSWire ordinarily do not allow two devices with the same
name to be assigned to the same Installation/Location. However, you may wish the
devices in a field to represent devices that exist on another page, and therefore you
would give the field the same Installation name as the other page where the devices
appear.
As shown in the following illustration, the device PB123 appears in Installation A,

Location B as a local device and also as a remote device in Installation X, Location
Y. The remote field has been assigned to Installation A, Location B.
Installation A Location B Installation X Location Y
Field Assigned To
PB123 Inst. A Location B
PB123
Ordinarily, when the device ID PB123 was entered a second time for the same
Installation/Location, a “Device already exists” error would be displayed and the ID
would not be allowed.
This restriction can be overridden by selecting the Duplicate Device ID checkbox in

the Device ID Assignment dialog box when both symbols are placed. Therefore in
the example above, the ID PB123 would be assigned to both pushbuttons when they
are placed (or after they have been placed by using the Modify > Symbol > Device
ID function).
Note To avoid duplication, part numbers should only be assigned to one of the devices.
5-55
Schematic Elements
Circles and Arcs

Functions are included in the Draw > Graphic pull–down menu for drawing Circles
and Arcs.
Circles – Selecting the Circle function displays the following submenu which
provides a variety of methods for circle drawing:
Draw Graphic Circle Center, Radius

Center, Diameter
2 Points
3 Points
Tan, Tan, Radius
Tan, Tan, Tan
Filled Circle
Center, Radius – Creates a circle by defining a center point and radius on the
drawing.
Center, Diameter – Creates a circle by defining a center point and a diameter on

the drawing.
2 Points – Creates a circle by defining two endpoints of the circle’s diameter.
3 Points – Creates a circle by defining three points on the surface of the circle.
Tan, Tan, Radius – (Tangent/Tangent/Radius) creates a circle by selecting two

lines or arcs to which the circle is to be tangent and then entering a radius value.
Filled Circle – Creates a circle with a fill color. Select the fill color with the
Arcs – Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc functions to draw arcs. You will be
prompted to select a center point (of the arc’s circle), a start point for the arc and an
endpoint that establishes the length of the arc.
5-56
Schematic Elements
Draw Graphic Arc 3 Points

Start, Center, End
Start, Center, Angle
Start, Center, Length
Start, End, Angle
Start, End, Direction
Start, End, Radius
Center, Start, End
Center, Start, Angle
Center, Start, Length
Continue
Filled Arc
Arcs are drawn by making three selections on the drawing, as determined by the
name of the specific arc function.
Use the Draw > Graphic > Arc > Filled Arc function to create an arc with a filled
interior.
5-57
Schematic Elements
Signal Cross Reference – JIC

To allow RSWire to cross reference the devices in long schematics that extend over
multiple columns and pages, the wires at the end of a column must be logically
connected to the wires in the next column or next page so that the software knows
that they are to be treated as one continuous circuit.
To make this connection, a Signal Cross Reference symbol is placed at the end of
the lines in one column and at the beginning of the next column.
Note Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should be
assigned before wire numbers are assigned.
125 CR124 AH126
126
127
128 Signal Cross Reference Symbols
129
L1/1 L2/1
If different page formats are used within a project, be sure to use identical cross
referencing. When referencing from page to page, use the same reference on each
page such as L1. The signal lines leaving or entering a location can be in the
horizontal or in the vertical direction (shown below). When the reference is to be
within the same sheet, the reference input used must be followed with /1, /2, etc.
For example:
5-58
Schematic Elements
L1 L2 L1/2 L2/2 L1/4 L2/4

JIC Incoming
Single Page Signal Signal
Cross Reference
Vertical Layout
Three Columns
Outgoing
Signal
L1/1 L2/1 L1/3 L2/3 L1 L2
The following signal cross reference symbols are provided with the software (in the
JIC symbol catalog). The user can also create custom symbols (see page 6-77).
Symbol name Description

SIG1 Outgoing, horizontal, right side of drawing, ID to right
SIG2 Incoming, horizontal, left side of drawing, ID to left
SIG3 Incoming, vertical, top of drawing, ID above
SIG4 Incoming, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below
SIG5 Outgoing, vertical, top of drawing, ID above
SIG6 Outgoing, vertical, bottom of drawing, ID below
SIGIN Incoming, vertical, ID in box
SIGOUT Outgoing, vertical, ID in box
STARHEX2L (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2L macro
STARHEX2R (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT2R macro
STARHEXOUT5 (Star type) for use with the HEXOUT5 macro
STARIN1 (Star type) Incoming, printed on 1 line
STARIN2 (Star type) Incoming, printed on 2 lines
STAROUT5 (Star type) Outgoing, 5 references
These symbols are selected and placed like other symbols. After the signal cross
reference symbols are placed, they will automatically display the current cross
reference values (i.e., they will indicate where the circuit continues or originates).
5-59
Schematic Elements
Note If a signal cross reference ID appears in the wire list (see page 9-10) this is an
indication that the signal is not matching correctly with its mate.
Signal Cross Reference Notation Formats – You can select the format of the signal
cross reference with the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function (see
page 7-22). The following formats for the cross reference information are available
in the Signal Cross Ref. Type field
Note Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the following format names it means
the installation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from the
installation where cross reference symbol is located):
Notation Format:
DevID/<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber
Shows signal designation with page.line number.
Example: L1/1.42
Installation is shown only when cross reference is outside current installation.
DevID=Inst/Page.Linenumber
Shows signal designation, installation, and page.line number.
Example: L1/=INST1/1.8
DevID/Page.Linenumber
Shows signal designation, page.line number. Never shows installation.
Example: L1/1.8
DevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber
Shows signal designation, page and line number (without period between
page and line number).
Example: L1/1218 (for signal 1 on page 12, line 18)
<=Inst/>Page Linenumber
Shows page and line number (without period or signal designation).
Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18)
Page^Linenumber
Note Do not use with star type references.
Shows page and line number on separate lines.

Example: 12
18 (for page 12, line 18)
<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber
5-60
Schematic Elements
Shows page.line number (without signal designation).

Example: 1218 (for page 12, line 18)
The device ID of the signal can take any form (L1, L2, etc.); the program suggests
the identification letters based on the device ID tag entered when the symbol was
created. The cross reference symbol you choose (see above) determines whether the
cross–reference is printed on one or two lines.
Cross Reference Device ID Format – The symbol group that was selected when the
cross reference symbol was created (see list below) determines whether the
cross–reference is printed on one or two lines. In the case of groups SG2 and SG4, it
can be placed according to definition (the cross reference will appear at the
connection text location designated when the signal cross reference symbol was
created). See page 6-6 for more on symbol creation.
Symbol Group Description

SG1 Incoming signal (1 line combined label)
SG2 Incoming signal (2 line separated label)
SG3 Outgoing signal (1 line combined label)
SG4 Outgoing signal (2 line separated label)
SG5 Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line label)
SG6 Incoming signal (star configuration, 2 line label)
SG7 Outgoing signal (star configuration, written upwards)
SG8 Outgoing signal (star configuration, written downwards)
Signal Analysis Types – When creating a project (or when using the Manage >
Project > Modify function) the user can select from three types of signal cross
referencing analysis in the Project Parameter dialog box. Choices include
Ascending by Installations and Pages (default), Pairs (signal cross references that
exist only in pairs – page order not taken into account), and Ascending Numbers
(ascending order for all cross references).
Ascending By Inst. and Pages – Signal cross–references are analyzed in ascending

order for all installations and pages.
Note The outgoing symbol must be placed ahead of the incoming signal in the page order.
5-61
Schematic Elements
Example:
Ascending By Inst. and Pages Signal Cross Reference
L1 L2
2 L1/1.22 L2/1.22
4
2
6
4
8
6
10
11
8 L1/2.22 L2/2.22
10
12 2
11
14 4
12
16 6
14
18 8
16
20 10
18
22 11
20
L1/2.01 L2/2.01 22 12
14
L1/3.01 L2/3.01 16
Page 1 18
Page 2 20
22
L1 L2
Page 3
Pairs Analysis – The signal cross–references only exist in pairs. Each pair is
recognized and analyzed as such. Installation and sequence of the pages are not
taken into account. The sub–group (incoming/outgoing) is ignored.
Example:
Pairs Signal Cross Reference
L1 L2
2 L5/3.22 L6/3.22
4
2
6
4
8
6
10
8 L3/1.22 L4/1.22
11
10 2
12
11 4
14
12 6
16
14 8
18
16 10
20
18 11
22
20 12
L3/3.01 L4/3.01 22 14
16
P.1 18
20
P.2 22
L5/2.01 L6/2.01
L3 And L4 On Page 1 Lead To
L3 And L4 On Page 3 P.3
Which Lead To Page 2.
5-62
Schematic Elements
Ascending Numbers Analysis – These signal cross–references link outgoing and

incoming signals regardless of page and installation order if the signals have a slash
followed by the same number. For example, you can have the outgoing signal L1/3
on page 10 and the incoming signal L1/3 on page 2. Signal symbols need not be
placed in page order.
Example:
Ascending Numbers Signal Cross Reference
L1 L2
2 L1/3 L2/3
4
2
6
4
8
6
10
8 L1/4 L2/4
11
10 2
12
11 4
14
12 6
16
14 8
18
16 10
20
18 11
22
20 12
L1/3 L2/3 22 14
L1/4 16
P.3 L2/4 18
20
P.1 22
L1/5 L2/5
L1/3 And L2/3 On Page 3 Lead To
L1/3 And L1/3 On Page 1 P.2
From Which L1/4 and L2/4 Lead To Page 2.
Star Type Signal Processing:
The symbols for star–type signal processing are created as symbols in Symbol
Groups SG5, SG6, SG7 and SG8. They must have a connection point and a write
position for connection point text. The cross–reference will later be entered at this
write position.
The format of the cross–reference depends on the symbol group:
Incoming Signals – Symbol group SG5 – cross–reference is printed on one line.

SG6 – cross–reference is written on two lines.
Outgoing Signals – With star–type signal processing there is only one outgoing
signal but several incoming signals. The outgoing signal has references to all
incoming signals. The outgoing signal does not have to be placed on a page before
the first incoming signal; it can be correctly analyzed in other positions as well. The
software includes outgoing star type symbols that can accommodate 5, 10 and 15
references (symbol names STAROUT5, STAROUT10, STAROUT15).
5-63
Schematic Elements
Example:
Star Type Signal Processing (Ascending Order Analysis)
L1 L2
L1/1.22 L2/1.22
2
4 2
6 4
8 6
10 8
L1/1.22 L2/1.22
11 10 2
12 11 4
14 12 6
16 14 8
L1/1.22 L2/1.22
18 16 10 2
20 18 11 4
22 20 12 6
L1 L2 22 14 8
2.01 2.01 16 10
3.01 18 11
3.01 20 12
4.01 4.01 P.2 14
P.1 22
16
18
20
P.3 22
Outgoing Signals On Page 1
Lead To Incoming Signals
On Pages 2, 3 And 4 P.4
Notes on Star Type Signal Cross Reference:
If you are cross referencing within a single page with star type symbols, it is not
necessary to use the “/” character in the device IDs.
Important It is important not to mix star type signal cross references with regular signal cross
references using the same device ID. For example if you use a SIG3 incoming signal
symbol and a STAROUT5 outgoing signal symbol on the same page, they must not
have the same device ID.
Each outgoing star type cross reference symbol must have a unique device ID. For
example, you cannot have outgoing signals on two different pages both called L1.
5-64
Schematic Elements
Signal Cross Reference – IEC

To allow RSWire to cross reference the IEC devices in long schematics that extend
over multiple pages, the wires at the end of a page must be logically connected to
the wires in the next page so that the software knows that they are to be treated as
one continuous circuit.
To make this connection, the software requires a Signal Cross Reference symbol to
be placed at the end of the lines in one page and at the beginning of the next page.
Note Because they are used to bring wires together, signal cross references should be
assigned before wire numbers are assigned.
IEC Signal Cross Reference Symbols
P1/1
P1/2 P1/3
N1/1
N1/2 N1/3
Page 1
Page 2
5-65
Schematic Elements
Wire Numbers
RSWire schematic diagrams are created with wire lines which the system can
recognize as wires (unlike drawing lines which are not recognized as having any
logical properties). The Tools > Wire Number > Automatic function allows the
software to automatically assign wire numbers throughout the project.
The format of the wire numbers is user–selectable: it can be based on line numbers
or sequential numbers with alphanumeric prefixes or suffixes. Color and gauge
(size) also can be assigned to each wire.
Wire numbers can be assigned automatically or manually as described in the

following sections.
Automatic Wire Number Assignment
The software can automatically assign wire numbers. The automatic wire numbering
function does not overwrite existing wire numbers. Therefore, if you wish to redo
the wire numbers, you must first delete the existing numbers using the Tools > Wire
Number > Delete function (see page 5-77).
Important Before the system can assign wire numbers across columns and pages, signal cross
reference symbols must be placed in the drawing to tie together the “hot” and
“common” lines on each column and page. See page 5-58. If this step is performed,
automatic wire numbering can extend across the pages of a project.
To automatically assign wire numbers, first use the Tools > Project Preselect
function to select a project for numbering (otherwise the currently selected project
will be numbered). Then select:
Tools Wire Number Automatic
The following Wire Number Automatic dialog box will appear.
5-66
Schematic Elements
Wire Number Automatic
Select Pages Numbering Format: Page – Line Number

Values Parameters
Wire Number Prefix Suffix

Color... 0
Gauge
Height... 0.1250
Color
Text Position
Additional
Beginning Middle End
Additional
Wire Numbering System
Additional Wire Number = I/O Address
Additional Terminal = Wire Number

Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal
Additional
Wire Numbering Omitted on Cables
Select Pages – Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages
on which the automatic wire numbering will be performed. After you make the
other wire number settings and select the OK button in the Wire Number Automatic
dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the project,
installation, and pages to which the automatic wire numbering will be applied.
If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, the automatic wire numbering will
apply to the entire project.
Note If you select individual pages for wire numbering, you may be using different wire
number formats in different parts of the project. Be aware that wire numbers can
pass through signal cross referencing and may come from or go to a page having a
different format from the current page.
5-67
Schematic Elements
Wire Numbering Formats – The Numbering Format field allows you to select one
of the following five formats.
Note You can add a prefix or suffix to any of these formats.
Page–Line Number – Page and line number plus sequential number.
Example:
123 LS124 LS124.1 CR124

1241 1242
124
125 CR124 LS126 AH126
1261 1262
126
Page–Line Number – ABC suffix – Page and line number plus letter.
Example:
123 LS124 LS124.1 CR124

124A 124B
124
125 CR124 LS126 AH126
126A 126B
126
Sequential Wire Numbers – sequential number.
Example:
123 LS124 LS124.1 CR124

17 18
124
125 CR124 LS126 AH126
19 20
126
5-68
Schematic Elements
Seq. Wire Number – Page Number – Sequential number plus page number.
Example (page 5):
523 LS124 LS124.1 CR124

175 185
524
525 CR124 LS126 AH126
195 205
526
Branch Numbering – The wire numbers have a prefix consisting of the first two
letters of the installation name. This is followed by the page number and a
sequential number beginning with 00. For each branch of a potential that connects to
an additional device, the software adds a decimal point and a sequential number. In
order to see the decimal point wire number extensions, you must select Branch
Numbering in the Wire Number Display field in the Tools > Project Settings
General Defaults tab.
LS124 LS124.1 CR124

ZB0100 ZB0101 ZB0102.1 ZB0103.1
124 ZB102.2
125 AH126
126
127
AH128
Installation Name “ZBX” ZB0102.3 ZB0103.2
Page Number 01
The Values column of the Wire Number Automatic dialog contains a group of fields
that allow the following parameters to be assigned.
5-69
Schematic Elements
JIC Wire Number – When numbering formats involving sequential numbers are
selected, the value entered in this field is the first sequential number that will be
assigned. If no value is entered, numbering will start with 1. This field does not
affect the Branch Numbering format which always starts with 0100.
IEC Wire Number – On IEC format pages, wires are automatically numbered from
left to right and then from top to bottom within a column, and by column from left
to right across the page. When a 3–phase circuit is drawn, the placement of all three
wire phases will determine the automatic wire numbering sequences.
The following illustrates the wire numbering of a 3–phase circuit placed within two
columns and within one column.
1 2 3 1 2 3
W1
W4
W5
W1
W2
W3
W2
W6
W7
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
W9
W3
W8
W9
U V W PE U V W PE
M M
–M1 3~ –M1 3~
PUMP PUMP
5 HP 5 HP
7.2 AMP 7.2 AMP
1000 RPM 1000 RPM
Placement Within Two Columns Placement Within One Column
IEC 3–Phase Wire Numbering
5-70
Schematic Elements
Gauge (Size in IEC version) – Allows a wire gauge (size) value to be assigned
which will be associated with the wires.
Color – This field (left side of the dialog box) allows a wire color to be assigned
which will be associated with the wires.
Additional – Five additional fields are available for any other information the user
may wish to associate with wires.
The Prefix and Suffix fields allow you to specify an alphanumeric prefix or suffix
that will be added to each wire number. If, for example, a prefix of “WN” and a
suffix of “A” is entered for a sequential wire numbering format, the numbers will
appear on the drawing as “WN1A, WN2A”, etc.
The Color button and field (right side of dialog box) allow a color to be assigned to
the wire numbers that appear on the drawing. Enter the color number in the field or
select the button to select from a display of colors.
The Height button and field allow a text height value to be assigned to the wire
numbers that appear in the drawing. Enter the height value in the field or select the
button to display a dialog box of height values to select from.
Text Position – These three radio buttons, Beginning, Middle, and End, allow you
to set a default position on the wire segment for the wire number. On wires having
multiple segments, the number will be placed on the first segment.
Note After wire numbers have been assigned, individual wire numbers can be
repositioned with the Modify > Wire Number function and Wire Number Manual
dialog box (Text Position checkbox).
Wire Numbering System – The following checkboxes determine how wire

numbering will interact with certain symbols such as terminals and PLCs.
Wire Number = I/O Address – This checkbox selects the format of the wire
numbering for wires connected to PLC I/O module symbols. If the checkbox is
selected, the PLC I/O address will be used for the wire number. If the checkbox is
not selected, the wire numbering sequence used in the rest of the project will be
continued through the PLC symbol. Attribute text in the PLC symbol must have
been set for Address when the symbol was created for this numbering to work (see
page 6-44).
5-71
Schematic Elements
Terminal = Wire Number – Determines whether or not terminals will take on the
same number as the wire connected to them. This happens when the wire number
function is executed. If this feature is disabled, terminals will keep the number
assigned when the terminal symbol is placed. When a checkmark appears in the box,
the terminal will take the same number as the wire. When the box is empty,
terminals will keep the same number assigned when the terminal symbol was
placed.
Wire Number With Suffix Over Terminal – When wire numbering is set to be the
same over terminals in the Project Parameters dialog box, selecting this checkbox
will add an incrementing letter suffix (A, B, C, etc.) to the wire number after each
terminal.
1A TB2 1B TB3 1C
Wire Numbering Omitted on Cable – When this function is selected, wire

numbering will not be performed on any wires that are assigned as conductors of a
cable.
Select the Save button if you wish to save the wire numbering settings for future
work sessions.
When all wire number parameters are entered, select the OK button to proceed with
the wire numbering.
Manual Wire Number Assignment
To manually assign wire numbers, select:
Tools Wire Number Manual
You can also use the Modify > Wire Number function.
The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish to
number by clicking the left mouse button and then click the right mouse button (or
press the <Enter> key. The following dialog box will appear.
5-72
Schematic Elements
Wire Number Manual

Values Parameters
Wire Number Duplicate Manual
Gauge Text Position Change All
Color
Beginning Middle End
Additional
Additional Color...
Additional
Angle...
Additional
Additional Height...
Label Origin...
The Wire Number field displays the number currently assigned to the wire (if any)
and allows you to enter a new number. Up to 20 characters can be entered. This field
corresponds to the variable ?pot1 listed on page 14-36.
The Gauge (Size in IEC version) and Color fields display the selected wire’s current
gauge (size) and color. Changes can be made here that affect only the selected wire.
These fields correspond to the variables ?pot2 and ?pot3 listed on page 14-36.
The Additional fields display any additional data associated with the selected wire.
New information can be entered. These fields correspond to the variables ?pot4
through ?pot8 listed on page 14-36.
The Duplicate checkbox allows you to place a copy of an existing wire number on a
different segment of a wire (potential) with multiple segments. This checkbox is
only available when the selected potential is multi–segment with a wire number
already assigned. After a wire number has been assigned to one segment, you can:
1. Select the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function
2. Select the segment on which the duplicate number is to appear
3. Select the Duplicate checkbox in the Manual Wire Number dialog box
4. Select the OK button.
5-73
Schematic Elements
If you attempt to place a duplicate wire number on a segment that is connected to a

signal cross reference an error message will appear indicating this fact. If you select
the OK button in the error message dialog box you will still be allowed to duplicate
the wire number.
Note After you assign duplicate wire numbers, you can modify any of the segments so that
they have different color or gauge values (or any of the five Additional wire
description fields). Use the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function to assign
color and gauge values. Assigning different values to the segments can result in
unpredictable results in the wire list unless there is a terminal symbol separating the
segments having different values.
Select the Text Position checkbox if you wish to change the position of the wire
number. After the OK button is selected, you will be prompted to “Define target
position” on the drawing. Select the desired new position for the wire number.
The Manual checkbox determines whether the software considers this wire number
to be manually assigned or automatically assigned. This is relevant when using the
delete wire numbers function (Tools > Wire Number > Delete) where you are
given the option of deleting all wire numbers (both manually and automatically
assigned) or just the automatically assigned numbers. When this checkbox is
checked the software considers the wire number a manually assigned number. When
the checkbox is unchecked, the wire number is considered automatically assigned.
If you select a group of wires for modification, the Change All checkbox determines
whether or not the parameters you change will apply to all the selected wires. When
the checkbox is checked, the parameters will be assigned to all the selected wires in
one step. When the checkbox is unchecked, you will be prompted for each wire
separately.
The three position radio buttons, Beginning, Middle and End, allow you to set a
default position on the wire segment for the wire number that is about to be
assigned.
The Color, Angle, Height and Label Origin buttons allow you to alter these
attributes of the wire number to change its appearance on the drawing. Selecting
each button will display a list of available values to choose from.
Select the Save button to save the wire number parameters as a default for future
work sessions.
Select the OK button to load the new wire number parameters.
If you selected more than one wire, the Wire Number Manual dialog box will be
displayed for each wire in turn.
5-74
Schematic Elements
Note This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal cross
reference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace
> Wire Number function (see page 5-76 ).
Duplicate Wire Numbers Using Invisible Text
The software’s error checking functions prevent two different wires in the same
project from having the same wire number. However some users may wish to have
duplicate wire numbers (for example if they wish each installation to start with the
same wire number).
It is possible to have what appear to be duplicate numbers by using invisible text in

the wire number prefix. Any text beginning and ending with an “@” character will
not be visible in the drawing.
Therefore, the user can run the automatic wire number function for different parts of
the project with different invisible text in the wire number prefix. The visible part of
the wire number will be the same.
For example if one page was sequentially numbered from 1 with the prefix
W@AA@ and another page was similarly numbered with the prefix W@BB@ both
pages would appear to have wire numbers W1, W2, etc.
Wire numbers with invisible prefixes can also be assigned using the manual wire
numbering function.
The hidden text will not be visible in the wire list. It will be visible only when
editing the wire number using the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function.
Note Invisible text can also be used in symbol (function) text and in normal text.
5-75
Schematic Elements
Changing Wire Numbers
The Tools > Replace > Wire Number function allows existing wire colors and
gauges to be changed on a project–wide basis. A single wire number can also be
changed.
Select:
Tools Replace Wire Number
Replace Wire Numbers

Select One
Wire Number Color Gauge
Installation
Old Values New Values

Wire Number Wire Number
Gauge Gauge
Color Color
Additional
Additional
Additional
Additional
Additional
OK Cancel Help...
In the Select group of checkboxes, select whether you wish to change Wire Number,
Color, or Gauge.
There is also an Installation button and field that allows you to restrict the wire
number replace function to a selected installation. Select the button to view a list of
installations in the current project. You can select from this list.
In the Old Values field, enter the existing value that you wish to change. In the New
Values field, enter the new value that you wish to assign.
5-76
Schematic Elements
Color and Gauge changes affect all wires. Number changes affect only the single
wire number that is changed.
Select OK to make the change.
If you enter an old color or gauge value to change without entering a new value, the
software will ask if you wish to delete the old value. Select the OK button to delete
the old value. Select No to return to the change dialog box.
Deleting Wire Numbers
To delete a single wire number:
You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, select
the wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of the
dialog box. Then select OK.
To globally delete existing wire numbers, use the following procedure:
Select:
Tools Wire Number Delete
The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear.
Delete Wire Numbers
All (including manually assigned)
Only Automatically assigned
Select Pages
OK Cancel Help...
The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those that
were manually assigned.
The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbers
that were automatically assigned to be deleted.
5-77
Schematic Elements
Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the
wire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete Wire
Numbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the
project, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted.
If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selected
type) will be deleted throughout the entire project.
Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask
“Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers.
Repositioning Wire Numbers
If you wish to reposition wire numbers, use the Tools > Wire Number > Manual
function and select the Text Position checkbox in the Wire Number Manual dialog
box. See page 5-74.
The software will then prompt “Define target position.” Click at the point where you
wish the wire number to be moved.
5-78
Schematic Elements
Part Numbers
The parts database allows RSWire users to assign part numbers to device IDs in the
schematic. This allows the system to generate bills of material and other informative
lists based on the items in the schematics and the information in the database.
See Section 13 for information on accessing and editing the parts database.
See page 5-119 for information on the Replace Part Number function (replacing one
assigned part number with another throughout a project).
Assigning Part Numbers – Part numbers can be assigned when a symbol is placed
or at a later time.
Note You can also assign a part number when a symbol is created so that the part number
is always prompted whenever the symbol is placed. See page 6-18.
Part numbers are assigned to device IDs within a given project. They are not
automatically assigned to the same symbols in a new project unless you use the Edit
> Browse Copy function to copy part of an existing project with part numbers
assigned.
Note If you create a macro containing elements which have been assigned part numbers,
these part numbers will be stored with the macro. (If desired, they can be altered
after the macro is placed by right clicking on the symbol and selecting the Part
Number function from the pop–up menu.)
When a symbol is placed, the Device ID Assignment dialog box appears, prompting
the user with a device ID for the symbol. This dialog box also contains a Part
Number field and a part number Search button.
5-79
Schematic Elements
Location: Search...

Part Number
Addit.Part Number Use To Select

Part Numbers
From Parts
Database
OK Cancel Help...
Delete Assigned Part Numbers By

Clicking On Part Number
To assign a part number from the parts database select the Search button. This
will display the Assign Part Number dialog box, which allows you to search the
database and make part number selections (see next page).
If you wish to assign additional part numbers to the same symbol you can
simply use the Search button again to return to the Assign Part Number screen. Or,
if you know the part number, you can type the additional part number in the the
Additional Part Number field and select the Additional Part Number button.
To delete (un–assign) part numbers that have already been assigned (listed in the
Delete area of the Device ID Assignment dialog box) simply click on the part
number you wish to delete.
5-80
Schematic Elements
Assign Part Number _
Device ID
Filter
CR SYMB_REF =”CR”
SYMB_REF =
PREGROUP =
PARTNUMBER =
Refresh DESCR =
MANUFACT =
SYMB_REF PREFGROUP PARTNUMBER DESCR MANUFACT TECHDATE_1

CR 500FL-COA93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE
CR 500FL-COB93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE
CR 500FL-COC93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE
CR 500FL-COD93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE
CR 500FL-COF93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE

Selected Part Numbers Are Listed Here . . .
OK Cancel Help...
The Assign Part Number dialog box above shows a part selection that could be
displayed when a control relay (JIC symbol name “CR”) is entered on a drawing.
The Assign Part Number dialog box contains the following fields and columns:
Device ID – The device ID of the currently selected symbol. (This field will be
blank if the symbol has not yet been placed.)
The Filter area allows you to to select criteria that determine the parts that are
displayed. To to filter the parts, select one of the database field names (SYMB_REF,
PARTNUMBER, etc.) and enter a specific value (PBNO, A–B, etc.) in the left field.
To remove parameters, select one of the database field names and delete the
parameter listed in the left field. Use the Refresh button to update the parts display
after each parameter has been entered or deleted. You can enter wildcard (*) strings
in the left field – for example, select the DESC field and enter *MOTOR* to display
all parts with the word “MOTOR” in the description.
5-81
Schematic Elements
The part number information is listed in columns. The width of these columns can
be adjusted by pointing the cursor at the dividing line in the column heading area
and dragging the column wider or narrower. The following columns of information
are available:
SYMB_REF – This column indicating what symbol name the part number is
usually associated with. (The Ref Symbol field is the primary search criteria when
you first enter the Assign Part Number dialog box. If you get a message “No data
found”, try searching by an entry in a different field.)
PREFGROUP – This column indicates which Preferred Manufacturer’s Group

(PMG) product category the part number is associated with. (See page 13-20 for
more information.)
PARTNUMBER – This column is the product part number.
DESCR – Product part description.
MANUFACT – Part manufacturer name.
TECHDATE_1 – An additional part description.
To select a part number, click twice on the desired part in the list. The selected part
will be listed in the area just below the part list. (You can select multiple part
numbers.) Then select the OK button. The Assign Part Number dialog box will close
and the selected part number will be displayed in the part number field of the Device
ID Assignment dialog box.
Existing Symbols: Assigning or Modifying Part Number – To change the part

number assigned to a symbol (or assign one to an existing symbol), Right click on
the desired symbol and select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign Part
Number dialog box will then appear, allowing you to select a new or different part
number. To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned,
simply click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned part
numbers.
5-82
Schematic Elements
Dimensions
The Draw > Dimensions function provides a submenu of the various AutoCAD
dimension functions. These are useful for adding dimensions to panel layout
diagrams and for drawing leader lines to annotate items. Consult the AutoCAD
User’s Guide for additional information.
To make settings to the dimension function, use the Draw > Dimension > Style
function. See page 7-52.
Draw Dimensions Linear

Aligned
Ordinate
Radius
Diameter
Angular
Baseline
Continue
Leader
Tolerance
Center Mark
Oblique
Align Text
Style
Override
Update
The dimensioning function allows one to pick two points on a drawing and
automatically display the distance between the two. Angular dimensions display the
angle between two lines.
5-83
Schematic Elements
Parts of a Dimension
Dimension Text
Dimension Line
Arrowhead
1.50 in 22 mm
Extension Line
JIC IEC
The following dimension function are available:
Linear – Measures the distance between two points.
Aligned – Creates an aligned linear dimension.
Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point called a

datum to another point. The current UCS is used to determine the distance.
Radius – Creates radius dimensions for a circle or arc.
Diameter – Creates a diameter dimension for circles and arcs.
Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points.
Baseline – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the baseline of

the previous dimension or a selected dimension.
Continue – Creates a linear, angular, or ordinate dimension from the second

extension line of the previous dimension or a selected dimension.
Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in a

drawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automatically
as part of a dimension line.
Tolerance – Creates geometric tolerances. Tolerances specify the required

accuracy for proper function and fit of the objects you draw. The software adds
geometric tolerances to a drawing in feature control frames. These are frames
divided into compartments that contain the geometric characteristic symbols
followed by one or more tolerance values.
5-84
Schematic Elements
Center Mark – Creates a center mark for circles and arcs.
Oblique – Makes the extension line of linear dimensions oblique.
Align Text – Submenu: Home moves dimension text back to its default position.
Angle rotates dimension text to an angle. Left will left justify dimension text.
Center will center dimension text. Right will right justify dimension text.
Style – Creates and modifies dimension styles.
Override – Overrides dimension system variables.
Update – Updates dimensions so they use the most current dimension style
settings.
Drawing a Dimension
Use the following procedures to draw the various dimension types.

Note After you select a dimensioning function the software will prompt the steps on the
command line.
Linear Dimension
1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Linear or one of the following related dimension
functions:
Aligned – The dimension line runs parallel to the dimensioned distance.
Baseline – Multiple dimensions measured from the same baseline.
Continue – Multiple dimensions placed end to end.
2. Select the first extension line origin point (i.e., one end of the distance to be
dimensioned).
3. Select the second extension line origin point (the other end of the distance to be
dimensioned).
4. Select a location for the dimension line. This determines the length of the
extension lines.
5-85
Schematic Elements
Circle/Arc Dimensions
1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Radius or one of the following related dimension
functions:
Diameter – The diameter of a circle or arc.
Center Mark – Marks the center point of a circle or arc.
2. Select the circle or arc.
3. Select a position for the dimension line.
4. Press the <Enter> key (or click the right mouse button).
Ordinate Dimensions
1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Ordinate. The software automatically determines
whether the datum is X or Y.
2. Select the feature location.
3. Select an endpoint for the leader.
4. The software will display the dimension text (distance) on the command line.
5-86
Schematic Elements
Angular Dimensions
To measure the angle between two lines:
1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Angular.
2. Select the first line.
3. Select the second line.
4. Select a position for the dimension line arc.
Leader Lines
To draw a leader line between two objects,
1. Select Draw > Dimensions > Leader.
2. Select a position for the arrowhead end of the leader.
3. If you wish the leader to have sections (bends), select a point for each bend and
continue the leader from there.
4. Press <Enter> to complete the leader line.
5. Enter annotation text string(s).
6. Press <Enter> to complete the leader.
5-87
Schematic Elements
Text File on Drawing

Lists, reports and other text file information can be placed on drawing pages. This
would, for example, allow a bill of material to appear on the same page with a panel
layout drawing.
Important You must place the text first on a blank page because the Text On Drawing function
will erase any existing elements on that page.
Two methods for placing text on drawings are given below: A) for information that
is already in a text file, and B) for sending text directly from an RSWire report
function to a drawing page.
To Use an Existing Text File – To place an existing text file on a drawing, first
select the Insert > Text on Drawing function. The Text On Drawing dialog box will
then appear.
To Place an RSWire Report on a Drawing – To send an RSWire list to a drawing

page, first select the Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function and select
the Project radio button in the Output section. This will cause the list generator to
access the Text On Drawing function whenever a list is created. The Text On
Drawing dialog box will appear after the desired list function is selected.
System Settings X
Report Settings Reports: Description Files Printer Configuration Command Protec
Filter Sort Output

OFF OFF Screen
Printer
File
ON ON Project
Interactive
Graphic Output
Select Project
Output Option
OK Cancel Save Help...
5-88
Schematic Elements
Text On Drawing Dialog Box – The Text On Drawing dialog box appears as a result
of having the Project output radio button selected under Tools > Systems Settings >
Report Settings (or by executing the Draw > Text on Drawing function).
Text On Drawing
File: C:\BOM.TXT Search...
Text:
Angle: 0 Select...
Slant: 0 Select...
Color: 0 Select...
Font:
Lines:
Line Spacing: .2 First Line: 18 Last Line: 2.5
Columns:
1: 20 2: 3: 4:
The following fields are provided:
File – Enter the name of the text file to be placed on a page. When the Project
output radio button has been selected, this field will automatically contain the name
of an ASCII file in the RS\TMP directory. The Search button allows you to look
through various directories and select a file name.
Text – This group of fields allow you to set various text parameters. See page 5-34
for descriptions of these parameters. For each parameter there is a Search button
that provides a selection dialog box.
5-89
Schematic Elements
Note The Label Origin setting affects how the text lines will appear on the drawing
(centered, left justified, etc.) in relation to the values entered in the Column fields.
Lines – This group of fields allows entries for Line Spacing (space between lines),
First Line (distance from the bottom of the page where text will begin), and Last
Line (distance from the bottom of the page where text will stop). In the example
above, text will start 18 inches from the page bottom and stop 2.5 inches from page
bottom.
Note If the text area defined by the Lines fields is not large enough to hold the entire text
file, the software will create one or more additional pages to accommodate the rest
of the file.
Columns – This group of fields allows up to four text columns to be defined on the
drawing page. The values entered in the fields represent the distance from the left
side of the drawing page. In the previous example, there will be only one column
located 20 inches from the left side of the drawing. Text appears at the column
positions according to the value entered in the Label Origin field (i.e., centered, left
justified, etc.).
When the desired parameters have been entered in the Text On Drawing dialog box,
select the OK button.
A dialog box will appear that indicates how many pages will be required to hold the
text according to the settings you have made. For example, “Create Pages: 3”.
Select Cancel to abort the process or select OK to continue.
The New Page dialog box will then appear, allowing you to specify the (first) page
on which the text is to appear.
5-90
Schematic Elements
New Page
Project: Select... Format Name D–2COL

Scale 1: 1
Location: Select...
Online
Page: Page Type

Schematic Diagram

1... 2... 3... 4... 5...
Select ... Select ... 6... 7... 8... 9... 10...
OK Cancel Help...
Enter the desired Project, Installation, and Page name just as you would when
creating a new page. You can also select page formats, title blocks, etc.
Warning: if you specify an existing drawing page to receive the text, any
existing elements on that page will be erased and replaced with the text. Be
aware that the software will create multiple pages in the specified range if the
text does not fit on one page.
Select OK to create the pages to receive the text. If more than one page is required
to receive the text, RSWire will create additional pages continuing from the
specified page number.
You can view the newly created pages with the File > Open function.
5-91
Schematic Elements
Edit Schematic Elements

The Edit and Modify pull–down menus contain functions for editing existing
schematic elements in a drawing. These functions are described in the following
sections.
Edit Menu
Edit Undo
Cut to Clipboard
Copy Clipboard
Paste
Paste Special
Browse Copy...
Undo
The Edit > Undo function will remove the most recently placed drawing element
from the screen.
Select:
Edit Undo
If you execute Edit > Undo multiple times, items will be removed in the reverse
order in which they were placed. This will only affect the most recently selected
drawing element type. For example, if you draw some lines, a box, and then more
lines, only the lines will be affected by the Undo function.
5-92
Schematic Elements
Cut to Clipboard
The Edit > Cut to Clipboard function will remove a drawing element and place it
in the Windows clipboard where it can be pasted into another application.
Copy to Clipboard
Use the Edit > Copy Clipboard function to copy portions of an RSWire drawing to
the Windows clipboard. The copied portion exists as a Windows metafile in the
clipboard and can be pasted as graphics into other Windows applications.
Select:
Edit Copy Clipboard
The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the portion of the drawing
that you wish to copy either by selecting individual objects or by windowing an
area. Press the <Enter> key when all the desired objects have been selected. The
objects will be copied to the Windows clipboard where they will be available for
pasting into other applications.
Warning: It is strongly recommended that you exit from RSWire before

pasting the copied items into another application. The pasted items have a link
to the original drawing which can cause the original drawing to be
inadvertently affected.
Paste
Selecting the Edit > Paste function will allow the user to paste items copied or cut
from a non–RSWire application.
Paste Special
Selecting the Edit > Paste Special function will allow the user to paste items copied
or cut from a non–RSWire application. The user is given a number of options as to
what format the pasted items will assume (text, AutoCAD entities, etc.). If the
source application supports an OLE link, this can be set.
5-93
Schematic Elements
Warning: Do not use the Edit > Cut, Copy Clipboard or Paste functions to
copy items within an RSWire drawing. Any items so copied (symbols, wires,
etc.) will lose their logical properties. Use the Modify > Copy function to copy
RSWire drawing elements within RSWire.
Browse Copy
The Browse Copy function allows you to simultaneously display up to four drawing
pages and copy portions of these drawings into the current drawing page. For more
information, see page 4-35.
Modify Menu
Modify Power–Editor
Symbol
Line
Text
Field
Wire Number
Delete
Copy
Move
Stretch
Properties
Power–Editor
The Power–Editor allows you to edit a variety parameters for drawing elements.
You can access the Power–Editor through the Modify > Power–Editor function
(you will be prompted to “Select Entity”) or by pointing at the desired element and
clicking the right mouse button. The following menu of functions will appear.
5-94
Schematic Elements
Device ID
Part Number
Connection Point
Symbol Text
Move
Rotate
Text Position
Text Angle
Attribute Settings
Block Settings
Device ID – Displays the Device ID Assignment dialog box, allowing you to

change the current device ID of the selected symbol.
Part Number – Displays the Part Number Assignment dialog box, allowing you
to change the current part number of the selected symbol.
Connection Point – Displays the Modify Connection Point dialog box, allowing
you to change the connection point designations of the selected symbol.
Symbol Text – Displays a dialog box containing any symbol text associated
with the selected symbol. You can edit the text as desired.
Move – Activates the Modify > Move function, allowing you to reposition the
selected drawing element.
Rotate – Displays a dialog box with angle values that allow you to rotate the
selected symbol. Highlight the desired angle value and select the OK button.
Text Position – Allows you to reposition text associated with the selected
symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired text and
then define a new position for it.
Text Angle – Allows you to change the angle of text associated with the
selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select Attribute.” Select the desired
text. A dialog box with angle values will appear. Highlight the desired angle
value and select the OK button.
Attribute Settings – Allows you to modify the color, height and label origin of
text associated with the selected symbol. You will be prompted to “Select
Attribute.” Select the desired text. A dialog box with values will appear. Select
the desired value and select the OK button.
5-95
Schematic Elements
Block Settings – Allows you to modify the appearance of the graphic portion of
the selected symbol. There are two submenu selections: Color and Symbol
Settings. Color allows you to change the color of the symbol. Symbol Settings
allow you to change Scale, Rotation and Mirror settings.
Modify Symbol
The Modify > Symbol function allows you to alter a variety of parameters for
existing symbols on a drawing.
Note To edit the default appearance of a symbol and permanently store it in a symbol
catalog, use Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
Select:
Modify Symbol
The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select individual object by
pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired
object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse
button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter>
key to complete the selection.
The following Modify Symbol dialog box will appear.
5-96
Schematic Elements
Modify Symbol
Device ID
Device Type
Connection Point
Symbol Text Terminal Dest. Cable Text
Text Position Prog. Controller Cross Reference Toggle
Color
Text Symbol Color...
Text
Angle Select...
Height Select...
Label Origin Select...
Settings
Symbol Settings Settings...
OK Cancel Help...
A group of checkboxes and buttons are provided in the dialog box for various
symbol parameters. In general, by selecting the desired checkbox you will be given
the opportunity to select or enter a new value. The following checkboxes and
buttons are provided.
Device ID – Assign a new device ID to the symbol. A dialog box will appear
showing the current device ID. Modify it as desired and select the OK button.
Device Type – Assign a new device type to the symbol. A dialog box will appear
showing the current device type. Use the Search button to search for existing device
types. Enter the desired new device type. You will be prompted for “Automatic
copy? Y/N” Answer yes if you wish existing child symbols to be copied into the
new device relationship automatically. If you answer no, the following dialog box
will appear which allows you to manually select where the information will be
copied.
5-97
Schematic Elements
In the above example, a relay (CR) is being modified from a device type 20 (2
normally open, 0 normally closed contacts) to a device type 22 (2 normally open, 2
normally closed contacts).
To copy the information manually, one must first select the relay name on the “old”
side and then select the relay line (“CR”) on the ’new” side followed by the
Exchange button. One can then pick contacts on the old side and then select the
order you wish them to occupy on the new side. When all existing contacts have
been reassigned, the dialog box will close and device modification will be complete.
Note If a device type was automatically assigned because it is associated with a part
number, you will be prompted if the new device type does not match the part
number’s device type.
Connection Point – Assign new connection point labels. A connection dialog box
will appear, listing the current connection point labels. (When a cable symbol has
been selected, this function lists cable conductor designations.)
Modify Connection Points
Current No. Description OK

1 X1
2 X2 Cancel
Help
5-98
Schematic Elements
Enter the desired new label in the appropriate field. (For parent/child symbols, you
must edit the text in the field at the bottom of the dialog box.) These entries cannot
differ from the labels that were defined when the symbol was created, except in
order (for example, you can enter 14 13 instead of 13 14). When finished, select OK.
Symbol Text – Assign new symbol text (this is text that is part of the symbol, either
fixed or prompted when the symbol is placed). A dialog box will appear showing
the current symbol text. Modify it as desired and select the OK button.
Text Position – Assign a new position for device IDs, symbol text, connection point
text, and cross references. After the OK button is selected you will be prompted to
“Select attribute” on the drawing. Pick the text item that you wish to move and
select a new position.
Terminal Dest. – Change the connection point designations of terminal symbols.

Terminal symbol connection points can be designated as Internal, External, or
Jumper (see page 11-3). This function lets you make or change this assignment.
After selecting this checkbox and OK, the following Terminal Target Settings dialog
box will appear (the number of connection points will reflect the type of terminal
symbol selected). Make the desired selection for each connection point.
Terminal Target Settings
OK
Internal External Jumper
Connection Point 1 X Cancel
Connection Point 2 X
Connection Point 3 X Help
Connection Point 5 X Accept All
Reset
Prog. Controller – Assign new function text for programmable controller symbols.
A dialog box will appear listing existing text including rack and module number and
function text. The Insert Text button will access and insert function text from an
external file (see page 7-38.) Edit the information as desired and select OK.
5-99
Schematic Elements
Programmable Controller Text Definition
Device ID: PLC377
Module: 02
Rack: 01
Address Function Text
0 I0102/00 Limit switch 1
1 I0102/01 Pushbutton 1 – Start
2 I0102/02
3 I0102/03
4 I0102/04
5 I0102/05
6 I0102/06
7 I0102/07
Next Previous I/O Text OK Cancel
Cable Text – Allows you to change the descriptive texts associated with a cable
symbol. After selecting this checkbox and OK, the Cable Text dialog box will
appear, listing any texts associated with the selected cable. Enter or change the texts
as desired and select OK to continue.
Cross Reference Toggle – Use this checkbox to turn off (hide) the cross references
at individual parent and child symbols.
Color – Use these checkboxes to change the color of the text. First select either the
Text checkbox (to color various symbol labels) or the Symbol checkbox (to color the
symbol itself). Use the Color button to display a color selection dialog box. Select
the desired color. Select OK for the color, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box.
You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the part of the
symbol that you wish to modify. This will then appear in the new color. When the
Text checkbox is selected you can selectively color device IDs, function text, and
connection point labels.
The functions in the Text area of the dialog box allow parameters for the various
symbol–related texts (device ID, symbol text, programmable controller function
text, etc.) to be modified.
5-100
Schematic Elements
Angle – Use this checkbox and button to change the angle of the text. First select the
Angle checkbox. Use the Select button to display an angle selection dialog box.
Select the desired angle. Select OK for the angle, and OK for the Modify Symbol
dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the
text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear at the new angle.
Height – use this checkbox and button to change the height of the text. First select
the Height checkbox. Use the Select button to display a height selection dialog box.
Select the desired height. Select OK for the height, and OK for the Modify Symbol
dialog box. You will then be prompted to “Select attribute.” Point and click on the
text that you wish to modify. The text will then appear with the new height.
Label Origin – use this checkbox and button to change the label origin of the text.
First select the Label Origin checkbox. Use the Select button to display a label
origin selection dialog box. Select the desired label origin. Select OK for the label
origin, and OK for the Modify Symbol dialog box. You will then be prompted to
“Select attribute.” Point and click on the text that you wish to modify. The text will
then appear with the new label origin.
Settings – If you wish to change the symbol’s Scale, Rotation, or Mirror settings,
select the Settings button. The Symbol Settings dialog box will appear. Select the
desired settings followed by OK. Once you have set the parameter for one symbol,
you need only select the Settings checkbox to make the same modification to other
symbols.
Modify Wire/Line Type
The Modify > Line function allows you to change three characteristics of a wire or
line in an RSWire drawing:
Line Type (Wire vs. Drawing Line)
Line Color
Line Style (solid, dashed, etc.)
Select:
Modify Line
The following Line Modify dialog box will appear.

Note The Format > Linetype and Format > Color functions apply only to lines created in
AutoCAD.
5-101
Schematic Elements
Line Modify
Line Type Wire Drawing
Color 1 Select
Line Style CONTINUOUS Select
OK Cancel Help...
On the left side of the dialog box are three checkboxes: Line Type, Color and Line
Style. You must select these to determine which line characteristics you are going to
modify.
Line Type – Select this checkbox to change a wire to a drawing line or vice versa.
Select the Wire radio button if you want to change drawing lines to wires. Select the
Drawing radio button if you wish to change wires to drawing lines. See page 5-3
for a description of the differences between wires and drawing lines.
Color – Select this checkbox to change the color of a wire or line. You can enter a
number for the color or select the Select button to choose from a color display.
Line Style – Select this checkbox to change the line style. Select the Select button to
display a list of available choices from which you can make selections.
Continuous (Solid)
Border (Dot 2 Dash)
Center (Long Dash, Short Dash)
Dashed (Short Dashes)
After you have selected the line characteristics that you wish to change, select the
OK button. The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the lines you
wish to modify. When you press <Enter> the selected lines will be modified.
5-102
Schematic Elements
Modify Text
The Modify > Text function allows you to edit existing text on the drawing. This
function affects only text that was entered with the Draw > Text function. Other
text such as device IDs must be modified with the appropriate modify function,
(such as Modify > Symbol in the case of device IDs, Modify > Wire Number
functions for wire numbers, etc.).
Select:
Modify Text
The software will prompt you to “Select object.” Select the desired text and press
<Enter>.
A dialog box will appear displaying the existing text which can be edited as desired.
This is the same dialog box used for entering text (see page 5-31). Other text
parameters such as height, angle, etc., can also be changed at this time. Select the
OK button to load the changes.
Modify Field
The Modify > Field function allows you to alter parameters of existing fields.
Select:
Modify Field
The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Click on the field you wish to
modify and press <Enter>.
A dialog box will appear listing current parameter values for the field. Any of these
values can be altered as described for creating fields on page 5-53.
5-103
Schematic Elements
Modify Wire Number
The Modify > Wire Number function allows you to alter the parameters of existing
wire numbers. You can also reposition wire numbers with this function. This
function is identical to the Tools > Wire Number > Manual function.
Select:
Modify Wire Number
The software will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select the wire that you wish to
modify and press <Enter>. The Wire Number Manual dialog box will appear. See
page 5-73.
Note This function should not be used to modify the number of a wire with a signal cross
reference (an error may result). For these wires you should use the Tools > Replace
> Wire Number function.
Delete, Undo Delete
To delete selected objects from a drawing page, use the Modify > Delete function.
Select:
Modify Delete
The software will prompt you to “Select objects.”
To Delete an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clicking

or define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one
corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected
objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the
deletion.
In the AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire, when selecting items you can use the
AutoCAD “R” and “A” command line options to remove and add items to the set of
entities to be deleted. Also, holding <Shift> and selecting an item will remove it
from the selection set.
The Edit > Undo function will restore the most recently deleted objects.
Note If you are unable to delete a selected object, the object may be an imported item
which would require the use of the Edit > Cut to Clipboard function.
5-104
Schematic Elements
Copy
To copy objects on the drawing page, use the Modify > Copy function. When items
with device IDs are copied, the device IDs will be updated to reflect the position of
the copy.
Select:
Modify Copy
Select individual object by pointing and clicking or define a box (window) on the
screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one corner and then the opposite
corner with the left mouse button. The selected objects(s) will be indicated by
dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the selection.
The software will then prompt you to “Select base point.” Select a point on the
drawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point of the copied
object(s).
The software will then prompt you to “Select second point of displacement.” Select
the destination reference point for the copied objects with the left mouse button. The
copied objects will appear at the new location.
You can place multiple copies of the selected objects, one after the other.
Note If you are unable to copy a selected object, the object may be an imported item
which would require the use of the Edit > Copy Clipboard function.
5-105
Schematic Elements
Move
To relocate objects on the drawing page, use the Modify > Move function.
Select:
Modify Move
To Move an Object or Objects – Select individual object by pointing and clicking or

define a box (window) on the screen around the desired object(s) by selecting one
corner and then the opposite corner with the left mouse button. The selected
objects(s) will be indicated by dashed lines. Press the <Enter> key to complete the
selection.
The software will then prompt you to select “Base point or displacement.” Select a
point on the drawing with the left mouse button that is to be the reference point of
the moved object(s). This point determines where the cursor will be positioned on
the items being moved.
The software will then prompt you to select “Second point of displacement.” Select
the destination reference point for the objects with the left mouse button. The moved
objects will appear at the new location.
Device IDs of Moved Symbols – When a project is created or modified there is a

checkbox in the Project Parameters dialog box labeled Adjust Device ID When
Symbols Are Moved (see page 3-10). This checkbox determines if the device ID of
an existing symbol will be adjusted automatically when the symbol is moved to a
new position. This affects only projects that use one of the device ID formats based
on page and line number. Select the checkbox to enable automatic device ID
adjustment. To change this setting on an existing project, use the Manage > Project
> Modify function and select the Project Parameters button.
5-106
Schematic Elements
Stretch
Use the Modify > Stretch function to make wires and drawing lines longer or
shorter.
Select:
Modify Stretch
The software will prompt “Define first corner of the field.”
You must define a field (box) on the screen that contains the endpoint of the line that
you wish to extend. After the first corner is selected, the software prompts you to
“Define the opposite corner of the field.”
The software prompts “Select base point.” Select a point on the line (usually the
endpoint you wish to reposition).
The software prompts “Specify second point of displacement.” Select a new point to
extend or shorten the line by the desired amount.
If you select the endpoints of multiple lines, all will be stretched.
Warning: Do not stretch wires in a direction perpendicular to the original

direction of the wire. This can cause unexpected results in the drawing. Wires
should only be stretched in a direction that is parallel to the wire.
Properties
The Modify > Properties function allows you to change the color, line weight and
other properties of imported AutoCAD drawing objects. This function will not
affect objects created with RSWire drawing functions.
Select:
Modify Properties
The Properties dialog box will appear listing a variety of object properties. You can
select new values by clicking in the desired field. Refer to the AutoCAD manual for
further information.
5-107
Schematic Elements
Replace Symbol
The Tools > Replace > Symbol function allows you to replace one type of symbol
with another. You can select individual symbols for replacement or globally replace
one symbol type throughout a page or an entire project.
Note The existing symbol and the symbol used to replace it must belong to the same
symbol group (GS1, PS1, etc.). If the existing symbol uses a device type, the
replacement symbol must be able to use the same device type.
Select:
Tools Replace Symbol
The Replace Symbol dialog box will appear.
Replace Symbol
Replace
All Pages Current Page
Existing Symbol
Select Individually
Name: Search...
New Symbol
Name: Search...
Maintain On New Symbol

Device ID Part Number
Connection Point Text Symbol Text With Attributes
All Symbol Text Terminal Target Settings
Settings
Take New Symbol Settings Settings...
OK Cancel Help...
The following selections are provided:
5-108
Schematic Elements
Replace – Select whether you wish a global replacement to occur on All Pages of
the project or only the Current Page.
Existing Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that you wish to replace. This
should be a symbol name (PBNO, LSNC, etc.) and not a device ID (PB102, LS5,
etc.). Pick the Select Individually checkbox if you wish to select specific
occurrences of the symbol for replacement. Otherwise, all occurrences of the
symbol on the current page or in the current project will be replaced. Use the Search
button to display a symbol list from which selections can be made.
New Symbol – Enter the name of the symbol that is to replace the current symbol.
This can be any symbol from the libraries on the software’s symbol (catalog) path.
This path is listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file.
Example: CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC C:\RS\CATALOG\IEC
(See Section 15 for more on search paths.) Use the Search button to display a
symbol list from which selections can be made.
Maintain on New Symbol – This series of checkboxes allows you to select items
from the current symbol that you wish to keep:
Device ID – Select this checkbox to keep the current device ID. Otherwise you
must enter a new device ID after the replace function by using the Modify >
Symbol function.
Connection Point Text – Select this checkbox to keep the current connection
point text. Otherwise, the connection point text defined for the new symbol will
be used.
All Symbol Text – Select this checkbox to keep all symbol text including
attribute text from the current symbol.
Part Number – Select this checkbox to keep any part numbers assigned to the
current symbol.
Symbol Text With Attributes – Select this checkbox to keep symbol text with
attributes from the current symbol (attribute text only).
Terminal Target Settings – Select this checkbox to keep the terminal target
destination settings (internal, external, jumper).
Settings – Select the Take New Symbol Settings checkbox if you wish the new
symbol to have different settings (Scale, Rotation, etc.) from the current symbol.
Select the Settings button to display a dialog box where new settings can be made.
Select the OK button to begin the symbol replacement. If you selected the Select
Individually checkbox, you will be prompted to select symbols on the drawing.
5-109
Schematic Elements
Clear Page
The Manage > Page > Clear function erases everything on the current drawing
page. Use this function with extreme caution. See page 4-17.
Replace Device IDs
The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to renumber device IDs and
terminals across an entire project. This is useful if there has been editing within the
project and the symbol IDs no longer represent their positions in the schematic, or if
there are gaps in the ID sequences.
Select:
Tools Replace Device ID
The Select Project dialog box will appear. Select the desired project name and select
OK to continue.
The Replace Device ID dialog box will appear.
Replace Device ID
Device ID
Terminals
First Number 1
Sort Direction
X Y
OK Cancel Help...
5-110
Schematic Elements
Renumber Device IDs
Select the Device ID checkbox followed by the OK button. All the devices IDs in
the project will be renumbered according to the format that was selected in the
Default Device ID Selection field of the Project Parameters dialog box when the
project was created (or when the Manage > Project > Modify function was used).
See page 3-9 for more on device ID formats.
Renumber Terminals
The Tools > Replace > Device ID function allows you to automatically renumber
terminals throughout a whole project, starting with a specified number.
Procedure:
1. Select the Tools > Replace > Device ID function. Select the desired project.
2. In the Replace Device ID dialog box select the Terminals checkbox.
3. In the First Number field enter the number that the first terminal in each strip is
to have. If you want continuous numbering of the terminals through the whole
project, you must use identical terminal strip designations (installation, location,
device ID). Terminals are then numbered in the order of the existing pages.
4. Select either the X or Y sort direction radio button to determine the direction in
which terminal numbering will proceed (x=horizontal, y=vertical). Terminals
are numbered in ascending order of x coordinate and descending order of y
coordinate. If direction x is specified, terminals on the same x coordinate as one
another are numbered first, followed by terminals on the next higher x
coordinate, and so on across the page. The same applies by analogy for
direction y. Terminal numbers which are part of a macro are treated as a single
unit and numbered in such a way as to indicate their association with one
another. See the next page for X and Y terminal numbering examples.
5. Select the OK button to execute the renumbering.
The terminal number can also be an alphanumeric expression. In this case, it is only
included in the numbering operation if it meets the following conditions:
it consists of a single number (number is replaced by new number)
it has a number at the beginning, the remaining sequence is alphanumeric
(number is replaced, rest remains unchanged)
it consists of a question mark only (question mark is replaced by number)
5-111
Schematic Elements
Terminal Numbering – JIC Examples

Note Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively.
TB1 12 TB1 15
TB1 11 13 TB1 16
TB1 10 14
Symbols Macro Symbols

X Direction TB1 1 4 7 Macro
Terminal Numbering Rotated 90 Degrees
2 5 8
TB1
Symbols
TB1 3 6 9 Macro
Rotated 90 Degrees
TB1 1 TB1 2
TB1 3 4 TB1 5
TB1 6 7

Y Direction
Terminal Numbering TB1 8 9 10 Macro
Rotated 90Degrees
11 12 13
TB1 Symbols
TB1 14 15 16 Macro
Rotated 90 Degrees
5-112
Schematic Elements
Terminal Numbering – IEC Examples

Note Terminals within a macro are always numbered consecutively.
–X1 12 –X1 15
–X1 11 13 –X1 16
–X1 10 14

Terminal Numbering –X1 1 4 7 Macro
X Direction
2 5 8
–X1
Symbols
–X1 3 6 9 Macro
–X1 1 –X1 2
–X1 3 4 –X1 5
–X1 6 7

Terminal Numbering
Y Direction –X1 8 9 10 Macro
11 12 13
–X1 Symbols
–X1 14 15 16 Macro
5-113
Schematic Elements
Replace Text
The Tools > Replace > Text function allows you to globally replace device IDs,
symbol text or standard text on the currently active drawing page.
With the desired drawing page displayed, select the Tools > Replace > Text
function.
Select:
Tools Replace Text
The Replace Text dialog box will appear.
Replace Text
Select Text Type
Device ID
Symbol Text
Text
Case Sensitive
Old:
New:
OK Cancel Help...
In the Select Text Type area, select which kind of text you wish to replace:
Device ID – Device IDs; the numbered symbol identifiers.
Symbol Text – Text that is defined when the symbol is created or automatically
prompted when the symbol is placed.
Text – Standard text that was entered with the Draw > Text function.
5-114
Schematic Elements
In the Old field enter the text that you wish to replace. You must match the
upper/lower case of the existing text. Any text entered will be treated as a wildcard
entry. In other words, it will find the specified characters even if they exist in a
longer string of text (of the selected type).
In the New field enter the new text that is to replace the old text.
Select the Case Sensitive checkbox to make the replace function apply only to text
that exactly matches the upper/lower case letters entered in the Old field.
Select the OK button to execute the replace.
The software will search for the first occurrence of the old text on the current page.
It will then display the new text in the dialog box.
Replace Text
=L1+E1–MDS1
Exchange Exchange All Next Cancel
To Replace One Occurrence of the Text – Select the Exchange button.
To Replace All Occurrences of the Text on the Current Page – Select the
Exchange All button.
To Skip the Replace for the Current Occurrence – Select the Next button. The
current occurrence will remain unchanged and the software will seek the next
occurrence.
To Exit the Exchange Function – Select the Cancel button.
Replace Symbol Text
The Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function allows you to replace any symbol text
of any existing symbols based on device ID and attribute number from a text file.
(Symbol text is text defined when the symbol is created or automatically prompted
when the symbol is placed.)
5-115
Schematic Elements
Select:
Tools Replace Symbol Text
When you activate the Tools > Replace > Symbol Text function, the Select File
dialog box will appear. Select the file that contains the replacement text. (See next
page for information on creating and formatting this file.)
Scrolling lists of filenames and directories are provided from which you can search
for and select the desired file.
The Find File button allows you to search for files matching given criteria. When
you select Find File the Browse/Search dialog box is displayed. Here you can enter
a Search Pattern for the file name (such as symbol* to find files that begin with
“symbol”). You can also select which File Type (extension) will be searched for,
minimum Time and Date values, and which drives and paths will be searched.
The Locate button allows you to search for a specific filename.
When you have selected the desired file in the Select File dialog box, select the OK
button to execute the symbol text replace operation.
When a page is active the function will only change devices found on the open page.
If the function is run when no page file is open, the program will query the user to
select a project. All devices on all pages of the selected project selected will then be
available for symbol text replacement.
5-116
Schematic Elements
Symbol Text Replace File Format:
The file containing the replacement symbol text should be an ASCII file with lines
containing the following information, each item in quotes and separated by commas:
“device ID”,“attribute number”, “new text string”
Here is an example file:
”=LINE1+EN1–RES1”,”31”,”560 OHMS^3.25 WATTS”

”=LINE1+EN1–CAP1”,”31”,”1400 MFD, 100VDC”
”=LINE1+EN1–OVPR”,”1”,”OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION^RELAY”
”=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”1”,”FUSE F1ÂVAILABLE”
”=LINE1+EN1–L1”,”31”,”G”
”=LINE1+EN1–D1”,”31”,”IR206D”
”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDCÎNPUT”
”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”14”,”24VDCÔUTPUT”
”=LINE1+EN1–PS”,”31”,”75 WATTS”
”=LINE1+EN1–PC”,”31”,”PWR322^POWER SUPPLY”
”=LINE1+EN1–R1S1”,”4”,”1”
”=LINE1+EN1–R1S2”,”4”,”2”
”=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”1”,”FUSE F6 AVAILABLE”
”=LINE1+EN1–L6”,”31”,”G”
”=LINE1+EN1–L7”,”1”,”FUSE F7 AVAILABLE”
For a list of symbol text attributes, see page 6-15.

Note Text attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT. Users can
edit this file to define unused attributes, however this file may be overwritten when a
new version (update) of RSWire is installed. The user can also define his own
attributes in a file called ATT_CUST.TXT (which the user must create). The software
will first read ATT_ENG.TXT and then ATT_CUST.TXT. Any values in
ATT_CUST.TXT will then overwrite the attributes in the first file. The file
ATT_CUST.TXT must begin with attribute 42 which is the first user–definable
attribute.
Example format of ATT_CUST.TXT:
42 customer defined attribute

Note The part number attribute (number 10) cannot be replaced using this method. The
part number is converted to text at the time of symbol placement and is no longer an
attribute.
5-117
Schematic Elements
Edit Part Number
To change the part number assigned to existing symbols in a drawing, use the
following procedure:
1. If assigned part numbers are not currently displayed in the drawing, select the
Tools > System Settings function and select the Display Settings tab. Select the
Display Part Numbers checkbox. Assigned part numbers will now be displayed
in the drawing.
2. Point the cursor at the part number you wish to change and click the right
mouse button. Select Part Number from the pop–up menu. The Assign Part
Number dialog box will appear. This dialog box will list any currently assigned
part numbers. See page 5-79 for more information.
3. To remove a part number when multiple part numbers have been assigned,
double click on the part number you wish to remove in the list of assigned part
numbers. New part numbers can then be searched for and selected.
Assign Part Number _
Device ID
Filter
CR SYMB_REF =”CR”
SYMB_REF =
PREGROUP =
PARTNUMBER =
Refresh DESCR =
MANUFACT =

CR 500FL-COB93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE
CR 500FL-COC93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE
CR 500FL-COD93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE
CR 500FL-COF93 CONTACTOR A-B AC CONTACTOR (NE

Assigned Part Numbers Are Listed Here
OK Cancel Help...
5-118
Schematic Elements
Replace Part Number Globally
The Tools > Replace > Part Number function allows you to replace assigned part
numbers throughout a project.
Select:
Tools Replace Part Number
The Replace Part Number dialog box will appear.
Replace Part Number
OK
Old New
Cancel
Help
Search
Save
In the Replace Part Number dialog box there are two columns of fields labeled Old
and New.
In one of the Old fields enter the existing part number that you wish to change. (You
can see a list of existing part numbers in the current project by double clicking in
any of the Old fields. You can select from this list.)
In the corresponding New field to the right, enter the new part number that will
replace the old part number.
Select the Save button to save the replacement list to a text file. This file can be used
in future work sessions (for other projects) by selecting the Search button.
Select the OK button to execute the change. The old part number will be changed to
the new part number wherever it has been assigned in the current project.
5-119
Schematic Elements
Deleting Wire Number
To Delete a Single Wire Number:
You can delete the wire itself, or use the Modify > Wire Number function, select
the wire, and delete the existing wire number from the Wire Number field of the
dialog box. Then select OK.
To Globally Delete Existing Wire Numbers:
Select:
Tools Wire Number Delete
The following Delete Wire Numbers dialog box will appear.
Delete Wire Numbers
All (including manually assigned)
Only Automatically Assigned
Select Pages
OK Cancel Help...
The All radio button will cause all wire numbers to be deleted including those that
were manually assigned.
The Only Automatically Assigned radio button will cause only those wire numbers
that were automatically assigned to be deleted.
Activating the Select Pages checkbox allows you to select the pages on which the
wire numbering will be deleted. After you select the OK button in the Delete Wire
Numbers dialog box, a page select dialog box will appear, allowing you to pick the
project, installation, and pages on which the wire numbering will be deleted.
If you do not select the Select Pages checkbox, wire numbering (of the selected
type) will be deleted throughout the entire project.
Select the OK button to proceed with wire number deletion. The software will ask
“Are you sure?” Select OK to delete the wire numbers.
5-120
Schematic Elements
I/O Device ID
The Tools > I/O Device ID function goes through the current drawing page and
changes the device IDs of symbols connected to a programmable controller symbol
to match the I/O address to which it is attached.
Tools I/O Device ID
Only the symbol that is closest to the programmable controller symbol will be
renamed. If a terminal symbol is closest to the programmable controller symbol,
then the terminal will be skipped over and the next closest symbol will be renamed.
5-121
Schematic Elements
Linetype Properties
To modify linetypes, use the Format > Linetype function.
Select:
Format Linetype
The Linetype Manager dialog box will appear.
5-122
Schematic Elements
Layers
In RSWire each category of drawing object (symbols, texts, wires, etc.) is
automatically placed on a separate “layer” in the drawing. This separation allows a
single setting to be made that will affect everything on that layer (and not affect
items on other layers). Each layer has a name that distinguishes it from other layers.
The user can create new layers and place things on these layers, however the
RSWire drawing and editing functions will only recognize items placed on the
standard RSWire layers. See page 5-128 for a list of RSWire layers.
The Format > Layer function allows you to select drawing layers and make various
settings for these layers. This function is useful for selectively hiding portions of a
drawing when plotting or for locking layers to prevent editing. You can also set
colors and line types for an entire layer.
Select:
Format Layer
The Layer Properties dialog box will appear.
5-123
Schematic Elements
The Layer Properties dialog box lists each layer in the current drawing and shows
each layer’s on/off status, color and line type.
Selecting Layers
You can select one or more individual layers by clicking on the desired layer name
to highlight it.
To Select All Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the <Shift> key, slide the
scroll bar down to the bottom, and select the last layer.
To Deselect All Layers – Select any single layer.
5-124
Schematic Elements
To Select Specific Layers – Select the first layer, hold down the <Ctrl> key, and
select additional layers.
To Deselect Specific Layers – Select any single layer.
Layer Settings
The following settings are possible in the Layer& Linetype Properties dialog box:
Show – Select one of the following layer types to be listed:

All
All in use
All unused
All Xref dependent
All not Xref dependent
All that pass filter
Set Filter dialog
Current – When a layer is current, you can create new objects on that layer. To
make a layer current, select the layer name and select the Current button A layer is
current when the layer name is shown next to the Current button.
(O...) On/Off – Select the icon to turn the currently selected layer on and off. When
a layer is off it is invisible on the drawing screen and on plots. An On layer is
identified by a highlighted icon in the column.
(F...) Freeze/Thaw in All Viewpoints, Current Viewpoints, New Viewpoints –

Freezing a layer is similar to turning a layer off in that it is invisible on the screen
and in plots. Additionally, a frozen layer is not included in drawing regenerations.
By freezing layers, the regenerating speed of complex drawings can be improved.
To freeze the currently selected layer, select the Freeze icon. To un–freeze a layer,
select the Freeze icon. A frozen layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the
column.
Note The Freeze in Current Viewpoints and Freeze in New Viewpoints properties are valid
only when tilemode is off.
(L...) Lock/Unlock – When a layer is locked you cannot edit the objects on that
layer (although you can add objects to the layer). The locked layer is visible
provided it has not also been turned off or frozen. To lock the currently selected
layer, select the Lock icon. To unlock a locked layer select the Lock icon. A locked
layer is identified by a highlighted icon in the column.
5-125
Schematic Elements
(C...) Color – To change the color of a layer, first select the layer, then select the Set
Color button. A Select Color dialog box will appear allowing you to choose a color.
Select OK. The current color of the layer is indicated in the Color column of the
Layer Control dialog box.
Linetype – To change the line type of objects on a layer, first select the layer, then
select the Linetype text. A Select Linetype dialog box will appear allowing you to
choose a line style. Select OK. The current line type of the layer is indicated in the
Linetype column.
New – The New button is used to create new layers. To create a new drawing layer,
select the New button and enter the layer name in the text field. The layer name can
be up to 31 characters long. The new layer name will appear in the layer list.
Note To rename a layer first select a layer name from the list. Its name will appear in the
text field. Enter the new name in this field. The layer name will be changed to the
new name. Do not rename the standard RSWire drawing layers (layer names
starting with “ECS”). Renaming these layers will make them inaccessible to the
RSWire software.
Delete – The Delete button is used to delete layers. To delete a layer first select a
layer name from the list. Select the Delete button and the layer will be deleted.
Note You cannot delete the current layer (name listed next to the Current button), layer 0,
an Xref layer, or a layer that contains objects.
5-126
Schematic Elements
RSWire Layer Names
RSWire drawing layers follow a naming standard that indicates the type of object
found on that layer.
All RSWire layer names begin with the characters ECS_L.
The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are evaluated (E) or not
evaluated (X). An evaluated object is part of the online control or can be changed by
the program automatically, e.g. the ladder text, frame size, etc.
The next letter indicates whether the objects on this layer are visible (V) or invisible
(X). Visible objects are normally always shown except when switched off by the
LAYER command. Example: Standard symbols in the schematic.
Invisible objects are normally invisible independent of the other (visible) objects.
Example: The shape of a drill hole in a panel layout.
The remainder of the layer name is a description of the type of object or portion of
object on that layer. Example: ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID for symbol device ID.
5-127
Schematic Elements
Symbol: Evaluated – Visible (standard symbol)
Layer Name Description

ECS_LEV_SYM Initial insert layer
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO3D Geometry 3D panel layout
ECS_LEV_SYM_GEO_SCM Geometry (schematic)
ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVID Device ID
ECS_LEV_SYM_CPOINT Connection point text
ECS_LEV_SYM_TPOINT Terminal text
ECS_LEV_SYM_TEXT Symbol text
ECS_LEV_SYM_PARTNO Part number
ECS_LEV_SYM_PCR Potential cross reference text
ECS_LEV_SYM_EED_PNT Extended Entity Data at Point
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_RP Reference point mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_CP Connection point mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_M_PN Part number mark
ECS_LEV_SYM_DEVICE Device Type
ECS_LEV_SYM_NAME Symbol name
ECS_LEV_SYM_MARK Selected symbol mark
Symbol: Evaluated – Invisible
ECS_LEX_SYM Initial insert layer

ECS_LEX_SYM_CPOINT Connection point text
ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVICE Device type
ECS_LEX_SYM_DEVID Device ID
ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEX_SYM_GEO_SCM Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LEX_SYM_NAME Symbol name
ECS_LEX_SYM_TPOINT Terminal text
ECS_LEX_SYM_TEXT Symbol text
ECS_LEX_SYM_PARTNO Part number
ECS_LEX_SYM_PCR Potential cross reference text
ECS_LEX_SYM_EED_PNT Extended Entity Data at Point
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_RP Reference point mark
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_CP Connection point mark
ECS_LEX_SYM_M_PN Part number mark
5-128
Schematic Elements
Symbol: Not Evaluated – Visible
ECS_LXV_SYM Initial insert layer

ECS_LXV_SYM_CPOINT Connection point text
ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVICE Device type
ECS_LXV_SYM_DEVID Device ID
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_HEX Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_GEO_SCM Geometry (app. variable)
ECS_LXV_SYM_NAME Symbol name
ECS_LXV_SYM_TPOINT Terminal text
ECS_LXV_SYM_TEXT Symbol text
ECS_LXV_SYM_PARTNO Part number
ECS_LXV_SYM_PCR Potential cross reference text
ECS_LXV_SYM_EED_PNT Extended Entity Data at POINT
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_RP Reference point mark
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_CP Connection point mark
ECS_LXV_SYM_M_PN Part number mark
ECS_LXV_NAV_MARK Navigator mark
ECS_LXV_CR_POS Connection point position during symbol create
Symbol: Dummy Symbol – Evaluated – Visible (rotated symbol placement)
ECS_LED_SYM Initial insert layer
Macro: Evaluated – Visible
ECS_LEX_MC_M_RP Reference point mark
Cross Reference Symbol: Evaluated – Visible
ECS_LEV_SYMCR Geometry + all texts

ECS_LEV_SYMCR_M_RP Reference point mark
5-129
Schematic Elements
Field: Evaluated Visible
ECS_LEV_FIELD Geometry + device ID
Line: Evaluated
ECS_LEV_LINE Wire (evaluated)
Line: Not Evaluated Visible
ECS_LXV_LINE Drawing line (not evaluated)
Wire Number: Evaluated Visible
ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO Wire number
Free Texts: Not Evaluated Visible
ECS_LXV_TEXT Free text
Page Header: Evaluated Visible
ECS_LEV_PH_DATA Drawing data

ECS_LEV_PH_EED EED data at POINT
ECS_LEV_PH_TMP EED data temporarily
ECS_LEV_PH_LOGO Logo
5-130
Schematic Elements
Page: Evaluated Visible
ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME Page frame

ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER Ladder Marks
Temporarily Used Layers
ECS_LXV_CURSOR Symbol as cursor

ECS_LXX_JUST_MOD Modify justification
5-131
Schematic Elements
List Object Function (for drawing elements)

The View > List function allows you to view data relating to specific entities in a
drawing.
Select:
View List
With a drawing page displayed, select the View > List function. The software will
prompt you to “select objects.” Select one or more drawing entities (wires, symbols,
circles, etc.) by pointing the cursor and clicking the left mouse button. Then press
the <Enter> key.
The software will then display a text window containing data for the selected
drawing entities. If there is more information than will fit in the window, the listing
will stop and you can press the <Enter> key to display the next screen of data.
The information listed depends on the type of entity, but its type, its x,y,z position,
and the layer on which it is drawn are always listed. Color and line type are
displayed if either are not done by layer.
The data displayed for symbols includes the symbol name and catalog (example:
“JIC–PBNO”) as well as descriptions of the graphic elements in the symbols. Data
for the various symbol attributes (device ID, connection point text, etc.) are also
displayed.
For lines and wires, information includes the x,y,z coordinates of the endpoints, the
length, and the angle in the x–y plane from start point to end point.
For circles, information includes center point, radius, area, and circumference.
You can toggle between the list window and the drawing window by pressing the
<F2> key.
If you select many entities, the list output may be very long. You can cancel the list
display by pressing the <Ctrl> and <C> keys.
To cancel the “select objects” prompt, press the <Ctrl> and <C> keys.
5-132
Create Schematic Elements
6 Create Schematic Elements

This section describes how users can create custom symbols, macros, and other
elements for use in RSWireTM Designer drawings.

Create Symbols
Symbol Elements
Symbol Creation Procedure
Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File
Symbol Creation Examples
Creating an Example Parent Symbol
Creating an Example Child Symbol
Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol
Creating an Example Device Type Definition
Creating an Example PLC (Parent) Symbol
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol
Creating an Example Terminal Symbol
Creating Pin Charts
Creating Form C Contacts
Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols
Create Macro
Create Title Block Macro
Create Device Type
Delete, Copy, Rename, for Symbols, Macros, Devices
Modify Symbol, Macro, Device
6-1
Create Symbols
Symbol Elements
Creating a symbol involves drawing the symbol itself and also defining the related
information shown in the following illustration.
ELEMENTS OF A JIC SYMBOL
CR 103 Device ID
8501XD1000V02 Part Number
Reference Point Connection Points
A B Connection Point Text
CONTROL Symbol Text
RELAY
ELEMENTS OF AN IEC SYMBOL

Reference Point
A1
Device ID Connection Points
–K2
8501XD1000V02
A2 Connection Point Text
Part Number
LOW TEMP RELAY Symbol Text
Device ID – A device ID tag must be defined for intelligent symbol types. The rest
of the device ID is added to this tag at the time the symbol is placed on the drawing.
In the illustration above, “CR” is used as the tag for control relay device IDs. The
rest of the ID is filled in automatically when the symbol is placed in a drawing and
might consist of consecutive numbers, page number, line number, or a combination
of these (this is determined in the Project Parameters dialog box when a new
project is created).
Reference Point – A reference point must be defined. This point will be positioned
on the cursor when the symbol is placed in the drawing.
6-2
Connection Points – These points determine where lines will break when the
symbol is placed on a line or when a line is drawn through the symbol.
If desired, Connection Point Text can be defined that will automatically label the
connection points when the symbol is placed (such as A and B terminations on a
relay coil).
Symbol Text – This is optional, additional text which will appear with the symbol.
Symbol text can be fixed text, or it can be configured to prompt the user for
information (Amp values, for example) when the symbol is placed.
Part Number (Optional) – You can enter a part number during symbol creation so
that this part number will be automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed.
6-3
Symbol Libraries and Directories
Symbols for a given type of application or drawing format are organized into
symbol libraries, also known as symbol catalogs. There are available RSWire
catalogs for JIC (electrical), IEC (electrical), ISA (process control), hydraulic, and
pneumatic symbols.
A sub–directory (folder) exists for each symbol catalog inside the RS\CATALOG
directory. Inside each symbol catalog directory there are the following
subdirectories:
BLOCK – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) for
each symbol in the catalog.
DEVICE – Contains device type definition files (.EC1) for device types
associated with this symbol catalog.
MACRO – Contains graphics files (.DWG) and definition data files (.EC1) for
each macro associated with this catalog.
In each of the above directories there is a file called NAMES.EC2 that lists
which symbol, device type or macro is associated with each file.
WMF – This directory contains the graphics files (.WMF) for the symbol
selection groups used with the Insert > Select Icon function.
6-4
Symbol Catalog Path
The file RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG contains a path statement that determines where

symbols are stored and which catalogs are available when creating projects. For
example:
CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\CUSTOM\ C:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ C:\RS\CATALOG\AB_CAT\
The first directory named in this path (CUSTOM in this example) is the directory
where all newly created symbols will be stored. Edit the path statement if you wish
symbols to be stored in a different directory.
Moving Symbols From Catalog to Catalog
Symbols can be moved from one catalog to another using the File >
Backup/Restore function. Selected symbols can be saved to a file using the backup
function and then loaded into the desired catalog using the restore function. See
page 3-21.
If you decide to move symbols by manually copying the files from one catalog
directory to another, the copied symbols will not be listed in the new catalog until
the NAMES.EC2 file is updated. To do this, delete the existing NAMES.EC2 file in
the destination directory. The software will then generate a new, updated file when
that catalog is accessed.
6-5
Symbol Creation Procedure
Symbols created with this procedure become part of an RSWire symbol library and
can be accessed at any time during schematic creation. The symbol will be stored in
the first catalog search path (listed in the RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file). The
default library for new user–created symbols is CUSTOM.
Note During symbol creation, if you wish to cancel the symbol creation, select the Cancel
function from the Manage > Symbol menu. This will erase any symbol information
that has been entered but not yet stored.
1. Use a blank page. Display a blank drawing page. There can be drawing
elements such as lines, circles and boxes on the page, but no symbols can exist
on the page. If a blank page is not available, create one using the File > New >
Page function (see page 4-11).
Turn off the Online function. When you create the page, turn off the Online
checkbox in the New Page dialog box. Symbols cannot be created when the
Online function is active. For an existing online page, use the Manage > Page >
Modify function to turn off the Online checkbox.
2. Select Manage > Symbol > New/Modify.
Manage Symbol New/Modify
If the page has symbols on it, the message “Caution: Symbols are already placed
on this page” will be displayed and the symbol creation function will be
canceled. You must use a page that contains no symbols.
3. Enter symbol name, type, description. The software will next display the
New/Modify Symbol dialog box. Enter a symbol name of up to 14 characters in
the Symbol Name field. Do not use an existing symbol name unless you wish to
replace or edit the existing symbol. Use the List button to see a list of existing
symbol names.
6-6
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint
Description:
Symbol Group:
GS1 General Symbol (no cross ref.)
OK Cancel Help...
The Preferred Direction checkboxes determine how the software will look at
the symbol when generating a connection list. It also determines how wires will
be broken or closed when the symbol is placed or moved. Select the Horizontal
checkbox if the symbol is to be scanned from left to right (in other words, if the
wire will be horizontal in relation to the symbol). Select the Vertical checkbox if
the symbol is to be scanned from top to bottom (i.e., if the wire will be vertical
in relation to the symbol, as in IEC format drawings).
Preferred direction horizontal Preferred direction vertical
Use the Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint checkbox to create a symbol that will
automatically snap to the end of a wire. The reference point of the symbol will
be positioned at the nearest endpoint of the wire on which it is placed. This
function is mainly used to create signal cross reference symbols and PLC child
symbols.
6-7
Enter a description of the symbol up to 100 characters long in the Description

field. This description will appear in symbol lists. If you wish to include foreign
language text strings in the description, select the Search Language Text button
to select from the available strings.
In the Symbol Group field, select the type of symbol that you are creating.
Select the down arrow button to display a list of symbol types. The following
types are available:
GS1 General Symbol, no cross ref. (e.g., lights, pushbuttons)

GS2 General Symbol, no cross ref. treated as wire (trailing cables)
PS1 Parent symbol with cross ref. (e.g., coils of relays, etc.)
Child symbol with cross ref. (e.g., normally open contact, normally closed
PS2
contact, form C contact, etc.)
PS3 Cross reference symbol
TS1 Terminal block
TS2 Plug - multi-pole
TS3 Plug - single pole
TS4 Parent plug with cross reference
TS5 Child pin with cross reference
TS6 Connector Cross reference symbol (pin chart)
SG1 Incoming signal (1 line text)
SG3 Outgoing signal (1 line text)
SG5 Incoming signal (star configuration, 1 line text)
SG7 Outgoing signal (star, same as SG8)
SG8 Outgoing signal (star, same as SG7)
CP1 Connection point
DW1 Diagonal wiring connection symbol
BOX Rectangular symbol
RES Reserved for future use - Do not use
CS2 Cable Child Symbol
SG9 Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (1 line text)
SGA Outgoing Signal, Device ID Reference (2 line text)
6-8
Select the OK button when the New/Modify Symbol dialog box is complete. If
the symbol name is already assigned, the following message will appear:
“Symbol already exists. Modify ?” Select the Yes button to redefine the symbol.
Select the No button to cancel symbol creation.
4. Select reference point. After you select OK in the New/Modify Symbol dialog
box, the software will prompt you on the command line to define a reference
point. This is the insertion point of the symbol in relation to the rest of the
symbol. Point to the desired reference point on the drawing page and click the
left mouse button. The reference point will be marked on the screen with a
small inverted triangle.
5. Draw the symbol. Now use RSWire drawing functions such as lines, circles,
boxes, text, etc., to create the symbol shape. You may call up existing symbols
and use them as part of a new symbol. You may wish to change grid spacing
(use the Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings tab) while creating symbols.
Important When drawing the symbol, be aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your
schematic drawings so that connection points are properly spaced. Connection
points must always be on this grid.
6. Enter Device ID. Once the symbol is drawn, return to the Manage > Symbol
menu and select the Device ID function.
The software will prompt you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a point
near (usually above for JIC and to the left for IEC) the symbol where you wish
the device ID to appear on drawings. The following Device ID Parameter dialog
box will appear.
Device ID Parameter
Device–ID: ?
Angle: 0 Select...
Color: 0 Select...
x–offset: 0.500
y–offset: 0.500
OK Cancel Help...
6-9
Device ID – Enter a device ID tag. The tag is just a prefix or mnemonic for the
type of device for which you are creating a symbol. For example, you might use
“PB” for pushbutton, or “K” for IEC relays. Complete device IDs are generated
by the system when a symbol is placed.
Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the ID will appear to the left,
right, above, below, or centered on the device ID origin point (i.e., select “5” to
center the label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the following
positioning: 7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
10 11 12
If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select from
verbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.).
Height – Enter a character height value for the device ID. The default entry is 0.
If no other entry is made the default text sizes set during project creation will
apply when the symbol is placed. If a different entry is made it will override the
project default text sizes.
Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the device ID will appear.
Use the Select button to display a list of values.
Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the device ID. You can
also use the Select button to display and select the available colors.
X–offset, Y–offset – These values represent the x and y distance from the
symbol reference point to the device ID reference point. If a device ID reference
point has already been selected with the mouse, this point’s position will be
reflected in the values shown, which can be changed.
When you select the OK button, the device ID tag will appear on the symbol at
the selected position.
Note The currently selected text font is used for the symbol’s device ID, connection point
text, and symbol text. You can select a different font for each, if desired. The fonts
used when the symbol is created will be used whenever the symbol is placed. Select
the Format > Text Style function to select fonts.
6-10
7. Define connection points. Next, select the Connection Point function from
the Manage > Symbol menu. The software will prompt you to “Define the
connection point.” Select a point on the symbol where a wire is to connect (be
aware of the grid spacing that will be used in your drawings). The selected point
is marked with an “X”.
Note The first connection point should be placed at the reference point. (You can relocate
the reference point to this location before you save.)
You will then be prompted to “Define label origin of text.” This is the point
where connection point text will appear. You must select a point, even if you do
not plan to have any connection point text. When you select a point, the
following Connection Point Parameter dialog box appears.
Connection Point Parameters
Connection Point: ?
Angle: 0 Select...
Color: 0 Select...
Conn.Pt. X Offset: 0.000
Conn.Pt. Y Offset: 0.000
Text X Offset: 0.000
Text Y Offset: 0.000
Sequence Number: 1
Terminal
Undefined Internal External Jumper

Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan
OK Cancel Help...
6-11
Connection Point – Enter a label for the connection point such as “CP1”.
Label Origin – Enter a value to select whether the label will appear to the left,
right, above, below, or centered on the selected point (i.e., select “5” to center
the label on the origin point). The numbers correspond to the following
positioning:
7 8 9
4 5 6
1 2 3
10 11 12
If you cannot remember these numbers, use the Select button to select from
verbal descriptions (Top Left, Middle Center, etc.).
Height – Enter a character height value for the label. Use the Select button to
display a list of values.
Angle – Enter a value to determine the angle at which the label will appear. Use
the Select button to display a list of values.
Color – Enter a color number to determine the color of the label. You can also
use the Select button to display and select the available colors.
Conn.Pt.–X–offset, Conn.Pt.–Y–offset – These values represent the x and y

distance from the symbol reference point to the selected connection point. If
desired, these values can be changed.
Text–X–offset, Text–Y–offset – These values represent the distance from the

connection point to the selected reference point of the connection point label
(text). If desired, these values can be changed.
Sequence Number – The value in this field indicates the order of connection
points in the symbol. It can be altered if desired.
Terminal – There are also four radio buttons to determine the type of connection
point: Undefined, Internal, External, or Jumper. These are only used with
terminal symbols (symbol group TS1). For more information see page 11-3.
Display Connection Point in the Graph. Terminal Plan – Select this

checkbox to determine whether the terminal connection point will always
appear in the graphical terminal plan or only when it is used. Selecting the
checkbox will cause the connection point to always appear in the terminal plan.
Select the OK button when the Connection Point Parameter dialog box is
complete. You can define additional connection points as required.
6-12
If you need to remove a connection point you have placed, select the Manage >
Symbol > Delete Conn. Point function and click on the “x” of the connection
point you wish to remove. (If the connection point is not located on a grid line,
you must use the Tools > Osnap function.)
Note The software has an automatic rotation feature that will automatically rotate a
symbol to match the horizontal or vertical orientation of the wire on which it is
placed. The software does this by checking the orientation of the first two
connection points that were defined when the symbol was created. If you are
creating a symbol with more than two connection points you may wish to define the
first two connection points so that they lie in a direction parallel to the wire.
8. (Optional) Modify Device ID and Connection Points – If necessary, during

symbol creation you can modify the text and position of the device ID and
connection points. Use the following procedures:
Modify Device ID
a. Point the cursor at the device ID and click the right mouse button. The
following popup menu will appear
Device ID Modify
Text Position
b. Select Device ID Modify if you wish to change the text or text parameters
of the device ID. Select Text Position if you wish to change the position of
the device ID.
Modify Connection Points

a. Point the cursor at the connection point text (not at the connection point
itself) and click the right mouse button. The following popup menu will
appear
Connection Point > Modify

Text Position Move
Delete
b. Select Connection Point if you wish to change the connection point. Select
Text Position if you wish to change the position of the connection point
text.
9. Add symbol Text – Text entered during symbol creation is part of the symbol
definition and appears with the symbol each time it is placed in the schematic.
Symbol text can be set up to contain input entered at the time of symbol
placement. Additionally, it can be set up to prompt for a certain type of input.
Use the following procedure to enter symbol text.
6-13
a. Select the Draw > Text function.
b. In the Text dialog box enter the text itself and set other text parameters as
desired. See page 5-31. If you wish to have prompted input at the time of
symbol placement, enter a “?” where the text is to appear. Enter, for
example: ? Hours (leave enough spaces after “?” for any valid input).
When the symbol is placed on a drawing, text input will be requested that
will take the place of the question mark. Select OK when ready.
c. Select a reference point for the text in the drawing.
d. Next, the Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. If you turn on the
Attribute – Activate checkbox, you can select an attribute for the text from
the attribute list (see list on next page), or you can enter the number of the
text in the No: field instead. An attribute will provide a prompt when the
symbol is placed that indicates what units or other information is to be
entered.
These attributes are defined in the file RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT

(for English). You can edit this file to add additional prompts in the 52 through
120 positions in the list. Alternatively, you can create a file called
RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_CUST.TXT to hold your additional attribute texts.
This ATT_CUST.TXT file will not be replaced during software updates.
Text Attribute Definition

Symbol Text:
I/O Attribute Attribute
Activate Activate
No:
Address
I/O Text
No:
Visible Hidden Hidden Fixed
OK Cancel Help...
6-14
If the text is related to a PLC symbol, select the I/O Attribute – Activate
checkbox. The following additional items will be enabled: Select the Address
checkbox if the text will be a PLC module address. Select the I/O Text
checkbox if the text will be PLC function text.
In the No: field you must enter a sequence number starting with 0 to determine
which place this text attribute has in the sequence of addressing. This number
can be modified during symbol creation in the Attribute Number field in the
Edit – Text dialog box.
The group of radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box are selected to
determine if the text will be Visible, Hidden, or Hidden Fixed (cannot be
modified).
List of Symbol Text Attributes

(numbers are for internal reference only)
1 Function Text:
2 PLC Function Text:
3 Rack:
4 Module:
5 Reserved
6 Reserved
7 DID, SDW:
8 Wire Diagram, CP:
9 DID,Panel/Wire Dia:
10 Part Number:
11 Reference Symbol Name:
12 Horsepower [P]:
13 Revolutions per minute [n]:
14 Voltage [V]:
15 VA:
16 Current (A) [I]:
17 Frequency [f]:
18 Temperature [T]:
19 Pressure [p]:
20 Resistance (ohm) [R]:
21 Velocity [v]:
22 Density [D]:
23 Quantity [Q]:
24 Capacitance [Cap]:
25 Inductance [L]:
6-15
List of Symbol Text Attributes

26 Seconds [s]:
27 Minutes [min}:
28 Hours [h]:
29 Channel:
30 Manufacturer:
31 Type
32 Length [l]:
33 Weight, mass [m]:
34 Amount of Material [mol]:
35 Luminous Intensity [lv]:
36 Area [A]:
37 Volume [V]:
38 Power [Pow]:
39 Quantity of Heat [Qj]:
40 Conductance [G]:
41 Field Strength [E]:
42 Magnetic Flux [Phi]:
43 time [t]:
44 sound level [dB(A) ]:
45 acceleration [a]:
46 current density [J]:
47 permittivity [F/m]:
48 permeability [My]:
49 permeance [H]:
50 thermal conductivity [W/(m*K)]:
51 temperature conductivity [m2/s]:
52 - 120 Free for user entries
10. Select cross reference position (child symbols only) – A cross reference can
appear at a child symbol to indicate the location of the parent symbol.
Ordinarily, the position of this cross reference can be adjusted by entering a
value in the Dist. Device ID Cross Ref. field in the Tools > Project Settings >
General Defaults tab (see page 7-21). However, if you wish to set a fixed
position for the cross reference (which will not be affected by the above value),
select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select the
desired position on the drawing. The position will be marked by a blue “X”.
6-16
If you wish to reposition the cross reference position, simply use the same
function to place it again. If you wish to remove the blue X (i.e., not use this
feature), place the cross reference position at the symbol reference point (red
triangle). When the symbol is saved, the blue X will be removed.
11. Store the symbol. Select the Save function from the Manage > Symbol menu
to store the symbol. The software will prompt you to “Define first corner” and
“Define opposite corner” which means that you should define a window around
all the elements that you wish to store as the symbol. The software will display
the message “The symbol was added to the catalog.”
All symbols created by the user are stored automatically in the first symbol
catalog defined by the catalog path statement in file ECSCAD.CFG.
Note You can cancel the symbol creation process at any time by selecting the Manage >
Symbol > Cancel function. This will abort the symbol creation.
6-17
Entering Part Number During Symbol Creation (for automatic assignment)
You can enter a part number during symbol creation so that this part number will be
automatically prompted whenever the symbol is placed. Use the following
procedure:
1. During the symbol creation process (after the New/Modify Symbol dialog box
has been completed) select the Draw > Text function.
2. In the Text field of the Text dialog box, enter the desired part number.
Note This number must exactly match the number used in the parts database (case
sensitive). None of the text parameters (Height, Angle, etc.) need be set; the part
number will be displayed with the same parameters as the device ID (except for
color).
Text
Text
Enter Function Text

Part Number
Here Language Text
Height: 0.150 Select... Position X: 23.500
Angle: 0 Select... Position Y: 15.000
3. Select the OK button. The software will prompt you to select a position for the
text. Select any position (the part number will be automatically positioned
below the device ID when the symbol is placed).
4. The Text Attribute Definition dialog box will appear. Select the Attribute–
Activate checkbox and select “Part Number” from the attribute list.
6-18

Select
Symbol Text: Activate
800T–A1D1 checkbox
Activate Activate Select

“Part Number”
No: 10 From List
Address
Part Number
I/O Text
5. Select the OK button. The part number will appear on the drawing.
6. Complete the symbol creation and save the symbol.
When you place a symbol that has had a part number assigned during symbol
creation, the part number will automatically appear in the Assigned Part Numbers
area of the Device ID Assignment dialog box. If desired, you can delete the part
number by clicking on it. You can then search the database for a different part
number by selecting the Search button.
Location: Search...

Part Number
800T–A1D1
Addit.Part Number
Part Number
Appears Here.
Delete By OK Cancel Help...
Clicking On
Part Number.
6-19
The part number will appear below the symbol’s device ID (assuming the part
number display has been activated with the Tools > System Settings > Display
Settings function).
6-20
Creating a Symbol from an AutoCAD DWG File
Graphics from existing AutoCAD DWG files can be converted into RSWire
symbols.
Note DWG files must be in a format compatible with AutoCAD Release 14 or AutoCAD
2000, depending on the Version of AutoCAD under which you are running the
software.
Use the following steps:
1. In RSWire, display a blank drawing page with the Online checkbox turned off.
(Use the Manage > Page > Modify function to access this checkbox.)
2. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. Enter a symbol name
and description in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box. Choose an appropriate
symbol group. (For more information on this part of the symbol creation
process, see page 6-8.) Select OK to continue.
3. Define a reference point for the symbol. You can redefine this point later, if
desired.
4. Bring in the AutoCAD drawing using the Insert > Block > Insert function.
Select an insertion point on the drawing page.
Note RSWire AutoCAD add–on users can also use the command line command
DDINSERT.
5. It is not necessary to explode the inserted drawing elements unless there are
items within blocks that you wish to change or remove. Explode the DWG
elements with the Insert > Block > Explode function.
6. As with normal symbol creation, add connection points, device ID, text, etc.
Redefine the reference point if desired. Remember that connection points must
be placed on a grid line.
7. Store the symbol: select Manage > Symbol > Save and define a window
around the symbol elements.
6-21
DXF Import
The File > DXF Import function allows the importing of drawings in the DXF
format.
File DXF Import Save Current Page

New DXF Page
DXF Import
Save as DWG
Save as Block
Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save Current Page function will save and
close current page. (You must close the current RSWire page and create a blank
AutoCAD page on which to place the DXF drawing.)
Selecting the File > DXF Import > New DXF Page function will bring up a blank
AutoCAD page.
Selecting the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function allows the user to pick a
DXF file and open it in the current page.
Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as DWG function will save the current
page as a .DWG file.
Selecting the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function will group all items
within the current page and save them as a block.
Note To ungroup items grouped with the File > DXF Import > Save as Block function,
use the Insert > Block > Explode function.
Rules for DXF Import:
1. Save and close any current RSWire page with the File > DXF Import > Save
Current Page function.
2. Create a blank AutoCAD page with the File > DXF Import > New DXF Page
function.
Use the following procedure:
1. Select the File > DXF Import > DXF Import function.
2. Select the DXF file that you want to import.
6-22
3. Save the imported DXF drawing as a DWG file (File > DXF Import > Save as
DWG) or as an AutoCAD block (File > DXF Import > Save as Block).
You can insert the saved DWG file by using the Insert > Block > Insert function.
6-23
Symbol Creation Examples
Creating an Example Parent Symbol
Certain symbols can have a “parent/child” relationship with other symbols in a

schematic. Examples include relays and motor starters (parent) which have related
contacts (child) appearing throughout a drawing. The child symbols are given the
same device ID as the parent, and the system can automatically provide cross
referencing. The system requires a “Device” definition that establishes which type
and number of child symbols are associated with the parent. This section and the
following sections describe how to create your own parent symbols, child symbols,
cross reference symbols, and device definitions.
Use the following procedure to create a parent relay symbol called XRELAY.
1. Display a blank drawing page.
2. Turn off the Online function (use Manage > Page > Modify function).
3. Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC (use the Tools >
System Settings > Grid Settings tab).
4. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function.
5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XRELAY. Press the <Enter> key.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XRELAY List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Snapmode: Nearest Endpoint Select

Preferred
Direction
Description:
Example parent symbol
Symbol Group:
PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
OK Cancel Help...
6-24
6. Symbols are drawn based on the wire passing through the symbol. Usually the
orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or
Vertical for IEC. Select a preferred direction.
7. Enter the description “Example parent symbol.”
8. Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
9. Select the OK button to continue.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbol
reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide,
overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbol
should be 10 mm wide, overall). Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when we
change the size of the grid).
ref. lines
.5 in. apart
ref. lines
5 mm apart
JIC Symbol IEC Symbol
12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only).
13. As shown above, draw a circle 0.3 inch in diameter for JIC. (Draw a 5 mm by
10 mm rectangle for IEC.) Draw 0.1 inch lines on each side of the circle. (Draw
a 5 mm line from the bottom center of the rectangle for IEC.)
14. Delete the reference lines.
15. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. The software will prompt
you to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID reference
point above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device ID
XRE for JIC (–XK for IEC).
6-25
Device ID
Position
XRE
–XK
JIC Symbol IEC Symbol
17. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function.
18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at the
symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of
text.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of the
connection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box
appears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK button
to continue (no text will be entered at this time).
19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottom
connection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connection
point for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter no
connection point text.
Connection Point
Position
Connection Point
Text Position
JIC Parent Symbol IEC Parent Symbol
6-26
20. (Optional.) If you wish the position of the cross reference information to be
fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a
point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross
reference will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjusted using
the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > Project Settings >
General Defaults function.
21. Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function to complete the creation of the
symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “The
symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-27
Creating an Example Child Symbol
Use the following procedure to create a child contact symbol called XNO for the
XRELAY parent symbol created in the previous section.
System Settings > Grid Setting function).
5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XNO. Press the <Enter> key.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XNO List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Select
Preferred
Direction
Description:
Example child symbol
Symbol Group:
PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
OK Cancel Help...
6. Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usually
the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or
7. Enter the description “Example child symbol”.
8. Select symbol group PS2 Child Symbol with cross ref.
6-28
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a JIC symbol
reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line (symbol should be 0.5 inches wide,
overall). Select a IEC symbol reference point on a 5 mm grid line (symbol
should be 10 mm height). Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
11. Draw reference lines to mark the width of the symbol (this will help when we
change the size of the grid).
Ref. Lines
Ref. Lines
JIC Child Symbol IEC Child Symbol
12. Set grid to 0.05 inch for JIC or 5 mm for IEC.
13. As shown above, draw a pair of vertical lines about 0.3 inches apart. Draw
horizontal 0.1 inch lines on each side of the vertical lines.
14. Delete the reference lines.
you to “Define Device ID position.” Select an appropriate device ID reference
point above the symbol for JIC (left of the symbol for IEC). Enter the device ID
XRE for JIC (–XK for IEC).
Note A child symbol must have same device ID as the parent symbol.
6-29
XRE
Connection Point
Location
–XK
Connection Point
Text Location
JIC Child Symbol IEC Child Symbol
18. Locate the left connection point for JIC (top connection point for IEC) at the
symbol reference point. You will be prompted to “Define reference point of
text.” Select a point below the connection point for JIC (upper right of the
connection point for IEC). When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box
appears, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field and select the OK button
to continue (no text will be entered at this time).
19. Locate the right connection point on the right side of the symbol (bottom
connection point on the bottom for IEC). Select a point below the connection
point for JIC (lower right of the connection point for IEC). Again, enter no
connection point text.
20. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference appears at the child
symbol. If you wish the position of this information to be fixed, select the
Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function and select a point near the
symbol. If you do not use this function, the position of the cross reference at the
child symbol will be offset from the device ID position and can be adjusted
using the Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Manage > Project
Settings > General Defaults function.
symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements.
Note Make sure complete text elements are included within the window around the symbol
elements.
The message “The symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-30
Creating an Example Cross Reference Symbol
In this section we will create a cross reference symbol that will appear beside the
XRELAY coil symbol and indicate where its contacts (child symbols) are located.
A number of cross reference symbols are included with the software (with names
such as Q22, Q42, etc.), but you may need to make your own for special
requirements.
System Settings > Grid Settings function).
5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCROSS (the name of our example
symbol). Press the <Enter> key.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XCROSS List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Select
Description:
Preferred
Direction
Example cross reference symbol
Symbol Group:
PS3 Cross Reference Symbol
OK Cancel Help...
6. Symbols are drawn based on how the wire passes through the symbol. Usually
the orientation of a symbol is drawn, but not limited too, Horizontal for JIC or
6-31
7. Enter the description “Example cross reference symbol”.
8. Select symbol group PS3 Cross Reference Symbol.
10. The software will prompt you to “Define reference point.” Select a symbol
reference point on a grid line. Zoom in for a better view of the work area.
Reference Point
JIC Cross Reference Symbol IEC Cross Reference Symbol
11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw boxes as shown.
12. Set grid to 0.05 inch (JIC only).
13. Use drawing lines to create the relay contact symbol as shown.
Relay Contact Symbol Relay Contact Symbol
6-32
14. Using the Draw > Text function, place the texts “?1” and “?2” (separately) as
shown. This text will later hold cross reference information.
Symbol Text Symbol Text
?1 ?2 ?1
?2
Note If you wish to make a cross reference symbol that includes normally closed symbols
as well as normally open, you could simply add another row (or rows) of boxes,
draw a normally closed symbol, and place additional text (?3, ?4, etc.). The
information that appears in the ? text locations is determined in the Device Type
New/Modify dialog box (see following section).
Note Some applications require that the cross reference text be underlined for normally
closed contacts. Add “%%U” before text “?1”, “?2”, etc., for cross references that
are normally closed only. Do not add “%%U” before the text of normally open
contacts. This is usually done when no open or closed symbol graphics are used in
the cross reference.
When prompted for an attribute for these texts, select the OK button (no
attribute).
symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “Symbol
added to the catalog” will be displayed.
6-33
Creating an Example Device Type Definition
In the previous sections, we have created a parent symbol, a child symbol, and a
cross reference symbol. We now need to tie these three together somehow so that
RSWire knows which child symbol(s) are associated with a parent symbol and
which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent symbol.
This is accomplished by defining a device type. A device type is a combination of

parent symbol, child symbol(s) and cross reference symbol.
The same symbols can be assigned to different devices. For example, you can have
various devices to represent relays with different combinations of normally open
and normally closed contacts. Or, you can create devices for a relay and a motor
starter that both use the same cross reference symbol.
When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its device
type. Once the software knows the device type, it can also perform error–checking
used.
For more information on creating devices, see page 6-89.
6-34
We will use the following procedure to define a device called X20.
1. Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device Type
New/Modify dialog box will appear.
Device Type New/Modify
Device Type X20 Search
Group Relay, I/O, Plug
Symbol Name Connection Points
Parent XRELAY AB
Child 1 XNO 12
Child 2 XNO 34
Child 3
Child 4
Child 5
Child 6
Child 7
Child 8
Child 9
Cross Ref. XCROSS Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position
OK Cancel Help Description...
Note Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC.
2. In the Device Type field, enter the name X20. Press the <Enter> key.
3. Select the Description button and enter “Example device” in the first
description field. Select OK. This description will appear on device listings.
4. In the Group field leave the default selection Relay, I/O, Plug.
5. Enter XRELAY for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of the parent
symbol of the device.
6-35
6. Enter XNO for Child 1 and Child 2. Enter the names of child symbols in the
order in which they will be used in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the first
child corresponds to the “?1” text in the cross reference symbol, the second
child corresponds to “?2”, etc.).
7. Enter the connection point text shown in the previous dialog box
(A B, 1 2, 3 4). Optional connection point text can be entered in these fields
which will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when the
parent or child symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with a
space. If more than two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when the
symbol is placed, and the unwanted texts can be deleted at that time.
In the example, the connection points for the relay coil will be labeled A and B.
The connection points for the first contact will be labeled 1 and 2. Connection
points for the second contact will be labeled 3 and 4.
8. Enter XCROSS for the Cross Ref. field. This is the name of the cross reference
symbol that will hold the cross reference information for the parent/child
symbols (we created this symbol in the previous section).
Note If you are creating a device type for which there will be no cross reference symbol,
enter the name DUMMY in the Cross Ref. field.
6-36
9. Enter 1.50 for dx (delta x) and –0.5 for dy (delta y) for JIC values. The values
entered in these fields determine where the cross reference symbol will appear
on the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Refer to the following
illustration. The distances entered are between the reference point of the parent
symbol and the reference point of the cross reference symbol. (If the Absolute
Position checkbox is selected, these values are measured from the drawing
origin point (0, 0) rather than from the parent symbol.)
Note For IEC, enter 0 for dx, 75 for dy, and select Absolute Position checkbox. The IEC
cross reference symbol will start at 75 mm from the bottom of the page.
dx=0 mm
dx=1.50”
dy=–0.5”
dy=75 mm
Bottom of Page
JIC Distance Values IEC Distance Values
10. Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.
6-37
Testing the Device Type – To test the operation of the example device type, cross
reference, and parent/child symbols created thus far, use the following procedure:
Note Example shown is in the JIC format. Same principles apply to IEC.
1. Use a drawing page with the Online function turned on.
2. On one line place the parent symbol, XRELAY.
3. Accept the prompted device ID by selecting OK in the Device ID Assignment

dialog box (the format of the device ID will vary according to how your project
was set up.
4. When prompted for a device type, enter X20. The connection points dialog box
will appear on the screen, prompting the connection point text. Select OK to
continue. The parent symbol should appear on the screen with the cross
reference symbol beside it.
5. On another line of the drawing, place the child symbol, XNO.
6. Give the child symbol the same device ID as the parent symbol. The connection
points dialog box will appear on the screen, prompting the connection point
text. Select OK to continue.
The cross reference symbol should indicate the location (line number) of the child
symbol.
XRE1
A1
(line 112) 13 3
A B
114 –XK –XK
14 4
XRE1 A2
(line 114)
1 2
13 14
Bottom of Page
JIC Device IDs IEC Device IDs
6-38
Creating an Example Programmable Controller (Parent) Symbol
Programmable logic controllers (PLCs) are a part of many control systems. With
RSWire, symbols can be created that represent PLC input and output modules. The
symbol can be designed to prompt the user for information such as rack and module
number, and automatically place address numbers and descriptive text.
In this section we will create an example PLC symbol like the one shown below
called XPLC8.
L1 L2
101 PLC102
102
RACK: 1 Device ID
103
MODULE: 0
104
Rack And
105 1000 Module Group
106 00
107 1001
01 Terminal Numbers
108
109 1002 Limit sw. 2 I/O Addresses

110 02
111 1003 Limit sw. 3
112 03
Descriptive Text
113 1004 Limit sw. 4
114 04
115 1005 Limit sw. 5

116 05
117 1006 Limit sw. 6
118 06
119 1007 Limit sw. 7
07
6-39
P22
=M =M =M =M =M =M =M =M
–S1 –S2 1N –S3 –S4 –S5 –S6 –S7 –S8
F+
F–
12
10
11.04 14
16
6
8
11.00
11.01
F+
11.03
F–
1N
11.02
11.05
PLC1
6ES5 436–4UA11 DIGITAL INPUT MODULE 220 VAC
Terminal Numbers
Rack And
Module/Slot Group I/O Addresses
Device ID Descriptive Text
This symbol is considered a parent symbol. Child symbols for the individual I/O
points can be located throughout the schematics in the same project.
The following procedure describes how to create a symbol for an eight point PLC
input module.
2. Turn off the Online function (use the Manage > Page > Modify function).
4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XPLC8 (this is the symbol name we
will use for this particular example). Press the <Enter> key.
6-40
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XPLC8 List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Snapmode: Endpoint
Select
Description:
Preferred
Direction
Example 8 point PLC input module
Symbol Group:
PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
OK Cancel Help...
6. Enter the description “Example 8 point PLC input module”.
7. Select symbol group PS1 Parent Symbol with cross ref.
reference point on a 0.5 inch (5 mm for IEC) grid line. Zoom in for a better
view.
10. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw the sides of a rectangle about
2 x 9 inches (it must be long enough for the input lines and wide enough for the
address text). If necessary the rectangle can be redrawn before saving the
symbol. If desired, use the circle and drawing line functions to draw terminal
screw heads. You will have to select a smaller grid size to do this, but place the
screws on your standard schematic line spacing. Leave about 1 inch (25 mm)
free at the top of the box for rack and module information.
6-41
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
Note Text Label Origin – When placing text in this or any symbol, it is important to
decide how you want the text to appear on the drawing in relation to the reference
point selected for the text. By selecting an appropriate label origin before entering
the text, you can determine whether the text will appear above, below, to the left, to
the right, or centered on the origin point. By selecting an appropriate label origin,
you can prevent one text from overwriting another or extending outside its intended
location.
you to “Define Device ID position.” Select a device ID reference point above
the symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”.
12. Use the Draw > Text function to enter the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” at
the top of the symbol. After selecting the reference point for each word you will
be prompted for text attributes. Simply select the OK button.
6-42
Device ID
PLC
Attribute Text
Standard Text RACK: ?
MODULE: ?
13. To the right of the words “RACK:” and “MODULE:” use the Draw > Text
function to enter a “?”. After selecting the reference point for each “?” you will
be prompted for text attributes. In the attribute dialog box, select the Attribute –
Activate checkbox and from the attribute list select “Rack:” for the “?” that you
place next to the word RACK, and “Module” for the one next to MODULE.

Symbol Text:
Select
? “Activate”
I/O Attribute Attribute checkbox
Activate Activate
No:
Address
I/O Text Select

PLC Function Text “Module”
Rack: or “Rack”
Module:
No: 000 + Combination of attributes
Reserved
14. Use the Draw > Text function to place a series of “?” characters beside each
screw location. For each “?”, select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and
the Address checkbox in the text attribute dialog box. These texts will display
the individual I/O addresses when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-43
Important You must place these texts in the order they will be addressed and you must number
each of these attributes the Number field of the text attribute dialog box starting
with 0 as shown below. If you lose track of which number you have assigned to these
texts use the Edit > Text > Modify function and select the text in question. The
assigned number will be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Modify Text
dialog box. Internally, RSWire assigns address numbers to the “300” range, so the
text codes displayed here will start at 300, rather than 00.
PLC
RACK: ?
MODULE: ? Number the first “?” 0,
the next one 1, etc.
?

Symbol Text:
Select ?
“Activate” I/O Attribute Attribute
and
“Address” Activate Activate
No:
Address
I/O Text
No: 300 + 0
6-44
15. Enter another series of ”?” attribute texts to the right of the module. These
attribute will contain PLC function text. Therefore for each “?”, select the I/O
Attribute–Activate checkbox and the I/O Text checkbox in the text attribute
dialog box. Like the address texts, each of these must be numbered sequentially
starting with 0.
If you lose track of which number you have assigned to these texts use the
Modify > Text function and select the text in question. The assigned number
will be displayed in the Attribute Number field of the Text dialog box.
Internally, RSWire assigns function text numbers to the “600” range, so the text
codes displayed here will start at 600, rather than 00.
6-45
PLC
RACK: ?
MODULE: ?
Number The First “?” 0,
The Next One 1,
? ? etc.
? ?
? ?
? ?
? ?
? ?
? ?
? ?

Symbol Text:
?
Select
“Activate” Activate Activate
and No:
“I/O Text” Address
I/O Text
Visible
No: 600 + 0 Hidden
16. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Place a connection
point beside each screw symbol. Be sure the connection points match your
standard line spacing. Place the connection point text below each screw.
6-46
Important You must place connection points in the same order as the I/O addresses. If your
symbol includes additional non–addressable terminals such as hots or commons
(our example does not) the connection points for these terminals must be assigned
last regardless of where they are located on the module.
PLC
RACK: ?
MODULE: ?
Place This Connection Point First
? ?
00
? ?
01
? ?
02
Connection Point Text Locations ? ?
03
? ?
04
? ?
05
? ?
06
? ?
07
17. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a
window around the symbol elements.
Create PLC Device Type – Before the symbol will function correctly, we must
create a device type that specifies the cross reference and child symbols to be
associated with the parent symbol.
1. Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. In the Device Type
field, enter the name XPLC8 (we will give the device type the same name as
the parent to make it easier to remember). Press the <Enter> key.
6-47
Device Type XPLC8 Search
Parent XPLC8 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
Child 1 INPUT 00
Child 2 INPUT 01
Child 3 INPUT 02
Child 4 INPUT 03
Child 5 INPUT 04
Child 6 INPUT 05
Child 7 INPUT 06
Child 8 INPUT 07
Child 9
Cross Ref. XPLC Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position
2. Enter the information shown in the example above.
a. For Cross Ref. enter XPLC. This is a standard PLC cross reference
provided with RSWire.
b. In the Connection Points field enter the same series of connection point
designations we placed as connection point text in the symbol.
c. In the Child symbol fields, enter the symbol name INPUT. This is a PLC
child symbol provided with RSWire (you can also create custom child
symbols). These child symbols can be placed throughout the schematics.
They can be given the same address as the parent and assigned one of the
terminal numbers.
3. Select OK to save the device.
6-48
Testing the PLC Symbol – To test the functioning of the PLC symbol use the
following steps:
1. Make settings: The Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller
Settings function allows various PLC related parameters to be set such as octal
vs. decimal addressing, the word/bit separator character for addresses, etc. See
page 7-37 for more information.
2. Select the symbol using the Insert > Symbol by Name function. Enter the
symbol name XPLC8 (or whatever other name you gave the symbol).
3. Place the symbol (page must be Online). The Device ID Assignment dialog box
will appear. Accept the prompted device ID or enter a different one.
4. The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter the device type XPLC8.
5. The Connection Points dialog box will appear, showing the device ID, the
parent and child symbol names, and the connection point designations. Select
OK to continue.
Connection Points

Device ID: =LINE1+NO_LOC–PLC377
Device Item: XPLC8
XPLC8 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
OK Cancel Help
6-49
6. The Programmable Controller Text Definition dialog box will appear. This
dialog box allows you to set rack and module numbers, the addressing numbers,
and function text for each point on the module. (See next page.)
I/O Text Definition
Device ID: PLC377
Module: 02
Rack: 01
Address Function Text
0 I0102/00 Limit switch 1
1 I0102/01 Pushbutton 1 – Start
2 I0102/02
3 I0102/03
4 I0102/04
5 I0102/05
6 I0102/06
7 I0102/07
Next Previous I/O Text OK Cancel
a. Enter the Module and Rack numbers in the appropriate fields.
b. In the Address fields, it is only necessary to enter an address in the first

field: once you move the cursor to another field, the remaining addresses
will be filled in automatically, continuing from the first. If you wish to use a
word/bit address, use the separator character that was specified in the
Address Separator field of the Programmable Controller Settings dialog
box (Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings
function). In the example above, “/” is the separator character.
c. In each Function Text field you can enter descriptive text. Two examples
are entered above.
d. If you select the I/O Text button, entries for the Function Text fields will
be taken from an external file. This filename is specified in the Active Input
File field of the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller
Settings tab. See page 7-38.
6-50
7. Select the OK button. The module symbol should appear on the drawing with
the appropriate Rack and Module numbers, addresses, and function texts.
6-51
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (JIC Format)
RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT).
These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic,
as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol.
L1 L2
101 Device ID
102
TB2:2 IAD343
LS103
103 01 I:000/01 I/O Address
104 343 Limit switch 2
105 Connection Point Text
106 Function Text
Cross Reference to Parent
107
JIC Format
Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol:
4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol name
we will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key.
6-52
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XINPUT List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Select
Preferred
Direction
Description:
Example PLC child input
Symbol Group:
OK Cancel Help...
5. Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will be

automatically positioned at the end of the wire.)
7. Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.
reference point on a 0.5 inch grid line. Zoom in for a better view.
11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 1.5
x 0.5 inches. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold the
connection point designation and a larger part to hold the full I/O address. If
necessary the box can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have to
select a smaller grid size to place some elements, but be aware of your
schematic line spacing when placing connection points.
6-53
the symbol. Enter the device ID “PLC”.
Note This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed.
14. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will be
prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smaller
part of the box. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears,
select the OK button to continue. There are no other connection points on the
symbol.
Reference Point PLC
Connection Point
Connection Point Text
15. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parent
symbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this
information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position
function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the
position of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using the
Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > General
Defaults function.
6-54
16. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of the
box (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you select
for the text will affect the placement of information later.)
Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the
text attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address when
the symbol is placed in a drawing.
PLC
Place Text
? ?

Symbol Text:
?
Select
and Activate Activate
“Address”
No:
Address
I/O Text
No: 300 + 0
17. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select the
Attribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the text
attribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from the
parent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-55
PLC
? ?
Place Text
?

Symbol Text:
?
Select I/O Attribute Attribute
“Activate”
checkbox Activate Activate
No: 2
Address
Select I/O Text
“PLC PLC Function Text
Function Rack:
Text” Module:
6-56
Creating an Example PLC (Child) Symbol (IEC Format)
RSWire includes several PLC child symbols (symbol names: INPUT, OUTPUT).
These can be used to represent individual PLC I/O points throughout the schematic,
as opposed to showing all wiring connected directly to a single parent symbol.
13
–S7
14
Function Text
1
–X1
Device ID I/O Address
–A1 I0.00
.1
Text Label
INPUT
CP:00
Start Motor
Cross Reference to Parent Connection Point Text
PLC Function Text

IEC Format
6-57
Use the following procedure to create a PLC (input) child symbol:
4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XINPUT (this is the symbol name
we will use for this particular example. Press the <Enter> key.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XINPUT List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Select
Preferred
Direction
Description:
Example PLC child input
Symbol Group:
OK Cancel Help...
5. Select the Snapmode:Endpoint checkbox. (The symbol will be automatically

positioned at the end of the wire.)
7. Enter the description “Example PLC child input”.
6-58
reference point on a 5 mm grid line. Zoom in for a better view.
11. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line function to draw lines to form a box about 20
x 15 mm. Draw a line to divide the box into two parts: one part to hold the I/O
address and a larger part to hold the full connection point text . If necessary the
box can be redrawn before saving the symbol. You will have to select a smaller
grid size to place some elements, but be aware of your schematic line spacing
when placing connection points.
Reference Point
you to “Define Device ID position.”
13. Select a device ID reference point below the symbol.
14. Enter the device ID “PLC”.

Note This default device ID tag can be overwritten when the symbol is placed.
16. Locate the connection point at the symbol reference point. You will be
prompted to “Define reference point of text.” Select a point inside the smaller
part of the box.
6-59
Reference Point
Connection Point
?
Connection Point Text
PLC
17. When the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the OK
button to continue. There are no other connection points on the symbol.
18. (Optional.) Users can select whether or not a cross reference (to the parent
symbol) appears at the child symbol. If you wish the position of this
information to be fixed, select the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position
function and select a point near the symbol. If you do not use this function, the
position of the cross reference at the child symbol can be adjusted using the
Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset field of the Tools > Project Settings > General
Defaults function.
19. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character in the larger part of the
box (see following figure). (Be aware of how the label origin value you select
for the text will affect the placement of information later.)
20. Select the I/O Attribute–Activate checkbox and the Address checkbox in the
text attribute dialog box. This text will display the individual I/O address when
the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-60
I/O Address
?
PLC
Symbol Text:
?
Select
and Activate Activate
“Address”
No:
Address
I/O Text
No: 300 + 0
21. Use the Draw > Text function to place a “?” character below the box. Select the
Attribute–Activate checkbox and the PLC Function Text selection in the text
attribute pull down list. This text will display the I/O function text from the
parent symbol when the symbol is placed in a drawing.
6-61
I/O Address
?
PLC
Symbol Text:
?
“Activate”
No: 2
Address
Select I/O Text
“PLC PLC Function Text
Function Rack:
Text” Module:
6-62
Creating an Example Terminal Symbol
A number of terminal symbols are provided with RSWire. The user may wish to
create custom terminal symbols. This section describes how to create an example
terminal symbol called XTERM.
3. Set the drawing grid to 0.5 inch (use the Tools > System Settings > Grid
Settings tab).
5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XTERM. Press the <Enter> key.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XTERM List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Description:
Example terminal symbol
Symbol Group:
TS1 Terminal Block
OK Cancel Help...
6. Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example

terminal symbol.” Select symbol group TS1 Terminal Block.
6-63
reference point where two 0.5 inch grid lines intersect. Zoom in for a better
view of the work area.
9. Set the grid to 0.05 inch.
10. Draw a small circle, about 0.2 inches in diameter.
11. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “Define
Device ID position,” select a point above the symbol.
12. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter TB in the Device ID field. Enter a
label origin of 6 (Middle Right). Select OK to continue.
14. When prompted to “Locate connection point,” select the point at the center of
the circle.
Device ID Connection Point 1
Text Origin Point
TB ?
15. When prompted to “Define reference point of text”, select a point to the right of
the device ID (the text for connection point 1 will be part of the device ID).
6-64
16. In the Connection Point Parameters dialog box leave the “?” in the Connection
Point field and enter a label origin of 4 (Middle Left).
In the Connection Point Parameters dialog there are also four radio buttons to
determine the type of connection point for terminal symbols: Undefined,
Internal, External, or Jumper. These determine how the connection
information is displayed in the terminal plan editor. The default is Undefined.
For more information see page 11-3.
17. Select OK to continue.

Note If you activate the Terminal=Wire Number checkbox in the Tools > Wire Number >
Automatic function dialog box, the wire number will replace the terminal number at
the text reference point of the first connection point (indicated by the “?” in the
above figure).
18. Locate four more connection points at the top, bottom, left and right side of the
circle (i.e. at the 0, 90, 180, and 270 degree positions of the circle). For these
four connection points, delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of the
Connection Point Parameters dialog box. You can select a reference point for
text anywhere for each of these points (there will be no text).
TB ?
Note Because of the defaults that the system will use to interpret terminal symbol
connection points, it is best to place these five points in the following order (see
page 11-4 for more information).
5 Connection Point Order

2
2 1 4 3 1 5
3
4
JIC IEC
19. Store the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a
6-65
By placing the five connection points as shown, it is possible to connect wires to the
terminal symbol from left, right, above, and below. When a wire is drawn over the
symbol (or when the symbol is placed on a wire) the wire will break at the two outer
connection points.
When the terminal symbol is placed, you can specify in the Device ID field a
terminal strip number and an individual terminal number separated by a colon. For
example TB1:1. The next terminal symbol placed will be automatically prompted
for TB1:2, then TB1:3, etc., until you enter a new terminal strip number. You can
also use letters for the individual terminal designations.
Creating Pin Charts
A pin chart is a combination of a plug symbol, pin symbols, and a device

(parent/child) relationship between them that provides cross referencing.
The plug symbol is placed somewhere on a drawing page and displays cross
reference information (such as page/line number) that indicates where each pin is
located in the project drawings.
The pin and plug symbols are part of the “TS” symbol groups (when a symbol is
created it is assigned to a symbol group such as general symbols, parent symbols,
etc.). With pin charts, this means you can have cross referencing like a parent
symbol and terminal plan connection information like a terminal symbol.
The characteristics of “TS” symbol groups are:
1. They allow the circuit’s potential (wire number) to flow through the symbol.
2. They are connection devices and the user may assign a cable to the pin (child)
symbol.
3. If they are to be treated the same as a terminal symbol, the user may work in the
Terminal Plan area of the program. The discipline (prompts, menu picks, listing
formats, etc.) of the program may need to be changed to reflect the Pin Plan
instead of the Terminal Plan. The end result is a connection symbol with the
ability to graphically show all target destinations off the symbol’s device
identification.
In addition, symbols from groups TS4, TS5, and TS6 have these characteristics of
parent and child symbols:
6-66
1. They allow a cross referencing relationship between graphical entities on the

schematic pages. The plug symbol may be located on a page, while all its
associated pin symbols are placed throughout the entire schematic. Much like
the coil–to–contact cross referencing relationship, the pin chart will display the
page / line number of all associated pin symbols.
2. They allow the parent component of the relationship to receive a part number
from the parts database. The user may use all variables associated to the parts
database.
3. The symbols then will be included in a device relationship which the user
defines. Through error checking, this device relationship will prevent the user
from using the same pin number twice and assigning too many pin numbers to
the selected plug.
Creating a pin chart involves creating the three components: pin symbol, plug
symbol, cross reference symbol, and creating the device relationship between them.
If you are unfamiliar with the basic process of creating symbols and devices in
RSWire, refer to the previous subsections.
Plug Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function,
create a parent symbol (Plug ) used for cross referencing. The symbol can be created
graphically as a 8 pin “D” type plug end. Label the pin numbers A1 through A8.
Use the following symbol creation criteria.
Symbol Name: PLUGA
Layout Direction: Horizontal
Description: Parent symbol for pin charts
Symbol Group: TS4
The symbol will require a device ID such as “PLUG”. Connection points with
associated text are not necessary. This symbol is primarily used to display the page
and line number of its associated pins across the schematic. Make the circles in the
plug large enough to hold cross reference data (circles 0.6 inch in diameter will hold
0.1 inch text).
6-67
A5
A1
A6
A2
A7 Plug
A3
A8
A4
Cross Ref Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify
function, create a cross reference symbol which will display Page / Line Number of
child components. The symbol can be created using only 8 text variables, and no
graphic entities. The variables are arranged so that the appropriate cross reference
information will appear directly inside of the pin holes of the plug symbol. Be aware
of the label origins and text size to ensure proper fit. Use the following symbol
creation criteria:
Symbol Name: XPLUG
Layout direction: Horizontal
Description: Cross reference symbol for pin charts
Symbol Group: TS6
The symbol will require no device ID, and no connection points with associated
text. The symbol will only be used for cross referencing the pin symbol to the plug
symbol. The reference point of this symbol should match the reference point of the
plug symbol so the cross references will be positioned correctly. Use the Draw >
Text function to enter “?1” through “?8”.
?5
Cross Reference Symbol
?1
For Plug Symbol
?6
?2
?7
?3
?8
?4
6-68
Pin Symbol Creation – Using the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function,
create a child symbol (Pin) used for cross referencing. Use the following symbol
creation criteria.
Symbol Name: PIN
Layout Direction: Horizontal
Description: Child symbol for pin charts
Symbol Main Group: TS5
Give the pin symbol the same device ID tag used by the parent symbol (“PLUG”).
For the first (right) connection point, place the connection point text next to the
device ID and enter a “?” for the text. For the second connection point, place the
text reference point anywhere and enter no text.
The pin device ID is handled much like a terminal symbol; the device ID tag serves
as the plug identifier, and the first connection point text serves as the pin number
inside of the plug. Be aware of the label origin of the connection point text so that it
does not run into the symbol.
Device ID Connection Point Text

For Connection Point 1
= Symbol Reference Point

PLUG ?
= Connection Points
Device Type Creation – Finally, create a device type relationship between the
previously created plug symbol, pin symbol, and cross reference symbol using the
Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. Allow the relationship to contain
8 pin symbols, with associated connection point text calling out the pin number
being used. Use the following criteria.
6-69
Device Type PLUGA Search
Parent PLUGA
Child 1 PIN A1
Child 2 PIN A2
Child 3 PIN A3
Child 4 PIN A4
Child 5 PIN A5
Child 6 PIN A6
Child 7 PIN A7
Child 8 PIN A8
Child 9
Cross Ref. XPLUG Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position
Pin Chart Usage – You can test the pin chart on a drawing page (it must be online).
Place the PLUGA plug symbol anywhere on a page. When prompted for the device
name, enter PLUGA. Then place pin symbols elsewhere in the drawing, assigning
the same device ID as the plug symbol and with connection point text of A1, A2,
etc. The location of the pins will appear in the plug symbol as shown below.
6-70
Plug 418
6-71
Creating Form C Contacts
There are two methods of creating and displaying Form C contacts in RSWire:
1. Create a child symbol with three connection points
2. Use two child symbols that share a common connection point designation
The first method reduces the likelihood of connection errors (e.g. different wires
connected to the same connection point). The second method allows more flexibility
in where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. However the system cannot
determine that both common connections share the same wire number.
The two methods are described in the following sections.
6-72
Method 1: Create a child symbol with three connection points
This method allows creation of Form C contact symbols which are graphically
shown as a single symbol with three connection points (see examples below). The
three connection points are indicated by the 1, 2 and 3 designations.
CR1 CR1
2 2
1 1
3 3
The steps to implement this method are:
1. Create the child symbol. See page 6-6 for the symbol creation procedure.
When you define the symbol, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol with
cross reference). Assign three connection points as indicated by the “x’s” in the
above figure (remember the order in which you assign them). Assign a device
ID tag that corresponds to the desired parent symbol (such as “CR” for a relay).
Use the Manage > Symbol > Cross Ref. Position function to select a position
for cross reference information.
2. Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbol with the desired
parent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. Enter three
connection point designations for each Form C child symbol in the device (see
example figure on next page). In the example, the device type has been named
2C, and the Form C child symbol name (the symbol created in step 1) is
FORMC.
Important The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device Type
New/Modify dialog box must match the order in which the connection points were
defined when the child symbol was created.
6-73
Device Type 2C Search
Parent CR 10 11
Child 1 FORMC 123
Child 2 FORMC 456
Child 3
Child 4
Child 5
Child 6
Child 7
Child 8
Child 9
Cross Ref. Q20 Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position
Note In the example shown above, the cross reference symbol Q20 is specified. This
symbol will serve to show the location of the Form C child symbols, but graphically
it suggests that these are normally open contacts. You may wish to create a cross
reference symbol that shows the Form C contact symbol.
3. When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for its
device type. Use the device type created in step 2.
4. When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as the
parent symbol.
Method 2: Use two child symbols that share a common connection point
designation
In this method you use two separate child symbols that share a common connection
point designation. These two symbols are tied to the parent symbol through a device
type definition and by assigning the same device ID as the parent symbol. This
method allows you to place the two child symbols on separate lines or even separate
pages of the project.
6-74
Parent Symbol
CR112
CR 1 2
10 11 114
CR 1 3
Child Symbol
CR112 LT114 116
G
Common 1 2
Connection 112
Point Child Symbol
Designation CR112 LT116
R
1 3
Important When using this method, RSWire has no way of checking the potential of the
common connection point. It might be possible in the schematic to have a different
wire connected to the child symbol’s common connection point. The user must be
aware of this possibility.
The steps to implement this method are:
1. You can use existing child symbols or create custom Form C child symbols. If
you create custom symbols, select the PS2 symbol group (Child symbol with
cross reference). Assign a common connection point designation for the two
symbols (in the previous figure “1” is the common designation.) See page 6-6
for the symbol creation procedure.
2. Create a device type that associates the Form C child symbols with the desired
parent symbol. See page 6-89 for device type creation procedure. In the
example below the device type has been named FC2. The existing child
symbols CRNO and CRNC are used in this example.
Important The order of the connection point designations entered in the Device Definition
dialog box must match the order in which the connection points were defined when
the child symbol was created. On most existing RSWire symbols the left connection
point was defined first.
6-75
Device Type FC2 Search
Parent CR 10 11
Child 1 FORMC 12
Child 2 FORMC 13
Child 3
Child 4
Child 5
Child 6
Child 7
Child 8
Child 9
Cross Ref. Q11 Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position
3. When you place the parent symbol in the schematic the software will ask for its
device type. Use the device type created in step 2.
4. When you place the Form C child symbols, assign the same device ID as the
parent symbol.
Recall that by using this second method with separate child symbols you have more
flexibility in where the two contacts are placed in the schematic. But because you
can place the symbols on separate lines the system cannot determine that both
common connections share the same wire number.
6-76
Creating Signal Cross Reference Symbols
The various kinds of signal cross reference symbols are described beginning on
page 5-59. If desired, you can create custom signal cross reference symbols.
There are outgoing signal cross references and incoming signal cross references.
The symbol group that you choose when creating the symbol determines whether
the reference is written on one line or multiple lines. The symbol group also
determines whether or not the symbol is a star type signal cross reference.
Symbol Group Description

SG7 Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG8)
SG8 Outgoing signal (star configuration, same as SG7)
Symbol Creation Procedure – The following is the general procedure for creating a
signal cross reference symbol. The selections and entries you make will vary
depending on the specific type of symbol being created.
4. In the Symbol Name field, enter the desired symbol name. Press the <Enter>
key.
6-77
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: name List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Description:
Signal Cross Reference Symbol
Symbol Group:
SG_ _________
OK Cancel Help...
5. Select Horizontal or Vertical for Preferred Direction (varies with symbol type).
6. Select the Snapmode:Nearest Endpoint checkbox so that the symbol will

automatically position itself on the end of a wire when placed.
7. Enter the desired description in the Description field.
8. In the Symbol Group field, select one of the SG symbol groups (described
above), depending on whether the symbol is incoming or outgoing, star type or
non–star type, one line notation or multi–line notation.
reference point at the intersection of two 0.5 inch grid lines. Zoom in for a
better view of the work area.
6-78
11. Set the grid to 0.05 inch (1 mm).
12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Device ID function. When prompted to “Define
Device ID position,” select the appropriate position.
13. In the Device ID Parameter dialog box, enter the desired device ID tag (such as
“L”) in the Device ID field. Select an appropriate label origin. Select OK to
continue.
14. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. When prompted to
“Locate connection point,” select the same point selected for the reference
point. When prompted to “Define reference point of text,” select a point. In
some cases you will need to delete the “?” in the Connection Point field of the
Connection Point Parameters dialog box so that no connection point text is
used. Connection point text is used only if a single reference is to appear at
some point other than the device ID. Select OK to continue.
15. Draw the remainder of the symbol, (which in many cases may consist only of a
single drawing line perpendicular to the wire).
16. For a star type outgoing signal with multiple references, enter an appropriate
number of attribute texts. Use the Draw > Text function to place “?” characters.
When prompted for attributes, select Attribute–Activate and enter a number in
the 2000 series (2000 for the first reference, 2001 for the next one, etc.).
6-79

Symbol Text:
?
“Activate”
No: 2000
Enter Address
Attribute
I/O Text
Number
17. Save the symbol: select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a
6-80
Create Macro
A macro is a group of schematic elements that are stored as a group and can be
placed in a drawing in one step. The macro can contain multiple symbols. If, for
example, there is a particular circuit which is needed repeatedly, you can store it as a
macro and place it quickly and easily. Symbols within the macro are recognized and
automatically addressed by the software (and can be modified by the user) just as
when individual symbols are placed in a drawing.
Custom title blocks and drawing borders can be stored as macros and can be placed
automatically on any new drawing. See page 4-14 for how to assign page macros.
Macros can be created on a blank page, or a portion of an existing drawing can be

stored as a macro.
In this section, an overview of the macro creation procedure will be given first,
followed by an example.
Macro Creation Procedure – The drawing elements that will comprise the macro
should be put down before selecting the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.
1. Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.
Manage Macro New/Modify
The New/Modify Macro dialog box will appear.
New/Modify Macro
Macro Name: List...

Macro Description:
Maintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering
OK Cancel Help...
6-81
2. Enter macro name, description. Fields are provided for the macro name (up
to 14 characters) and description. Use the List button to see a list of existing
macro names. If you wish to include foreign language text strings in the
description, select the Search Language Text button to select from the available
strings.
3. Does macro contain sequential terminals? There is a checkbox labeled

Maintain Sequence of Terminal Numbers During Renumbering. This should
be selected if the macro contains any terminals that must be treated as a group
in the terminal plan (must not be split up in the terminal sorting process). If the
checkbox is selected, the terminals in the macro will also be renumbered as a
group if terminals are renumbered.
5. Select base point. The software will then prompt you to Define Base Point.
This is the reference point that determines where the macro will appear in
relation to the point selected when it is placed in a drawing. (For macros such as
title blocks that are automatically placed by RSWire in the same location, select
a base point of x:0.000, y:0.000.)
Note Before the macro is saved you can change the base point with the Manage > Macro
> Reference Point function.
6. Select objects. The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select objects
by windowing them (or selecting individually) on the drawing page. Press the
<Enter> key when all items have been selected. The Manage > Macro > Select
Items function allows you to select additional items at any time before the
macro is stored. Line numbers and other automatically placed elements will not
be included in the macro.
Note If you wish to bring in an AutoCAD drawing use the Insert > Block > Insert
function. Select an insertion point on the drawing page. It is not necessary to
explode the inserted drawing elements unless there are items within blocks that you
wish to change or remove. Explode the DWG elements with the Insert > Block >
Explode function.
7. Store the macro. Select the Manage > Macro > Save function to store the
macro.
The software will display the message “Macro stored.”
6-82
Note Attribute text: if the macro is to contain symbols with attribute text (text that
prompts you for a value when the symbol is placed), note the following. When the
macro is created, this text must consist of an unanswered prompt, indicated by a “?”
on the screen. If the attribute has already been assigned a value and a macro is then
created, a new value will not be prompted when the macro is placed. Use the Modify
> Symbol function to change this text back to a “?” before creating the macro. (You
can also place the symbol again and press <Enter> when prompted for the attribute
value.)
You can cancel the macro creation procedure with the Manage > Macro > Cancel
function.
Macro Wire Numbers – Wire numbers can be stored as part of the macro. These
will appear when the macro is placed. They will be altered by the system according
to the following rules:
1. If a numbered wire in the macro is connected to an existing wire that already

has a wire number, the existing wire number will be used.
2. If the macro contains a signal cross reference that already exists in the project,
any existing wire number connected with that signal will be used.
3. If any wire numbers in the macro duplicate wire numbers that already exist in
the project, a “?” will be added to the duplicate wire numbers in the macro.
Create Title Block Macro
RSWire users can create page title blocks which automatically appear on schematic
drawing pages. A title block is created and stored as a macro. Variable text can be
placed in the title block when it is created, and these texts are automatically replaced
with project data (date, project name, page number, etc.) when the page is displayed.
A default title block can be named in the New Project dialog box when a project is
created (see page 3-6). This will be placed automatically on every page in the
project. An appropriate title block can also be specified in the New Page dialog box
when a drawing page is created (see page 4-14) which will override the default title
block. Existing title blocks in a drawing can be changed using the Manage > Page >
Modify function.
Manage Page Modify
Title Block Creation Procedure – Use the following steps to create a title block
macro:
6-83
1. Open a blank drawing page (see page 4-11).
2. Select Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function.
Tools Project Settings General Defaults
3. The General Defaults dialog box will appear. De–select the Display Title Block
checkbox and select the OK button.
4. Now you can draw the elements of the title block. These will usually consist of
drawing lines and text.
If you wish to include an existing graphic element, such as a company logo, in

the title block, it is best to do this before creating the rest of the title block. You
may bring ACAD .dwg files using Insert > Block > Insert (AutoCAD text
attributes will not be reorganized).
Insert Block Insert
Typically, the title block consists of an area at the bottom of the page divided
into boxes for different pieces of information. Use the Draw > Graphic > Line
or Draw > Graphic > Box function to draw these areas. Do not use Wires or
Logical Boxes when drawing these lines or boxes.
Note RSWire has a Frame function which automatically draws a single line border
around the extents of the page format when the page is plotted. Therefore it is not
necessary to make this frame part of the title block. The Format > Layer function
can be used to turn off the frame layer, if desired.
Use the Draw > Text function to label the various areas of the title block.
Variable text which will be replaced with project data is entered as a question
mark followed by the appropriate variable name (for example, ?page for page
number). A list of available variables is given on page 6-87.
The following figure shows the macro TITLED, one of the title blocks included
with RSWire. Note the variable (?) text.
6-84
Title block macro TITLED

PROJECT: DRAWING–NO.:
DATE NAME ?title03
?project
?addr01 JOB–NO.:
DRAWN ?addr02 ?title01 ?title02
?pgdescr02?pgdescr04
BY ?addr03
?addr04 PAGE DESCRIPTION: SHEET
CKD ?addr05 ?pgdescr01

BY ?pgdescr03 ?pgdescr05 ?page of ?prpgno
?pgdescr18
5. Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function (see page 6-81).
6. Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/Modify
Macro dialog box. Select OK.
7. The software will prompt you to Define Base Point. The base point of the title
block macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XY coordinate
system, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, when prompted for a base
point, you can either enter these coordinates on the command line or you can
position the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point (coordinates are displayed above
the drawing area) and press the left mouse button.
8. When the block is drawn as desired, you must select all the items to be included
in the macro. Use the Manage > Macro > Select Items function. The software
will prompt you to “Select objects.” Select objects by windowing them (or
selecting individually) on the drawing page. (Or enter ALL in the Command
Line.)
9. The software will highlight all of the selected objects. Click the right mouse
button, or press the <Enter> key, to confirm the selected objects are grouped.
10. Use the Save function on the Manage > Macro submenu to store the macro.
The software will display the message “Macro was stored.”
11. After the macro is stored, delete the title block from your page by selecting the
Manage > Page > Clear function.
12. To add the title block to your current project: Select Manage > Project >
Modify. Add the title block macro name to the Title Block Macro field.
To add the title block to a single page: Display the page and select Manage >
Page > Modify. Add the macro name to the Title Block field.
6-85
Note The above example shows the variables ?addr01, ?addr02, etc., each of which
represents one line of the address file. See page 7-17 for more information on the
address file. Using these variables instead of a fixed address allows you to change
the address without editing the title block macro.
6-86
Available Title Block Variables:
Project–Related Variables (File > New > Project function)
Variable: Description:
?project Current Project
?install Current Installation
?location Current Location
?page Current Page
?prpgno Total drawing pages in project
?inpgno Total drawing pages in installation
Next Page Flag: + following pages
?nextpgfl
- no more pages
?nextpgno Next page number in current installation
?plotdate Displays current date when page is created or plotted
?plottime Displays current time when page is created or plotted
?prdescr01 Project description 1 (Comment")
?prdescr02 Project description 2
?prdescr03
Project description 3
etc.
?prdescr09 Project description09
?title01 Project title data 01 (Description")
?title02 Project title data 02 (Job Number")
?title03
Project title data 03 (Drawing Number")
etc.
?title20 Project title data 20
6-87
Address File Variables (enter using Tools > System Settings > Address File)
?addr01 Address file: line 01
?addr03
Address file: line 03
etc.
Page–Related Variables (File > New > Page function)
Page description 1
?pgdescr01
(File > New > Page, Parameter" button)
?pgdescr02 Page description 2 - date
?pgdescr03 Page description 3
?pgdescr04
Page description 4 - user name
etc.
6-88
Create Device Type

The Manage > Device Type function is used to create a device type.
When you place a parent symbol on a drawing, the software will ask for its device
type.
A device type specifies a combination of parent symbol, child symbol(s) and cross
reference symbol. This allows RSWire to know which child symbols are associated
with a parent symbol and which cross reference symbol to place next to the parent
symbol. Once RSWire knows the device type, it can also perform error–checking
used. For more information on parent and child symbols, see page 5-25.
A number of device types are provided with the software. These can be listed with
the Reports > Libraries > Device Type Full (or Device Brief) function.
You may also wish to create your own, custom device types. For this, use the
Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. (An example device is created on
page 6-34.)
Select:
Manage Device Type New/Modify
The following Device Type New/Modify dialog box will appear.
6-89
Device Type Search
Parent
Child 1
Child 2
Child 3
Child 4
Child 5
Child 6
Child 7
Child 8
Child 9
Cross Ref. Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position
Device Type – Enter a name for the device type up to 14 characters long. Press the
<Enter> key. Select the Search button to see a list of existing device types.
Group – Two choices are available: Relay,I/O,Plug and Cable. Choose Cable when
defining a cable device type and Relay,I/O,Plug for all other device types.
Note You must select a group for the device type before entering a description (see next
paragraph). Failure to follow this order of entry may result in the device type not
appearing on the device type list.
Description – This button allows a description of the device to be entered which

will appear on device listings. Three description fields are available. If you wish to
use foreign language text strings in the descriptions, select the Search Language
Text button to select from the available strings. If a Cable device group was
selected, three additional fields will be accessible which allow the user to enter a
cable type description, gauge and a part number.
6-90
Device Type Description

Description
Descr. 1
Descr. 2
Descr. 3
Cable
Cable Type
Gauge
Part No.
OK Cancel Help...
Parent Symbol Name – Enter the symbol name of the parent symbol of the device.
Child 1, 2, etc. – Enter the names of child symbols in the order in which they will be
used in the cross reference symbol (i.e., the first child corresponds to the “?1” text in
the cross reference symbol, the second child corresponds to “?2”, etc.). 256 Child
fields are available.
Connection Points – Optional connection point text can be entered in these fields
which will overwrite any connection point text that was specified when the parent or
child symbol was created. Separate each connection point text with a space. If more
than two texts are entered, they will all be displayed when the symbol is placed, and
the unwanted texts can be deleted at that time.
Cross Ref. – Enter the name of the cross reference symbol that will hold the cross
reference information for the parent/child symbols.
Delta X, Delta Y – The values entered in these fields determine where the cross
reference symbol will appear on the drawing in relation to the parent symbol. Refer
to the following illustration. (If the Absolute Position checkbox is selected, the Y
measurement will be from the drawing origin point: 0.0, 0.0.) The distances entered
are between the reference point of the parent symbol and the reference point of the
cross reference symbol.
6-91
dx=0 mm
dx=1.50”
dy=–0.5”
dy=75 mm
Bottom of Page
JIC Distance Values IEC Distance Values
Absolute Position – Determines whether the Delta Y field is measured from the
drawing origin (0.0, 0.0) or from the reference point of the parent symbol. Select the
checkbox to measure from the drawing origin. This setting is typically used for IEC
format drawings where the cross references appear in a row below the parent
symbols.
Once the Device Type New/Modify dialog box has been filled out, select the OK
button to complete the creation of the device type.
6-92
Delete, Copy, Rename for Symbols, Macros, and Devices

Existing symbols, macros, and devices can be deleted, copied and renamed in the
RSWire database by using the appropriate Manage submenu function.
Manage Symbol Delete

Copy
Rename
The above figure shows a portion of the Manage > Symbol submenu. Similar
submenus are provided for the Manage > Macro and Manage > Device Type
functions.
Delete Symbol, Macro, or Device
You can delete a symbol, macro or device to remove it from the RSWire database,
making it unavailable for use.
Symbols – If you delete a symbol from the database, it will not be available for
placing in new drawings and the system will not be able to display the symbol when
existing drawings containing the system are loaded. When you read such a page the
system will display the message “Warning: Symbol not in the catalog” and will
include the name of the missing symbol. When the page is displayed, the symbol
will not appear, although the device ID will remain.
Macros – If you delete a macro from the database, it will not be available for
placing in new drawings. In most cases, a page containing a deleted macro will still
display the macro when the page is loaded. However title block macros and ladder
line number macros will not appear if they have been deleted from the database.
Device Types – If you delete a device type from the database, it will not be available
for new drawings. If you read a page containing a device type that has been deleted
or is otherwise not in the database, the system will display a message “Error while
reading project data. Device not defined.” It will then list the parent and child
symbols that are part of the device in question.
6-93
To delete a symbol, macro, or device from the RSWire database:
1. Select the appropriate Delete function.
Manage Symbol Delete
or Manage Macro Delete
or Manage Device Type Delete
2. The Delete dialog box will appear. In the Name field, enter the name of the
symbol, macro, or device you wish to delete from the database. Select the
Search button to display a list of symbols, macros, or devices. Select the OK
button to delete the selected item.
Delete Symbol
Symbol Delete
or Macro Delete Symbol Name:
or Device Delete
Search
OK Cancel Help...
Note If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to delete a symbol, it
indicates that no symbol catalogs are currently open. To open the catalog, load
(read) a drawing page that contains at least one symbol from the desired symbol
catalog.
6-94
Copy Symbol, Macro, or Device
You can copy existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different name to
the copy.
This is useful if you wish to create a new symbol, macro, or device type that is
similar to an existing one. You can modify the copy as desired instead of creating
the new symbol, macro, or device from scratch. See page 6-97.
To copy a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database:
1. Select the appropriate Copy function.
Manage Symbol Copy
or Manage Macro Copy
or Manage Device Type Copy
2. The Copy dialog box will appear (Macro Copy dialog box shown).
Copy Macro
Macro Name: To Macro Name:
Search
OK Cancel Help...
3. Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (If
you wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a list
which can be selected from.)
4. Enter the name the copy is to have in the To Name field on the right.
5. Select the OK button to create copy.

Note If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to copy a symbol, it
catalog.
6-95
Rename Symbol, Macro, or Device
You can rename existing symbols, macros, and devices, assigning a different name
to the original item.
To rename a symbol, macro, or device in the RSWire database:
1. Select the appropriate Rename function.
Manage Symbol Rename
or Manage Macro Rename
or Manage Device Type Rename
2. The Rename dialog box will appear (Device Rename dialog box shown).
Device Type Rename
Device Name: To Device Name:
Search
OK Cancel Help...
3. Enter the existing symbol, macro, or device type name in the left Name field. (If
you wish to see a list of existing items, use the Search button to display a list
which can be selected from.)
4. Enter the new name the item is to have in the To Name field on the right.
5. Select the OK button to rename the item.

Note If you get the message “No catalog loaded” when attempting to rename a symbol, it
catalog.
6-96
Modify Symbol, Macro, or Device

This section describes how to change a symbol, macro or device type as it is stored
in the catalog, in other words, changing its basic definition in the software. (To
change a single use of a symbol in a drawing use the Modify > Symbol function.)
To Modify an Existing Symbol:
1. Display a blank, offline page.
2. Use the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function and enter the name of the
existing symbol. Press the <Enter> key.
3. The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish to
modify it. Select Yes to modify.
4. Make changes (if any) in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box and select OK.
5. The software will prompt you to select a reference point in the drawing for the
symbol. Select a point.
If the symbol you have chosen to modify exists in the first symbol catalog in the
symbol catalog search path, it will appear automatically at the selected reference
point. If no symbol appears, it probably exists in a different catalog. If so you
must place the symbol in the drawing using the Insert > Symbol by Name or
Insert > Select Icon function. (The symbol catalog path can be found in the
RS\WORK\ECSCAD.CFG file.
6. Perform the desired modifications. To change the symbol’s reference point,

device ID, connection points, or cross reference position, use the appropriate
function in the Manage > Symbol submenu.
7. Store the symbol to save the changes. (Use the Manage > Symbol > Save
function and define the area to be included in the symbol.)
6-97
To Modify an Existing Macro:
1. Use the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function and enter the name of the
existing macro. Select OK.
2. The software will prompt you that it already exists and ask if you wish to
overwrite it. Select Yes followed by OK to modify.
3. The software will prompt you to select a base point (reference point). Select any
point. You can change it later.
4. The software will prompt you to select objects. At this point press the <Esc>
key to escape from the macro creation process. The software will prompt
“Selected item not valid.” Select OK to continue.
5. Place the existing macro on the page.
a. Select the Insert > Macro By Name function. Enter the macro name in the
Name field and select OK.
b. The macro will appear at the cursor. Click the left mouse button to place the
macro in the drawing.
c. Select the Accept All button to insert device IDs in the macro.
6. Perform the desired modifications on the macro.
7. Select the items to be included in the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro >
Select Items function and select the objects. Press <Enter> when all objects
have been selected.)
8. Select a reference point for the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Reference
Point function and select the desired reference point.)
9. Store the macro. (Use the Manage > Macro > Save function.)
6-98
To Modify an Existing Device Type:
1. Use the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function and enter the name of
the existing device type in the Device Type field. Press the <Enter> key.
2. The software will prompt you that the device type already exists and ask if you
wish to modify it. Select OK to modify.
3. Perform the desired modifications in the Device Type New/Modify dialog box
and select the OK button to save the changes.
6-99
Multiline Styles
Multilines are wires consisting of multiple parallel elements. Multiline wires are
drawn with the Draw > Wire > Multiline function (or using the Multiline button on
the toolbar). Multilines can have various combinations of solid, dashed and dotted
lines in various colors. These combinations are called multiline styles.
You can select from the available multiline styles using the Format > Multiline
Style function.
Format Multiline Style
The Multiline Styles dialog box will appear.
Multiline Styles
Multiline Style
Current: 3_PHASE
Name: 3_PHASE
Description: L1,L2,L3
Load... Save... Add Rename
Element Properties...
Multiline Properties...
OK Cancel Help...
The following fields and functions are available:
Current – This field displays and sets the current multiline style. Select a name from
the list to make it current. If there are multiple styles, the name of the current style is
selected.
6-100
Name – This field names a new multiline style or renames one. The element and
multiline properties are unavailable until you enter a new name and make it current
by choosing Add.
Enter a name and choose Add, and then save the multiline style to a multiline library
(MLN) file. The software saves the definition in the MLN file you specify. If you
specify an MLN file that already exists, the new style definition is added to the file
and existing definitions are not erased. The default file name is
pr/menu/mnu/acad.mln.
To rename a style, enter a name and choose Rename. You cannot rename, modify,
or delete the default STANDARD multiline style. To make a copy of the current
style, enter a name and then choose Save. Multiline style names adhere to the
naming conventions for named objects.
Description – This field allows you to enter a description for a multiline style. Enter
up to 255 characters, including spaces.
Load – This button displays the Load Multiline Styles dialog box, in which you can
load multiline styles from a specified MLN file.
Save – This button saves or copies a multiline style. Enter a name and then choose
Save.
Add – This button adds the multiline style in the Name field to the Current list.
Rename – This button renames a multiline style. Enter a name and then select
Rename.
Element Properties – This button displays the Element Properties dialog box. You
cannot edit the element properties of an existing multiline style. Here you can set the
properties, such as the number, offset, color, and linetype, of new and existing
multiline elements.
Multiline Properties – Displays the Multiline Properties dialog box. Here you can
set multiline properties, such as the display of segment joints, the start and end caps
and their angle, and the background color.
6-101
Element Properties
Select the Element Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box.
Element Properties
Elements: Offset Color Ltype

2.0 BYLAYER CONTINUOUS
Add Delete Offset 2.000
Color... BYLAYER
Linetype... CONTINUOUS
OK Cancel Help...
Elements – displays the elements in the current multiline style. Each line element in
the style is defined by its offset from the multiline origin (0.0), color and linetype.
The line elements are always displayed in descending order of their offsets.
Add – Select this button to add a new line element to the multiline style.
Delete – Select this button to delete a line element from the multiline style.
Offset – This field specifies the offset of the line element in the multiline style.
Color – Select this button display and set the color of line elements in the multiline
style. The software will display the Select Color dialog box.
Linetype – Select this button to display and set the linetype for line elements in the
multiline style.
6-102
Multiline Properties
Select the Multiline Properties button in the Multiline Styles dialog box.
Multiline Properties
Display joints
Caps
Start End
Line
Outer arc
Inner arcs
Angle 90.000 90.000
Fill
On Color... BYBLOCK
OK Cancel Help...
Display joints – Controls the display of the joints at the vertices of each multiline
segment. A joint is also known as a miter. Joints typically would not be used for
wires.
Caps – These functions control the start and end caps of the multiline.
Line – Creates a straight line across each end of the multiline.
Outer arc – Creates an arc between the outermost elements of the multiline.
Inner arcs – Creates an arc between pairs of inner elements. If there’s an odd
number of elements, the center line is unconnected. For example, if there are 6
elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 5 and elements 3 and 4. If there are
7 elements, inner arcs connect elements 2 and 6 and elements 3 and 5. Element
4 is left unconnected.
Angle – Specifies the angle of the end caps.
6-103
Fill – These functions control the background fill of the multiline.
On – Turns background fill on.
Color – Displays and sets the color of the background fill. The software will
display the Select Color dialog box. You can also enter a color name or number
in the box.
6-104
Settings
7 Settings
There are a variety of parameters that can be set that determine how RSWireTM
Designer will operate. The functions that allow these settings to be made are found
mainly in the Tools and Format pulldown menus.

System Settings
Report Settings
Reports: Description Files
Printer Configuration
Command Protection
Navigator
Display Settings
Grid Settings
Address Files
Project Settings
General Defaults
Page Control Functions
Page Formats
Programmable Controller Settings
Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Device ID Style
Object Defaults
Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration
Terminal Plan Configuration
Pin–Plug Plan Configuration
Object Styles
Text Styles
Dimension Styles
Preferences
7-1
Settings
System Settings
Grid Settings
The Tools > System Settings > Grid Settings function defines the grid size of the
drawing. The size of the drawing grid determines how drawing elements are
positioned and where connections can be made. When placed on the drawing, the
reference points of symbols, text, lines, etc., snap to the nearest grid line.
To set the grid size, select:
Tools System Settings Grid Settings
The Grid Settings dialog box will appear.
System Settings
Grid Settings Default Settings Report Settings Format Files Printer Configura
Command Protection
X Y
0.0500 0.0500
0.0100 0.0100
0.1250 0.1250
0.2500 0.2500
0.5000 0.5000
1.0000 1.0000
2.0000 2.0000
Current Value: 0.0500 0.0500
7-2
Settings
This dialog box lists a group of fields for X and Y values from which the user may
choose (these values represent the current drawing units – inches or millimeters).
The user can select these values by placing the cursor and pressing the <Enter> key.
Alternately, the user can select a radio button beside the desired value to select both
x and y values. The selected value will then appear in the Current Value field.
Select the OK button to put the newly selected values into effect.
The user can also enter new grid values in any of the X and Y fields. These values
can then be selected as described above. Select the Save button to save these newly
entered values for future work sessions.
Important (AutoCAD R14 Add–on version only) Do not use a grid value having units smaller
than thousandths of an inch (.001 inch). Use of such a grid value can result in
unrecognized connections in the schematic drawings.
7-3
Settings
Default Settings
The Tools > System Settings > Default Settings function allows several settings to
be made.
System Settings
Grid Settings Default Settings Printer Configuration Command Protectio
General System Settings
Default to Uppercase
Dialog Language
Symbol and macro names in RSWire are case sensitive – they must be entered
exactly as they exist in the symbol catalog. When you select the Default to
Uppercase checkbox, any symbol or macro names you enter will be converted to
uppercase letters, which is how the symbols provided with the software are named.
The Dialog Language section, allows you to select the language used for dialog
boxes, menus, text attributes, and help screens. The choices are German, English,
French, Italian and Spanish.
Select the Save button to save your settings for future work sessions. Select the OK
button to load the new settings.
Note To change back to English from another language, the System Settings function is
located under the Format menu.
7-4
Settings
Report Settings
The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box that
allows a number of list related parameters to be set. These settings determine how
the lists will be formatted and handled by the system.
Tools System Settings Report Settings
System Settings
Report Settings Format Files Printer Configuration Command Protection
Filter Sort Output

OFF OFF Screen
Printer
File
ON ON Project
Interactive
Graphic Output
7-5
Settings
The following parameters can be set:
Filter – When On is selected, lists can be filtered according to wildcard strings

entered by the user when the list is generated. For example, when Filter is On and
the symbol list function is selected, a dialog box with the following fields will
appear:
Symbol: = *
Description: = *
By entering “P*” in the Symbol field, the list will contain only those symbols whose
names begin with P. By entering “*NC*” only those symbols containing NC will be
listed. An entry of “*” will include all information. Similarly, the Description field
can also be used to filter the list. When the Filter radio button is Off, no filtering is
performed.
Sort – When On is selected, lists will be sorted by selected fields according to sort
variables in the list generator file (the format of each list is determined by a list
generator file located in the RS\SYSCON\LIST directory). When Off is selected, no
sorting is performed. See page 14-11.
Output – These five radio buttons allow you to select the list output medium.
Selecting Screen will cause the list to be displayed on the screen. Printer will send
the list to the currently active LPT port (which may be different than the default
AutoCAD printer). Selecting File will cause the list to be stored as a text file in the
RS\TMP subdirectory. Selecting Project will activate the Text On Drawing function
which allows the list to be placed on a drawing page (see page 5-88). Selecting the
Interactive option will cause the software to prompt you for the output type (screen,
printer, file, project) whenever you generate a report. This removes the need to make
the output setting before you generate the report.
Graphic Output – This checkbox allows extended IBM graphic characters in the
lists for borders and other purposes. When the Graphic Output checkbox is turned
off these characters are translated to pipes and dashes for use where the extended
graphic characters are not supported.
Select the Save button to save the current settings for future work sessions.
7-6
Settings
Report Format Files
The Tools > System Settings > Reports: Description Files function assigns a file
to either a report or list function. If you create a custom list generator file you must
assign this file to the appropriate report or list function within RSWire.
Select:
Tools System Settings Reports: Description Files
The following dialog box appears:
System Settings
List Name File Name Printer

Conn. List I/O List PLC.LST Default
Conn. List Wire Diagram List WIREDG.LST Default
Conn. List Wire Label List WIRELAB.LST Default
Conn. List Wiring List WIRE.LST Default
Fld. Wire Cable + Wire List FLDWIRE.LST Default
Fld. Wire Cable List CABLE.LST Default
Fld. Wire Terminal List TERM.LST Default
Fld. Wire Terminal Strip List TSTRIP.LST Default
Gen. Info Device Types [Brief] DEVICE2.LST Default
Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed] DEVICE1.LST Default
Gen. Info Macro Directory MACRO.LST Default
Gen. Info Page Formats FORMAT.LST Default
Conn. List I/O List PLC.LST
Printer
Default 1 2 3 4 5 File
7-7
Settings
List Name, File Name, and Printer – This is a description of available reports listed
in alphabetical order by name of report. A corresponding file name for each report
as well as the defined printer for the report is also listed.
(List Name/File) – When you select a report name from the upper list, this field
displays the name of the operator file that will be used to print the selected
(highlighted) list. If you wish to use a different file to generate the selected list, you
can enter the filename in this field.
Note The name of this field will change, depending on which list is selected.
Printer – These radio buttons select to which printer a file will print. Choose from a
default printer or one of five printers listed in the Printer Configuration dialog box.
Each report can be defined to go to a print file for printing at a later time.
7-8
Settings
Printer Configuration
Use the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration tab to select the printer
to be used for lists and other printed information.
Select:
Tools System Settings Printer Configuration
System Settings
Printer Lines Symbol Set Options
1. Printer 60 850 ISO

60 850 ISO
File
Default Printer
1 2 3 4 5 File
7-9
Settings
The Printer column lists the available printer drivers. These are batch files located
in the RS\WORK directory. See page 9-3 for more information.
The Lines column allows the number of lines per page to be specified for each
printer. This applies to list outputs.
The Symbol Set area allows you to select standard ASCII character set (850) or ISO
(International Standards Organization) foreign language symbol sets. If you select
ISO certain inappropriate characters may appear in lists generated using the default
format files supplied with RSWire.
Use the Options column to enter appropriate options for each printer.
The Default Printer area allows one of the printer drivers to be selected as the
default printer. Selecting File will send print outputs to file in the RS\TMP
directory.
Select the Save button to save the printer settings for future work sessions.
Select the Cancel button to quit, discard all changes and exit the dialog box.
Select OK to exit the printer configuration dialog box.
7-10
Settings
Command Protection
The Tools > System Settings > Command Protection tab allows password
protection for access to functions. Functions can be assigned to one of three security
categories: Unprotected (level 0), Constructor (level 1) or Administrator (level 2).
This allows functions to be available or unavailable to different categories of users.
Select:
Tools System Settings Command Protection
The following dialog box appears.
System Settings
Command Protection Navigator Display Settings Grid Settings Address Files
Passwords
Level 2 [Administrator]: Change
Level 1 [User]: Change
Level Command
0 ACAD_INI
0 AD_DWG
0 BACKUP
0 BROWSE
0 CHECK_PARENT
0 CHECK_SIGNAL
1 CIR_2POINT
1 CIR_3POINT
1 CIR_DIA
1 CIR_RAD
1 CIR_TTR
0 CMD_DISPATCH
1 CONF_LANGUAGE
1 CONF_LAYER
7-11
Settings
When the user begins a work session, all unprotected commands are available. With
the first attempt to access a level 1 command, the software will prompt for a
password. Entering the level 1 password gives access to all level 0 and level 1
commands for the remainder of the session. With the first attempt to use a level 2
command the software will prompt for a level 2 password which will give access to
all level 0, 1 and 2 commands for the remainder of the session. Access to the
command level and the password function can also be password protected.
Enter the password in the appropriate field making certain that it is spelled correctly.
Note One password is used for all same level access.
To password protect a command, click on that command in the dialog box. With
each click, the software will toggle through the 0–2 levels of password protection.
Select level 0 for no password protection.
Select level 1 for Constructor password access.
Select level 2 for Administrator level password access.
Select the Change button to revise an existing password.
Select Cancel to discard any changes and exit the dialog box.
If you wish to use the same settings for future work sessions, select the Save button
to store the settings. Select the OK button if you only wish to load the settings for
the current sessions.
The settings are save in the cp.cfg file located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM
directory. It is recommended that the cp.cfg file be made read–only to ensure that
users cannot change the settings.
7-12
Settings
Navigator
The Tools > System Settings > Navigator tab allows you to set the zoom
parameters that are used in conjunction with the Navigator function. Type the
percentage of zoom (0–100) in the text box or click and drag the slide bar. The
percentage of zoom will appear in the text box as you move the slide bar. Smaller
percentage values will result in a closer zoom view.
Zoom Off – This checkbox activates the default settings for the Navigator Zoom
function. When checkbox is not selected, the zoom function is on. When the
checkbox is selected, the zoom function is off.
Select:
Tools System Settings Navigator
System Settings
Parameter
Zoom Off
Zoom 0 Percent
7-13
Settings
When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for the
current sessions only and exit the dialog box.
to store the settings.
7-14
Settings
Display Settings
The Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function allows you to select
whether or not the screen display will indicate symbol connection points, reference
points, and part numbers.
To set the display settings, select:
Tools System Settings Display Settings
The following dialog box will appear:
System Settings
All On
Display Connection Points
Display Reference Points
Display Part Numbers
Display Wire Numbers
Display Hidden Symbols [Cable...]
All Off
7-15
Settings
The following check boxes are available:
All On – Display connection points, reference points, part numbers, and wire
numbers for symbols on the drawing screen.
Display Connection Points – Display symbol connection points on the drawing

screen (marked by a green “X”).
Display Reference Points – Display symbol reference points on the drawing screen
(marked by an inverted red triangle).
Display Part Numbers – Display symbol part numbers on drawing screen.
Display Wire Numbers – Display wire numbers on drawing screen.
Display Hidden Symbols (Cable...) – Display invisible symbols on the drawing

screen. For example, when you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic
representing the cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed
unless this checkbox is selected.
All Off – Do not display connection points, reference points, part numbers, wire
numbers, and invisible symbols on the drawing screen.
When the desired settings have been made, select the OK button to load them for the
current sessions only and exit the dialog box.
to store the settings.
7-16
Settings
Address File
The Tools > System Settings > Address File tab allows you to create or edit a text
file containing information such as the user’s street address which the system can
automatically place on drawings, list headings, and title blocks. (In the New Project
dialog box there is a Address field for specifying an address file name to be used in
the project.)
Select:
Tools System Settings Address File
System Settings
Command Protection Navigator Display Settings Grid Settings Address File
File Name
Delete
Title Block-Logo
File Name: Search...
X-Coord: Y-Coord:
Edit Area
Next Previous
7-17
Settings
The right File name field allows you to select from an existing list of address files.
The left File name field allows you to enter the name of a new address file. These
files must exist in the RS\DB\CUSTOM directory.
When a file name is entered or selected, the contents of that file will appear in the
Edit Area fields. There are 20 fields, each of which holds 60 characters. Five fields
are displayed at a time. Use the Next and Previous buttons to move through the
groups of fields.
The Title Block–Logo fields allow you to specify a DWG file (such as a logo) to be
placed automatically in the title block. X and Y positions can be set for the logo.
The logo .DWG file must exist in the RS\WORK directory.
Use the Save button to save any newly entered or edited information for future work
sessions.
Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected address file.
Use the Cancel button to exit the Address File dialog box.
Select OK to exit the address files dialog box.

Note On title blocks, if you wish the currently selected address file to be inserted in the
title block automatically, you must create the title block with the variables ?addr01,
?addr02, etc., in the position where the address is to appear. Each variable
represents one line of the address file. See page 6-83, create title block macro.
7-18
Settings
Project Settings
General Defaults
Note If you use the Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function to change units
from inches to millimeters (or vice versa) during a work session, the on–screen
markings for symbol reference points, connection points, etc., may appear either too
large or too small. To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button, exit
from RSWire and then restart RSWire.
Select:
Tools Project Settings General Defaults
7-19
Settings
Project Settings
General Defaults Page Control Functions Page Formats Programmable Controller Settings Configuration: Terminal a
User Name USER Display Title Block
Display Grid
Digits in Line Numbers 2
Units=Inch
Default Page Format D-2COL
Prompt For Device ID
Date Format MM/DD/YY Prompt For Conn. Point Text
Part Number Check
Cross Ref. Display Format
Use Text Height from Project Parameters
IEC JIC
Use Text Style from Project Parameters
Prompt For Page Store
Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset 3.0000
Ladder Without Page Numbers
Zone Cross Ref. Display Format Diagonal Wire
Line Number
Display Cross Ref. at Child
Signal Cross Ref. Display Format
Create Connection List When Saving Page
Wire Number Display Normal
7-20
Settings
User Name – This field allows you to change the default name that appears in the
page title block. Changing this entry does not affect existing pages, only pages
created after the change. Any entry made here is automatically placed in the fourth
page parameter field when a new page is created.
Digits in Line Numbering – Determines number of digits used in ladder diagram

line numbers.
Note This value does not include page number if page number is part of the line number.
Default Page Format – Determines the default page format name that will be
prompted in the New Page dialog box when a new drawing page is created.
Date Format – Determines the default format for the dates that appear in the title
block of drawing pages. Specify the order of day, month and year by using “DD” for
day, “MM” for month and “YY” or “YYYY” for year. Example: MM/DD/YYYY
Cross Ref. Display Format – Selects IEC or JIC style cross reference.
Device ID to Cross Ref. Offset – Sets the distance between the device ID and the
cross reference text. When device IDs with sequential numbers are used (rather than
page and line numbers), or when the Display Cross Ref. at Child checkbox
described below is set, RSWire adds cross reference information at child symbols to
indicate where the parent symbol is located. This field is used to adjust the vertical
position of the cross reference text. The value entered does not represent drawing
units; it is a factor that is multiplied with the cross reference character size. It affects
all relevant symbols in the project.
CR1
Device ID
Cross Reference Text

104
You can adjust the position of cross references at individual child symbols using the
Modify > Symbol function (Text Position checkbox). The cross reference box at
individual parent symbols can be positioned with the Modify > Move function.
7-21
Settings
Zone Cross Ref. Display Format – This pull–down list allows you to select from
the following cross reference types:
Line Number (no zones)
Line/Zone Number (example 105A)
Zone/Line Number (example: A105)
Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicate page/line number, zones,

or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define to divide a page into
columns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zone cross reference will
indicate the zone where the reference point of a given item is located. The cross
referencing in the figure below indicates that the relay coil is located in zone B (line
102) while the contact is in zone A (line 105). For zone cross referencing to work
you must have page formats in which the zones have been defined (see page 7-36).
A B C
101 CR1 Zones

102
105A
103
104 CR1
105
106 102B
Signal Cross Ref. Display Format – Here the user can select from a list signal cross
reference formats by selecting the down arrow button. The following formats are
available (see page 5-60 for more information):
DevID=Inst/Page.Linenumber
DevID/Page.Linenumber
DevID/<=Inst/>Page Linenumber
<=Inst/>Page Linenumber
Page^Linenumber (Do not use with star type references)
<=Inst/>Page.Linenumber
Note Where you see the character string <=Inst/> in the above format names it means the
installation name will be included in the cross reference only if it differs from the
installation where the cross reference symbol is located.
Display Title Block – Determines whether or not the page title block is visible on
the screen. If the checkbox is selected, the title block will be displayed.
7-22
Settings
Display Grid – Determines whether or not the grid appears on the drawing screen.
Units=Inch – Determines the default units of measurement (length) used in

drawings. If the checkbox is selected, the units are inches. If the checkbox is not
selected, millimeters are the units. Changing this entry does not affect existing
pages, only pages created after the change.
Note If you change units during a work session, the on–screen markings for symbol
reference points, connection points, etc., may appear either too large or too small.
To avoid this, after selecting the units select the Save button in the General Defaults
dialog box, exit from RSWire then restart RSWire.
Prompt For Device ID – This checkbox determines whether or not the system will
prompt the user for a device ID when a symbol is placed. When the checkbox is
selected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear as described on page
5-14. If the checkbox is not selected, the Device ID Assignment dialog box will not
appear; the default device ID (based on project parameters) will be assigned
automatically. This latter option speeds up the drawing process.
Prompt For Conn. Point Text – This checkbox determines whether or not the
system will prompt the user for connection point text when a parent or child symbol
is placed. When the checkbox is selected, the Connection Points dialog box will
appear as described on page 5-17. If the checkbox is not selected, the default (next
available) connection point text will be assigned automatically.
Part Number Check – Determines whether or not the system will flag the entry of
part numbers that do not exist in the database. When the checkbox is selected, the
system will display a warning message when the user attempts to enter a
non–existent part number. If the checkbox is not selected the system will allow any
part number to be entered without checking.
Use Text Height from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether or
not you will use the project default text height values for device IDs, connection
point text, terminal IDs and cross reference text. These default values are set in the
Project Parameters dialog box (see page 3-8). When this checkbox is selected, the
default text heights will be used on any symbols placed after you make the setting.
When the checkbox is not selected, the software will use the text heights that were
defined when the symbol was created.
Use Text Style from Project Parameters – This checkbox determines whether the
various texts associated with a symbol (device ID, connection point text, terminal
ID, cross reference text) will use the currently selected font (Format > Text Style)
or the font that was defined when the symbol was created. This setting only affects
symbols placed after the setting is made.
7-23
Settings
Prompt For Page Store – When this checkbox is selected, you will be prompted if
you wish to store (save) the page when you perform a Page Next, Page Previous, or
other operations that clear the drawing screen (except the File > Break operation).
This prompt will appear only if changes have been made to the current page. If the
checkbox is not selected the page is stored automatically when performing these
operations (except the File > Break operation).
Ladder Without Page Numbers – Determines whether or not page numbers will be
included as part of the line numbers. (Example: 201 for page 2, line 01.) When the
checkbox is selected, the page numbers will not be included in the line number.
When the checkbox is not selected, page numbers will be included. Changing this
entry does not affect existing pages, only pages created after the change.
Diagonal Wire – Determines whether a diagonal or perpendicular connection

symbol will be used at nodes. If the checkbox is selected, the diagonal symbol
(symbol name DW) is used. If the checkbox is not selected, a perpendicular
connection (symbol name CP) is used. Changing this entry does not affect existing
pages, only drawings created after the change.
Diagonal Connection Perpendicular Connection
7-24
Settings
Display Cross Ref. at Child – Selects whether or not a cross reference to the parent
symbol will appear at a child symbol. The project must be using one of the
following device ID formats:
Device ID/Page/Line number
Page/Device ID/Line number
Device ID/Continuous line number
When the checkbox is selected, the reference will appear at the child symbol.
If the checkbox is not selected, the reference will not appear at the child symbol.
Note You must re–open the page to see the result of this setting.
CR124
124 126
125 AH126
CR124
126
124
Cross Reference To Parent
You can also turn off cross references individually at parent and child symbols using
the Modify > Symbol function. See page 5-96.
Create Connection List When Saving Page – This checkbox, when selected, causes
the software to update the connection list every time a page is saved. This ensures
that any wire list or other report based on the connection list will always use the
latest information. When you first turn on the checkbox and select OK in the Project
Settings dialog box, a dialog will appear that asks if you wish to create a connection
list. Select the Yes button. This dialog will not appear subsequently. If the checkbox
is not selected, the software will only update the connection list when the user
generates a report that requires connection information.
Note When the Create Connection List When Saving Page checkbox is selected,
performance of the software may be slowed somewhat because the connection
information must be updated each time is page is saved.
7-25
Settings
Wire Number Display – This pull–down menu with three selections determines
whether or not wire color and gauge are included with the wire number on the
drawing screen.
Normal – The wire number only is displayed.
(Example: 126)
Complete – The wire number, color, and gauge are displayed.
(Example: 126/14/RED
Branch Numbering – The wire number and decimal point are
displayed (Example: AL126.1)
Note For the branch numbering display option to work, wire numbers must be created
using the branch numbering option.
Select the Save button to save your general settings for future work sessions.
Select the OK button to activate the entries made in the General Defaults dialog
box.
Select the Cancel button to discard any changes made to the entries in the General
Defaults dialog box.
7-26
Settings
Page Control Functions
The Tools > Project Settings >Page Control Functions function allows a variety of
error checking settings to be made. These are conditions that RSWire will check for
and flag with an error message when a drawing page is saved. For each condition
the user can select from three options: take no action, prompt the user with a screen
message, or send the error message to a file.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Page Control Functions
Project Settings
Page Without Control No Ctrl Prompt File
Question Mark Alert No Ctrl Prompt File

Short Circuit No Ctrl Prompt File
Symbol Without Connection No Ctrl Prompt File
Tie Point Between Terminals No Ctrl Prompt File

Wire Without Connection No Ctrl Prompt File
Cable No Ctrl Prompt File
Symbol Without Part Number No Ctrl Prompt File
Do Not Exit Page With Error
7-27
Settings
By clicking on the appropriate checkbox for each condition the user can select :
No Ctrl (No Control) Take no action; disregard condition.
Prompt Notify user with an on–screen error message dialog box.
File Send the error message to the file RS\TMP\DWGCTL.
The following conditions are detected:
Page Without Control – Checks for drawing pages that do not have the Online
function activated.
Question Mark Alert – Checks for question marks (?) in device IDs, connection
points, wire numbers and texts. Question marks indicate that prompts have been
unanswered.
Short Circuit – Checks for direct connections between potentials. Wire numbers
must be assigned for this function to work.
Symbol Without Connection – Checks for symbols without logical line (wire)
connections.
Tie Point Between Terminals – Checks for a branch on a wire between two
terminals.
Wire Without Connection – Checks for an open end on a wire.
Cable – Checks for wires that are assigned to more than one cable.
Symbol Without Part Number – Checks for symbols that do not have a part number
assigned.
Do Not Exit Page With Error – When selected, this checkbox will not allow you to
leave a page on which any error conditions are detected. The message “Page not
stored” is displayed. You must either correct the error condition or turn off the
prompting checkbox for that error condition.
When the desired options have been set, select the OK button to load the selections,
or select the Save button to save the selected settings for future work sessions.
7-28
Settings
Page Formats
The Tools > Project Settings > Page Formats function allows you to view and
modify the parameters of the 50 drawing page formats available in RSWire.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Page Formats
Project Settings
Select Format: A-1VCOL (A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column, 9x11.0)
Format Name: A-1VCOL

Description: A Size Vertical 1 Line Number Column
Page Format Size:
X Min. 0 X Max. 8.5 Y Min. 0 Y Max. 11
Line Number Range:
Min. 1 Max. 10.75 Increment 0.5 First Number 1

Position of Line Numbers:
X Direction Y Direction
Two Line Ladders 1 0.25 2 0
Ladder Macro LADDERA-V
3 0 4 0
Hexagon
Zone Number Range:

Max. 0 Min. 0 Increment 1 Start Number 1
Zone Macro
Format Available For All Projects
7-29
Settings
Select Format – Use this pull–down list to select the page format that you wish to
edit. If you wish to create a new page format, select one of the “UNDEFINED”
formats from the list.
Format Name – This field indicates the name of the selected page format. A format
must be assigned a name before it can be used to create a page. If you are creating a
new format, enter a name for it here.
Description – This field shows the description of the page format. If you are
creating a new format, enter a description for it here.
Page Format Size – The fields on this line define the size limits of the page. The X
Min. and Y Min. values determine the origin (lower left corner) of the page. The X
Max. and Y Max. determine the upper right corner of the page.
X Max., Y Max.
Drawing Page
X Min., Y Min.
7-30
Settings
Line Number Range – This group of fields allows the user to define the position of
the ladder diagram line numbers. In RSWire page formats, the allowable drawing
area is defined by the Min. and Max. line number range values.
Y Direction Example
Line No. Increments

Drawing Page
Max.
Allowable
Min. Drawing
Area
X Direction Example
Line Number Increments
Drawing Page
Allowable
Drawing
Min.
Area
Max.
7-31
Settings
The Min. field value determines the lower limit of the line numbering area. It is the
distance from the bottom of the page to the bottom of the allowable drawing area
(assuming a Y–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). For
X–direction example, see previous page.
101 107
Maximum 102 108
Distance Allowable
Increment 103 109
Drawing
Area
104 110
105 111
106 112
Minimum Distance
The Max. field value is the distance from the drawing origin to the top of the
allowable drawing area. For example, on a page that is 22 inches high, with a
drawing area that starts 1 inch from the top, this value would be 21 (assuming a
Y–direction format where line numbers run from top to bottom). For X–direction
example, see previous page.
The Increment field value is the increment (distance) allowed for each line number
row. This works in conjunction with the ladder macro. Any “?” characters from the
macro that fall within a given line number row will receive a line number value that
is one greater than the previous row. See the ladder macro note on next page.
The First Number field value determines the number at which the line numbering
will begin.
Note This value should not include the page number.
7-32
Settings
X Direction, Y Direction – Select one of these radio buttons to determine the X or Y

axis orientation of the ladder line numbering. When Y is selected, the Line Number
Range field is measured from the bottom of the page and the Position of Line
Number values are measured from the left side of the page. When X is selected, the
Line Number Range is measured from the left side of the page and the Position of
Line Number values are measured from the bottom of the page.
Two Line Ladders – This checkbox allows the page number to appear over each line
number. When selected, the page number appears over each line number. When not
selected, the page number appears next to the line number.
101 1
01
102 1
Page Number Page Number 02
Line Number
Line Number
Ladder Macro – Enter the name of the ladder line number macro to be used on this
drawing page format. The following ladder macros are provided with RSWire. (The
user can also create custom ladder macros – see note on next page.)
For pages that are to have no ladders, see note on page 7-35.
Macro Description
LADDERAH ASize Horizontal (11 x 8.5 inches)
LADDERAV ASize Vertical (8.5 x 11 inches)
LADDERB BSize
LADDERC CSize
LADDERD DSize
Note A ladder macro consists of a series of question mark characters (?) placed using the
Draw > Text function and stored as a macro. If this macro is named as the ladder
macro in a page format definition, RSWire will place this macro on every page using
that format and will replace each question mark with a line number. This line
numbering is controlled by the line number rows established by the value in the
Increment field described previously. If two question marks from the ladder macro
fall within the same line number row, they will receive the same line number.
7-33
Settings
Increment ?
Increment ?
Line Number Rows

Established By Increment ?
The Increment
Value Increment ?
Increment ?
Increment ?
Ladder Macro
Locate Ladder Macro Base Point One Grid Unit Left Of “?”
If you wish to have the line numbers on the drawing increment by some value other
than one, you must define the increments and ladder macro so that there are empty
line number rows between each question mark.
Multiple line number columns are established by the Position of Line Number
fields described previously. If coordinates for more than one column are entered, the
ladder macro will be repeated at each position.
When defining a ladder macro that will be used on multiple column pages, locate
the macro base (reference) point at least one grid unit to the left of the ? characters.
This will ensure that the ? characters are placed within the intended column.
7-34
Settings
The Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults function includes several
functions that affect line numbering. The Digits in Line Numbers field determines
how many digits the line number will contain (not including page number). The
Ladder without Page Numbers checkbox determines whether or not the page
number is included in the line number. See page 7-24.
Note Blank (ladder–less) Pages – If you wish to create a page format with no line
numbering, you must still make the following entries:
Max. – The value in the Max. field must be greater than the value in the Min. field.
Increment – This field must contain a value (any value).
Ladder Macro – This field must contain the macro name DUMMY (this is an empty
macro provided with RSWire).
Hexagon – This field allows a hexagon (or other defined symbol) to be placed
around a star cross reference (as shown below). If no symbol name is entered,
RSWire will not suppress the symbol around the star cross reference.
Note You will need to create a hexagon symbol of the appropriate size. See page 6-6 on
how to create a symbol.
Note For RSWire to suppress the hexagon symbol when a signal is not linked, the
hexagon symbol must be placed on top of the reference point of the cross reference
text of the star cross reference. This can be simplified by creating a macro of the
hexagon symbol and the signal symbol. See page 6-81 on how to create a macro.
1
01
1 1
02 1.02 Page Number 02
Line Number
Position of Line Number – These four fields allow you to specify the distance of
each column of line numbers (from column 1 up to column 4) from the page origin.
For unused columns, enter a value of 0.00.
When all values for a page format have been entered, select the Save button to load
the values.
7-35
Settings
Zone Number Range – Cross referencing in RSWire can be configured to indicate

page/line number, zones, or a combination of the two. Zones are areas you define to
divide a page into columns. Each zone has a letter name (A, B, C, etc.). A zone
cross reference will indicate the zone where the reference point of a given item is
located. Zone cross reference display format is selected with the Tools > Project
Settings > General Defaults function (see page 7-22).
The Zone Number Range fields allow you to set the following values:
Min. – Where the first zone will begin (in default units) measured from the left
side of the page.
Max. – Where the last zone will end measured from the left side of the page.
Increment – The width of each zone.
First Number – A code number that sets the letter name of the first zone. A=65,
B=66, etc.
Zone Macro – The name of a macro that provides zone labels across the top of
the page.
When you have made the desired page format settings, select the Save button to
save the values for future work sessions.
Format Available For All Projects – Selecting this checkbox will cause the page
format to be stored in the RS\Syscon\System\dwg.cfg file when the Save button is
selected. This matches the format available to all projects. When this checkbox is
not selected, new or edited page formats will only be available in the project that is
open when the format is saved. (New or edited page formats are always saved in the
cfg directory of the current project, regardless of the settings of this checkbox.)
7-36
Settings
Programmable Controller Settings
Use the Tools > Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function to
set parameters related to PLC (programmable logic controller) module symbol
addressing and labeling.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Programmable Controller Settings
Project Settings
Active Input File
Search...
File Format
Replace Text in Current Project

Delete Unused Text
Remove Linefeed Character (^)
Error Control Switches

Module/Slot Proj. Inst. Loc. No Ctrl
Address Proj. Inst. Loc. No Ctrl
Addressing
8-Bit octal Address Separator /
Automatic Addressing
7-37
Settings
Active Input File – Specifies a text file containing programmable controller

addresses and descriptive text. Once the file is activated (by selecting the Replace
Text in Current Project button), the relevant text is automatically taken from the
text file and placed in the drawing when placing programmable controller symbols.
The format of the text file is as follows:
1 6 (first and last column holding the PLC address)

8 60 (first and last column holding descriptive text)
I00100 CONVEYOR START PUSHBUTTON (first address and text)
I00101 CONVEYOR STOP PUSHBUTTON (second address and text)
etc.
Use the Search button to view and select available files.
The File Format field allows you to select the format of the programmable
controller file. The current selections include:
Standard (see above)

Siemens S5 (tab delimited)
RSI RSLogix/AI for Allen–Bradley controllers (comma delimited)
Festo FPC405
Siemens S7
Replace Text in Current Project – Selecting this button will cause programmable
controller descriptive text throughout the project to be replaced by text in the file
that is specified in the Active Input File field.
Delete Unused Text – If this function is activated and a PLC child symbol is
deleted, the corresponding function text will be deleted from the parent symbol and
from the output (report) file. (The page must be refreshed before the text will be
removed from the parent symbol.) If the checkbox is not selected, the text will be
kept and reused with the same address when a new symbol is placed.
Remove Line Feed Character (^) – Selecting this character will cause line feeds to
be removed from function text strings in reports. The line feeds are set by “^”
characters entered in the function text.
7-38
Settings
Error Control Switches – These radio buttons determine whether or not the system
will check for duplicate PLC symbol addressing. The Module row of buttons
determines error checking for duplicate module numbers. The Address row of
buttons determines error checking for duplicate I/O address numbers. Within each
row there is a Proj., Inst., Loc., and No Ctrl button to determine whether checking
is performed over the entire project (select Proj.), over the installation containing
the PLC symbol (select Inst.), over the location containing the PLC symbol (select
Loc.), or whether no duplicate checking will be performed (select No Ctrl).
Addressing – This field selects decimal or octal I/O address numbering for
programmable controller symbols. The addressing will proceed in the selected
numbering system from the starting address entered by the user when the symbol is
placed. The following selections are available:
decimal
8–bit octal
8–bit decimal
16–bit octal
16–bit decimal
32–bit octal
32–bit decimal
16–bit hexadecimal
32–bit hexadecimal
Address Separator – This field allows a word/bit separator character to be specified

for programmable controller I/O addresses.
Automatic Addressing – This checkbox selects automatic or manual I/O addressing

of programmable controller module symbols. When the checkbox is selected,
automatic addressing is in effect; the system will take the rack and module number
and the beginning address number entered by the user, and assign consecutive
addresses to the remaining I/O points on the module. This addressing will be octal
or decimal depending on the setting of the Addressing field (see above). If the
Automatic Addressing checkbox is de–selected, manual addressing is in effect; the
system will prompt consecutive addresses one at a time for each I/O point, which
the user can either accept or type over.
When the desired settings have been made, select the Save button to save the
settings for future work sessions. Select the OK button to load the settings and exit
the dialog box.
7-39
Settings
Terminal and Plug ID Settings
The Tools > Project Settings > Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs function
allows a number of parameters to be set that relate to terminal symbols.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs
Project Settings
Configuration: Terminal and Plug IDs Device ID Style Object Defaults Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Default IDs
Terminal Strips TB
Plug PL
Include With Terminals

Part Number
Target Configuration Control

Internal/External/Jumper
Terminal IDs Without Duplicate Checking

PE L1 L2 L3 N
GND U1 U2 U3
Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper 1000
7-40
Settings
Default IDs: Terminal Strips and Plug – Use these two fields to set the default
prefix for terminal strip and plug device IDs. If desired, the user can write over
these default prefixes during symbol placement.
Note You must leave and restart RSWire before changes in the above two fields will take
effect.
Include With Terminals: Part Number – Use this checkbox to determine whether
the system will allow you to enter a part number when a terminal symbol is placed
in the drawing. Select the checkbox to allow part number entry, de–select the
checkbox to prevent part number entry.
Note These checkboxes work only on newly defined projects (projects that are created
after you make the setting); they will not change existing projects.
Target Configuration Control – Terminal symbol connection points can be

designated as Internal, External, or Jumper (see page 11-3). When the
Internal/External/Jumper checkbox is selected, the software will prompt the user
with the following Terminal Target Settings dialog box when a terminal symbol is
placed on a wire. The user selects whether the target of each connection point is to
be Internal, External, a Jumper, or Undefined. The dialog box will appear for each
connection point on the terminal that is being connected to a wire (the current
connection point will be highlighted).
Terminal Target Settings
OK
Internal External Jumper
Connection Point 1 X Cancel
Connection Point 3 X Help
Connection Point 5 X Accept All
Reset
Terminal IDs without Duplicate Checking – Terminal symbol IDs entered in these
fields will not be subject to RSWire error checking that prevents duplicate device
IDs.
7-41
Settings
Number of Terminals per Clip Jumper – The value in this field is the maximum
number of terminals that can exist in a clip jumper. If you edit a terminal strip in the
terminal editor and attempt to define a clip jumper that matches or exceeds this
number of terminals, a message will appear stating that a “Clip jumper is not
possible.”
When the desired terminal and plug parameters have been set, select the OK button
to load the settings. Select the Save button to save the settings for future work
sessions.
7-42
Settings
Device ID Styles
The Tools > Project Settings > Device ID Style function allows you to select in
what format a complete device ID (including installation and location) will be
displayed: one line, two lines, or three lines. It also allows you to select which part
of the device ID is placed on each line.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Device ID Style
The Device ID Style dialog box will appear.
Project Settings
First Line
Installation Location Device ID
Second Line
Third Line
Suppress Device ID Sign (-)
Show Installation
Default Never Always
Show Location
Default Never Always
Nested Device ID
Partial Complete
7-43
Settings
The First Line, Second Line, Third Line fields in this dialog box allow you to
select the three components of the complete Device ID: Installation, Location, and
Device ID. If you wish the complete device ID to appear on one line, then all
components of the ID should appear in the First Line area (as shown above).
If you wish the ID to appear on two lines, then one or two components can be
placed in the First Line, and the remainder can be selected in the Second Line area.
Similarly, for a three line display, place one component on First Line, one on
Second Line, and one on Third Line. You cannot select a given component in more
than one field at a time.
Select the Suppress Device Sign (–) checkbox to hide the “–” character that will
otherwise appear before each device ID.
The Show Installation and Show Location radio buttons control whether or not
Installation and Location names will be included with each device ID in the
drawing. The following options are provided:
Default – The default RSWire setting is to not include installation/location

names with device IDs unless the symbol represents a device from a different
installation/location than the current drawing page.
Never – This setting will not include installation/location with device IDs under
any circumstances.
Always – This setting will include installation/location with every device ID in

the drawing.
The Nested Device ID radio buttons apply to logical boxes only. This allows
symbols inside the logical box to have a device ID that combines the ID of the
logical box with the ID of the nested symbol. One application of this feature would
be to use the box to represent a circuit board and then insert pin/plug symbols to
represent the connectors on the board. The box could also represent a special
controller module with terminal symbols inside that are related to that module.
Selecting the Partial button will display only the device ID of the nested symbol.
Selecting the Complete button will display the entire, combined device ID.
Select the Save button to save the device ID settings for future work sessions.
Select the OK button to enter the selected device ID style.
You will need to re–read the current drawing page to see the effects of any changes
in the device ID setting.
7-44
Settings
Object Defaults
The Tools > Project Settings > Object Defaults function lets you set default
drawing element parameters that will apply to any projects and drawings that are
created after the settings are made.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Object Defaults
The following dialog box will appear. (You must select an object from the
pull–down list before any of the fields will become active. Only those fields relevant
to the selected object will be active.)
Project Settings
Activate Object Activate All Deactivate All
Text Color Select...

Line Type Select...
Line Color Select...
Height Select...
Label Origin Select...
Angle Select...
Slant Select...
Ratio Select...
Font
7-45
Settings
Objects – To set drawing defaults, first select which kind of drawing object you
wish to set in the pull–down list at the top of the dialog box. The following objects
can be selected:
Drawing Line
Logical Line (wire)
Logical Line N (neutral)
Logical Line PE (potential earth)
Drawing Box
Logical Box
Field
Text
Function Text
Circle
Activate Object – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings will
override the settings made to an element elsewhere (for example with the Tools >
Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate Object
checkbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be in
effect for the selected drawing element. When the Activate Object checkbox is not
selected for the selected element, the parameters for that element can change
depending on the most recently made settings. To activate a specific element, select
element, change settings, and select the Save button.
Activate All – This checkbox determines whether or not the default settings will
override settings made to all elements elsewhere (for example with the Tools >
Project Settings > Object Defaults > Color function). When the Activate All
checkbox is selected, the settings made with the Defaults function will always be in
effect for all drawing elements. When the Activate All checkbox is not selected for
a given element, the parameters for each element can change depending on the most
recently made settings.
Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawing
elements.
Text Color, Line Type, Line Color, Height, Label Origin, Angle, Slant, Ratio, and
Font – These text parameters are the same listed in the Text dialog box with the
Draw > Text function. (See page 5-31 on how to set the appropriate fields.) Use the
Select button beside each field to see a list of available values.
7-46
Settings
Deactivate All – This checkbox turns off the Activate checkbox for all drawing
elements.
When the desired settings have been made you must select the Save button to save
the settings for future work sessions. Selecting the OK button (without Save) will
only enter the settings for the current work session.
Default values are saved in the file RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\SODSETT.CFG.

Note Settings made for the three logical line types, when activated, will be in effect when
the toolbar buttons for those functions are used.
Terminal Plan Configuration
The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
function allows a number of graphical terminal plan configuration settings to be
made. See page 11-24.
Pin–Plug Plan Configuration
The Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
function allows a number of graphical Pin–Plug plan configuration settings to be
made. See page 11-24.
7-47
Settings
Object Settings
There are a number of functions for setting drawing object parameters.
Symbol Settings
To make scaling, rotation and mirroring settings for symbols, first right click on the
symbol and select Block Settings > Symbol Settings from the pop–up menu. See
page 5-23.
Macro Settings
When you place a macro using the Insert > Macro by Name function, the Select
Icon dialog box contains Macro Settings fields that allow macro scale and angle
(rotation) to be set. See page 5-28. These settings do not affect macros that already
exist on a drawing, only those macros placed after the setting is made.
Wire/Line Type
The Modify > Linetype function allows wire and line color to be selected as well as
line type (dashed, solid, etc.). See page 5-101.
7-48
Settings
Text Styles
The Format > Text Style function displays a list of available drawing text styles
with graphic samples. This function also allows new text styles to be defined. A text
style is a combination of a font, a height value and possibly other effects such as
boldness, vertical orientation, etc. Various RSWire functions such as Draw > Text
and Project Parameters allow you to select a text style that will apply to texts.
Select:
Format Text Style
The Text Style dialog box is displayed.
Text Style
Style Name
Apply
STANDARD New... Rename... Delete
Cancel
Font Help...
Font Name: Font Style: Height:
romans.shx 1.0000
Use Big Font
Effects Preview
Upside Down Width Factor: 1.0000
Backwards
AaBbCcD
Oblique Angle: 0
Vertical AaBbCcD Preview
In the Style Name area, there are the following items:
Style Name – A drop down list of currently available styles.
New – Select this button to create a new style. Displays the New Text Style dialog
box. You can accept the default name or enter a name in the box and choose OK to
apply the current style settings to the new style name.
7-49
Settings
To Create a New Text Style:
1. Select the desired font and make any other settings for the font.
2. Select the New button.
3. Enter a name for the new text style.
4. Select OK.
5. Save the current drawing page.

Note When you create a new text style, it will only be available on the drawing page that
is currently open when you define it. To make the style available on all drawing
pages, you must have the default RSWire drawing page RSWire.dwg open when you
define the style. RSWire.dwg is active when you first enter RSWire but have not yet
selected a project or page. You can also open RSWire.dwg using the command line
command, OPEN (the RSWire.dwg file is located in the RS\WORK directory).
Because RSWire.dwg is does not belong to a project you cannot use the File > Save
command to save it; you must use the File > Save As command.
Rename – Select this button to rename an existing style. The text style listed in the
box is renamed when you enter a new name and choose OK.
Delete – Select this button to delete an existing style. Select a name from the list to
make it current, and then choose Delete.
In the Font area, there are the following items:
Font Name – Lists the font family name for all registered TrueType fonts and all
AutoCAD compiled shape (SHX) fonts in the AutoCAD Fonts directory. When you
select a name from the list, AutoCAD reads the file for the specified font. The file’s
character definitions are loaded automatically unless the file is already in use by
another text style. You can define several styles that use the same font.
Font Style – Specifies font character formatting, such as italic, bold, or regular.
When Use Big Font is selected, this option changes to Big Font Name and is used
to select a Big Font file name.
Height – Sets the text height based on the value you enter. If you enter 0.0,
AutoCAD prompts for the text height each time you enter text using this style.
Entering a height greater than 0.0 sets the text height for this style. TrueType fonts
may be displayed at a smaller height than SHX fonts with the same height setting.
7-50
Settings
Use Big Font – Use the Big Font option to specify an Asian–language Big Font file;
Use Big Font is available only if an SHX file is specified under Font Name; only
SHX files are valid file types for creating Big Fonts.
Note The text height you specify may not be accurately represented by uppercase letters
in TrueType fonts supplied with AutoCAD.
In the Effects area, there are the following items:
Upside Down – Displays the characters upside down.
Backwards – Displays the characters backwards.
Vertical – Displays the characters aligned vertically. Vertical is available only if the
selected font supports dual orientation. Vertical orientation is not available for
TrueType fonts.
Width Factor – Sets the character spacing. Entering a value less than 1.0 condenses
the text. Entering a value greater than 1.0 expands it.
Oblique Angle – Sets the oblique angle (italicizing) of the text. Entering a value
between –85 and 85 makes the text oblique.
7-51
Settings
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for the
dimensioning function. Refer to the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more information.
The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing and
Select:
Format Dimension Style
Dimension Style Manager
Current Dimstyle: STANDARD

Styles Styles
Set Current
STANDARD
New...
Modify...
Override...
Compare...
List: Description
STANDARD
All styles
Don’t list styles in xrefs
Close Help
7-52
Settings
Dimension Styles (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

The Format > Dimension Style function allows you to make settings for the
dimensioning function.
The dimensioning function allows you to pick two points on a drawing and
Select:
Format Dimension Style
Dimension Styles
Dimension Style
Current: STANDARD
Name:
Save Rename
Family
Parent Geometry...
Linear Diameter
Format...
Radial Ordinate
Angular Leader Annotation...
OK Cancel Help...
7-53
Settings
Dimension Style – A dimension style is a stored group of dimension settings which

determines the appearance of the dimensions. The style can be conveniently selected
in one step. In the Current field you can select an existing dimension style.
STANDARD is the default dimension style.
You can define a new dimensioning style by entering the name in the Name field,
making the desired settings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons,
selecting the Save button, and then selecting the OK button.
Dimension Family –An overall dimension style consists of a family of styles within
which there are variations or family members. When you create a new style it
becomes the “parent” style. Variations of this parent can be defined for specific
types of dimensioning such as linear, radial, angular, etc. This is done by selecting
the appropriate button in the Family area of the dialog box, making the desired
settings using the Geometry, Format, and Annotation buttons, and then selecting
the Save button. If no family members have been defined for a dimension style, the
parent style is automatically used.
The following style family members can be defined:
Linear – Measures the distance between two points.
Radial – Measures the radii of arcs and circles.
Angular – Measures the angle between two lines or three points.
Diameter – Measures the diameters of arcs and circles.
Ordinate – Measures the perpendicular distance from an origin point to another

point.
Leader – A leader is a line that connects annotation text to some item in a

drawing. This leader is not the same as the leader that is generated automatically
as part of a dimension line.
Dimension Geometry – Selecting the Geometry button in the Dimension Styles

dialog box displays the Geometry dialog box. Here settings can be made that affect
the extension lines, dimension line, arrowheads, and center marks of a dimension.
There is also a scale setting so that dimension scale can be set to match that of the
page.
7-54
Settings
Geometry
Dimension Line Arrowheads
Suppress: 1st 2nd
Extension: 0.000
1st: Closed Filled
Spacing: 0.3000
2nd: Closed Filled
Color... BYBLOCK Size: 0.1800
Extension Line Center

Suppress: 1st 2nd Mark
Extension: 0.2000 Line
None
Origin Offset: 0.0625
Color... BYBLOCK Size: 0.0900
Scale
Overall Scale: 1.00000 Scale to Paper Space
OK Cancel Help...
The following settings are available:
Dimension Line
Suppress – You can select checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd dimension
lines (when text divides a dimension line in two).
Extension – When using oblique stroke arrowheads, you can set the distance that
the dimension line extends beyond the extension lines by entering a value in this
field.
Spacing – Enter a value to set the distance between dimension lines of neighboring
baseline and continue dimensions.
Color – Select this button to set a color for the dimension lines. A Select Color
dialog box will appear, displaying the available colors.
7-55
Settings
Arrowheads
The 1st and 2nd fields allow you to select an arrowhead style for each end of the
dimension line. The currently selected style is displayed.
In the Size field you can enter a size for the arrowhead.
Extension Line
Suppress – Select these checkboxes to turn off the 1st and/or the 2nd extension
lines.
Extension – Enter a value to set how far beyond the dimension line the extension
line will extend.
Origin Offset – Enter a value to set the distance between the extension line origin
and the beginning of the extension line.
Color – Select this button to set a color for the extension lines. A Select Color
dialog box will appear, displaying the available colors.
Center
Center marks and lines apply only to center, diameter, and radius dimensions. They
are drawn only if the dimension line is placed outside the circle or arc. Select Mark,
Line, or None as a center mark. The current selection is displayed.
In the Size field you can enter a size for the center mark.
Scale
In the Overall Scale field enter a value to determine the size of the dimension
geometry relative to the drawing. It should be set according to the intended plot
scaling. Dimension scale affects sizes such as text height and arrowhead size, and
offsets, such as extension line origin offset. You should set these sizes and offsets to
values that represent their actual plotted size.
You can also set a scale relative to paper space. This scale adjusts dimensions in
model space to the scale of the paper space view.
7-56
Settings
Dimension Format – Selecting the Format button in the Dimension Styles dialog
box displays the following dimension Format dialog box. This dialog box allows the
user to make settings that affect placement of dimension text, arrowheads and leader
lines relative to the dimension and extension lines.
Format
Text
User Defined
Force Line Inside
Fit:
Best Fit Inside Horizontal
Outside Horizontal
Horizontal Justification Vertical Justification
Centered Centered
OK Cancel Help...
Select the User Defined checkbox if you wish to position dimension text by entering
coordinates or by pointing the cursor. If you de–select this checkbox the software
will determine the text position automatically.
Select the Force Line Inside checkbox if you wish the software to draw a leader
line between extension lines when there is no room between the lines for
arrowheads or text (i.e., when the arrowheads are placed outside the extension
lines).
The Fit field allows you to select how the software will place arrowheads,
dimension text and leader lines between the extension lines.
The Inside Horizontal and Outside Horizontal checkboxes allow you to set
dimension text either to remain horizontal or to align with the dimension line.
7-57
Settings
The Horizontal Justification field allows you to select the horizontal position of the
dimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated.
The Vertical Justification field allows you to select the vertical position of the
dimension text in relation to the dimension line. The current selection is indicated.
Dimension Annotation – Selecting the Annotation button in the Dimension Styles

dialog box displays the Annotation dialog box where settings can be made that
affect the formatting of the dimension text.
Annotation
Primary Units Alternate Units
Units... Enable Units Units...
Prefix: Prefix:
Suffix: Suffix:
1.00 [25.4]
Tolerance Text
Method: None Style: STANDARD
Upper Value: 0.0000 Extension: 0.1800
Lower Value: 0.0625 Origin Offset: 0.0900
Justification: Middle Color... BYBLOCK
Height: 1.0000 Round Off: 0.0000
OK Cancel Help...
7-58
Settings
Primary Units – Primary Units control the main dimension values. You can specify
special prefixes and suffixes for dimension values. The Units button displays the
Primary Units dialog box.
Primary Units
Units Angles
Decimal Decimal Degrees
Dimension Tolerance
Precision: Precision:
0.0000 0.0000
Zero Suppression Zero Suppression

Leading 0 Feet Leading 0 Feet
Trailing 0 Inches Trailing 0 Inches
Scale
Linear: 1.00000 Paper Space Only
OK Cancel Help...
Under Units, select a unit type from the list for all dimension types except
angular. For angular dimensions, select a type from the Angles list.
Under Dimension, select a precision value for the primary units.
Under Tolerance, select a precision value for any tolerance values.
There are also Zero Suppression checkboxes for suppressing leading and
trailing zeros in decimal dimensions and tolerances (select the Leading and
Trailing checkboxes). You can also choose to suppress zero values for
dimensions given in feet and inches (select the 0 Feet and 0 Inches
checkboxes).
Under Scale, set the units scale for primary units.
7-59
Settings
Alternate Units – The Alternate Units area of the Annotation dialog box, select the
Enable Units checkbox to activate a second set of units (for example, if you wish to
show feet and inches in a metric drawing). The alternate unit values will appear in
square brackets [] in the dimension text.
Once you select the Enable Units checkbox, you can select the Units button in the
Alternate Units area. This displays the Alternate Units dialog box which contains
the same fields and settings as the Primary Units dialog box (see above).
Tolerance – In the Tolerance area of the Annotation dialog box you can choose to
have lateral tolerance values added to the dimensions to indicate the degree of
accuracy required.
The Method field allows you to select: None (no tolerance values), Symmetrical
(same + and – value), Deviation (different + and – values), and Limits (the software
calculates a maximum and minimum dimension value).
The Upper Value and Lower Value fields allow you to enter tolerance values.
The Justification and Height fields allow you to set the alignment and size of
tolerance values.
Text – In the Text area of the Annotation dialog box you can set the dimension text
format. Fields are provided for text Style, Height, and Gap (around base dimension
text). A button is also provided for setting text Color.
Round Off – The Round Off field in the Annotation dialog box allows you to set a
value to which dimension values will be rounded (except angular dimensions). For
example, if you specify a round–off value of 0.25 all dimensions are rounded to the
nearest 0.25 unit.
7-60
Settings
Preferences (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings through
the AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevant
to RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more
information.
Select:
Tools Preferences
Options ?
Current profile: RSWire Current drawing: RSWire.dwg
Files Display Open and Save Plotting System User Preferences Drafting Selection Profiles
Window Elements Display resolution

Display scroll bars in drawing window 100 Arc and circle smoothness
Display screen menu
8 Segments in a polyline curve
3 Text lines in command line window
0.5 Rendered object smoothness
4 Contour lines per surface

Colors... Fonts...
Layout Elements Display performance

Display Layout and Model tabs Pan and zoom with raster image
Display margins Highlight raster image frame only
Display paper background True color raster images and rendering
Display paper shadow Apply solid fill
Show Page Setup dialog for new layouts Show text boundary frame only
Create viewport in new layouts Show silhouettes in wireframe
Crosshair size Reference Edit fading intensity

5 50
7-61
Settings
Files Tab
The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by the
software to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse button
to search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.
Display Tab
The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window.
Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. The
sample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slider
controls (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Blue
components of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using a
monochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays.
The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on the
command line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialog
box will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also select
whether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) text
window.
Open and Save Tab
Options for loading and saving AutoCAD drawings.
Plotting Tab
Select and configure output devices (printers and plotters).
System Tab
Select 3D graphics displays and pointing devices.
User Preferences Tab
Settings for accelerator keys, shortcut menus and right mouse button actions.
Drafting Tab
Make AutoSnap, AutoTrack, and Alignment Point Acquisition settings.
7-62
Settings
Selection Tab
Make settings for selecting objects and configuring grips.
Profiles Tab
Available Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles.
Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile.
Add to List – Add a new profile to the list.
Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name and
description of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile
but keep its current settings.
Delete – Deletes the selected profile.
Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the same
computer or a different computer.
Import – Imports a profile created using export.
Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.
7-63
Settings
Preferences (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings through
the AutoCAD PREFERENCES function. Not all the available settings are relevant
to RSWire. Refer to the online help and the AutoCAD User’s Guide for more
information.
Select:
Tools Preferences
Preferences ?
Files Performance Compatibility General Display Pointer Printer Profiles
Drawing session safety precautions
Automatic save Save thumbnail preview image
Minutes between saves 120 Beep on error in user input
Create backup copy with each save File extension for temporary files: ac$
Full–time CRC validation Maximum number sorted symbols: 200

Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN
Maintain a log file
Reset
OK Cancel Apply Help...
This dialog box has eight tabs which can be selected to display different sets of
parameters. The user can make a variety of AutoCAD–related hardware and
software settings. Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information. This
function is not available in the Standalone version of RSWire.
7-64
Settings
Files Tab
The Files options let you enter the support directories path which is used by the
software to locate help files, fonts, and other support files. Use the Browse button
to search for files and subdirectories you wish to add to the support field.
Performance Tab
The Performance options control preferences that relate to performance. Consult

your AutoCAD manual for further information.
Compatibility Tab
The Compatibility options maintain compatibility with earlier versions of

AutoCAD. Consult your AutoCAD manual for further information.
General Tab
The General options let you specify a number of general operating preferences.
Automatic Save – By selecting the Automatic save checkbox, a DWG format file of
the current drawing page will be saved automatically on a selectable time period.
The file will be saved in the temporary files directory (default is RS\TMP).
Create backup copy with each save – Select this checkbox to create a backup of the
drawing each time the drawing is saved. Use the File tab to specify where the
backup is saved.
Full–time CRC validation – Not applicable.
Audit after each DXFIN or DXBIN – Not applicable.
Save Thumbnail Preview Image – Specifies whether an image of the drawing

should be displayed in the Preview area of the Select File dialog box.
Beep on Error in User Input – Select to hear an audible beep when an error occurs.
File Extension for Temporary Files – Specifies a unique extension for the current
user to identify plot files in a network environment.
7-65
Settings
Maximum Number Sorted Symbols – Specifies the maximum number of items to

sort. If you set this preference to 0, the items are listed in the order they were
created. Items are sorted in alphabetical order.
Reset – resets the General Preferences to the system defaults.
Maintain a Log File – Saves a command history file of the current work session.
This file is saved under the name ect.log in the RS\PROGRAM directory.
Display Tab
The Colors button allows you to set colors of various areas of the software window.
Select the element to color in the Window Element field. Then, select a color. The
sample Graphic and Text windows will show your color selections. Use the slider
controls (or enter a number from 0 to 255) to change the Red , Green, or Blue
components of a color. Select the Monochrome Vectors checkbox if you are using a
monochrome display. This setting may also be best for gray scale displays.
The Fonts button allows you to select the font used in the toolbar and on the
command line. This setting has no effect on the text in your drawing. A Font dialog
box will appear, allowing you to select fonts from a list. You can also select
whether the setting will affect the Graphics window or the (Command) text
window.
Pointer Tab
The Pointer options set the current pointing device.
Current Pointing Device Driver – Displays the name of the current pointing device
driver.
Current System Pointing Device – Displays a list of the available pointing device
drivers.
Set Current – Makes the selected pointing device the current pointing device.
Accept Input From – Specifies whether input is accepted from both a mouse and a
digitizer or ignores mouse input when a digitizer is set.
7-66
Settings
Cursor Size – Controls the size of the crosshairs. The allowable range is from 1 to
100 percent of the total screen. At 100% the ends of the crosshairs are never visible.
When the size is decreased to 99% or below, the crosshairs have a finite size, and
the crosshairs’ ends are visible when moved to the edge of the graphics area. The
default size is 5%.
Printer Tab
Customizes printer or plotter settings and sets the current printer.
Current Printer – Displays the name of the current printer.
List of Printers – Displays a list of the available printers.
Printer Description – Displays information about the currently selected printer.
Set Current – Makes the selected printer the current printer.
Modify – Reconfigures the selected printer. Select a printer from the list of available
printers and choose Modify. In the Reconfigure a Printer dialog box, provide a
description for the printer. Then choose Reconfigure.
New – Displays the Add a Printer dialog box. To add a printer, select a printer from
the list of available printers, provide a description, and then choose OK. The text
window with prompts for printer settings is displayed.
Open – Opens a printer configuration file. In the Select PC2 File dialog box, select
the configuration file for the device you want to use. Then choose OK.
Save As – Saves the complete configuration information for a printer to a file.
Remove – Removes the selected printer from the list of available printers.
7-67
Settings
Profiles Tab
The options contained under this tab control use of profiles; a profile is a
user–defined configuration.
Current profile – Lists the currently selected profile.
List of Profiles – Displays a list of the available profiles.
Set Current – Makes the selected profile the current profile.
Copy – Displays the Copy Profile dialog box to copy an existing profile. Enter a
name and description for the new profile. When you choose OK, a copy of the
selected profile is created, and the new profile name is added to the list box.
Rename – Displays the Change Profile dialog box for changing the name and
description of the selected profile. Use Rename when you want to rename a profile
but keep its current settings.
Delete – Deletes the selected profile.
Export – Exports a profile as a REG file. You can import the profile on the same
computer or a different computer.
Import – Imports a profile created using export.
Reset – Resets the values in the selected profile to the default settings.
7-68
Settings
Preferences (Standalone Version)

Use the Tools > Preferences function to make a number of general settings. Not all
the available settings are relevant to RSWire.
The tabs in the Preferences dialog will be similar to those in the add–on version. If
you installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD R14 format drawings, see
page 7-64. If you installed the Standalone version that uses AutoCAD 2000 format
drawings, see page 7-61.
7-69
Settings
7-70
Plotting
8 Plotting
This section explains how to plot drawing pages from RSWireTM Designer.

Plot Functions
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)
Plotting to Files
Plotting Selected Layers
8-1
Plotting
Plot Functions
To plot drawing pages from RSWire, select the File > Print/Plot pull–down menu.
File Print/Plot Preview...

Plot Config...
Current Page...
Multiple Pages...
There are two plotting functions:
Preview – The Plot Preview function displays the drawing on the screen as it
will appear when plotted on paper. While using the Plot Preview function, the
real–time interactive zooming capability is available. As you move the pointing
device, the drawing image zooms in or out.
During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. Plot
Preview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display is
equal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to the
level of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting.
When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+)
is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. When
you have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minus
sign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further.
You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view.
Plot Config. – This function displays the Plotting tab of the the Options (Tools >
Preferences) dialog box. Here you can select or add printers and plotters.
Configure the drivers and make other printer/plotter settings.
Current Page – Select this function for plotting to a plotter or to the Windows
system printer. This function displays the Plot Configuration dialog box. See
page 8-5.
Multiple Pages – Use this function to plot a group of drawing pages in one
operation. You can select an entire project, an installation within a project, or
individual pages within an installation. You can send the pages to a plotter or to
disk files (PLT, DWG, or DXF format).
8-2
Plotting
Plot Preview
The File > Print/Plot > Preview function allows you to preview a plot before you
send it to the plotter.
Select:
File Print/Plot Preview
A Plot Preview will appear (example shown below).
While using the Plot Preview function, the real–time interactive zooming
capability is available. As you hold down the button and move the pointing
device, the drawing image zooms in or out.
8-3
Plotting
During Plot Preview, zoom–in is limited by the resolution of your plotter. Plot
Preview stops your zoom–in at the point where one pixel on your display is
equal to one pixel (or plotter step) on your plotter. You can only zoom in to the
level of detail that your plotter or printer is capable of plotting.
When you have reached the zoom–in limit (the current view), the plus sign (+)
is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom in any further. When
you have zoomed out to the limit (the extents of the current view), the minus
sign (–) is no longer displayed, indicating that you cannot zoom out any further.
You cannot zoom out beyond the extents of the current view.
To Exit Plot Preview
Press the <Esc> key, or:
1. Press right mouse button. A sub–menu will appear.
2. Select the Exit function. The drawing will appear.
Exit
Plot
Select
“Exit” Pan
Zoom
Zoom Window
Zoom Previous
8-4
Plotting
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayed
drawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command)
also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.
File Print/Plot Current Page
The following Print/Plot Configuration dialog box will appear.
Print / Plot Configuration
Device and Default Information Paper Size and Orientation

Default System Printer Inches
Device and Default Selection... Size... MAX
Pen Parameters MM
Pen Assignments... Optimization... Plot Area 7.93 by 10.49
Orientation
Scale, Rotation, and Origin Icon
Additional Parameters
Rotation and Origin...
Display Text Resolution 50
Extents Text Fill Plotted Inches = Drawing Units
Hide Lines 7.93 = 14.874
Limits
Adjust Area Fill Scaled to Fit
View
This Checkbox Plot to File
Window Plot Preview
Must Be Autospool
Selected To Preview... Partial Full
Enable The View... Window... File Name...
Plot PLT Func-
tion. OK Cancel Help...
8-5
Plotting
The following settings are available:
Device and Default Information
Select the Device and Default Selection button to view or change information
about the device, to save or get defaults from a Plotting Program Parameters
(PCP) file, or to view or change a device–specific configuration. The name of
the currently selected printer/plotter is displayed above this button.
When you select the Device and Default Selection button, the following Device
and Default Selection dialog box will appear.
Device and Default Selection

Select a Device Configuration
Default System Printer
Manufacturer: System Printer ADI 4.3 – By Autodesk, Inc

Port: \\Boggy\B–Size
Configuration File
Complete (PC2) Partial (PCP–R12/R13)

Save.. Replace.. Save.. Merge..
Device Specific Configuration
Device Requirements: Show.. Change
OK Cancel Help...
Partial Save – Saves the current default settings to a PCP file. Plot
Configuration Parameter (PCP) files store the device independent plot settings
you specify. This means you can store settings like paper sizes, pen assignments,
orientations, and scaling factors. You can choose to save to a new or existing
file.
Partial Merge – Retrieves the default settings from a PCP file. The Merge From
PCP File dialog box is displayed, in which you can select a PCP file. If the PCP
file contains errors, a dialog box is displayed listing the errors. Choose Create
Error File to create a file containing any listed errors. A file is created using the
PCP filename with an .err file extension. The file is placed in the same directory
that contains the PCP file.
8-6
Plotting
Complete Replace – Replaces the default settings from a PC2 file. Current
information is lost unless it has been saved to a PC2 file.
Complete Save – Saves the current default settings to a PC2 file. Complete Plot
Configuration (PC2) files store all the information found in a PCP file, plus
device–specific information that would otherwise be defined in the ACAD.CFG
file. You can choose to save to a new or existing file.
Device Specific Configuration – Displays and changes device–specific

configuration requirements. The Show button displays configuration
information for the current plotter. The Change button allows you to enter new
settings for the current plotter. The dialog boxes are different for different
plotters.
Pen Parameters
Use the Pen Assignments button to assign colors, line types and pen widths for
the various pens of the current plotter. The ability to control these parameters
depends on the type of plotter you have selected.
Use the Optimization button to select various optimizations that can be

performed when plotting, minimizing wasted pen motion and reducing plot
time. The default setting is dependent on the device you have configured.
Additional Parameters
In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows:
Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen.
Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that
currently contains entities).
Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits.
View – Not accessible.
Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. You
specify a lower left corner and an upper right corner of the area to be plotted.
This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.
8-7
Plotting
To specify the window, select the Window button. The Window Selection dialog
box will appear. If the area you wish to plot is totally visible on the screen you
can select the Pick button and use your pointing device to designate the window.
The default window is the current display. You can also specify the window by
entering drawing unit coordinates in the First Corner and Other Corner fields.
When you accept the specified window, you will return to the Plot
Configuration dialog box and the Window radio button will be enabled and
selected.
Text Resolution – Sets the resolution, in dots–per–inch, of True Type fonts

while plotting, exporting, and rendering. Lower values decrease resolution and
increase plotting speed. Higher values increase resolution and decrease plotting
speed.
Text Fill – Controls the filling of True Type fonts while plotting, exporting and
rendering. If Text Fill is not selected, text is output as outlines.
Hide Lines – Not applicable.
Adjust Area Fill – Not applicable.
Plot To File – Select to send plot output to a file rather than directly to a plotter.
Important The Plot to File checkbox must be selected (on) to allow the RSWire PLT Plot
function (File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages > Create PLT Files) to work
properly. A plot file will be created with the extension .plt. To specify a file name
other than the default name, select the File Name button. If the current drawing is
unnamed, a plot file will be created with the name unnamed.plt.
Autospool – Select to send plot output directly to a plotter.
Paper Size and Orientation
Use this area to specify plot size, paper size, and orientation.
Use the Inches and MM (millimeters) radio buttons to select the appropriate
plotting units.
The Orientation icon is a rectangle that indicates the natural orientation (portrait
or landscape) of the current plotting device. If your current plotter’s natural
orientation is portrait, it may be necessary to rotate the plot 270 degrees to
achieve the result you want.
Use the Size button to display the paper size dialog box. This dialog box
displays the plot sizes that the current plotter supports. “MAX” is the maximum
size that the plotter can handle. Select a predefined size or enter the width and
height in a USER text box.
8-8
Plotting
Scale, Rotation, and Origin
Use this area to set the plot scale, rotation, and origin.
The label Plotted Inches = Drawing Units will read Plotted MM = Drawing
Units if millimeter was selected as units. The values in these fields indicate the
scale of the plot; plot units in relation to drawing units.
Use the Rotation and Origin button to display the Plot Rotation and Origin
dialog box. Select a rotation value to rotate the plot clockwise. The plot
normally begins in the lower left corner of the paper (home position). If you
wish to place the plot origin at another location, enter the desired coordinates in
the X Origin and Y Origin fields.
Select the Scaled to Fit checkbox to scale the plot so the view chosen, the
portion of the drawing to be plotted, is made as large as possible for the
specified paper size. When this checkbox is selected, the text boxes display the
actual scale used to fit. When Scaled to Fit is turned off, the text boxes default
to 1=1 except when the scale has been previously set to other values. In this
case, the software will use that scale.
Plot Preview
Select the Preview button to display the plot on screen so you can see that it is
correctly placed on the paper.
If you select the Partial radio button, the preview will indicate the plot area as a
simple rectangle positioned on the paper. If the plot origin has been offset so
that the effective area extends outside the graphic area of the preview area, a
green line will be displayed along any clipped side.
If you select the Full radio button, the preview will show the drawing on the
screen as it will appear on paper. Because this requires a regeneration of the
drawing it is slower than a partial preview. During a full preview a dialog box is
displayed with buttons for Pan and Zoom and End Preview. The Pan and
Zoom function is similar to the Dynamic zoom function (see page 4-32). The
End Preview function returns you to the Print/Plot Configuration dialog box.
8-9
Plotting
Plot Current Page (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

Use the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function to plot the currently displayed
drawing page. This function (which is equivalent to the AutoCAD PLOT command)
also displays a dialog box that allows various plot configuration settings to be made.
File Print/Plot Current Page
The following Plot dialog box will appear.
Plot ?
Layout name Page setup name
Model Save changes to layout <Select page setup to apply> Add...
Plot Device Plot Settings

Plotter configuration
Name: HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced Properties
Plotter: HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced-Windows System Driver Hints
Where: LPT1:
Description:
Plot style table (pen assignments)
Name: None Edit... New...
What to plot Plot to file

Current tab Plot to file
Selected tabs
File name:
All layout tabs
Location: D:\RS\PROJECT\WORK\____6
Number of copies 1
Full Preview... Partial Preview... OK Cancel Help
8-10
Plotting
Layout name – (Layouts are not used in RSWire – they are the same as Paper
Space.) Displays the current layout name or displays ”Selected layouts” if multiple
tabs are selected. If the Model tab is current when you choose Plot, the Layout
Name shows ”Model.” Select the Save changes to layout checkbox to save changes
you make in the Plot dialog box in the layout. This option is unavailable if multiple
layouts are selected.
Page setup name – Displays a list of any named and saved page setups. You can
choose to base the current page setup on a named page setup, or you can add a new
named page setup by choosing Add. Selecting Add displays the User Defined Page
Setups dialog box. You can create, delete, or rename named page setups.
Plot Device tab
Use the Plotter Configuration function to select a printer/plotter driver.
Use the Plot style table function to edit pen colors and line weights.
Use the What to plot functions to select which tabs to plot and the number of copies
to plot. Current tab plots the current Model or Layout tab. (Layouts are not used in
RSWire.) If multiple tabs are selected, the tab that shows its viewing area is plotted.
Selected tabs plots multiple preselected Model or layout tabs. To select multiple
tabs, hold down CTRL while selecting the tabs. If only one tab is selected, this
option is unavailable. All layout tabs plots all layout tabs, regardless of which tab is
selected.
Select the Plot to file checkbox if you wish to create a plot file of the current
drawing. You can enter the desired filename and directory.
8-11
Plotting
Plot Settings tab
Plot ?
Layout name Page setup name
Model Save changes to layout <Select page setup to apply> Add...
Plot Device Plot Settings

Paper size and paper units Drawing orientation
Plot device: HP LaserJet 6P/6MP-Enhanced Portrait
Paper size: Letter Landscape
Printable area: 10.60 x 8.10 inches inches mm Plot upside-down
Plot area Plot scale
Limits Scale: Scaled to Fit
Extents Custom:
Scale Lineweight
Display
Plot offset Plot options
View
Center the plot Plot object lineweights
Window Plot with plot styles
Window < X: 0.00 inches
Plot paperspace last
Y: 0.00 inches Hide objects
Full Preview... Partial Preview... OK Cancel Help
Paper size and paper units
Select the output Paper size. Also select inches or mm as the units for the plot
settings.
Drawing orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape orientation of the drawing on the paper. Selected

orientation is indicated by the page icon. Also, select Plot upside down if
desired.
Plot area
8-12
Plotting
In this area you can set additional plotting parameters as follows:
Limits – Select to plot entire drawing area as defined by the drawing limits.
Extents – Select to plot everything in the drawing (that part of the drawing that
currently contains entities).
Display – Select to plot what is currently displayed on the screen.
View – Not accessible.
Window – When selected, allows you to plot any portion of the drawing. Select
the Window button. Then define two opposite corners of the area to be plotted.
This radio button is grayed out until a window has been specified.
Plot scale
Scale – From the pulldown list, you can select Scaled to Fit to scale the plot as
large as possible for the selected paper. You can also select from a number of
scale ratios (1:1, 1:2, etc.).
Custom – Indicates the relation between plot units of length and drawing units
of length. This will change according to the selected scale.
Scale lineweights – Scales lineweights in proportion to the plot scale.

Lineweights normally specify the linewidth of printed objects and are plotted
with the linewidth size regardless of the plot scale.
Plot offset
Select the Center the plot checkbox to center the plot on the paper. Or, you can
set the origin of the plot by entering values in the X and Y fields.
Plot options
Plot object lineweights – If you have turned off the Plot with plot styles
checkbox, you can select this checkbox to use object lineweights in the plot.
Plot with plot styles – Select this checkbox to plot using the plot styles applied
to objects and defined in the plot style table. All style definitions with different
property characteristics are stored in the plot style tables and can be attached to
the geometry. This setting can replace pen mapping in earlier versions of
AutoCAD.
8-13
Plotting
Plot paperspace last – Plots model space geometry first. Paper space geometry
is usually plotted before model space geometry.
Hide objects – Plots layouts with hidden lines removed for objects in the layout
environment (paper space). Hidden line removal for model space objects in
viewports is controlled by the Viewports Hide property in the Object Property
Manager. This is displayed in the plot preview, but not in the layout.
8-14
Plotting
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD R14 add–on version)

The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entire
project or a group of selected pages within the project.
Select:
File Print/Plot Multiple Pages
The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear.
Print/Plot Pages
Export Type File Name Format Export Format Plot Sequence
Plot Direct Project/Inst./Page AutoCAD R12 Forward

Create PLT Files
AutoCAD R13
Create DWG Files
Create DXF Files Consecutive AutoCAD R14 Backward
Page Selection... Layer Groups... Define Layer...
OK Cancel Help...
This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or to
a disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and the
AutoCAD version format of the files.
Plot to a Plotter
Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
8-15
Plotting
Plot to a File
In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that you
wish to create: PLT, DWG, or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files contains more
information (see page 8-21).
Select Pages to be Plotted
Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear.
Plotting
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
OK Cancel Help...
The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select a
project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a
list of pages in that installation will appear.
lists.
To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Do
not select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will be
plotted.
To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desired
installation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) All
drawing pages in the installation will be plotted.
8-16
Plotting
To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installation
name. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page column
followed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted.
Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting.
Plot Sequence
You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons in
the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest to
highest.
Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order from
highest to lowest.
8-17
Plotting
Plot Multiple Pages (AutoCAD 2000 add–on version)

The File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function allows you to plot an entire
project or a group of selected pages within the project.
Select:
The following Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear.
Print/Plot Pages
Export Type
Page Selection...
Plotter Configuration
Plot Direct
Layer Selection...
Create PLT Files
Create DWF Files Define Layer...
Create DWG Files
Create DXF Files
File Name Format Export Format Plot Sequence
Project/Inst./Page AutoCAD R12 Forward

Consecutive AutoCAD R13 Backward
AutoCAD R14
AutoCAD 2000
OK Cancel Help...
This dialog box allows the user to select whether pages will be sent to a plotter or to
a disk file. There are also radio buttons to select the file naming format and the
AutoCAD version format of the files.
8-18
Plotting
Plot to a Plotter
Select the Plot Direct radio button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
Plot to a File
In the Print/Plot Pages dialog box, select the radio button for the file type that you
wish to create: PLT, DWF, DWG or DXF. The section on Plotting to Files contains
more information (see page 8-21).
Select Pages to be Plotted
Select the Page Selection button. The following Plotting dialog box will appear.
Plotting
ABACK
MACHINE1
TOOL
WAREHOUSE
OK Cancel Help...
The Project field contains a list of projects currently on your system. Select a
project name and a list of installations will appear. Select an installation name and a
list of pages in that installation will appear.
lists.
To Plot an Entire Project – Select the project name followed by the OK button. (Do
not select any installation or page names.) All drawing pages in the project will be
plotted.
8-19
Plotting
To Plot an Entire Installation – Select the project name and then the desired
installation name followed by the OK button. (Do not select any page names.) All
drawing pages in the installation will be plotted.
To Plot Individual Pages – Select the project name and then the desired installation
name. You can then select one or more individual pages from the Page column
followed by the OK button. The selected pages will be plotted.
Select the OK button in the Print/Plot Pages dialog box to proceed with the plotting.
Plot Sequence
You can select the order in which pages plot with the Plot Sequence radio buttons in
the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
Select the Forward radio button to print pages in numerical order from lowest to
highest.
Select the Backward radio button to print pages in reverse numerical order from
highest to lowest.
8-20
Plotting
Plotting to Files
PLT Files
To plot drawing pages as PLT files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages
function and select the Create PLT Files radio button. Files will be saved in the
RS\PLOT directory.
Note The Create PLT Files function will not work under AutoCAD R14 unless the Plot to
File checkbox in the File > Print/Plot > Current Page function is turned on.
Note When you use the AutoCAD PLOT command to plot to a file, the system will create
a plt extension file in the same directory as the original page file (under
RS\PROJECT\WORK).
Procedure:
1. Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function.
2. Select the Create PLT Files radio button in the dialog box.
3. Select the File Name Format option. Two choices are available:
Project/Inst./Page – This option will create subdirectories under the RS\PLOT

directory for the project and installation and store the PLT files in these
subdirectories. For example, if pages from the project EX2, installation A are
plotted, the files will be stored in the directory RS\PLOT\EX2\A. (If there is no
installation in the project, the plot file installation subdirectory will be named
NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.plt where “pagename” is
the name of the page created in RSWire. The software creates the file
Plot_plt.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which
project/installation/location/page are in each plot file.
Consecutive – This option will create a subdirectory under the RS\PLOT

directory having the project name. Within this directory all selected files will be
saved (without being divided by installation). The files will be named in the
format ecs0.plt, ecs1.plt, etc. The software creates the file Plot_plt.txt in the
project’s plot file directory that indicates which
project/installation/location/page are in each PLT file.
4. Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages that
you wish to plot to file. Select OK once the pages are selected. You will return
to the Print/Plot Pages dialog box.
8-21
Plotting
5. Select OK in the Plot dialog box to create the files.
The software will remind you to select the Plot to File radio button in the Print/Plot
> Current Page function. If there are already PLT files in the same subdirectory of
the PLOT directory (from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt
“There are PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete
the existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the PLT plot
function.
DWF Files
(AutoCAD 2000 add–on version only) DWF files can be viewed in Internet
browsers with the Autodesk WHIP! 4.0 plug–in. To plot drawing pages as DWF
files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and select the Create
DWF Files radio button. Files will be saved in the RS\PLOT directory.
Procedure:
2. Select the Create DWF Files radio button in the dialog box.
3. Select a configuration file from the drop–down list immediately to the right of
the Create DWF Files radio button. There are two choices for DWF files: The
DWF Classic.pc3 configuration file creates DWFs that resemble AutoCAD
Release 14 DWFs. The output file is created with a black drawing background.
The DWF ePlot.pc3 file creates DWFs with a white drawing background and a
paper boundary.

directory for the project and installation and store the DWF files in these
NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwf where “pagename” is
Plot_dwf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which
8-22
Plotting

format ecs0.dwf, ecs1.dwf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwf.txt in the
5. Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages that
to the Plot dialog box.
DWG Files
To plot drawing pages as DWG files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages
function and select the Create DWG Files radio button. Files will be saved in the
RS\PLOT directory.
Note You can also use the File > Save As function to save drawings as DWG files (see
page 4-9), but these functions only save one page at a time. The plot function allows
you to save a range of pages in one operation.
Procedure:
2. Select the Create DWG Files radio button in the dialog box.

directory for the project and installation and store the DWG files in these
NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dwg where “pagename” is
Plot_dwg.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which
8-23
Plotting

format ecs0.dwg, ecs1.dwg, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dwg.txt in the
4. Select the Export Format AutoCAD R12, AutoCAD R13, AutoCAD R14 or
AutoCAD 2000 to match the DWG type that you wish to create.
5. Select the Select Pages button to select the project, installation and pages that
If there are already DWG files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory
(from a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are
DWG/PLT files in the plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the
existing files and continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DWG plot
function.
DXF Files
To plot drawing pages as DXF files, use the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages
function and select the Create DXF Files radio button. Files will be saved in the
RS\PLOT directory.
Procedure:
2. Select the Create DXF Files radio button in the Plot dialog box.
8-24
Plotting

directory for the project and installation and store the DXF files in these
NO_INST.) The files will have the format pagename.dxf where “pagename” is
Plot_dxf.txt in the project’s plot file directory that indicates which

format ecs0.dxf, ecs1.dxf, etc. The software creates the file Plot_dxf.txt in the
project/installation/location/page are in each DXF file.
4. Select the Page Selection button to select the project, installation and pages that
If there are already DXF files in the same subdirectory of the PLOT directory (from
a previous use of this function) the software will prompt “There are DXF files in the
plot directory. Delete?” Select Yes if you wish to delete the existing files and
continue. Select Cancel if you wish to abort the DXF plot function.
8-25
Plotting
Plotting Selected Layers

RSWire has the capability to plot selected drawing layers. This is useful if, for
example, you wish to show or hide mounting information on a panel layout
drawing, or show or hide certain texts on a schematic drawing.
To plot by layer, the user creates a layer group consisting of one or more selected
layers. A layer group can then be selected for plotting. All the standard RSWire
drawing layers are available for inclusion in a layer group. (See page 5-127 for a list
of layers.)
If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWire
using the Define Layers function before they can be included in a layer group. See
page 8-31.
Creating and Selecting Layer Groups
To plot by layer, the layer first must be assigned to a layer group. A group can
consist of one or more layers.
To create a layer group
1. Select File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages.
The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will appear.
2. Select the Layer Groups button.
The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear.
8-26
Plotting
Layer Printing Control

Layer Control Active
On
Off
Layer Group
Select
Modify...
Delete
Add...
OK Cancel Help...
Enter New Group Name
Enter a name for the new layer group in the field above the Add button. Then
select the Add button.
3. The Modify Groups dialog box will appear.
Modify Groups
Layer Group Layer Names
ECS_LEV_FIELD
ECS_LEV_LINE
ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO
ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME
ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER
ECS_LEV_PH_DATA
ECS_LEV_PH_EED
ECS_LEV_PH_TMP
Delete Add
OK Cancel Help...
8-27
Plotting
Existing layer names are listed in the Layer Names field. Select (highlight) the
names of the layers that you wish to include in the layer group. Then select the
Add button. The selected layers will be listed in the Layer Group field. When
you have added all the desired layers for the group select the OK button.
4. The Layer Groups dialog box will return. The newly created layer group will be
listed in the Layer Group field.
Selecting a Layer Group for Plotting
To select a layer group for plotting:
2. Select the Layer Groups button.
3. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will appear. Select the On radio button
in the Layer Control section.
Layer Printing Control

Layer Control Active
On
Off
Layer Group
Select
template
Modify...
Delete
Add...
OK Cancel Help...
8-28
Plotting
4. Existing layer groups are listed in the Layer Group field. Select (highlight) the
name of the layer group that you wish to plot.
5. Then select the Select button. The selected layer group name will appear in the
Active field.
6. Select the OK button. The Print/Plot Pages dialog box will return. You can then
select pages for plotting with the Page Selection button.
7. The plot by layer mode will remain in effect during the work session until you
return to the Layer Groups dialog box and select the Off radio button in the
Layer Control area.
Modifying a Layer Group
To add or remove layers in an existing layer group:
2. Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will
appear.
3. Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be modified.
4. Select the Modify button. The Modify Groups dialog box will appear. Layers
that are currently in the group are listed in the Layer Group field. All available
layer names are listed in the Layer Names field.
5. Use the Delete button to remove selected layer names from the Layer Group
field. To add a layer name to the group, select the layer name in the Layer
Names field followed by the Add.
Deleting a Layer Group
To delete an existing symbol group:
2. Select the Layer Groups button. The Layer Printing Control dialog box will
appear.
3. Select (highlight) the name of the layer group to be deleted.
8-29
Plotting
4. Select the Delete button.
8-30
Plotting
Defining Custom Drawing Layers
If you have created custom drawing layers, these must first be defined in RSWire
using the Define Layers function before these layers can be included in a layer
group for plotting by layer.
Define a Layer
2. Select the Define Layer button.
3. The Define Layers dialog box will appear. A list of existing, defined layer
names appears on the left side of the dialog box.
Define Layers
Existing Layer Names
ECS_LEV_FIELD
ECS_LEV_LINE
ECS_LEV_LINE_WNO Add
ECS_LEV_PG_FRAME
ECS_LEV_PG_LADDER
ECS_LEV_PH_DATA
ECS_LEV_PH_EED
ECS_LEV_PH_TMP Remove
OK Cancel Help Save
Enter Layer Name
4. Enter the name of the layer that you wish to define in the field above the Add
button. Then select the Add button. The name of the newly defined layer will
then appear in the list in alphabetical order.
5. If you wish the layer to remain defined in future work sessions select the Save
button. If you only wish to define it for the current work session select OK.
8-31
Plotting
Remove (un–define) a Layer
When a layer is removed from the Existing Layer Names list, this layer name can no
longer be included in a layer group. The removed layer still exists, it is simply not
listed in the Define Layers dialog box. A removed layer can be added to the layer
list again at a later time.
1. Select the File > Print/Plot > Multiple Pages function and then the Define
Layer button.
2. Select (highlight) the layer name that you wish to remove.
3. Select the Remove button.
4. If you wish the layer name to remain un–defined in future work sessions select
the Save button. If you only wish to un–define it for the current work session
select the OK button.
8-32
Reports
9 Reports
This section describes the various information reports and lists that can be generated
in RSWireTM Designer.
The report functions are found under the Reports pull–down menu. They are
divided into a number of submenus, each of which contain several specific list
functions. These submenus are described in the following sections.
Reports Project
Libraries
Connections
Terminals
Wire
PLC–List
Parts
MS Access Reports
Comma Separated
Error Checking
The Tools > System Settings > Report Settings function displays a dialog box that
allows a number of list output settings to be made. See page 7-5.
See Section 14, List Generator Configuration, for information on customizing the
formats of the various reports and lists.

Printing Lists from RSWire
Project Reports
Project Full
Project Brief
Installations
Page Full
Page Brief
9-1
Reports
Table of Contents
Library Reports
Macro
Symbols
Device Type Full
Device Type Brief
Parts
Foreign Languages
Page Formats
Connections Reports
Wire List
Wire Labels
Cable List
Field Wire
Signals
Terminals Reports
Terminals
Terminal Strips
PLC–List Report
Parts Reports
Compile Parts File
Master List
Bill of Materials
Purchase Order
Job Costing
Dimension List
MS Access Reports
Comma Separated Reports
Error Checking Reports
Unreferenced Signals Report
Device Without Parent Report
9-2
Reports
Printing Lists from RSWire

When a list is sent from RSWire to a printer, the default method for printing is to
use the DOS PRINT command. RSWire creates a file and then “shells” out to DOS
and calls a batch file in the RS\WORK directory. The name of the file to be printed
is sent as a parameter to the batch call (%2). The name of the batch file to be called
is named in the Tools > System Settings > Printer Configuration dialog box in
one of the numbered Printer fields. See page 7-9. Up to five different batch files can
be used at any given time.
The batch files can be written to send the print files to different printers or to imbed
escape sequences for the printer so that different printer setups for fonts, paper
orientations, etc., can be assigned to the five printers. This can be done by the use of
an ECHO command with a redirection to the appropriate printer.
For example, this line would send “ [ESC] FF” to LPT1 at the start of every print
job:
ECHO [ESC] FF > LPT1 ]
PRINT %2
Or
This line would send a whole file of text or escape sequences:

TYPE PRINTER1.ESC > LPT1
The standard default batch is PRINTER.BAT. This file uses the DOS PRINT
COMMAND.
Other methods can also be used in the batch file:
“TYPE %2 > LPT1”

“TYPE %2 > LPT1.DOS”
“COPY %2 LPT1”
“COPY %2 LPT1.DOS”
You can verify that these lines will work on your system by typing them on the DOS
command line while shelled out of DOS and substituting an actual text file name for
the “%2”.
Other methods may also be available with your network or spooling software.
NPRINT for example.
9-3
Reports
Project Reports
The Reports > Project submenu allows you to generate lists of projects and the
installations and pages contained in those projects.
Reports Project Project Full

Project Brief
Installations
Page Full
Page Brief
Table of Contents
Project Full
This function generates a list of RSWire projects that currently exist on the system
in the designated project directory (RS\PROJECT\WORK). The list includes project
name, number of pages, description, job number, drawing number and additional
description.
Project Brief
This function also lists all RSWire projects, but in a more concise format that does
not include the additional description.
Installations
This function generates a list of all installations in a selected project.
Page Full
This function generates a detailed list of all drawing pages in a project including
page descriptions, format number, location, date, etc. When you select this function
a Select Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a project
and (if desired) limit the list to a single installation.
9-4
Reports
Page Brief
This function generates a more concise list of drawing pages in a project, including
only page, description, location, date and name. When you select this function a
Select Project – Installation dialog box appears allowing you to select a project and
(if desired) limit the list to a single installation.
Table of Contents
This function generates a graphical page list. The pages are listed in table format,
with columns for installation, page number, description, location, date and macro.
9-5
Reports
Library Reports
The Reports > Libraries submenu provides a selection of lists of information that
is relevant to all projects. This includes lists of macros, symbols, device types, and
language texts.
Reports Libraries Macro

Symbols
Device Type Full
Device Type Brief
Parts Full Data Preview
Brief Data Preview
Full Data Printout
Brief Data Printout
Foreign Languages
Page Formats
Macro
This function generates a list of available macros in the currently loaded symbol
library. Sorting can be performed by macro name and macro description.
Symbols
This function generates a list of all the symbols in the currently loaded symbol
library.
Note If you have not looked at any drawing page since entering RSWire, the system may
prompt “No catalog loaded” when you select the macro or symbol list. In this case,
you can open a drawing page that utilizes the desired symbol catalog.
Device Type Full
This function provides a list of device types. (In RSWire, a device type is a
definition that ties together a parent symbol, a child symbol, and a cross reference
symbol.) The list contains detailed information about the device types including the
names of the parent, child and cross reference symbols and the distance of the cross
reference symbol from the parent symbol reference point.
9-6
Reports
Device Type Brief
This function generates a concise list of available device types consisting of device
name and description.
Parts
The Library > Parts report functions allow you to create reports on information in
the parts database.
Full Data Preview – This function displays a detailed listing of parts data on the
screen.
Brief Data Preview – This function displays a more concise listing of parts data on
the screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number..
Full Data Printout – This function generates a detailed printout of parts data.
Brief Data Printout – This function generates a more concise printout of parts data
on the screen including part number, description, manufacturer and catalog number..
Foreign Languages
This function allows foreign language lists to be searched and listed. RSWire
includes a file containing lists of commonly used technical words and phrases in
multiple languages (English, German, French, etc.). By entering the number for the
word or phrase in the drawing (instead of the word itself), RSWire can automatically
display the word or phrase in up to three of the available languages. The Foreign
Languages function displays the following Language Text Database dialog box.
9-7
Reports
Language Text Database
Selected Languages List
English All Selected Languages

German
French
Spanish Translated Texts
Netherlands
Italian
Not Translated
Filter
Text
Number
Cancel Help...
The Selected Languages field allows you to select one or more languages for
searching and/or listing. Use standard Windows selection keys (hold down <Ctrl> to
select more than one language, hold down <Shift> to select a block of languages.)
The Filter fields allow you to enter a text phrase or number and search for that
entry. Wildcard entries containing an asterisk (*) character are possible (e.g., enter
text *ON* to search for all text containing the letters “ON”).
The List buttons allow you to list all the selected languages, all entries that exist in
all languages (Translated Texts button), and all entries that do not exist in all
languages (Not Translated button).
The selected texts are listed in a dialog box. You can print these texts by selecting
the Print button. To sort the texts by text number, click in the column header for text
numbers. To sort the texts alphanumerically by text, click in the column header for
the texts. See following figure.
9-8
Reports
Language Text Database
TEXTNO OK
1 DRIVE Print
2 MOTOR DRIVE
3 E-VALVE
4 MOUNTINGS
5 PUMP Click in
6 AMPLIFIER column
7 THROTTLE ORIFICE headers to
8 TRANSFORMER sort texts
Page Formats
This Reports > Libraries > Page Formats function generates a list of RSWire
drawing page formats including dimensions and descriptions.
9-9
Reports
Connections Reports
The Reports > Connections submenu provides wire related list information.
Reports Connections Wire List

Wire Labels
Cable List
Field Wire
Signals
Wire List
The Reports > Connections > Wire List function generates a list of wires which
includes the following information: wire number, gauge, color, source (from),
destination (to).
When you select the Wire List function, a dialog box will appear asking if you wish
to create a project connection list. This connection list is a source file that is used to
generate the wire list.
Warning
Create project connection list?
Yes No Cancel
If you have not yet created a connection list file for the project, or have made
changes since the last connection list was generated, select the Yes button. If you
wish to base the wire list on an existing connection list file, select the No button.
The Connection List dialog box will appear.
9-10
Reports
Connection List
File Name L1.LST

Installation LINE1 Search...
Location Search...
Comment LINE1 WIRE LIST
File Name(s)
L1.LST LINE1 WIRE LIST
L2.LST LINE2 WIRE LIST
WIRELIST TOTAL WIRE LIST
Parameter Open Connections
Delete
OK Cancel Help...
To create a new connection list:
In the File Name field enter the name you wish the connection list to have.
In the Installation field enter nothing if you wish to include all installations. Enter
an installation name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specified
installation.
In the Location field enter nothing if you wish to include all locations. Enter a
location name if you wish to restrict the contents of the list to the specified location.
In the Comment field enter a description of the connection list. This will help you
distinguish the various connection lists later.
The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain types
of terminal information. See page 9-13.
Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of open
connections.
9-11
Reports
Select OK to generate the wire list.
To use an existing connection list:
The File Name(s) area of the Connection List dialog box lists the available
connection lists. Select an existing list by pointing and clicking; the file name and
description is listed in the upper part of the dialog box.
The Parameter button provides additional toggles to include or restrict certain types
of terminal information. See page 9-13.
Selecting the Open Connections toggle will generate a list consisting only of open
connections.
Select OK to generate the wire list.

Note When there are more than two devices connected to a potential, the connections
shown in the wire list are determined by the connection search priorities that the
software uses when analyzing the schematic drawings. See page 9-15.
Note To delete an existing connection list, select the list name in the Connection List
dialog box and then select the Delete button.
9-12
Reports
Connection List Parameters
The Parameter button in the Connection List dialog provides settings to include or
restrict certain types of terminal information. The following dialog box is displayed.
Connection List Parameters

Suppress
Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers
Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers
Terminal Block Connections
Cable Connections
Target Definition
Both Targets Match Selection
Selection Filters To Target 1
Print Target
Complete Partial
OK Cancel Help...
Suppress:
Terminal Blocks Clip Jumpers – When this checkbox is Off all connections are
shown in the connection list. When On, connections between two consecutively
numbered terminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appear
in the connection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminal
plan interconnection drawings and subsequent lists.
Terminal Blocks Wire Jumpers – When Off all connections are shown in the
connection list. When On, connections between two non–consecutively numbered
terminals possessing the same device ID (terminal strip) will not appear in the
connection list. The jumper connection will then be displayed in the terminal plan
interconnection drawings and subsequent lists.
9-13
Reports
Terminal Block Connections – When Off all connections are shown in the
connection list. When On, connections between two terminals possessing different
device IDs (terminal strip) will not appear in the connection list. The cabling
information will then be displayed in the terminal plan interconnection drawings
and subsequent lists.
Cable Connections – When checked, will omit cable connections from the
connection list.
Target Definition:
Both Targets Match Selection – When this checkbox is On, both targets
(destinations) in the connection list must match the installation and location defined
by the user in the Installation and Location fields of the Create Connection List
dialog box. When Off only one of the destinations must match the installation and
location defined by the user. The system will display the connection between the
devices in their respective installations and locations when connected by wires.
For example: suppose a wire list is generated based on the installation L1 and the
location E1. Suppose the following wire list is generated with the Both Targets
Match Selection checkbox turned OFF.
FROM TO
Inst. Loc. Device ID Inst. Loc. Device ID
= L1 + E1 PB1 = L1 + E1 TB1:10
= L2 + ST1 LS2 = L1 + E1 SS2
The first connection in the list matches the specified installation and location (L1
and E1) on both the From and the To sides. The second connection matches the
specified installation and location only on the To side. If the connection list were
created again with the Both Targets Match Selection checkbox turned ON, only the
first connection shown above would be listed because both sides would have to
match the specified installation and location.
Selection Filters To Target 1 – This checkbox works in conjunction with the Both
Targets Match Selection checkbox (which must be OFF for this checkbox to serve
any purpose). Turning ON the Selection Filters to Target 1 checkbox will place all
destinations that match the installation and location specified by the user ( in the
Installation and Location fields of the Create Connection List dialog box) on the
From side of the list. For the example listing shown above, turning this checkbox
ON would have the effect of reversing the second connection the next time a listing
was made, as follows:
9-14
Reports
FROM TO
Inst. Loc. Device ID Inst. Loc. Device ID
= L1 + E1 PB1 = L1 + E1 TB1:10
= L2 + E1 SS2 = L2 + ST1 LS2
Print Target
These radio buttons determine whether the complete target name is listed including
installation and location. Selecting Complete will include installation and location.
Selecting Partial will exclude the installation and location.
Select OK to return to the Connection List dialog box.
Then select OK to create the connection list.
The Wire List output is done with the Reports > Connections > Wire List
function.
Connection Search Priorities
The software uses a search routine to determine connections on potentials where

more than two devices are connected. For most wires, only a “from” and “to” need
to be determined; but in some cases there may be many devices all connected to the
same potential. The software searches these wires in the following manner:
The search of a potential begins on the left–hand side of the lowest line number on
the connected symbols. If the page format in use does not have line numbers, the
leftmost connection will be used as the starting point. If two connections on a page
without line numbers are lined up, the topmost one will take precedence. If a
diagonal connection symbol exists on the wire, the connection search will begin at
the connection point left of position 1 on the diagonal connection symbol (see
diagram on next page). If multiple diagonal connection symbols exist, the search
will begin with the upper–leftmost connection.
The system will follow the wire from this first connection until it encounters another
connection point. Here it analyzes all wires incoming to the connection point and
looks for unanalyzed wires. In a vertical (U.S. type) ladder diagram, the system uses
the following priorities at each connection point:
1st priority: horizontal line to the left
2nd priority: horizontal line to the right or slanting
3rd priority: vertical line upwards
4th priority: vertical line downwards
5th priority: diagonal line
9-15
Reports
T1 3rd
Connection Search 1st 2nd

From Left Side of T2
T2
4th 5th
Search Priorities
JIC Style Diagram
For horizontal (IEC, DIN) style diagrams, the system searches for connections using
the following priorities:
1st priority: vertical line upwards
2nd priority: vertical line downwards
3rd priority: horizontal line to the left
4th priority: horizontal line to the right
5th priority: diagonal line
1st
3rd 4th
5th
T1 T2
2nd
Connection Search Search Priorities

From Left Side Of T2
IEC Style Diagram
For both diagram types (ladder and IEC), these priorities only apply if a
perpendicular connection is used as the connection point. If the diagonal wiring
symbol DW is used (selected with Tools > Project Settings > General Defaults
function), the subsequent course of the search depends on the orientation of the
diagonal wiring symbol:
incoming at connection point 1 continue at 2
incoming at connection point 2 continue at 1 if 3 already processed
9-16
Reports
3 DW Symbol
Connection
1 2 Points
After the search is completed, each connection along the search path is put on the
connection (wire) list. If the list did not contain any diagonal wires, the list will be
sorted alphanumerically according to the “From” part of each connection. If ANY
diagonal wires exist, connections will be shown on the wire list in the order they
were analyzed.
The above process is completed for each potential and the information is added to
the connection (wire) list.
9-17
Reports
Wire Labels
Use the Reports > Connections > Wire Labels to generate a list of wire numbers
which can be printed in the form of wire labels.
Select:
Reports Connections Wire Labels
The wire labels will be printed, displayed on the screen or saved to a file depending
on the output mode selected with the Report Settings tab in Tools > System
Settings function.
Note Wire labels cannot be filtered using the list generator filter function.
Cable List
The Cable List is a list of cables in the project including installation, location,
device ID and number of conductors.
Reports Connections Cable List
Field Wire
The Field Wire report is a list of cables in the project including the internal and
external connections of each conductor. The list indicates which conductors have
been used (assigned).
Reports Connections Field Wire
Signals
The Signals report function displays a list of signal symbols in the project showing
each symbol’s device ID and Installation – page – line number position. It also
indicates whether the signal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type.
Reports Connections Signals
9-18
Reports
Terminals Reports
The Terminals report functions generate information on terminals strips.
Reports Terminals Terminals

Terminal Strips
Terminals
The Terminals function generates a list of terminal strips. For each strip, the
internal and external connections of each terminal are indicated.
Select:
Reports Terminals Terminals
Terminal Strips
The Terminal Strips function generates a list of terminal strips in the project
including installation, location, device ID, and number of terminals.
Select:
Reports Terminals Terminal Strips
The list shows the terminal strip ID and the number of terminals used in the project.
9-19
Reports
PLC–List Report
The PLC–List report function generates a list of programmable controller I/O
modules in the project. This list indicates the address and descriptive text of each
I/O point of each PLC module parent symbol. Installation and line number are given
for PLC child symbols.
Select:
Reports PLC–List
9-20
Reports
Parts Reports
The Reports > Parts submenu provides a selection of lists jointly compiled from
the items included in a project and the data in the parts database.
Reports Parts Compile Parts File

Master List
Bill of Materials
Purchase Order
Job Costing
Dimension List
Compile Parts File
The Compile Parts File function creates a source file of parts information from the
current project that is used to generate other job lists including the Master Parts List,
Bill of Material, Purchase Order List, Job Costing List and Dimension List.
Reports Parts Compile Parts File
The Master Parts List dialog box will appear.
Master Parts List
Project: project name Output File Name: MAST.LST
Replace Language Text Language

Replace Multi–Line Text (^) 1: English
Only On–Line Selected Pages
2:
Only Device IDs With Part Number
Include Terminals 3:
OK Cancel Help...
The Output File field allows the name of the parts file to be entered. The default
filename is MAST.LST.
9-21
Reports
The following checkboxes determine what is included in the parts file:
Replace Language Text – Select this checkbox to overwrite the user–defined

function text language selected in the Project Parameters dialog box (you must then
specify new languages in the Language fields of the Compile Parts File dialog
box).
Replace Multi–Line Text – Select this checkbox to eliminate the control symbol (^)
in the lists to be created. When text is entered on a drawing this symbol indicates a
line break. For function text printouts, leave this checkbox unselected to maintain
text locations for applications such as nameplate generation.
Only On–Line Selected Pages – Select this checkbox to create a file only from
those pages with online control turned on.
Only Device IDs With Part Number – Select this checkbox to restrict the list to
only those device IDs that have a part number assigned.
Include Terminals – Select this checkbox to include terminals in the list.
Select OK to generate the parts file. The parts file will be stored in the
RS\PROJECT\WORK directory in the subdirectory for the currently active project.
Master List
The master parts list includes the device ID, page/line number, part numbers, and
function text for items in the schematics.
In order to generate this list, a parts file must first have been created with the
Reports > Parts > Compile Parts File function.
Select:
Reports Parts Master List
A Master List dialog box will appear listing the available parts files. Select a file
name and select the OK button to generate the master list.
9-22
Reports
Bill of Materials
The bill of materials is a list of parts used in a given project. The list shows every
device ID to which a part number has been assigned, the part number, the part
description and manufacturer.
In order to generate this list, a parts file must first be created with the Reports >
Parts > Compile Parts File function.
Select:
Reports Parts Bill of Materials
Bill Of Materials
Master List: Select:
Installation:
Location:
MAST.LST
MASTB.LST
OK Cancel Help...
You can select from different parts files which are listed on the left side of the dialog
box.
The output can be limited to information from specific installations or locations by

entering the desired installation and location names in the Installation and Location
fields. Wildcard (*) entries are allowed.
Select OK to generate the list.
9-23
Reports
Purchase Order List
The purchase order list is a quantified list of part numbers (with descriptions) used
in a project. All items with matching part numbers are combined and shown as a
quantity.
Select:
Reports Parts Purchase Order
Purchase Order List

Installation:
Location:
MAST.LST
MASTB.LST
Print Device ID’s
OK Cancel Help...
You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box.

If you select the Print Device ID’s checkbox, each item on the list will include the
device IDs to which that part number was assigned.
9-24
Reports
Job Costing List
The job costing list calculates the total cost of the project including material,
assembly and wiring time, and mark–up.
Select:
Reports Parts Job Costing
Job Costing List

Installation:
Location:
MAST.LST
MASTB.LST
Hourly Cost 0.00
Mark–Up 0.00
Print Device ID
OK Cancel Help...
You can select from different parts files listed on the left side of the dialog box.

The Hourly Cost field allows you to enter a labor cost value which, in conjunction
with the assembly and wiring times from the parts database, will be used to calculate
the total assembly and wiring costs.
The Mark–Up field allows you to set a mark–up percentage beyond the prices in the
parts database.
9-25
Reports
If you select the Print Device ID toggle, each item on the list will include the device
IDs to which that part number was assigned.
9-26
Reports
Dimension List
The dimension list calculates the total area, maximum depth and total weight of the
components in the project. Subtotals are calculated for each location.
Select:
Reports Parts Dimension List
The software will prompt you to create a master parts file.
The following will then appear dialog box appears:
Dimension List
Installation:
Location:
MAST.LST
MASTB.LST
OK Cancel Help...
You can select from different master lists listed on the left side of the dialog box.

Select OK to create the dimension list.
9-27
Reports
MS Access Reports
Parts reports can be generated in Microsoft Access format. See the previous section,
Parts Reports, for descriptions of these reports.
Reports MS Access Reports Print Master List

Preview Bill of Materials
Purchase Order
Job Costing
Dimension List
Note It is not necessary to compile a parts file for these reports. Access obtains the
information directly from the project database.
To print a MS–Access report – select the Reports > MS Access Reports > Print
menu and then the desired list.
To view a MS–Access report on screen – select the Reports > MS Access

Reports > Preview menu and then the desired list.
9-28
Reports
Comma Separated Reports

The Reports > Comma Separated submenu provides list generator functions that
produce various lists in a comma separated format. List output files in this format
can be imported easily into spreadsheet and database programs for further
manipulation and formatting. See previous sections for descriptions of these lists.
Reports Comma Separated Project

Libraries
Connections
Terminals
PLC–List
Parts
Error Checking
9-29
Reports
Error Checking Reports

The Reports > Error Checking submenu allows you to generate lists related to
signals and parent/child referencing. These functions are performed for the currently
active project. Use the Manage > Project > Project Preselect function to select a
different project.
Reports Error Checking Unreferenced Signals

Device Without Parent
Unreferenced Signals Report
This function displays a list of unmatched signal IDs (an outgoing signal without a
corresponding incoming signal, or vice versa). The list shows each symbol’s device
ID and Installation – page – line number position. It also indicates whether the
signal is an incoming or outgoing symbol type.
If there are no unreferenced signals, the software will display the message “All
signal cross references are matched up.”
Device Without Parent Report
This function displays a list of child symbols that exist in the schematics without a
corresponding parent symbol. For example, a relay contact for which there is no coil
with the same device ID.
9-30
Panel Layout
10 Panel Layout
This section contains instructions for producing a layout of devices in a cabinet or

other type of assembly.
Overview
Although the user can use ordinary drawing functions to produce a panel layout
diagram, this would not take advantage of the time–saving features of the RSWireTM
Designer panel layout mode.
When you create schematic diagrams with RSWire, the system allows you to enter a
part number for each device in the drawing. This part number ties the device in the
drawing to the parts database (see figure below). The database, in turn, contains
information about a specific part, including dimensions and the name of a layout
symbol which can graphically represent the part on a layout drawing.
The Panel Layout mode can access this information. When the user wishes to
create a panel layout, the Panel Layout function will automatically present the user
with a list of every item in the drawing for which a part number has been assigned.
The user simply selects one or more items from the list and then selects a position
on the layout page. The system places the symbol and labels it with the device ID.
This greatly speeds the production of the layout drawing.
Schematic Diagram Parts Database Panel Layout Drawing
Part Number 10250T101–23X

PB206
Description PUSHBUTTON N.O.
Manuf. ACME
10250T101–23X Symbols
Ref. PBNO
PB206 PB223
Wire
Part number: 10250T101–23X Lay. L–PB
10-1
Panel Layout
Preliminary Panel Layout Steps

The following preconditions are necessary to produce panel layouts using the Panel
Layout function.
1. Ensure that the parts database contains information on the components to be

used in the schematic diagrams. If you are using layout symbols (see next step),
the layout symbol name should be assigned to each part in the database that the
layout symbol will represent. There is a layout symbol name field for this
purpose. See Section 13 for information on using the database.
2. If you want the software to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to a
dimensioned box), create the necessary symbols. See page 10-9 for layout
symbol creation procedures. A number of layout symbols are provided with
RSWire; these symbols all have names that begin with the characters “L–”.
3. When you create the schematic diagrams, assign part numbers to the symbols,
either as you place the symbol or afterwards (right click on symbol and select
Part Number from the pop–up menu).
10-2
Panel Layout
Panel Layout Procedure

Use the following steps (after the preliminary steps on the previous page):
1. Using the File > New > Page function, create a drawing page for the panel
layout in an appropriate scale (e.g. 1:4). You must select “Panel Layout” in the
Page Type field. Commonly used portions of layouts can be set up as macros
and specified in the Page Macro field.
New Page
Project Select... Format Name D–2COL

Installation Select...
Scale 1: 1 Set Scale
Location Select...
Online
Page Page Type

Panel Layout
Title Block Page Macro Parameters Select “Panel

Layout”
1... 2... 3... 4... 5...
Select ... Select ... 6... 7... 8... 9... 10...
OK Cancel Help...
2. Set an appropriate grid size to allow proper positioning of components (Tools >
System Settings > Grid Settings).
3. Select the Tools > Panel Layout function. The Panel Layout dialog box will
appear.
10-3
Panel Layout
Panel Layout
Select Devices... Use Text Parameter

Text Parameter...
Display Placed Components
Selected: 0 Place as a Group
OK Exit Help...
4. Select the Select Devices button. The Select Devices dialog box will appear.
Select Devices
Devices
Terminals
Location: Select...
Device ID:
Display All Part Numbers
OK Cancel Help...
10-4
Panel Layout
This dialog box allows you to select which items from the schematics will be
prompted for placement in the panel layout drawing. Select OK to continue.
a. Select the Terminals checkbox to display only terminals, or select the

Devices checkbox to display all other items.
b. If desired, you can use the Installation, Location and Device ID fields to
restrict the listing to items that match these entries. Wildcard (*) entries are
permitted in these fields. Use the Select buttons to view and select from
lists of existing installations and locations.
c. Select the Display All Part Numbers checkbox to display all part numbers
in cases where more than one part number is assigned to a single device ID.
If this checkbox is not selected, only the first part number assigned to each
device ID will be displayed.
5. The Panel Layout dialog box will then reappear with the selected items
displayed.
Panel Layout
Use Text Parameter

Select Devices... Text Parameter...
Display Placed Components
Selected: 0 Place as a Group
Pos. Installation Location Device ID Dim X Dim Y Symbol
0001 LINE1 EN1 CR303 0.000 0.000 L–ABNCR

0002 LINE1 EN1 CR307 0.000 0.000 L–ABNCR
0003 LINE1 EN1 CR310 0.000 0.000 L–ABNCR
0004 LINE1 EN1 CR314 0.000 0.000 L–ABNCR
0005 LINE1 EN1 CR337 0.000 0.000 L–ABNCR
0006 LINE1 EN1 PB310 0.000 0.000 L–PB
0007 LINE1 EN3 GW320 5.000 2.000
0008 LINE1 EN3 SS325 0.000 0.000 L–SS
0009 LINE1 EN3 SS330 0.000 0.000 L–SS
0010 LINE1 PBS1 PB348 0.000 0.000 L–PB
0011 LINE1 PBS1 PB350 0.000 0.000 L–PB
OK Exit Help...
10-5
Panel Layout
The dialog box lists all the device IDs (including installation and location) for
which a part number was assigned. This is the list that you will select from to
place items in the panel layout. If any X and Y dimensions have been assigned
to the part in the parts database, these are listed in the Dim X and Dim Y
columns. If a panel layout symbol has been assigned to the part number in the
parts database, this is indicated in the Symbol column.
a. Use the Text Parameter button to make the desired settings (size, label
origin, etc.) for the device IDs and other text that will appear on the
drawing. See page 5-34 for more information on the text parameter
functions.
b. Selecting the Display Placed Components checkbox will cause items that
have been placed in the panel layout to be marked with an “X” in the
leftmost column. If Display Placed Components is not selected, items that
have been placed are removed from the list as they are placed.
c. Select the Use Text Parameter checkbox to use the text parameters that you
set with the Text Parameter button (see above). If you do not select this
checkbox, the software will use the default text settings for device IDs.
d. Select the Place as a Group checkbox if you wish to simultaneously place

multiple items in the panel layout with one click of the button. You can
select multiple items in the list (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys). The
items will appear in the drawing together, spaced from each other according
to the X value entered in the parts database for each part.
6. To place items in the panel layout select one or more items from the list in the
Panel Layout dialog box and select the OK button.
Note If the item was assigned a layout symbol in the parts database it will be represented
on the panel layout by that layout symbol. If the item was assigned no layout symbol
but was assigned X and Y dimensions it will be represented by a box having those
dimensions. If only the x–coordinate is entered, the part will be represented on a
panel layout as a circle having this value as its diameter (if no other symbol is
named in the Layout Symbol field).
To place a single item, select the item followed by the OK button. The panel
layout page will appear. Point at the desired position for the layout symbol and
click the left mouse button.
10-6
Panel Layout
To place multiple items, you can select multiple individual items from the list
by pointing and clicking on each item while holding the <Ctrl> key down. Or, to
select a continuous block of items, you can hold down the <Shift> and select the
first and last item. Then select the OK button. The panel layout page will appear.
Point at the desired position for the layout symbol and click the left mouse
button. The items will be prompted in the order in which they appear on the list.
After placing items you can select the Tools > Panel Layout function again to
select more items (or you can click the right mouse button). As items are placed,
they are removed from the list in the Panel Layout dialog box unless you select
the Display Placed Components checkbox in which case items that have been
placed are marked with an “X” in the leftmost column.
If an item is deleted from a panel layout drawing, that item will reappear in the
list of items in the Panel Layout dialog box where it will be available for
selection.
To exit the panel layout mode, select the Exit button in the Panel Layout dialog
box.
You can leave the panel layout mode and continue at a later time; the system
will keep track of the items you have placed.
10-7
Panel Layout
Panel Layout/Schematic Comparison Check

The software will automatically check for items in the panel layout that have been
deleted from the schematic drawing after the panel layout was created. This check is
performed the next time you start the panel layout function.
After deleting one or more items from the schematic, when you start the panel
layout function again, the following dialog box will appear that lists the items in the
panel layout that no longer exist in the schematic.
Panel Layout
Non placed devices in drawing
LINE1 NO_LOC PB106
Mark devices to be deleted
OK Cancel Help...
To delete the listed item(s) from the panel layout, select the item(s) and select the
OK button.
To leave the listed item(s) in the panel layout, select the Cancel button.
10-8
Panel Layout
Creating a Panel Layout Symbol

If you want RSWire to prompt you with a layout symbol (as opposed to a
dimensioned box), you must assign a layout symbol to the parts data that you use in
your project. A selection of layout symbols are provided with RSWire (they have
names that begin with the characters “L–”), or you can create your own symbols
using the following procedure.
1. Create a blank drawing page. Select “Schematic Diagram” as the page type.
Generally, layout symbols are created in a 1:1 scale, so select this scale for the
drawing page. The Online toggle for this page should be turned off.
2. With the blank page active, select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify
function.
3. In the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, enter the symbol name and description.
(The layout symbols provided with RSWire all have names that begin with the
characters “L–”. This is not required, but makes it easier to find and list the
layout symbols.)
4. Also in the New/Modify Symbol dialog box, select the symbol group
GS1–General Symbol (no cross ref.).
5. Select OK to continue.
6. Define a reference point for the symbol with the Manage > Symbol >
Reference Point function. You can redefine this point later.
7. Draw the symbol using RSWire drawing functions or import an existing DWG
file. If you are importing a file, follow the steps given on page 6-21.
8. Enter the attribute text that will receive the device ID when the symbol is placed
in a panel layout. To do this, first select the Draw > Text function. In the Text
dialog box’s Text Input field, enter a “?”. Also select an appropriate text size,
label origin, etc. Select OK to continue. Select a position for the text. The
Definition of Text Attributes dialog box will appear.
10-9
Panel Layout

Symbol Text:
?
Select
Activate I/O Attribute Attribute
Toggle Activate Activate
No: 9
Address
Select Function Text
I/O Text
DID,Panel/Wire Dia DID,Panel/Wire Dia
Select the Attribute Activate toggle and select “DID,Panel/Wire Dia” from the
list of attribute types. Select OK to continue.
9. If you wish function text associated with the schematic symbol to appear at the
layout symbol, enter another “?” attribute text as in the previous step, but for
this text select “Function Text” from the list of attribute types.
10. Add any other drawing elements, texts, etc., that you wish the symbol to have.
Redefine the reference point if desired with the Manage > Symbol > Reference
Point function.
11. Store the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a
Remember that if you wish RSWire to automatically prompt the layout symbol in
the panel layout mode, the layout symbol must be assigned to the appropriate part
numbers in the parts database, and those part numbers must be assigned to device
IDs in your project. The layout symbol name is entered in the Parts Database dialog
box (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form function) in the Symbols – Lay. field.
10-10
Panel Layout
Article
Parts Database
Date Dimensions
Part Number Created X 1.81
Description
Changed Y 2.82
Manuf. PMG Z 3.31
Symbols
Catalog
Ref.
Weight[lb] 0.00
Price Wire
Units Power[VA] 0.00
Price_S 0
Lay.
Price_B 0 Discount 0 Time[min]
(C)over or (P)anel Assembly
Device Type
Wiring
Technical Description Additional Part Numbers
Enter Layout Symbol Name
10-11
Panel Layout
10-12
Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
11 Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan
RSWireTM Designer has functions that automatically compile information on all the
terminals that exist in the project drawing pages. The user can view and edit this
information in a table format. Graphic drawings of terminal strips can also be
generated automatically.
There are also Pin–Plug Plan functions that operate in the same manner as the
terminal plan functions except that they gather and display pin and plug information
rather than terminal and terminal strip information.

Terminal Plan Overview
Steps of Terminal Plan Creation
Internal/External Connections and Jumpers
Terminal Plan Functions
Terminal Plan Editor
Graphical Terminal Plan
Graphical Terminal Plan Macro
Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration
Graphical Terminal Plan Generation
Pin–Plug Plan
Pin–Plug Editing
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan
11-1
Terminal Plan Overview
Steps of Terminal Plan Creation
Once the schematics in the project are complete, use the following steps to create a
terminal/cable plan. (More detailed information is given in the following sections.)
1. Activate the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs
function. This function automatically generates a list of terminals and terminal
connections according to the information in the project schematics.
2. The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. Select the strip(s) that you
wish to edit.
3. Select the Edit button in the selection dialog box. The connections for the
selected terminal strip(s) will be displayed in the Terminal Editor dialog box.
Changes can now be made, such as cable assignment, reversing internal and
external connections, sorting terminals, inserting spare terminals, and other
operations.
4. Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan
function to automatically create a drawing page showing a representation of
selected terminal strips.
Terminal Plan
Creation Steps CREATE SCHEMATICS
EDIT TERMINALS
New destinations
Change terminal numbers
Assign part numbers
Assign cables
GRAPH TERMINAL PLAN

& TERMINAL LISTS
11-2
Customization – Default formats for terminal lists and graphical terminal plans are
included with the software. These formats can be customized to suit the user’s
requirements.
Internal/External Connections and Jumpers
“Internal” vs. “External” Connections – The terms “internal” and “external” are
used to describe the two “sides” of connections to terminals. Other terms such as
“from and to” or “source and destination” may be more familiar to you. The
assignment of internal and external connections may be based on positioning in the
schematic (left or right of the terminal) or by manual assignments made by the user.
Terminals can also be designated as jumpers.
Internal, External, and Jumper priorities are defined at the connection points of
terminal symbols. In other words, a connection point can be “set” so that anything
connected to it is considered an internal connection, external connection, or a
jumper. This setting can be made in three different ways:
1. Connection points can be defined as internal, external, or jumper when the

terminal symbol is created (see page 6-63).
2. Connection points can be designated as internal, external or jumper after the

symbol is placed in a schematic by activating the Modify > Symbol function,
selecting the desired terminal symbol and then selecting the Terminal
Destinations toggle in the Modify Symbol dialog box. You can also use the
Modify > Power–Editor function (or right click on a terminal symbol) and
select “Jumper” from the pop–up menu.
3. If the connection points of a terminal symbol in a schematic are undefined (have

not been designated as internal, external, or jumper) the system has default
priorities upon which it will make assumptions.
For a terminal symbol with two connection points:

1st Connection Point – Internal
2nd Connection Point – External
1st CP 2nd CP
11-3
For a terminal symbol with five connection points:

1st Connection Point – Undefined
2nd Connection Point – Internal
3rd Connection Point – Jumper
4th Connection Point – External
5th Connection Point – Jumper
X1 Symbol – Connection Point Order

5
2
2 1 4 3 1 5
3
4
JIC IEC
Why does it matter whether connection points are internal or external?

Documentation listings, terminal plan macros, and editor screens for terminals show
internal destinations on one side of the terminal and external destinations on the
other side of the terminal. By changing the connection point designations, we have
control over how the information is listed and displayed.
Target Internal TB:No. Target External
Static Header Text
–PB201 –TB1:1 +L1–STRIP2:1
–PB203 –TB1:2 +L1–STRIP2:2
Variable Data –TB1:3 +L1–STRIP2:3
–LS205
The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function causes
the system to look along the wires in both directions from each terminal in the
schematics. Signal cross references are also analyzed. The software uses search
priorities in cases where a potential has more than two devices connected. These
priorities are the same as those used in generating the connection list. See page 9-15.
11-4
Terminal Plan Functions
Functions related to the terminal plan are found in the Tools >Project Settings >
Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration and Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug
Plan submenus.
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs

Generate Graphical Plan
Tools > Project Settings >Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration –

Configuration of the graphical terminal plan. See page 11-24.
Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs – Terminal plan
editor (table format). See page 11-6.
Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan – Generates a

graphical terminal plan. See page 11-30.
In addition, terminal lists can be generated under the Reports > Terminals submenu
with the Terminals and Terminal Strips functions.
11-5
Terminal Plan Editor

The terminal plan editor mode compiles a list of terminals in the current project and
allows the user to select and edit the terminal information.
To enter the terminal plan editor select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs
If no page is currently open, you will be asked to select a project.
The Terminal Strip Selection dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to
select which terminal strips will be included in the current editing session.
Terminal Strip Selection
Search
Installation * Search...
Location *
Strip * View All...
Number of Selected Terminal Strips: 8

Terminal Strip
Installation Location Terminal Strip Total
=LINE1 +BAY1 -TB1 3
=LINE1 +BAY1 -TB2 3
=LINE1 +BAY1 -TB3 3
=LINE1 +CAB1 -TB 8
=LINE1 +EN1 -STRIP1 17
=LINE1 +EN1 -STRIP2 30
=LINE1 +EN1 -TB1 8
=LINE1 +EN1 -TB2 8
Edit...
OK Help
11-6
If you wish to limit the editing to a portion of the project, you can make entries in
the Installation, Location and Strip fields to filter the list of terminal strips. Use
asterisks (*) to make wild card entries. For example enter *BLDG1* in the
Installation field to include any installation names containing the characters
“BLDG1”. Select the Search button to display the filtered list of terminal strips. By
limiting the editing session to part of the project you can improve editor response
time for large projects and also make it easier to find a specific strip.
The value shown on the Number of selected Terminal Strips line indicates the total
number of strips that were found.
The Terminal Strip section of the dialog box lists all the terminal strips that the
system found in the current project (or selected portion). The strips are listed in
alpha–numeric order by installation–location–terminal strip name.
To select an individual strip for editing, select (highlight) the strip and select the
Edit button.
To select all listed strips for editing, select the View All button.
The Terminal Editor dialog box will then appear.
11-7
Editor Display
You can resize the Terminal Editor dialog by dragging the lower right–hand corner.
You can resize the width of the columns by pointing at the dividing line between the
column headings and dragging. The information in the unshaded columns can be
edited by double clicking inside a cell.
Use the Settings > Wire Number function to select how many columns of wire
number information (wire number, color, guage, etc.) are displayed.
Use the Settings > Expand Columns to Fit function to expand the columns to
display all the information they contain.
Note Installation/Location display – In RSWire a complete identification consists of an
installation name (indicated by an “=”) followed by a location name (indicated by
a “+”) followed by a device ID (indicated by a “–”). In the terminal editor list, the
full name of the current terminal strip is given, but in the listing of internal and
external targets, installations and locations are not shown unless they differ from
that of the current terminal strip. In the following example, we can assume the
Internal Targets belong to Installation “L1” because no other installation name is
given. However, they do have a different location name (“E1”). The External
Targets consist only of a device ID so we can assume they belong to the same
installation and location as the terminal strip. If you are viewing a single terminal
strip, its installation and location will be shown at the top of the editing screen but
not in the Strip:TB column.
Installation
Location
Device ID
=L1+B1–TB5
Color Internal Target Strip: TB Type Page Jumper External Target
+E1–STRIP1:1 –TB5:1 1.10 –M110

+E1–STRIP1:2 –TB5:2 1.11 –M111
+E1–STRIP1:3 –TB5:3 1.12 –M112
Internal Targets External Targets
The following editing functions are available in the Terminal Editor dialog box.
11-8
Terminal Editing Functions

Note You can access most of the terminal editing functions using the Edit pulldown menu
in the Terminal Editor dialog box. There are also toolbar buttons for most of these
functions at the top of this dialog.
Change Terminal Number
To change a terminal block number in the terminal editor:
1. Double click on the desired terminal block ID. The Device ID Assignment
dialog box will appear.
2. Change the terminal block ID as desired
3. Select OK in the Device ID Assignment dialog box.

Double click to edit terminal ID
Any changes to terminal numbers are reflected in the schematic drawings.
11-9
Rename Terminal
Rename – This function allows you to change the terminal strip to which a terminal
belongs.
1. Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog and select one or more
terminals to be reassigned by highlighting the terminal names in the Strip TB
column.
2. Select the Edit > Rename function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal
Editor dialog box).
3. The Define Target dialog box will appear.
Define Target
Installation: =LINE1 Select...
Location: +EN1 Select...
Strip ID: –TB4 Select...
OK Cancel Help...
4. Enter the Installation, Location and Strip ID of the terminal strip to which you
wish the selected terminal block(s) to be assigned.
5. Select OK. The reassigned terminal blocks will be removed from the terminal
editor display (because they no longer belong to the current terminal strip).
Note If you reassign a terminal block to a strip that already contains a terminal block
with the same number, the result will be two terminal blocks with the same number
in that strip (unless you edit the terminal number).
11-10
Renumber Terminals
This function allows you to renumber all the terminals in the selected strip. Changes
made with this function are reflected in the schematic drawings.
1. Display a terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2. Select the Edit > Renumber function (use the pulldown menu inside the
Terminal Editor dialog box) or use the Renumber toolbar button. The Renumber
Terminal Strip dialog box will appear.
Renumber Terminal Strip
First Number: 1
Renumber Terminals with the Same Number
OK Cancel Help...
3. In the First Number field enter the number that you want to assign to the first
terminal in the strip. Select the Renumber Terminals with the Same Number
checkbox if you wish to renumber duplicate terminals as well.
4. Select the OK button. All the terminals in the strip will be numbered
sequentially from the first number. Changes made with this function will also be
reflected in the schematic.
11-11
Sort Terminals
This function lets you change the order in which terminals are listed in the terminal
editor.
2. Select the Edit > Sort function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal
Editor dialog box) or select the Sort toolbar button. The Sort Terminals dialog
box will appear.
Sort Terminals
Sort Terminal Blocks
Sort by Terminal Number
Sort by Internal Target
Sort by External Target
OK Cancel Help...
3. This dialog box lets you select whether terminals will be listed in order of
Terminal Number, Internal Target, or External Target. Select the desired option
followed by the OK button. The terminals will be listed in the selected order.
Note The Sort by Internal and External Target functions will take into account
Installation and Location names even if these names are not displayed (installation
and location names of targets are not displayed if they are the same as the current
terminal strip).
Generally, terminal sorting is done before renumbering.
11-12
Move Terminals
Move – This function allows you to move a terminal or a group of terminals from
one position in the strip to another. This function will only affect the listing of
terminals in the graphical terminal plan.
2. Select the group of terminals that you wish to move. Do this by selecting the
first terminal in the group, holding down the <Shift> key and then selecting the
last terminal in the group.
3. Select the Edit > Move function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal
Editor dialog box) or select the Move toolbar button.
4. The system will prompt “Mark Destination Position.” By double clicking, select
the terminal just ahead of where you want the moved terminals to be inserted.
The terminals will be moved to that position.
5. The software will ask you “Maintain Terminal Sequence?” Select OK if you
wish the moved terminals to remain in the new position when you exit the
terminal editor. Select No if you wish the move to last only for the current work
session.
Create Spare
This function allows you to insert additional terminals into a terminal strip.
2. Select the terminal just ahead of where you want the spare terminal inserted.
3. Select the Edit > Create Spare function (use the pulldown menu inside the
Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Create Spare toolbar button.
4. The Insert Spare Terminal dialog box will then appear, prompting you with the
next available terminal number in the Terminal Number field. You can type
over this number if desired. If you enter the number of an existing terminal, the
software will ask if you wish to duplicate the terminal. If you answer Yes it will
create a spare terminal with the same number.
5. In the Quantity field you can specify how many spare terminals are to be
inserted.
11-13
Insert Spare Terminals
Terminal Number 4
Quantity 1
OK Cancel Help...
6. Select the OK button. The new terminals will appear in the list. The spare
terminal number is followed by an “R” in the Type column to indicate it is a
“Reserve” terminal.
Delete Spare Terminal
To delete spare terminals from a terminal strip:
1. In the terminal editor, select (highlight) the spare terminal(s) that you wish to
delete
2. Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal
Editor dialog box) or select the Delete toolbar button.
3. The selected spare terminal(s) will be removed from the list.
Edit Spare Terminal Targets
The Internal Target and External Target for spare terminals can be edited in the
terminal editor. Only spare terminals can be edited in this manner. Use the following
procedure:
1. In the terminal editor, double click inside the Internal Target cell or the
External Target cell for the desired spare terminal. The Define Target dialog
box will appear.
11-14
Define Target
Location: Select...
Strip TB: TB4
OK Cancel Help...
2. In the appropriate fields, enter the Installation, Location and terminal number of
another terminal to which you wish to jumper. Use the Select buttons to view
and select from lists of existing Installations and Locations.
3. Select OK to enter the target information.
Switch Targets
This function will switch the targets for a terminal from an internal target to an
external target and vice versa.
2. For the desired terminal, highlight the cell in either the Internal Target column
or the External Target column.
3. Select the Edit > Switch Targets function (use the pulldown menu inside the
Terminal Editor dialog box) or select the Switch Targets toolbar button. The
targets will be switched between the Internal and External columns.
Note Changes made with this function will be reflected in the schematic (but can only be
seen by using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify > Symbol mode).
11-15
Clip Jumper
This function specifies a short jumper symbol to be used in the graphic terminal
plan. If the target for a terminal is another terminal, you can specify a jumper
symbol rather than listing the terminal as a target. The jumper symbol will connect
the two terminals in the graphical terminal plan.
TERMINAL STRIP
WIRE NO. =L1+CAB1–TB2 WIRE NO.
1
2
Clip jumper in 3
graphical terminal plan 4
Note To use the clip jumper symbol, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in the
schematic drawing.
When terminals are jumpered, they are marked as such in the Jumper column of the
terminal editor. Numbers in this column indicate to which other terminal a terminal
is jumpered. In the following figure terminals 1 and 2 are jumpered.
Internal Target Strip: TB Type Page Jumper External Target
–TB5:1 1.10 2
–TB5:2 1.11 1 –TB5:3
–TB5:2 –TB5:3 1.12 –LT110
Clip jumper information
The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, or

Jumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminal
connection points that are defined as Jumper, these will automatically appear in the
terminal editor as jumpered.
If you wish to assign a jumper in the terminal editor, use the following procedure.
11-16
2. For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Target
column or the External Target column (depending on which side of the
terminals should be jumpered). Hold down the <Ctrl> key while selecting the
two cells.
3. Select the Edit > Clip Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside the
Terminal Editor dialog box). Numbers will appear in the Jumper column
indicating to which terminal the terminals are jumpered.
When a graphical terminal plan is generated, the clip jumper symbol will represent
the terminal–to–terminal connection.
Removing a Clip Jumper
To remove a clip jumper, use the following procedure.
1. After assigning a clip jumper, you must first exit from the terminal editor and
then re–enter the terminal editor before you can delete the clip jumper.
2. Assign a wire jumper to the two terminals that have the clip jumper assigned.
(See the following section). This will have the effect of removing the clip
jumper.
Wire Jumper
When a wire jumper is assigned between two terminals, they are listed as targets for
each other.
Note To assign a wire jumper, the two terminals must be connected by a wire in the
schematic drawing.
The connection points on terminals can be set Internal, External, Undefined, or

Jumper. If you have used a wire in the schematic drawing to connect two terminal
connection points that are defined as Internal or External, these will automatically
appear in the terminal editor as a wire jumper. If the two connection points are
defined as Jumper, this will default to a clip jumper in the terminal editor and you
will not be able to assign a wire jumper. The user must redefine these connection
points as Internal and External using the Terminal Dest. function in the Modify >
Symbol mode.
To assign a wire jumper, use the following procedure:
11-17
2. For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Target
column or the External Target column (depending on which side of the
terminals should be jumpered). Hold down the <Ctrl> key while selecting the
two cells.
3. Select the Edit > Wire Jumper function (use the pulldown menu inside the
Terminal Editor dialog box) or use the Wire Jumper toolbar button. The internal
or external targets will become the terminal that is at the other end of the
jumper.
To change a wire jumper to a clip jumper, highlight the two Internal Target or
External Target cells that are jumpered, and select the Edit > Clip Jumper
function.
Assign Terminal Part Number
You can assign a part number to a terminal or a group of terminals in the terminal
editor.
1. Select (highlight) the Part Number cells for the desired terminals.
2. Click a second time in the last selected cell.
3. The Assign Part Number screen will appear. This screen allows you to search
the parts database for appropriate part numbers and assign them. See page 5-81.
Assign Cable
In the terminal editor, you can assign the conductors of a cable to a group of
terminal targets. Use the following procedure.
1. Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2. For the desired terminals, highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable column
or the External Cable column (depending on which side of the terminals should
be cabled).
3. Click on the highlighted cells. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will
appear.
4. Assign a device ID to the cable. Select the OK button to continue.
11-18
5. The Device Type dialog box will appear. Enter an appropriate device type for
the cable. (Use the Search button to display a list of existing cable device
types.) Select the OK button to continue.
6. The Connection Points dialog box will appear, listing the conductor
designations for the cable. Select the OK button to continue.
7. The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This allows you to enter a length value
and other descriptive texts to be associated with the cable. Enter the desired
texts and select OK to continue.
The cable device ID and conductor designations will appear in the terminal list.
Note When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the
cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you select
the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the Display
Hidden Symbols checkbox.
Delete Cable
To delete an existing cable in the terminal plan editor:
1. Display the terminal strip in the Terminal Editor dialog.
2. Highlight the cells in either the Internal Cable column or the External Cable
column to which the cable has been assigned.
3. Select the Edit > Delete function (use the pulldown menu inside the Terminal
Editor dialog box).
The cable will be removed from the terminal list.
11-19
Graphical Terminal Plan

The software can create a graphical terminal plan, automatically generating drawing
pages that show terminal strips with connection information for each terminal.
To do this, the software uses a designated terminal plan macro, which graphically
represents each terminal strip. Appropriate terminal information is then
automatically placed at each terminal position.
The user can select from a number of terminal plan macros provided with the
software, or the user can create a custom macro.
The terminal plan configuration mode allows the user to set up the format, content
and positioning of items in the graphical terminal plan pages.
The Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function causes
the graphical terminal plan pages to be generated according to the preselected
formats.
The following subsections describe the elements of the graphical terminal plan.
Graphical Terminal Plan Macro
The graphical terminal plan layout is created and stored as a macro. This macro can
consist of a realistic drawing of a terminal strip (see below). It can also consist of
columns of boxes containing various texts, or any other format the user requires.
When the macro is first defined, variables (?values) are entered at appropriate places
in the drawing. Note the variables in the terminal plan macro shown below.
TERMINAL STRIP
FROM SOURCE WIRE NO. ?strip WIRE NO. TO DESTINATION
?t1devid ?t1wn ?term ?t2wn ?t2devid
Terminal Plan Macro

(similar to FTW20
Provided With The Software)
11-20
When a graphical terminal plan is generated for a given project, the correct value is
automatically substituted for each variable in the terminal plan macro. Information
for each individual terminal proceeds from the variable positions with spacing
determined by offset values entered in the graphical terminal plan configuration
mode.
In the following figure, after the Generate Graphical Plan function has been run,
the software has filled out the macro with information for the terminal strip TB2 in
the installation L1, location CAB1. The left side indicates the device IDs and wire
numbers connected to the internal side of the terminal. (The “:4” at the end of the
device IDs is connection point text for those limit switches.) The right side of the
diagram shows connection information for the external side of the terminals. In this
example, the external connection is to items in a different location, CAB2.
TERMINAL STRIP
FROM SOURCE WIRE NO. =L1+CAB1–TB2 WIRE NO. TO DESTINATION
LS101:4 W10 1 W62 +CAB2–LT301:X1

LS103:4 W14 2 W66 +CAB2–LT303:X1
LS105:4 W18 3 W69 +CAB2–AH307:X1
LS107:4 W21 4 W73 +CAB2–LT311:X1
LS109:4 W26 5 W75 +CAB2–LT313:X1
LS111:4 W29 6 W79 +CAB2–LT315:X1
Creating a Terminal Plan Macro – Use the following steps (see page 6-81 for
more information on creating macros.)
Note You can use existing terminal macros provided with the software to build up your
own macro. For example the FTW5– macro provides a group of five terminals which
you can use to build longer strips. Other macros provide columns of cable
information, etc., complete with variable texts. Look in the macro list for
descriptions of “Construction Macro” and “Term Plan Macro”.
1. Use a blank drawing page of the appropriate format size.
2. Create the drawing elements of the terminal plan. Position them where they
should appear on the finished terminal plan pages.
3. Place the desired terminal plan variables using the Draw > Text function. Each
variable must begin with a “?”. A list of available variables is given on the next
page. For individual terminals it is necessary to place the variable only at the
first terminal position. Information for the remaining terminals is positioned
according to offset values entered in the configuration mode (see page 11-24).
11-21
4. Select the Manage > Macro > New/Modify function.
5. Enter an appropriate name and description for the macro in the New/Modify
Macro dialog box.
6. The software will prompt you to “Define Base Point.” Select any point on the
drawing for now.
7. The software will prompt you to Select objects. Select all the objects to be
included in the macro. (You can also select items later with the Manage >
Macro > Select Items function.)
8. Select the Manage > Macro > Reference Point function. The reference point
of a terminal plan macro must be at the origin (0.0000, 0.0000) of the page XY
coordinate system, i.e. at the bottom left corner. Therefore, after selecting the
Reference Point function, position the cursor at the 0.0000, 0.0000 point
(coordinates are displayed above the drawing area) and press the left mouse
button.
9. Use the Manage > Macro > Save function to store the macro.
To select your new macro for use in generating terminal plans, select Tools >
Project Settings, select the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab and
then enter the macro’s name in the Plan Macro field (see page 11-25).
Terminal Plan Variables
Variable Description
?location Location designation
?locstrip Location designation and terminal strip
?strip Terminal strip
?strip_inst Display installation
?strip_loc Display location
?strip_name Display strip name
?term Terminal number
Internal cable designation complete: includes
?t1cablec
installation + location + device ID
External cable designation complete: includes
?t2cablec
installation + location + device ID
?t1devid Internal: device ID
?t2devid External: device ID
?xref Cross-reference
11-22
Variable Description
?xrefinst Cross-reference with installation
?t1cable Internal: cable designation
?t1wire Internal: wire designation of cable conductor
?t2cable External: cable designation
?t2wire External: wire designation of cable conductor
?partno Part number(Ident.number)
?consno Consecutive number
?t1cabtype Internal: cable type
?t2cabtype External: cable type
?t1cabpartno Internal: cable part number
?t2cabpartno External: cable part number
?t1cablen Internal: cable length
?t2cablen External: cable length
?t1cabgauge Internal: cable gauge
?t2cabgauge External: cable gauge
?t1cabwire Internal: Number of wires
?t2cabwire External: Number of wires
?jumper Evaluated jumpers are displayed
?ftext Terminal: function text
?t1ftext Internal: function text
?t2ftext External: function text
?t1wn Internal: wire number
?t1wnc Internal: wire number and color
?t1wng Internal: wire number and gauge
?t1wncg Internal: wire number, color and gauge
?t2wn External: wire number
?t2wnc External: wire number and color
?t2wng External: wire number and gauge
?t2wncg External: wire number, color and gauge
?t1conduit Internal: conduit
?t2conduit External: conduit
?t1cabtxt01
Internal cable text 1
etc.
?t1cabtxt50 Internal cable text 50
?t2cabtxt01
External cable text 1
etc.
?t2cabtxt50 External cable text 50
11-23
Graphical Terminal Plan Configuration
Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
function to set the defaults for graphical terminal plan generation.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration
(First select the Tools > Project Settings function and then select the Terminal/Plug
Plan Graphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear.
Project Settings X
Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs Device ID Style Object Defaults Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
File: TPLAN.CFG Cable External Cable Internal
Columns 10 Columns 10
Terminal Plan Plug Plan Offset X: 0.2500 Offset X: -0.2500
Offset Y: 0.0000 Offset Y: 0.0000
Title Block TITLED
Plan Macro FTW20 Jumper
JUMPER Offset X -0.7500 Offset Y 0.0000
Jumper Symbol Name
Cable/Wire Used Symbol CROSS Format Of Target Destinations
Installation TCPLAN intern Installation 1
Starting Page Number 1 extern 0
Location
Page Format D-0COL 0
Device ID
Connection Point 0
Title Block Variables Maximum Characters 25
pgdescr01 pgdescr06 pgdescr07
strip Terminal Drawings Write text as single line
Update Existing Pages
Total Lines
Columns 20 Offset X: 0.000 Offset Y: -0.500
In the File field, select a configuration file (such as TPLAN.CFG). The remaining
fields will then become active.
11-24
Select the Terminal Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply to
the terminal plan and not the pin/plug plan.
Note The default configuration file is TPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM
directory. You can create alternate terminal plan configuration files by copying
TPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > Project
Settings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab).
This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers,
installation name, and other variables for the graphical terminal plan.
File – Indicates the name of the selected terminal plan configuration file.
Title Block – You can specify a title block macro name in this field that will
override the default title block macro (selected when the project was created) on
terminal plan pages.
Plan Macro – Determines the macro that graphically represents terminal strips in
the terminal plan pages.
Jumper Symbol Name – Determines the symbol that represents jumpers in the
graphical terminal plan pages. (“JUMPER” is a variable length symbol that is
automatically sized to stretch from terminal to terminal.)
Cable/Wire Used Symbol – Determines what symbol is used in the graphical

terminal plan to mark a cable conductor that has been used (assigned). (The
“CROSS” symbol is an “X”.) If the user enters a minus sign (“–”) in this field, the
software will fill in the cable conductor colors in the graphical plan, rather than just
placing a cross symbol.
Installation – Determines what installation the system will create to hold the
graphical terminal plan pages.
Starting Page Number – Determines the first page number the system will assign to
the terminal plan pages.
Page Format – Determines the drawing page format to be used for the graphical
terminal plan pages.
11-25
Title Block Variables – The six fields in this area allow you to specify three title
block variables and the values that will appear at those variable locations in the title
block. This applies to the title block entered in the Title Block field and only to the
graphical terminal plan drawing pages. There are three pairs of fields; the upper
field contains a variable name, the lower field contains the information to be
displayed where that variable exists in the title block (see page 6-83 for more about
title blocks). You can also use another variable name in the lower field (for example,
?strip to show the terminal strip name in the title block).
This Variable In Title Block Variables

The Title Block
Terminal Plan Drawings
Will Contain This
Information OK Cancel Help...
Total Lines
The Quantity field sets the maximum number of lines of terminal information on
each graphical terminal plan page.
Offset X, Offset Y – Determines the spacing between lines in the graphical terminal
plan. When lines are listed vertically, enter an Offset Y value and enter 0 for Offset
X. When lines are listed horizontally, enter an Offset X value and enter 0 for Offset
Y. See the following figure.
Offset X
10 =1+LS–PB1
Offset Y
11 =1+LS–PB2
=1+LS–PB1
=1+LS–PB2
=1+LS–PB3
12 =1+LS–PB3
10
12
11
11-26
The upper right portion of the dialog box allows the user to specify the number of
columns available for cable information:
Cable External and Cable Internal
The Quantity fields establish the number of columns of cable information that will
be provided in the terminal plan.
The Offset X and Offset Y fields allow you to set the spacing of the columns.
Jumper
Offset X and Y – These fields determine the position of the jumper symbol in
relation to the terminal number. Depending on whether the terminal plan is
horizontal or vertical, one of the values will be zero.
Jumper Offset X
10
12
11
10
Jumper Offset Y
11
12
(JIC Example: dx=–0.50, dy=0 in.) (JIC Example: dx=0, dy=–0.50 in.)
(IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm) (IEC Example: dx=0, dy=–5 mm)
Format of Target Destinations – This area allows the setting of the layout and
content of the target information for each terminal. For example, in the figure below,
each terminal is labeled with the installation, location, and device ID of the items
connected to the terminal (the “=”, “+”, and “–” characters are RSWire conventions
used to distinguish installation names, location names, and device IDs, respectively.
10 =1+LS–PB1
11 =1+LS–PB2
12 =1+LS–PB3
The Installation, Location, Device ID, and Connection Point fields let the user set
the spacing of this information by assigning a beginning column number to each
piece of information.
11-27
Note The above example does not include connection point text. If you imagine each
character of the above information assigned to a column number, it might look like
the following figure.
= 1 + L S – P B 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
The default entries for these fields are 1 for Installation and 0 for Location and
Device ID. The “0” column value means that the location and device ID will
immediately follow the installation name with no spaces in between.
However, if you wished to space out the information more you could enter, for
example, values of 1 for Installation, 10 for Location, and 20 for Device ID. Then
the information would have the following column assignments. These values will
space the information out more, but note that with these values any installation or
location names longer than 9 characters will be truncated in the graphical terminal
plan target listings.
= 1 + L S – P B 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
The Maximum Characters field lets you set how many columns will be allowed for
displaying this information.
The intern and extern selections allow you to choose whether the column
assignments you make in the Installation, Location, and Device ID fields apply to
the internal side of the terminal plan or the external side. Select one or the other
before entering column values.
Write Text as Single Line – When this checkbox is selected, this feature allows you
to write function text on a single line. The “return” is over–ridden and the “^” will
be replaced with a space on the plan.
11-28
Update Existing Pages – This checkbox determines whether the software will
always generate new graphical terminal plan pages or if it will update information
on existing pages. If the checkbox is not checked, the software will always generate
new pages starting with the page number in the Starting Page Number field. This
means that existing pages in the same page number range will be overwritten. If the
Update Existing Pages checkbox is checked, the software will update information
on existing pages for the selected terminal strips, but will not overwrite existing
pages for non–selected terminal strips.
When you have finished entering values in the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical
Configuration tab, select the Save button to copy the new information over the
existing terminal plan configuration file. Select Cancel to keep the old configuration
information. If you select the OK button without first saving any new values, these
new values will only be used during the current work session.
11-29
Graphical Terminal Plan Generation
Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to
generate a graphical terminal plan. This consists of automatically generated drawing
pages for each terminal strip in the project.
Select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Generate Graphical Plan
The software will prompt you to select the Project, Installation and Pages to be
included in the terminal plans. Select OK to continue.
The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will then appear, listing all the terminal strips
in the selected project or portion thereof. Select (highlight) those strips for which
you wish to produce a graphical terminal plan page. Select the OK button.
Graphical terminal plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in the
terminal plan configuration mode. See page 11-24.
The system will create a separate installation for the graphical terminal plan pages
(provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not already
exist). The default installation name is TCPLAN. A different installation name can
be specified in the configuration mode.
If there are more terminals in a strip than will fit on the terminal plan macro
(designated in the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages in
the same number sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc.
To view the graphical terminal plan pages use the File > Open function.
Note The software will generate the graphical terminal plan based on the configuration
file that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function under
the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files are
selected from the File pulldown list.
11-30
Pin–Plug Plan
The software is capable of accessing pin and plug information in the same way it
can access information about terminals and terminal strips. Information can be
gathered, edited and presented in a graphical plan.
The same functions that are used for editing and generating a terminal plan are used
for pin–plug plans. There is a separate function for configuring the pin–plug plan.
Pin–Plug Editing
Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Edit Terminals/Pin Plugs function.
Any plugs in the selected project/installation will be available for editing along with
the terminal strips. See page 11-6.
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Macro
A pin–plug plan macro named PPLAN is provided with the software. This macro
can be specified in the pin–plug plan configuration mode so that it will be used
when generating graphical pin–plug plans.
You can also create custom pin–plug plan macros. Following the procedures for
creating a terminal plan macro. See page 11-20.
11-31
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Configuration
Use the Tools > Project Settings > Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration function to
set the defaults for graphical pin–plug plan generation.
Select:
Tools Project Settings Terminal/Plug Plan Configuration
(Select the Tools > Project Settings function, then select the Terminal/Plug Plan
Graphical Configuration tab.) The following dialog box will appear.
Project Settings X
Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs Device ID Style Object Defaults Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration
File: PPLAN.CFG Cable External Cable Internal
Columns 10 Columns 10
Terminal Plan Plug Plan Offset X: 0.2500 Offset X: -0.2500
Offset Y: 0.0000 Offset Y: 0.0000
Title Block TITLED
Plan Macro PPLAN Jumper
JUMPER Offset X -0.7500 Offset Y 0.0000
Jumper Symbol Name
Cable/Wire Used Symbol CROSS Format Of Target Destinations
Installation PPLAN intern Installation 1
Starting Page Number 1 extern 0
Location
Page Format D-0COL 0
Device ID
Connection Point 0
Title Block Variables Maximum Characters 25
strip Pin Plan Drawings Write text as single line
Update Existing Pages
Total Lines
Columns 20 Offset X: 0.000 Offset Y: -0.500
In the File field, select a configuration file (such as PPLAN.CFG). The remaining
fields will then become active.
11-32
Select the Plug Plan toggle to ensure that the settings you make will apply to the
Plug Plan rather than the Terminal Plan.
Note The default configuration file is PPLAN.CFG located in the RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM
directory. You can create alternate pin–plug plan configuration files by copying
PPLAN.CFG under another name and then editing it with the Tools > Project
Settings function (Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab).
The Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration dialog box will appear.

This dialog box allows you to set title blocks, page formats, page numbers,
installation name, and other variables for the graphical pin–plug plan. It is the same
dialog box used for terminal plan configuration. See page 11-25.
Use the Macro File field in this dialog box to specify the macro to be used for
generating the graphical plan.
Use the Installation field to set the name of the installation that will be created for
the pin–plug plan drawings.
Graphical Pin–Plug Plan Generation
Use the Tools > Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan > Generate Graphical Plan function to
generate a graphical pin–plug plan. This consists of automatically generated
drawing pages for each plug in the project. Pin–plug plan pages are generated along
with terminal plan pages. These can be placed in different installations according to
the settings made in the terminal plan and pin–plug plan configuration modes.
Select:
Tools Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Generate Graphical Plan
The Select Terminal Strip dialog box will appear, listing existing plugs and terminal
strips. Select (highlight) the plugs for which you wish to generate a graphical plan.
Graphical pin–plug plan pages will be generated according to the variables set in the
pin–plug plan configuration mode.
The system will create a separate installation for the graphical pin–plug plan pages
(provided the installation name specified in the configuration mode does not already
exist). The default installation name is PPLAN. A different installation name can be
specified in the configuration mode.
11-33
If there are more pins in a plug than will fit on the pin–plug plan macro (designated
in the configuration mode) the software will create additional pages in the same
number sequence, for example, page 5, page 5.1, page 5.2, etc.
To view the graphical pin–plug plan pages use the File > Open function.
Note The software will generate the graphical pin–plug plan based on the configuration
file that was most recently selected in the Tools > Project Settings function under
the Terminal/Plug Plan Graphical Configuration tab. Configuration files are
selected from the File pulldown list.
11-34
Cables
12 Cables
This section explains various aspects of creating and assigning cables in RSWireTM
Designer. The user can create device types and enter part numbers that represent
various types of cables. Wires can be assigned to cables either in the schematic or in
the terminal plan editor.

Assigning a Cable in the Schematic
Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor
Creating a Cable Symbol
Creating a Cable Device Type
Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol
Cable Lists
12-1
Cables
Assigning a Cable in the Schematic

You can assign a group of wires to a cable by placing a cable symbol in the
schematic drawing. Cables assigned in the schematic will be listed in the terminal
plan editor mode (see page 11-18).
To assign a group of wires in a schematic to a cable, use the following steps:
1. While viewing the schematic, select the Insert > Symbol by Name function.
When prompted for a symbol name enter a cable symbol name. The symbol
named CABLE is provided with RSWire.
2. Select the desired cable symbol position on the first wire that you wish to assign
to the cable.
3. The Device ID Assignment dialog box will appear. A device ID tag will be
prompted in the Device ID field. Enter a device ID for the cable in this field.
4. The Multiple Placement checkbox will default to the “On” setting when placing
cable symbols. This allows you to assign multiple consecutive wires to the cable
in one step. (You can also assign wires to a cable individually by placing the
cable symbol on each wire and assigning the same device ID on each wire).
Location: Search...

Part Number Multiple
Assigned Part No. / Select to Delete Search... Placement
checkbox
Addit.Part Number
OK Cancel Help...
12-2
Cables
5. At this time, if desired, you can also assign a part number to the cable. Select
the Search button and the parts database Assign Part Number dialog box will be
displayed. You can search the database for cable part numbers. Select these part
numbers by pointing and clicking. Caution: assign a part number to only one of
the cable’s conductors. Select OK to return to the Device ID Assignment dialog
box.
6. The Device Type dialog box will appear allowing you to select a device type for
the cable. The device type determines how many conductors the cable has and
what the designation (such as color) is for each conductor. Use the Search
button to display and select device types that apply to cables.
Note If you assigned a part number to the cable, and a device type was defined in the
data for that part number, the device type will be assigned automatically and the
Device Type dialog box will not appear.
Device Type
Device Type:
Description:
Search... OK Cancel Help...
7. The Connection Points dialog box will appear next, listing all the conductor
designations for the cable. The first available (unassigned) conductor will be
assigned to the cable symbol you are currently placing unless you select a
different conductor by pointing and clicking. The selected conductor’s
designation will appear in the field at the bottom of the widow.
12-3
Cables
Connection Points

Device ID: =LINE1+LOC1–CAB50
Device: 8444
CABLE BLK
CABLE WHT
CABLE RED
CABLE GRN
BLK
OK Cancel Help
If any of the conductors have already been assigned in the schematic, a page and
line number will be indicated in the Connection Points dialog box. These
conductors cannot be assigned again unless you delete the existing cable symbol
where they have been assigned.
Select the OK button to continue.
8. The Cable Text dialog box will appear. This dialog box allows you to enter up to
50 descriptive texts related to the cable. Ten text fields are displayed at a time.
You can move from one group of texts to another with the Next and Previous
buttons.
Select the OK button when the desired texts have been entered.
12-4
Cables
Cable Text
Length
Text 2:
Text 3:
Text 4:
Text 5:
Text 6:
Text 7:
Text 8:
Text 9:
Text 10:
Next Previous
OK Cancel Help...
9. The cable symbol will appear at the selected position with the device ID and the
designation of the first conductor.
If the Multiple Placement toggle was selected, the software will then prompt,
“Mark position of last symbol.” By pointing and clicking, select the last wire (or
below the last wire) to be assigned to the cable.
L1
101
102
PB103 TB1 CAB50
BLK
103
1
104 PB105 Original Symbol Position
105
2
106
LS107
107 Select Last Wire
3
108
LS109
109
4
110 LS110
111
5
112
LS113
113
6
12-5
Cables
Cable conductor designations will be automatically assigned to each wire up to

the last selected wire. The cable device ID appears at the first wire; conductor
designations appear at subsequent wires (see following figure).
Note To cancel out of the multiple placement mode (if you decide you wish to assign only
one conductor) use the <CTRL> <C> key combination or click the right mouse
button.
L1
101
102
PB103 TB1 CAB50
BLK
103
1
104 PB105 Conductor Designations
WHT
105 Automatically Assigned
2
106
LS107
RED
107
3
108
LS109
GRN
109
4
110 LS110
111
5
112
LS113
113
6
12-6
Cables
Assigning a Cable in the Terminal Plan Editor

In the terminal plan editor mode you can assign a group of terminals to the
conductors of a cable. See page 11-18 for more information.
Cables assigned in this manner will automatically appear in the schematic (see the
following note). Cables that were assigned in the schematic will be listed in the
Cable columns of the terminal plan editor.
Note When you create a cable in the terminal plan editor, a graphic representing the
cable is added to the schematic page. This graphic is suppressed unless you select
the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings function and select the Display
Hidden Symbols toggle.
The terminal plan editor is accessed through the Tools > Terminal Pin–Plug Plan >
Edit Terminals/Pin–Plugs function. After selecting one or more terminal strips
from a list, the Terminal Editor dialog box will appear. There are columns indicating
any cables that are assigned.
Cable columns
12-7
Cables
Creating a Cable Symbol

A cable symbol named CABLE is provided with RSWire. The user may wish to
create other cable symbols to meet specific requirements. The following example
shows how a cable symbol is created.
Use the following procedure to create a symbol called XCABLE.
3. Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settings
function and Grid Settings tab).
4. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/Modify
Symbol dialog box will appear.
5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCABLE (or whatever symbol name
you wish to use). Press the <Enter> key.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XCABLE List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Description:
Example cable symbol
Symbol Group:
CS2 Cable Symbol
OK Cancel Help...
12-8
Cables
6. Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cable
symbol.” Select symbol group CS2 Cable Symbol.
reference point where the cable symbol will cross a wire. Zoom in for a better
view of the work area.
9. Draw the graphic elements that will represent the symbol.
the symbol.
11. The Device–ID–Parameter dialog box will be displayed. Enter the device ID
tag “CB” (or whatever you want your cable ID prefix to be).
12. Select the Manage > Symbol > Connection Point function. Select a
connection point position.
12-9
Cables
Important The connection point itself is not required for this symbol (the connection point text
is) but the connection point must not be located where it will contact the wire on
which the cable symbol is placed. Place the connection point above or below the
symbol itself.
Device ID Connection Point

Text Position
CB
Connection Point
Position
13. After you place the connection point you will be prompted to “Define label
origin of text.” Select a position for the connection point text where you wish
the cable conductor designations (such as BLACK, RED, etc.) to appear. These
designations are defined as part of a cable device type (see page 12-11). When
the Connection Point Parameters dialog box appears, select the desired text
parameters and select the OK button to continue.
symbol. Define a window around the symbol elements. The message “The
Symbol was added to the catalog” will be displayed.
After you create an appropriate cable device type (see page 12-11), the symbol
can be placed in schematics and should appear as shown below.
CB22
BLACK
12-10
Cables
Creating a Cable Device Type

A cable device type is a definition that tells RSWire how many conductors a cable
has and what designation (color, etc.) each conductor should have. This information
allows the software to automatically assign conductor designations, and keep track
of which conductors have been assigned.
When you place a cable symbol in a schematic, the software will ask which device
type to use with the symbol. By having different device types available you can
make the cable symbol represent various types of cables.
Use the following procedure to define a device called X4CON.
1. Select the Manage > Device Type > New/Modify function. The Device Type
New/Modify dialog box will be displayed.
2. In the Device Type field, enter the name X4CON. Press the <Enter> key.
Device Type X4CON Search
Group Cable
Parent XCABLE BLK

Child 1 XCABLE WHT
Child 2 XCABLE RED
Child 3 XCABLE GRN
Child 4
Child 5
Child 6
Child 7
Child 8
Child 9
Cross Ref. Delta X 0.0000 Delta Y 0.0000
Absolute Position
12-11
Cables
3. In the Group field select the Cable device group.
4. Select the Description button. The Device Description dialog box will be
displayed.
5. Enter “Example device” in the first description field. This description will
appear on device listings. Enter “Example cable” in the Cable Type field. Select
OK.
Device Type Description

Description
Descr. 1 Example device
Descr. 2
Descr. 3
Cable
Cable Type Example cable
Gauge
Part Number
OK Cancel Help...
Note We could also enter a part number in the Part Number field if we wished a specific
part number to be assigned automatically to any cable using this device type.
6. Enter XCABLE for Parent symbol name. This is the symbol name of the
parent symbol associated with this device. (XCABLE is the example cable
symbol created in the previous section. If you did not create this symbol use an
existing cable symbol name such as CABLE.)
7. Enter XCABLE for the symbol name of Child 1 through Child 3. With cable
device types it is not necessary to enter a different symbol name in the Child
fields. The Child fields merely represent additional conductors of the cable. If
more conductors are needed, you can scroll down to display additional Child
fields (up to 256).
12-12
Cables
8. Enter the connection point text shown in the Device Definition dialog box
(BLK, WHT, RED, GRN). These are the conductor designations (sometimes
numbered by the cable manufacturer) that will appear in the schematic beside
the individual wires assigned to the cable.
9. Select OK to complete the creation of the device type.
To test the device type, follow the instructions on page 12-2 for assigning a cable
in a schematic. Use the parent symbol name and device type name that you used in
the Device Type New/Modify dialog box.
12-13
Cables
Creating a Cable Cross Reference Symbol

You can create a cable cross reference symbol that will show all the conductor
connection information for a given cable in one place. This allows easy generation
of interconnection plans.
If you have assigned descriptive cable texts to the cable (for cable length, connector
type, etc.) these can also be shown on the cross reference symbol.
Use the following procedure to create a cross reference symbol for a four conductor
cable called XCAB4REF:
3. Set the drawing grid to the desired spacing (use the Tools > System Settings >
Grid Settings function).
4. Select the Manage > Symbol > New/Modify function. The New/Modify
Symbol dialog box will appear.
5. In the Symbol Name field, enter the name XCAB4REF (or whatever symbol
name you wish to use). Press the <Enter> key.
New/Modify Symbol
Symbol Name: XCAB4REF List...

Preferred Direction
Vertical Horizontal
Description:
Example cable cross reference symbol
Symbol Group:
OK Cancel Help...
12-14
Cables
6. Select Horizontal for preferred direction. Enter the description “Example cable
cross reference symbol.” Select symbol group CS3 Cable Cross Reference
Symbol.
reference point somewhere in the center of the drawing area. Zoom in for a
better view.
9. Use the graphical line and box functions (not wires) to draw the graphic
elements that will represent the symbol. For this example we will draw a
rectangle with four branches at each end.
the reference point of the symbol. Select a label origin of 5 for the device ID.
Enter the text “CAB” for the device ID tag. Select the OK button. “CAB” will
appear at the device ID position.
12-15
Cables
The remainder of the creation of this symbol consists of entering a series of

symbol texts with attribute numbers to determine which piece of information
will be displayed at each text position. The following text attribute numbers
have been set aside for cable information:
Cable Destination Left: Attribute numbers 3000 to 3255

Conductor Description Left: Attribute numbers 3600 to 3855
Cable Destination Right: Attribute numbers 3300 to 3555
Conductor Description Right: Attribute numbers 3900 to 4155
11. Assign the destination symbol text for each conductor on the left side of the
symbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text. Use a label
origin of 6. When the Text Attribute Definition dialog box appears, select the
Attribute – Activate checkbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in the
No. field. Then select the OK button. The first (top) conductor should be
assigned attribute 3000, the second conductor 3001, and so on.

Select
? checkbox
Activate Activate
No: 3000 Enter

Address Attribute Number
3000 to 3003
I/O Text
Assign attribute 3000 ?
CAB
12-16
Cables
12. Next assign the description symbol text for each conductor on the left side of
the symbol. Use the Draw > Text function and place a “?” as the text just below
each text placed in the previous step. Use a label origin of 6. When the Text
Attribute Definition dialog box appears, select the Attribute – Activate
checkbox and enter the appropriate attribute number in the No. field. Then
select the OK button. The first (top) conductor should be assigned attribute
3600, the second conductor 3601, and so on.

Select
? checkbox
Activate Activate
No: 3600 Enter

Address Attribute Number
3600 to 3603
I/O Text
?
CAB
?
?
?
13. Now repeat the symbol text assignment steps for the conductors on the right
side of the symbol. First, place symbol text for the destinations. Use a label
origin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3300 to 3303.
12-17
Cables
? ? Assign attribute 3300

?
CAB
?

?

?
14. Assign conductor description symbol texts to the right side of the symbol. Place
them just below the destination texts placed in the previous step. Use a label
origin of 4. Assign attribute numbers 3900 to 3903.
? ?
CAB
? ?
? ?
? ?
15. Place a label for the text length symbol text. Use the Draw > Text function and
place the word “LENGTH” below the symbol reference point. Do not assign an
attribute number, simply select OK in the Text Attribute dialog box.
16. Below the “LENGTH” text, place a text consisting of the string “?cabtxt01”.
Use a label origin of 5. This text will display the cable length when the symbol
is placed.
Note All other cable texts can be extracted in this manner using ?cabtxt02–?cabtxt50.
12-18
Cables
? ?
? ?
CAB
? ?
? ?
? LENGTH ?
? ?cabtxt01 ?
? ?
? ?
17. Save the symbol: Select the Manage > Symbol > Save function and define a
window around all the symbol elements. The message “The symbol was added
to the catalog” will be displayed.
Testing the cable cross reference symbol
To test the operation of the symbol cross reference symbol you must first assign a
cable in a schematic.
Note There is no need to specify the cable cross reference symbol when assigning the
cable in the schematic.
Suppose you had assigned the following cable in a schematic.
TB2 CAB77 TB9

BLK
1 1
WHT
2 2
RED
3 3
GRN
4 4
You can then place the cable cross reference symbol on any online drawing page in
the same project and assign the same device ID as the existing cable (CAB77).
12-19
Cables
After placing the symbol you must perform a View > Refresh Page function to
update the cross reference symbol with the correct information for the cable as
shown in the following figure.
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:1 = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:1
BLK BLK
CAB77 = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:2
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:2
WHT WHT
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:3 LENGTH = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:3

RED 50 RED
= LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB2:4 = LINE1/108/=line1+EN1–TB9:4
GRN GRN
The following information is displayed for each conductor:

Cable Installation/Cable Page–Line/= Symbol Installation+Location–Device ID
Note For a length value to appear, you must have assigned a length value as the first
cable text when assigning the cable in the schematic. See page 12-4.
12-20
Cables
Cable Lists
There are two cable–related list functions in the Reports > Connections submenu:
Cable List – This is a list of all the cables in a given project.
Field Wire – This is a list of all cables in a project including descriptions and
destinations of each conductor within each cable. The list indicates which
conductors have been used (assigned).
12-21
Cables
12-22
Parts Database
13 Parts Database
This section describes the RSWireTM Designer parts database. This database
contains information about the physical devices that will be used to build the
projects that are designed with RSWire. As the user creates schematic drawings with
RSWire, the user can assign part numbers to each symbol. Then, when the
schematics are completed, RSWire can use the information in the database to
generate an appropriate bill of material, purchase order list, etc., based on the
schematic.
For information on assigning part numbers to symbols, see page 5-79.
The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu provides functions which allow a
variety of parameters to be set for parts data.
Manage Parts Edit Form

Edit Table
Duplicates Check

MS–Access Database Files
Accessing the Parts Database
Parts Database Edit Form
Add a Parts Database Record
Delete a Parts Database Record
Find a Parts Database Record
Edit a Parts Database Record
Table View of Database
Database Manipulation
Previewing the Parts Database
Printing the Parts Database
13-1
Parts Database
MS–Access Database Files

The parts database and language text databases in RSWire are based on Microsoft
Access database software. If you do not have MS–Access installed on your
computer at the time that you install RSWire, the run–time version of Access will be
installed.
Warning: Make sure all Microsoft Access applications are closed before
starting RSWire. Otherwise, data from RSWire could override your open
database files.
When RSWire starts for the first time, it creates a UI.mdb database file in the
WORK directory. The UI.mdb file links to tables within two database files,
ARTICLE.mdb (parts data) and TDB.mdb (language text). The UI.mdb file also
contains a number of queries. The database files ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb are
located in the DB and the LG directories respectively.
Once the UI.mdb database file is created, RSWire copies forms and reports from
either USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb located within the LIST directory. The
DEFAULT.mdb will contain the default reports and forms shipped with RSWire. If
you would like to create your own reports or forms, store them in USER.mdb.
Pr Main RSWire Directory
Bmp
Catalog
Db
Custom Location of TDB.mdb File
Lg
Logos
Dbs Location of ARTICLE.mdb File
Db
Fonts
Menu
Plot
Program
Project
Syscon Location of USER.mdb File
List and DEFAULT.mdb File
System
Tmp
User Location of UI.mdb File
Work
13-2
Parts Database
UI.mdb
UI.mdb is a database file located in the RS\WORK directory.
Rs Contents of 'Work'
Bmp
Name
Catalog
Db
Dbs
Fonts
Menu
Plot
Program
Project
Syscon Select
Tmp UI.mdb File
User
Work
To access the UI.mdb file, go to the RS\WORK directory and select the UI.mdb
icon. The following UI: Database dialog box will appear:
UI: Database
Tables Queries Forms Reports Macros Modules
ARTICLE Open
TDB Design
New
The UI: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms,
Reports, Macros, and Modules. To review the links to any of these functions, select
the applicable tab.
13-3
Parts Database
Tables
The Tables function contains links to two files with tables, ARTICLE and TDB.
These are the ARTICLE.mdb and TDB.mdb files discussed further in this section.
UI: Database
ARTICLE Open
TDB Design
New
Note The Open, Design, and New buttons are not functional in the Run–Time version of
Access. These buttons are available in the Full version of Access only.
Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) table.
Design – Use this button to modify the table.
New – Use this button to create a new table in the database.
13-4
Parts Database
Forms
The Forms function contains two forms, ARTICLE and TEXT. These forms are
copied into UI.mdb from USER.mdb or DEFAULT.mdb files.
Open – Use this button to open the selected (highlighted) form.
Design – Use this button to modify a form.
New – Use this button to create a new form for the database.
Article Form
UI: Database
Article Form
Article Open
ARTICLE Design
Parts Database Date Dimensions

Part Number 100A09NA3 Sort By:
Created 04/23/96 X (in) 1.81
IEC CONTACTOR PARTNUMBER
Description Changed 06/05/96 Y (in) 2.92
Manuf. A–B PMG Z (in) 3.31
Symbols Filter By:
Catalog 100A09NA3
Ref. M
Supplier M31 Weight[lb] 0.95
Wire W–ABCOA010 PARTNUMBER
Power[VA] 0
Price Lay. L–ABCOA010
Price_S 0 Units Time Filter
Price_B 0 Discount 0 (C)over or (P)anel Assembly
Remove
Wiring Filters
Device Type M31

220VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50HZ
MS3, CRNO QM31
Record: *
13-5
Parts Database
Text Form
UI: Database
Article Open
Text TEXT: Form Design
Language DatabaseNew
Find Text Number
Text Number 1
English: German:
French: Spain:
Italy: Dutch:
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used

Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
Text Form Not Used Not Used
Not Used Not Used
13-6
Parts Database
Reports
The Reports function contains links to two reports, Full “ARTICLE1” and Brief
“ARTICLE1”. The full report lists all parts database information about a part. The
brief report lists only specified parts database information.
Preview – Use this button to view the selected (highlighted) report.
Design – Use this button to modify a report.
New – Use this button to create a new report from the database.
Article Report
UI: Database
ARTICLE Preview
ARTICLE_BRIEF ARTICLE1 Design
New
Parts Database
Part Number Manufacturer PMG List Price Units
Description Catalog # Sell Price Discount
Technical Description
100-A09NA3 A-B 0
IEC CONTACTOR 100-A09NA3 0
MS3, CRNO
100-A09NB3 A-B 0
Record:
*
Full “Article1” Report
13-7
Parts Database
UI: Database
ARTICLE Preview
ARTICLE_BRIEF ARTICLE1 Design
New
Parts Database
Part Number Description Manufacturer
100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B

MS3, CRNO
100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B
MS3, CRNO
100-A09NC3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B
Record:
*
Brief “Article1” Report
13-8
Parts Database
Macros
The Macros function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation.

Macros can be defined and created after initial installation.
Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) macro.
Design – Use this button to modify a macro.
New – Use this button to create a new macro for the database.
Modules
The Modules function contains no links to files or reports at time of installation.

Modules can be defined and created after initial installation.
Run – Use this button to run the selected (highlighted) module.
Design – Use this button to modify a module.
New – Use this button to create a new module for the database.
13-9
Parts Database
ARTICLE.mdb
The ARTICLE.mdb is a database file located in the RS\DBS\DB directory.
Pr Contents of 'Db'
Bmp Name
Catalog
Db
Select
Custom ARTICLE.mdb File
Lg
Logos
Dbs
Db
To access the ARTICLE.mdb file, go to the RS\DBS\DB directory and select the
ARTICLE.mdb icon. The following ARTICLE: Database dialog box will appear:
ARTICLE: Database
ARTICLE Open
DICTION Design
New
The ARTICLE: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries,
Forms, Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select the
applicable tab.
13-10
Parts Database
Tables
The Tables function contains two files with tables, ARTICLE and DICTION.
ARTICLE: Database
ARTICLE Open
DICTION Design
New
13-11
Parts Database
ARTICLE Table
To select the ARTICLE table, select (highlight) the ARTICLE icon and select the
Open button. The following ARTICLE: Table will appear:
ARTICLE:Table
PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL MANUFACT PREFGROUP
100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
Record:
*
The ARTICLE: Table contains records on each of the parts within the parts database.
13-12
Parts Database
DICTION Table
To select the DICTION table, select (highlight) the DICTION icon and select the
Open button. The following DICTION: Table will appear:
DICTION:Table
DIC_NAME DIC_TABLE DIC_FIELD DIC_INTERN DIC_KEY
ARTICLE ARTICLE PARTNUMBER partno 2000
ARTICLE ARTICLE DESCR descr 2001
ARTICLE ARTICLE SYMBOL symb_wir 2002
ARTICLE ARTICLE MANUFACT manufact 2003
ARTICLE ARTICLE PREFGROUP prefgrp 2004
ARTICLE ARTICLE ORDNUMBER ordno 2005
ARTICLE ARTICLE PRICE_S price_s 2007
ARTICLE ARTICLE PRICE_B price_b 2006
ARTICLE ARTICLE DISCOUNT discount 2025
ARTICLE ARTICLE UNITS units 2008
ARTICLE ARTICLE X dim_x 2011
ARTICLE ARTICLE Y dim_y 2012
ARTICLE ARTICLE Z dim_z 2013
Record:
*
The DICTION: Table defines the structure for each field record within the
ARTICLE table.
13-13
Parts Database
TDB.mdb
The TDB.mdb file is located in the RS\DB\LG directory.
Rs Contents of 'Lg'
Bmp
Catalog Name
Db
Custom
Lg Select
TDB.mdb File
Logos
Dbs
To access the TDB.mdb file, go to the RS\DB\LG directory and select the TDB.mdb
icon. The following TDB: Database dialog box will appear:
TDB: Database
TEXT Open
Design
New
The TDB: Database dialog box contains five functions; Tables, Queries, Forms,
Reports, Macros, and Modules. To access any of these functions, select the
applicable tab.
13-14
Parts Database
Tables
The Tables function contains one table, TEXT.
TDB: Database
TEXT Open
Design
New
13-15
Parts Database
TEXT Table
To open the TEXT table, select (highlight) the TEXT icon and select the Open
button. The following table will appear:
TEXT: Table
TEXT NO English German French Spanish
1
10 MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR MOTOR
100 '.' DIRECTION BEWEGUNGS DIRECTION '.' DIR. DE MOVI
101 MAIN SPINDL HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PRIN
102 MAIN SPINDL HAUPTSPINDL BROCHE PINC
103 FEED ON VORSCHUB S DEPART AVAN
104 FEED HOLD VORSCHUB H AVANCE STOF
105 INDEX TABLE UEBERWACH CONTROLE ^P
106 SAFETY DOO UEBERWACH CONTROLE PO
107 MANUAL TOO WERKZEUGW CHANGEM.MA
108 CHECK CLAM UEBERWACH CONTROLE DI
109 LUBRICATION STOERUNG ZE DERANGEMEN RECTIFICADO
11 RECTIFIER GLEICHRICHTEREDRESSEUR
Record:
*
The TEXT: Table contains records on each language database.
13-16
Parts Database
USER.mdb and DEFAULT.mdb
Once the UI.mdb database is created by RSWire, it looks for two files (USER.mdb
and DEFAULT.mdb) to link forms and reports. These files contain reports and forms
for data to be entered. Both files are located in the RS\Syscon\List directory.
UI.mdb conditionally looks for the USER.mdb and then for the DEFAULT.mdb file.
If USER.mdb exists (and contains reports or forms), UI.mdb will stop and obtain
data from USER.mdb for the form and report information. If USER.mdb either
exists but contains no reports or forms, or does not exist, UI.mdb will look to
DEFAULT.mdb for the form and report information.
RSWire currently is shipped with an empty USER.mdb file. This file is created by
the user to either put their own reports and forms, or copy DEFAULT.mdb, change
name to USER.mdb, and modify the reports or forms.
Pr
Bmp
Catalog
Contents of 'List'
Db
Dbs Name
Fonts
Menu
Plot
Program
Project
Syscon Select
List USER.mdb File
System (If Present)
Tmp
User Or
Work Select
DEFAULT.mdb File
13-17
Parts Database
Accessing the Parts Database

As delivered, the parts database contains one ARTICLE file with a collection of
sample parts data. The Manage > Parts Database pull–down menu provides
functions which allow access to the parts data.
Manage Parts Database Edit Form...

Edit Table...
Duplicates Check
13-18
Parts Database
Parts Database Edit Form

You can view and enter data about a part number using the parts database edit
(Article) form.
Note The ARTICLE mdb database file is located in RS\DBS\DB. If you use metric units
you may wish to edit the Article Form to change the labels for the Dimensions and
Weight fields from “in.” and “lb.” to “mm”, “kg”, etc.
Note RSWire is supplied with the Run–Time version of Access which will allow you to
view and edit only the data files. If you wish to edit the Article form itself, or create
a custom form, you will need to have a Full Version of Access installed on your
system.
To access the parts database edit form, select:
Manage Parts Database Edit Form
The following form will appear:
ARTICLE
Parts Database Date Dimensions
Part Number 100A09NA3 Sort By:
Created 04/23/96 X (in) 1.81
IEC CONTACTOR PARTNUMBER
Description Changed 06/05/96 Y (in) 2.92
Manuf. A–B PMG Z (in) 3.31
Symbols Filter By:
Catalog 100A09NA3
Ref. M
Supplier M31 Weight[lb] 0.95
Wire W–ABCOA010 PARTNUMBER
Power[VA] 0
Price Lay. L–ABCOA010
Filter
Units Time
Price_S 0
(C)over or (P)anel Assembly
0 Discount Remove
Price_B 0 Wiring Filters
Device Type M31
MS3, CRNO QM31
Record: *
13-19
Parts Database
This form contains the various data fields available for each part in the database.
Each time a database query is requested, Microsoft Access opens the database and
provides an output based on the type of query.
Database Data Fields
Part Number – This field holds the part number by which the part is identified both
in the database and when entering part numbers on the schematic screen.
Important Do not include spaces in the part number.
Description – Use this field to enter a description of the part.
Manuf.– Use this field to enter the manufacturer’s name. Up to 15 characters are
allowed.
Catalog – Use this 20 character field to enter the manufacturer’s catalog part
number for the part.
Supplier – Use this 20 character field to enter the name of the company from which
you purchase the part.
PMG – Use this field to assign the part a Preferred Manufacturer’s Group (PMG)
number of up to 3 characters.
Each part in the database can be assigned to a preferred manufacturer’s group.

These groups can consist of parts from a single manufacturer, parts from a certain
supply company, etc.
Once the groups are created, you can filter parts data by the PMG field so that only
the parts from the selected group(s) will be listed in the Assign Part Number dialog
box (the dialog box that appears when you search for part numbers from the
drawing screen).
Price:
Price_S – Use this field to enter the selling price that you charge for the part.
Price_B – Use this field to enter the billing price that the manufacturer charges for
the part.
Units – Use this field to enter a description of the units that the part is measured in,
such as inches, millimeters, gallons, etc. These units are not taken into account in
the default RSWire lists.
13-20
Parts Database
Discount – Use this field to enter the percent discount.
Device Type – You can assign a device type to the part. If this is done, when the part
is assigned to a symbol the device type is automatically assigned to the symbol and
the Device Type selection dialog box will not be displayed. In other words, it saves a
step when placing parent symbols. (You have the option of changing this
automatically assigned device type when the symbol is placed.)
Technical Description – Use these four fields to enter an extended description of the
part.
Date:
Created – This field holds the date that the part data was entered in the database.
Changed – This field holds the date that the part data was altered (edited).
Symbols:
Ref. – Use this field to enter the name of the symbol that will represent the part in
schematic diagram. For example, enter the symbol name PBNO for parts that are
normally open pushbuttons (JIC format). This ensures that when the symbol is used
in a schematic, the part will be listed on the Assign Part Number dialog box (that
allows users to select a part number). You can have many different part numbers
assigned to one symbol name. If a part number applies to more than one symbol,
you can enter multiple symbol names in the Ref. field separated by commas up to
the maximum width of the field (example: TBC1,X1).
Wire – Use this field to enter the name of a wire diagram symbol that will represent
the part on wiring diagrams. (This is an optional routine that automatically generates
a wiring diagram showing connection information for devices in the schematics.)
Lay. – Use this field to name the symbol that will represent the part on panel layout
diagrams. If no symbol is named here, the part will be shown on panel layouts as a
box having the size entered in the Dimensions fields.
(C)over or (P)anel – Enter a “C” or “P” to indicate whether the part is usually
mounted on an enclosure door (cover) or on an inside panel.
Dimensions (X, Y, Z) – Use these fields to enter the size of the part. Fields are
provided for width (x), height (y), and depth (z). If only the x–coordinate is entered,
the part will be represented on a panel layout as a circle having this value as its
diameter (if no other symbol is named in the Lay. field). If no x or y values are
entered, the user can make a box of any size in the layout mode.
13-21
Parts Database
Weight – Use this field to enter the weight of the device.
Power[VA] – Use this field to enter the power requirements of the part in VA.
Time:
Assembly – Use this field to enter an assembly time value in minutes.
Wiring – Use this field to enter a wiring time value in minutes.
Additional Part Numbers – Use these four fields for additional part numbers that
are associated with this part. This is useful for parts that are assemblies of multiple
parts. These additional part numbers should have their own data records elsewhere
in the parts database.
Sort By – The dropdown list allows records to be sorted by a specific database field.
The selections in the list are the internal names of the parts database fields.
Filter By – This pair of fields allows you to restrict the range of parts records that
are displayed. In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select the
database field to which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer,
etc.). In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts records
must match. This can include wildcard (*) strings. When the desired criteria are
entered, select the Filter button to put the filter into effect. Now only those parts
records that match the entered criteria will be displayed. To remove the filter, select
the Remove Filter button.
Record 1 of ? Count – Displays the number of records contained within a specific

regular or filtered search.
13-22
Parts Database
Add a Parts Database Record

1. Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).
2. Select the Add Record ( >* ) button at the bottom of the form for new data
entry. A blank data entry form will be displayed. Enter the desired part data.
3. You can store the newly entered data by a.) selecting the Add Record button
again, b.) displaying another part record, or c.) selecting the Save Record button
(the button with the disk and pencil icon).
Undo Record
You can use the Undo Record button to clear the form of any parts data that has not
yet been saved (if you wish to start over). This is the button with the curved arrow
and pencil icon.
13-23
Parts Database
Delete a Parts Database Record

1. Display the parts database edit form (Manage > Parts Database > Edit Form).
2. Display the part record that you wish to delete. See page 13-25.
3. Select the Delete Record button (the button with the “X” icon).
4. The software will ask, “Are you sure you wish to delete this record?” Select the
Yes button to delete the record from the Article.mdb file.
13-24
Parts Database
Find a Parts Database Record

1. In the Parts Datadabase edit form, place the cursor in the field for the type of
information for which you plan to search (part number, manufacturer, etc.)
2. Select the Find button. (This is the button with binoculars icon.) The Find and
Replace dialog will appear.
3. The Look In field will show the name of the database field that you selected in
step 1. The database search will be confined to entries in this field. If you wish
to include all database fields in the search, select “Article” in the Look In field.
4. In the Find What field, enter the alphanumeric string for which you wish to
search. You can use wildcard (*) searches.
5. In the Match field select whether the search string you entered should match
Any Part of the part number, the Whole part number or the Start (beginning) of
the part number. (This step is not necessary if you entered a wildcard string in
the previous step.)
6. Select the Find Next button to find the next part number record that matches
your search criteria.
13-25
Parts Database
Filtering Parts Database Records
The Parts Database edit form contains filtering functions that allow you to narrow
down the range of parts records that are displayed. This makes it easier to find and
view parts data that matches a given set of criteria.
Filter By:
PARTNUMBER
Filter Filtering functions

Remove
Filters
The two Filter By fields allow you to restrict the range of parts records that are
displayed.
1. In the lower of the two fields, use the dropdown list to select the database field
to which you wish the criteria to apply (part number, manufacturer, etc.).
2. In the upper field, enter the alphanumeric string that the desired parts records
must match. This can include wildcard (*) strings.
3. When the desired criteria are entered, select the Filter button to put the filter
into effect. Now only those parts records that match the entered criteria will be
displayed.
You can add additional criteria to the current filter by repeating the above steps.
To remove the filter, select the Remove Filter button.
More complex filters can be created by using the Edit Filter button (the button with
the filter and pencil icon). This displays a table where multiple filter criteria can be
entered with conditional statements. Refer to MS–Access documentation for more
information.
13-26
Parts Database
Edit a Parts Database Record

To edit individual parts records using the Parts Database edit form.
1. Display the desired parts database record.
2. Enter the desired new data in the appropriate field(s).
3. Select the Save Record button. (This is the button with the disk and pencil
icon.)
Note The new data also will be saved if you display a different parts record.
13-27
Parts Database
Table View of Database

You may choose to edit parts data using the table view of the database. New data
can be entered into a table using the Edit function within Access.
To add a new record to the database, select:
Manage Parts Database Edit Table
The following TEXT table will appear:
ARTICLE:Table
PART NUMBER DESCR SYMBOL MANUFACT PREFGROUP
100-A9NA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NB3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NC3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9ND3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NE3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NF3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NG3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NH3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NI3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NJ3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NK3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NKA3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
100-A9NKD3 IEC CONTACT W-ABCOA010 A-B
Record:
*
The columns in the table correspond to the data fields in the parts database edit
form.
13-28
Parts Database
Database Manipulation
This section provides information for the advanced RSWire user who wishes to
work with the structure of the RSWire parts database. It is vital that complete
backup copies of database information be made before attempting to alter the
structure or content of the database.
13-29
Parts Database
Database Manipulation Outside of RSWire
The form for Parts Data entry and Editing work well for manipulation of data within
RSWire, but some users may wish to manipulate the parts database outside of
RSWire using a separate Database Management System (DBMS). The reasons for
doing this vary with each company. Some possible reasons for working with the
database outside of RSWire are:
1. Data entry may be done outside of the RSWire environment by clerical

personnel who have data entry experience but no CAD knowledge.
2. The users can use the DBMS that they are the most experienced with.
3. The data entry interface can be customized by the use of the chosen DBMS
tools which may be more familiar than dialog box modification.
4. DBMS programming tools such as macros, scripts and database application

languages can be used to manipulate data and automate data entry.
5. The RSWire parts database can be linked to a company–wide DBMS parts

management / inventory system.
6. Actions can be performed on the database which are not available through
RSWire (spell checking, search and replace, etc.).
7. External manipulation can help to minimize limitations of table locking.

(AutoCAD does not support record locking.)
Editing the Database Outside of RSWire
The DBMS you choose depends on the import / export functionality of the DBMS
and the format that you wish to use for your parts table. (The terms import and
export are used because .MDB may not be the native format of your DBMS and an
import / export function may be needed. If your software does use .MDB directly
you would simply use a file open or save.)
13-30
Parts Database
If you choose to stay with the default format of MS–Access you need to be sure that
your software will do a true Access or .mdb export. This means the database
structure MUST be kept intact and the structure exported must match what is
imported. If you have any doubt, back up the DB directory. Import the tables
ARTICLE and DICTION from the ARTICLE.MDB file and try every manipulation
that you intend to perform (add, delete, sort, edit, etc.). Export the database back to
RSWire and thoroughly check the database’s integrity. You may be able to use a
spreadsheet software as well as true DBMS software, although this may limit the
size of the files that you may need to work with.
Be especially careful of spreadsheet programs such as Excel which will change the
field width when you graphically widen a column to view its entire contents.
To read the parts database simply open the ARTICLE.MDB and read it into your
DBMS. The user may now make any modifications to the table as long as they do
not change the structure. The ARTICLE.MDB can then be saved.
13-31
Parts Database
Changing Field Sizes
The simplest restructuring of the database is to change the field width. Always
backup your database file before restructuring! Losses of data can occur which
become un–retrievable. The first step is to bring the tables from ARTICLE.MDB
into a DBMS as discussed above. Use the tools within the DBMS to modify the
field desired. Save the file.
The DICTION table has the following structure:
DIC_NAME – Database Name used in RSWire (Several “virtual databases”

may be created from one Physical table.)
DIC_TABLE – Database .MDB file (Table) name
DIC_FIELD – Database structure field name
DIC_INTERN – Variable name used within RSWire for dialog boxes and lists
Note All entries to DIC_INTERN must be at least 4 characters long. Otherwise, the field
will not appear in the list.
DIC_KEY – A field number used internally by RSWire. The range is 2000 to

2099. This number determines the order of the fields listed in the Assign Part
Number dialog box.)
DIC_LENGTH – The character width of the field.
DIC_TYPE – The type of information stored in the Field Database Structure

0 – String (Characters)
1 – Integer (Whole Numbers)
2 – Floating Point (Decimals)
DIC_PREC – Precision (Not used at this time.)
DIC_ITYPE – Type of index (Not used at this time.)
DIC_INDEX – The name of the .NDX file in which the field is the key for the
index. (Not used at this time.)
DIC_DCL – The name of the dialog box for entry in the database within
RSWire. (Not used at this time.)
13-32
Parts Database
In the DIC_FIELD column, search for the field name that you wish to change the
size of. In the DIC_LENGTH field for the record change the number to the new
field width. Note that some fields may be listed more than once in the DICTION
table with different DIC_NAME entries. This is because RSWire may internally
divide one physical database file into several tables and an individual entry may act
as a field in several of these virtual tables. Be sure that you change all of the entries
to match the same width as that which is actually used in the MDB file. After the
edits are complete, save the file.
Now that RSWire will be able to use the new column widths to read the database
and handle it internally it is necessary to allow the users to make use of the new
width. This will require the modification of all forms and List Generator files to
reflect the new field widths. Typically the files to be modified are ARTICLE form
and several of the parts related List Generator files. An easy way to get a list of the
files that need changing is to use a utility such as Norton File Find to find all
occurrences of the DIC_INTERN entries for the records that were modified in the
DICTION table.
13-33
Parts Database
Adding Fields
To add or delete fields the process is the same as for modifying fields. First you read
in the ARTICLE table with a DBMS and restructure the database with the new
fields. Then edit the DICTION table. You will have to insert new lines for the new
fields. The position in the file where you place the new records does not matter. For
the sake of clarity you should use the same order as the actual database field order.
Add the internal variables into the appropriate list generator and files.
Example:
Three new fields are needed for parts information; one floating point, one integer
and one string.
New fields:
Name Type Length

MY_INT new integer field 4
MY_FLOAT floating point field 6
MY_STRING new character field 5
1. Enter the DBMS and add the three fields to the ARTICLE table. Give the new
fields the appropriate width and type.
2. Modify the DICTION table within the DBMS. Add the corresponding 3 rows to
the table:
DIC_NAME DIC_TABLE DIC_FIELD DIC_INTERN DIC_KEY DIC_LENGTH
ARTICLE ARTICLE MY_INT int1 2099 4
ARTICLE ARTICLE MY_FLOAT float 2098 6
ARTICLE ARTICLE MY_STRING string 2097 5
DIC_TYPE DIC_PREC DIC_ITYPE DIC_INDEX DIC_DCL

1 0 0 db_rec
2 0 0 db_rec
0 0 0 db_rec
The positions of the new columns and the new rows don’t matter. Save the file
and enter RSWire.
3. Create a new form within Access.
13-34
Parts Database
4. Edit the description file of the database list description (db2.lst):

Add three lines in the part data section:
|Int : ?int1 |
|Float : ?float |
|String : ?string |
When the list is used the new fields will be displayed in the list.
13-35
Parts Database
Database Complete Restructure
Through the use of the methods already discussed it seems possible to completely
restructure the RSWire database to match one that the customer may already have.
This attractive proposition would allow the customer to have real time interaction
between RSWire and his other parts inventory software. Unfortunately there are two
roadblocks to this goal.
The first is the already mentioned limit to record locking. In most true DBMS’s,
locking is accomplished on a record level. This means that any number of people
can be using the database simultaneously to do edits, lists, data entries, etc. The
only limitation is that the software will not allow two people to modify the same
record at the same time. In RSWire, whole tables are locked at the same time. This
makes the system difficult to use in a large multi–user environment where several
people may need to change part information at the same time. If you must have this
type of data entry flexibility, the only solution at this time is to maintain the
database using the current DBMS software and use a script or custom software to
transfer the parts information in a separate parts database file to be used by RSWire
on a read–only basis.
The second limitation to tying directly to an existing database is that there are a few
fields which must be left alone for RSWire to function correctly. These fields are:
symb_ref
prefgrp
partno
dim_x
dim_y
addparton
symb_lay
descr
These fields must be left alone with regard to DIC_FIELD and DIC_INTERN.
13-36
Parts Database
Previewing the Parts Database

To access the RSWire parts database, and view the detailed data, select:
Reports Libraries Parts Full Data Preview
The following Parts Database dialog box will appear.
Parts Database
Part Number Manufacturer PMG List Price Units Device Type Ref. Symbol Wire. Symbol Lay. Symbol Weight Assembly Time Created
Description Catalog # Sell Price Discount (C)over or (P)anel X Y Z Power Wiring Time Changed
100-A09NA3 A-B 0 M31 M W-ABC0A010 L-ABC0A010 0.95 04/23/96

IEC CONTACTOR 100-A09NA3 0 0 1.81 2.92 3.31 0 06/05/96
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NB3 A-B 0 M31 M W-ABC0A010 L-ABC0A010 0.95 04/23/96

IEC CONTACTOR 100-A09NB3 0 0 1.81 2.92 3.31 0
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NC3 A-B 0 M31 M W-ABC0A010 L-ABC0A010 0.95 04/23/96

IEC CONTACTOR 100-A09NC3 0 0 1.81 2.92 3.31 0
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09ND3 A-B 0 M31 M W-ABC0A010 L-ABC0A010 0.95 04/23/96

IEC CONTACTOR 100-A09ND3 0 0 1.81 2.92 3.31 0
MS3, CRNO QM31
Wednesday, December 30, 1998 Page 1 of 898
The Parts Database list in the Full Data Preview function is viewed in a landscape
format.
13-37
Parts Database
To access the RSWire parts database, and view a more concise data listing, select:
Reports Libraries Parts Brief Data Preview
The following Database Data dialog box will appear.
Parts Database
Part Number Description Manufacturer Catalog #
100-A09NA3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NA3

MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NB3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NB3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NC3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NC3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09ND3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9ND3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NE3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NE3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NF3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NF3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NG3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NG3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NH3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NH3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NI3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NI3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NJ3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NJ3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NK3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NK3
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NKA3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NKA3
48VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ
MS3, CRNO QM31
100-A09NKD3 IEC CONTACTOR A-B 100-A9NKD3
24VAC, 9A, NON REVERSING 50/60HZ
MS3, CRNO QM31
Wednesday, December 30, 1998 Page 1 of 321
The Parts Database list in the Brief Data Preview function is viewed in a portrait
format.
13-38
Parts Database
Printing the Parts Database
Printing from MS–Access

Note Printing options will vary depending on which version of Access (Run–Time or Full)
is on your system. You can verify which version of Access you have by using the
Help > About Microsoft Access drop–down menu. The Run–Time version will allow
printing of the complete list only. The Full version will allow printing of the
complete list, range of pages, or the current page.
Use the following procedure to print the Full Data Preview list or the Brief Data
Preview list from Access:
1. Open the project.
2. Select either the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Preview or the
Reports > Libraries > Parts > Brief Data Preview function.
3. Select the page you want to print.
4. Select File > Print pull–down menu in Access. The Print dialog box will
appear.
5. Select one of the printing options: all pages, range of pages, or current page.
6. Select the OK button.
Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.
13-39
Parts Database
Printing from RSWire
In order to print the complete Full Data Preview list or Brief Data Preview list from
RSWire , you must perform the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Brief Data
Printout or the Reports > Libraries > Parts > Full Data Printout function.
Select:
Reports Libraries Parts Full Data Printout
or
Reports Libraries Parts Brief Data Printout
Access will open, the Printing dialog box will appear, and the complete list will
print.
Note Selecting one of these functions will result in the printing of the complete parts
database list. Some lists could be over 850 pages. If only a specified range of pages
are required, refer to the Printing from Access section.
Once printing is complete, exit Access. You will return to RSWire.
13-40
List Generator Configuration
14 List Generator Configuration
The RSWire list generator generates information reports and lists with a variable
format. The format of a list is determined by a list description file. These files are
stored in the directory RS\SYSCON\LIST. When one of the RSWire list functions is
executed (from one of the Reports submenus), the system uses a list description file
to determine which data are used in the listing and how they are positioned.
List Generator
RSWire List File Formatted

Project (provides Information
Information format) Listing
A number of list description files are provided with RSWire. The user can also
create custom list files.
Caution: If you create your own list description files, keep a backup copy of
your new files on a separate disk. Do not edit the existing list generator files as
these will be overwritten when you update to a new software version. Instead,
make a copy of list generator files under a different name and edit the copy.

Assigning List Generator Files
List File Structure
Sample List File
Sort Criteria Function
Using Variable Data in Lists
List Data Formatting
Arithmetic Operations With Variables
String Manipulations
Static Filter for Lists
Tab Formatting in Lists
14-1
List Generator Variables

Project Lists
Database Lists
Wire Lists
Parts Lists
Field Wiring Lists
Error Checking Lists
14-2
Assigning List Generator Files

If you create a custom list generator file you must assign this file to the appropriate
report or list function within RSWire.
1. To assign list generator files, select:
Tools System Settings
2. Select the Reports: Description Files tab. The following dialog box will appear.
System Settings X
List Name File Name Printer

Conn.
Conn. List
ListI/O
I/OList
List PLC.LST
PLC.LST Default
Default
Conn. List Wire Diagram List WIREDG.LST Default
Conn. List Wire Label List WIRELAB.LST Default
Conn. List Wiring List WIRE.LST Default
Fld. Wire Cable + Wire List FLDWIRE.LST Default
Fld. Wire Cable List CABLE.LST Default
Fld. Wire Terminal List TERM.LST Default Select
Fld. Wire Terminal Strip List TSTRIP.LST Default List
Gen. Info Device Types [Brief] DEVICE2.LST Default Here
Gen. Info Device Types [Detailed] DEVICE1.LST Default
Gen. Info Macro Directory MACRO.LST Default
Gen. Info Page Formats FORMAT.LST Default
Conn. List I/O List PLC.LST

Enter
Printer Filename
Default 1 2 3 4 5 File Here
After selecting the desired list name, you can enter the new file name in the field
below the list. You can also select a printer for each list. Select the Save button to
save the assignment for future work sessions.
14-3
The following list generator files are provided with the software. The default
directory for these files is RS\SYSCON\LIST. (See next page for comma–separated
“CS” list generator files.)
List File Description

BRADY.LST Brady label list
CABLE.LST Cable list
DB1.LST Database list (brief)
DB2.LST Database list (detailed)
DEVICE1.LST Device type list (detailed)
DEVICE2.LST Device type list (brief)
DEVWP.LST Device without parent list
DIM.LST Parts dimension list
FLDWIRE.LST Field wiring list
FORMAT.LST Page format list
INST.LST Installation list
JOB.LST Job costing list
MACRO.LST Macro list
MASTER.LST Master parts list
P_O.LST Purchase order list
PAGE1.LST Page list (brief)
PAGE2.LST Page list (detailed)
PAGE3.LST Project all list (project paths/directories)
PAGE4.LST Alternative format page list
PARTS.LST Bill of Materials
PLC.LST PLC (programmable logic controller) list
PROJECT1.LST Project list (brief)
PROJECT2.LST Project list (detailed)
SIGNAL.LST Signal list
SYMBOL.LST Symbol list
TERM.LST Terminal list
TEXT1.LST Language text list (single language)
TEXT2.LST Language text list (multi-language)
TSTRIP.LST Terminal strip list
WIRE.LST Wire list
WIRELAB.LST Wire labels
14-4
The following list generator files produce comma separated lists (qualified with ” ”)
which can be imported into a spreadsheet program.
List File Description

CSCABLE.LST Comma separated cable list
CSDB1.LST Comma separated Database list (brief)
CSDB2.LST Comma separated Database list (detailed)
CSDEVICE1.LST Comma separated Device type list
(detailed)
CSDEVICE2.LST Comma separated Device type list (brief)
CSDEVWP.LST Comma separated Device without parent
list
CSDIM.LST Comma separated Parts dimension list
CSFLDWIR.LST Comma separated field wire list
CSFORMAT.LST Comma separated Page format list
CSINST.LST Comma separated Installation list
CSJOB.LST Comma separated Job costing list
CSMACRO.LST Comma separated Macro list
CSMASTER.LST Comma separated master list
CSP_O.LST Comma separated purchase order list
CSPAGE1.LST Comma separated Page list (brief)
CSPAGE2.LST Comma separated Page list (detailed)
CSPARTS.LST Comma separated parts list
CSPLC.LST Comma separated PLC list
CSPROJECT1.LST Comma separated Project list (brief)
CSPROJECT2.LST Comma separated Project list (detailed)
CSSIGNAL.LST Comma separated Signal list
CSSYMBOL.LST Comma separated Symbol list
CSTERM.LST Comma separated Terminal list
CSTSTRIP.LST Comma separated Terminal strip list
CSWIRE.LST Comma separated wire list
14-5
List File Structure

The list file is organized in blocks of lines. Each block has a specific purpose as
described below. These blocks are always output “en bloc”, in other words, without
page breaks.
The following blocks must be listed in every list description file:
Control sequence: Block Description:

!lh List header (beginning of first page)
!ph Page header (beginning of all subsequent pages)
!d1 Data block (output of data)
!pf Page footer (end of all pages with the exception of the last page)
!lf List footer (end of the last page)
The following is a sample list file, with an example of the listing that is generated
from the list file.
14-6
Sample List File (TSTRIP.LST)

!lh 0 First Page Header
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Terminal strip list Date : ?date Page : ?pgno |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Project : ?project * ?addr01 |
| Description: ?title01 * ?addr02 |
| Drawing–No.: ?title02 * ?addr03 |
| Job–Number : ?title03 * ?addr04 |
List Header ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
(first page) | Number | Terminal strip |
%3.3s ?pgno
%.22s ?title01
%.22s ?title02
%.22s ?title03
%.33s ?addr01
%.33s ?addr02
%.33s ?addr03
%.33s ?addr04
!ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers)
Page Header ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
(2nd page, * Terminal strip list Project: ?project Date : ?date Page : ?pgno*
and ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Following) | Number | Terminal strip |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
!d1 1 Database
Data Block | ?count | ?install&?location&?strip |
!fill 0
Page Filler | |
!pf 0 Page Footer
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Page Footer
| continued on page ?nextpgno |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
List Footer !lf 0 End of List
(Last Page) ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
14-7
Sample List Generated from the List File

––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Terminal strip list Date : 02.20.99 Page : 1 |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Project : PROJECT * Company Name |
| Description: SAMPLE PROJECT * Company’s Address |
| Drawing–No.: 1000 * City, State Zip |
| Job–Number : NONE * Phone Number |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Number | Terminal strip |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| 24 | =LINE1+JBOX–TB1 |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| 6 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB1 |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| 18 | =LINE1+PANEL–TB2 |
––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
In each block of the list file, text that will not change is entered as it should appear
in the listing. RSWire variables are entered as a ? followed by the variable name.
When the list is generated, the variable is replaced with the appropriate piece of data
from the project. See page 14-29 for lists of available variables. Also see page 14-14
for information on formatting the appearance of variable data in the listing.
List Header Block – This block specifies the information that will appear at the top
of the first page of the listing. In the example list file on the previous page, the
header block begins with the positioning of the various fields and descriptions of
these fields. Below this, the field size of the variables are defined. For example,
“%.22s ?title01” means that variable ?title01, the project description, is a string of
which a maximum of 22 characters will be displayed. See page 14-14 for more
information on formatting variables.
Page Header Block – Specifies the page header that will appear at the top of the
second and all subsequent pages. In the example file, the page header has been
configured to display the project name (?project), the date (?date), and the page
number (?pgno).
Data Block – This block specifies the main content of the listing. In the example
file, the variable ?termno (Quantity of terminal blocks) is specified, followed by
variables ?install, ?location, and ?strip (terminal block installation, location and
device ID).
14-8
Page Filler Block – (Optional) If the user requires that page and list footers are
always positioned at the lower edge of the page, the output block “page filler”
should be listed in the list description file. The control sequence for the page filler
block is “!fill”. This block must only contain one line. It is output repeatedly so that
the pages end precisely with the final line of the page or list footer.
Note When outputting a list, in some circumstances, only one page with a large number of
lines will be created. In order to avoid the generation of the corresponding number
of fill lines, in such a case, the list generator will ignore the page filler.
Page Footer Block – Specifies what will appear at the bottom of every page except
the last page of the listing. In the example file, the text “continued on page” is
specified, followed by variable ?nextpgno which represents the next page number.
List Footer Block – Specifies what appears at the end of the last page of the listing.
Rules for list files

The beginning of each block is signaled by a control sequence composed of an
exclamation mark and a block identifier.
It is essential that the control sequences begin in the first column.
The end of each block is signaled either by the beginning of the following block
or by the end of the file.
Each line must be completed with a carriage return.
If the output of a block is not required, it must nevertheless be listed (otherwise
an error message will appear), but it may be specified with 0 output lines.
In some lists, provision is made for additional output blocks. These must be
listed in the corresponding description files.
Other List File Functions
Page Break – Normally, the list generator automatically controls page breaks.
Following the last block which will fit in full on the page started, the output of the
page footer is activated. If the user requires a new page to begin after each group of
data, this can be achieved by adding the letter “n” to the control sequence !d1.
Example:
Control sequence: Description:

!d1 Data block is output with maximum page utilization.
!d1n Page break prior to output of the data block.
!h1 Headline is output if block output before is not page header.
Headline is output only on the first page of the list, later on only a
!h1n
page break is initiated.
14-9
Caution: The unconditional page break must not be used for list headers, list
footers, page headers and page footers.
Page Counter Variables – The list generator has two counters that keep track of:
The number of the current page
The number of the following page
Output of page numbers is initiated by the variable ?pgno (current page of list)
or ?nextpgno (next page of list). Recommended method: use ?pgno in list and page
headers; use ?nextpgno in page footers (“continued on page ?nextpgno”).
Consecutive Number – The list generator holds a range of indices which can be
output in every list at any given point. The starting value for the indices is 1; the
expression of an index automatically leads to its incrementation. These indices can
be used, for example, for numbering items in the list. The following variables may
be specified:
?ix1 Index 1
?ix.1 Index 1.1; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1
?ix..1 Index 1.2; is reset in the event of incrementation of index 1 or 1.1
?ix2 Index 2
?ix3 Index 3
Suppress Individual Lines – Occasionally, when replacing variables, the list

generator will access strings with a length of 0. It is possible to suppress such lines.
For this purpose, the control sequence ?nopr should be entered at any point in the
list description file. The line thus marked will be suppressed if only zero strings are
accessed during data access.

?nopr Line is suppressed
14-10
List to File – When outputting a list to a disk file, the file path is generated
automatically. However, automatic generation can be prevented via the entry of the
control block !outfile at the end of the list file. The control sequence !outfile or
!outfile ? will cause the system to request path/filename for the file. The sequence
!outfile <path/filename> will automatically save the file to <path/filename>

!outfile request filename for list
!outfile? <path/filename> save list as <path/filename>
Sort Criteria Function
The user can place sort statements in the list generator files which specify variables
by which the list will be sorted. This sorting will only occur when the Sort On
toggle is selected in the Report Settings dialog box (Tools > System Settings >
Report Settings tab).
System Settings X
Filter Sort Output

OFF OFF Screen
Printer
File
Sort Toggles ON ON Project
Interactive
Graphic Output
14-11
When the Sort Off toggle is selected, sorting occurs in default order.
In the list file on the following page (P_O.LST), the sort criterion is found at the end
of the file and is identified by the key phrase “!sort”. Following the sort command is
the “!h2” descriptor identifying the data block to be sorted and the variable name
(?manufact) to be used in the static sort method. Also specified is a numeric
constant (0) which describes the sorting method. These numeric constants are
defined as follows:
Sort Constants
Sort Mode Ascending Descending
Alphabetical [0] [1]
Ignore Case [2] [3]
Numerical [4] [5]
Mixed: Alpha + Num. [6] [7]
Date [8] [9]
New Page [n]
Therefore, in the following P_O.LST example the list would be sorted by the
information in the !h2 block by manufacturer name in alphabetical order. The
inclusion of the “n” switch indicates that a new page should be started for each
manufacturer.
14-12
!lh 0 First Page Header

–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Purchase Order List Date: ?date Page: ?pgno|
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Project Name: ?project | ?addr01 |
| Install. Name: ?title01 | ?addr02 |
| Drawing No.: ?title03 | ?addr03 |
| Job Number: ?title02 | ?addr04 |
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer |
%3.3s ?pgno
%.24s ?title01
%.24s ?title02
%.24s ?title03
%.32s ?addr01
%.32s ?addr02
%.32s ?addr03
!ph 0 Second Page Header (all following page headers)
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Purchase Order List Project: ?project Date: ?date Page: ?pgno|
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| Part No. Qty. Description Catalog No. Manufacturer |
%3.3s ?pgno
!h2 1 Database
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| ?partno ?quant ?descr ?ordno ?manufact |
| ?nopr ?tech01 |
| ?nopr ?tech02 |
| ?nopr ?tech03 |
| ?nopr ?tech04 |
%–14.14s ?partno
%–6.6s ?quant
%–21.21s ?descr
%–12.12s ?ordno
%–13.13s ?manufact
%.48s ?tech01
%.48s ?tech02
%.48s ?tech03
%.48s ?tech04
!d1 2
| |
| ?ins01 ?ins02 ?ins03 ?ins04 ?ins05 ?ins06 ?ins07 ?ins08 |
| ?loc01 ?loc02 ?loc03 ?loc04 ?loc05 ?loc06 ?loc07 ?loc08 |
| ?did01 ?did02 ?did03 ?did04 ?did05 ?did06 ?did07 ?did08 |
!fill 0 Fill Command
| |
!pf 0 Page footer
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
| continued on page ?nextpgno |
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
!lf 0 End of list
–––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
!sort !h2 ?manufact 0n
!outfile ?
14-13
Using Variable Data in Lists
The list description file contains references to data assigned in the program. These
references (? values) are composed of a question mark and a variable name, for
example ?date. The list generator replaces the string ?date in the output list with the
current date. Because the date comprises 8 characters, the 6 characters following
?date in the list description file are ignored and are overwritten in the output list.
Note The variables that can be accessed by each list are limited. If an attempt is made to
access variables that are not valid for a given list then it is possible for nonsense
values to appear in the output list (see page 14-29 for lists of the variables available
for each type of list).
The “&” Separator – For many variables, the list generator will access values of
different lengths. If these data are to be written consecutively in flush format, the
symbol “&” should be added to the data identifier to ensure that the first value does
not write over the second. The following examples show various methods of
separating the values.
Where:
?title01 is replaced by Installation12
?title02 is replaced by 0815
?title03 is replaced by 4711
Control sequence: ?title01?title02
Produces output: Installa0815
Control sequence: ?title01&?title02

Produces output: Installa120815
Control sequence: ?title01&?title02&?title03

Produces output: Installation1208154711
Control sequence: ?title01&/?title02&/?title03

Produces output: Installation12/0815/4711
Control sequence: ?title01& / ?title02& / ?title03

Produces output: Installation12 / 0815 / 4711
Note – the “&” character must be directly after the data identifier
– all symbols between & and ? will be inserted flush
– if there is no ? after the &, all symbols until the end of the line will be inserted in
flush format
14-14
List Data Formatting
As a general rule, the data in the lists are output left–aligned. It is also possible to
change the output to other formats including right–aligned. Reformatting is
conducted separately for each output block. Format specifications are listed below
the last output line of the output block in question. Each format specification is in its
own line, terminated by a carriage return. The formatting instruction is identified by
its leading percentage symbol %. The formatting instruction is followed by the data
identification number, separated at least by a blank.
Note The formatting instruction must begin in the first column.
Example format instruction
%10.2f
% 10 . 2 f
Indicates A Field Number Of Indicates

Format Width Digits To The Format Of
Specification Right of Decimal Value
Point (Floating
Point) Or Number
Of Characters
Displayed
If no field width value is given, as many characters will be displayed as is necessary

to show the value.
Note Most listings will require a field width to establish columns.
A minus sign preceding the field width value will cause the listing to be
left–aligned.
Examples:
Note In the following examples, colons have been used to show the beginning and end of
the string; these are not output by the list generator.
a. String output:
An “s” at the end of the format instruction represents a string.
14-15
Format instr.: Result:

%5s :EXAMPLE1:
%-5s :EXAMPLE1:
%10s : EXAMPLE1:
%-10s :EXAMPLE1 :
%10.5s : EXAMP:
%-10.5s :EXAMP :
%.5s :EXAMP:
b. Output as whole number: (E.g.: 123)
A “d” at the end of the format instruction represents a whole number value.

%d :123:
%10d : 123:
%10.4d : 0123:
%-10.2d :123 :
%-10.4d :0123 :
%.2d :123:
%.4d :0123:
c. Output as floating point number: (E.g.: 123.321)
A “f” at the end of the format instruction represents a floating point number.

%f :123.321000:
%10.2f : 123.32:
%10.4f : 123.3210:
%-10.2f :123.32 :
%-10.4f :123.3210 :
%.2f :123.32:
%.4f :123.3210:
14-16
Arithmetic Operations With Variables
By means of arithmetic operations, it is possible to import additional information

into the lists from the data defined in RSWire. For this purpose, the list generator
provides two types of variables:
Type i (integer) variables for whole numbers
Type f (float) variables for floating point numbers
Expression in the list description file:
Variable: Meaning:
?i1 1. Whole number variable
?i2 2. Whole number variable
?f1 1. Floating point variable
?f2 2. Floating point variable
Up to 30 of each type of variable are allowed.
Formatting List Generator Variables
Equations must exist in the control sequence block where the variable is defined.
Formatting instructions for variables must be located at the end of the block, after
all the output lines. They are likewise identified by the leading percentage symbol.
Whole number variables must be formatted using the conversion symbol d, and
floating point variables using the characters ?f.
Examples:
%d ?i1
%f ?f1
%4.2f ?f2
Value assignment to List Generator Variables
Values can be assigned to the variables via expressions following the corresponding
format specification. These expressions are composed of a sequence of operands
and operators.
14-17
Permissible operands: Purpose:

?c constants
(no character) RSWire variable
?i whole number variable
?f floating point variable
Permissible operators: Function:

+ for addition
- for subtraction
* for multiplication
/ for division
Examples: Effect:
The list generator variable ?i1 is allocated the value of the
%d ? i1 ?c4*25
constant 4 multiplied by the RSWire variable 25.
The value of the list generator variable ?i1 is added to the list
%d ?i2 ?i2+?i1
generator variable ?i2.
?f1 is allocated the approximate value of the circle area with a
%f ?f1 ? i1*?i1*?c3.14
radius of ?i1.
Note – The starting value for all variables is zero.

– All variables can be freely assigned in all List Generator lists.
– The expressions are processed sequentially; there are no operator priorities
(no point–before–dash rule)
– All data are converted to the type of variable to which they are assigned
(for floating point data, floating point variables are used in some circumstances,
even though no places after the point are outputted)
– Do not forget the character “c” before constants.
– Expressions are processed in the order in which they are listed in the list
description file (exception: brackets, see below.)
Example of a list description:
The database supplies:

The part number under data variable ?partno
The quantity used under data variable ?quant
The list price under data variable ?price_b
14-18
This information should be extended by the total item price and the overall costs.
List description:
!lh
Calculation list
!ph
!d1
Part number : ?partno
Quantity : ?quant
List price : ?price_b
Total price : ?f1
%5.2f ?price_b
%5.2f ?f1 ?quant*?price_b
%f ?f2 ?f2+?f1
!pf
!lf
The sum of overall costs is: ?f2
%.2f ?f2
Caution: In this example, the overall costs (?f2) are calculated in data block
!d1, but not printed until the list footer !lf. Irrespective of the order of the
value assignments listed under the print lines of the data block !d1, the value is
not assigned to ?f2 until all variables printed in block !d1 have been allocated
their values.
Parentheses
Not all calculation formulae can be transformed in such a way that sequential
processing displays the required result. Example: The user wishes to calculate the
overall area of all devices in an installation in the dimensions list.
Variable for overall installation area: ?f11

Variable for x dimension coordinate: ?dim_x
Variable for y dimension coordinate: ?dim_y
The following actions must be executed:

Initialize the variable ?f11 with 0 (in installation header !h2)
Add the individual areas to ?f11 (in data set !d1)
Output the variables ?f11 (in installation footer !f2)
14-19
Problems will occur when adding up in the data block; according to the rules
outlined above, the instruction in the data block must be as follows:
%f ?f11 ?price_s * ?units + ?f11
However, this will not produce the desired result. The list generator will assign the
first operand, ?price_s, to the variable ?f11 when processing the expression. This
means that the sum of all areas formerly calculated will be overwritten, and instead
of this, the double area of the most recent device will appear in ?f11.
The solution to this situation is to use parentheses.
In order to achieve the required result, the instruction should therefore be as follows:
%f ?f11 ?f11 + (?price_s * ?units)
The parentheses may also be nested, but note that no error message will appear if
the bracketing is incorrect.
Minimum/Maximum Determination
With the aid of the comparative operators, it is possible to determine extreme values
of RSWire variables and list generator variables. The greater than symbol “>”
serves as maximum determination, and the less than symbol “<” as minimum
determination.
Caution: The list generator does not recognize the intended use of a variable
for extreme value determination and initializes all list generator variables with
zero. Accordingly, the variables must be set “manually” in the list header to
values beyond the expected values.
14-20
Example:
!lh
.
.
.
%f f2 c99999
.
.
.
!d1
Item no.: ?partno
Depth : ?ordno
%f f1 f1>?ordno Conditional value
assignment
%f f2 f2<?ordno Conditional value
assignment
!pf
!lf
The maximum depth is: ?f1
The minimum depth is: ?f2
In the first line, with the comment “conditional value assignment” the value of f1 is
compared with the value of the RSWire variable ?ordno. If the latter value is
greater, it is assigned to f1; otherwise, no action is initiated. This conditional
assignment is repeated until the data block !d1 is output. Once all data blocks have
been output, the maximum of the depths is printed in the list footer.
The same applies analogously to the processing of f2.
Note In the case of aborted lists (screen output), only the extreme values of the output
section of list are determined, as the arithmetic operations do not take place until a
block is output.
14-21
String Manipulations
As outlined above, the strings present in RSWire may be output in a formatted form.
In order to be able to cut the beginning of a string, another mechanism of the list
generator connected prior to formatting must be initiated. The list generator
provides memory space for 30 manipulated strings which can be re–allocated in
every list. Output of strings (in this case list generator strings) is conducted as
follows:
Data ID: Meaning:

?s1 1. List Generator string
: :
The contents of all list generator strings are pre–assigned the string length 0. These
contents may be modified by manipulation terms which are appended to the
formatting instructions described above.
Example:
The RSWire variable ?ftext contains the string:
“1st line^2nd line^3rd line”
Format spec. Effect of ?s1 or ?s2, ?s3 in the relevant output block
%s ?s1 ?ftext 1st line^2nd line^3rd line
%s ?s1 ?ftext t^1 1st line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s2 ?ftext f^1 t^2 2nd line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s3 ?ftext f^2 3rd line (positioned by separator)
%s ?s2 ?ftext f10 t17 2nd line (positioned absolutely)
14-22
The leading data identification number specifies the RSWire variable from which
the string is to be taken. The letter “f” in the manipulation term means “from
symbol”, the letter “t” means “up to symbol”. The sequence directly following “t” or
“f” may contain a non–numerical symbol and a number. If only one number (n) is
contained, the string is copied into the list generator string from or up to the nth
symbol inclusively. If a non–numerical symbol (c) is also included, then the string is
copied into the list generator string from the nth symbol c exclusively or up to the
nth symbol c exclusively.
Caution: The sequences f[symbol][number] or t[symbol][number] must not

contain any spaces (exception: when the symbol itself is a space).
Static Filter for Lists
The filter feature for list generators enables the user to filter specific data into the
lists. An example would be the purchase order list. Not all of the parts are purchased
from one vender. We might need a separate P.O. list for each vender. Through
filtering, we can print only the parts we need.
To filter a list the user must do two things:
1. Put a filter statement in the list generator file that specifies how the list is to be
filtered.
2. Turn on the Filter function in the Tools > System Settings > Report Settings
tab before generating the list.
If the filter statement contains variables, the user will be prompted for values at the
time the list is generated.
The filter statement consists of the following information.
14-23
!filt (Filter statement identifier)

!h2 (The data block in which the variable resides.)
& (Logical operand and for the AND junction and allows the filter
description to be displayed in the Filter DCL. NOTE: If no other
operands are used the & must be in place.)
&! (Logical operand for a negated AND junction, AND NOT".)
| (Logical operand for an OR junction.)
|! (Logical operand for a negated OR junction, OR NOT".)
?manufact (The name of the variable to filter. manufact" is one example.)
0-8 (The filter mode). See below.
= (The equation which the filter path is to take). See below.
* (The preset value *"*" appears in the filter data entry field of the filter DCL and
can be used as a wild card,
card i.e.
i e S*,
S* which would display all manufacturers
g
beginningg with S)) Keepp in mind case sensitive data
S). data. In a static filter the & |
may bbe usedd tto acceptt values
l which
hi h are nott case sensitive,
iti ii.e. *S or **s.
Manufacturer" (Text that appears in the Filter window to identify the filter variable name).
name)
Statement Format – (the actual statement is separated by spaces, not commas)

!filt, block identifier, logical junction, field identifier, comparison mode, comparison
operator string
Example statement: !filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = *

“Manufacturer”
This statement will filter for manufacturers in alphabetical order.
Filter Criteria:
The following values in the filter statement determine the order in which the data
will be listed.
Filter Mode Constants (Ascending)

Alphabetical [0]
Ignore Case [2]
Numerical [4]
Mixed: Alpha-Numeric [6]
Date [8]
14-24
For filtering, the block identifier !filt is used in conjunction with the following
logical operators:
& = AND junction

&! = AND NOT junction
| = OR junction
|! = OR NOT junction
Several entries may be made in the Filter window; only those data records which
satisfy all entries are output.
For the “equal to” and not equal to”, partial qualifications are evaluated, i.e. it is
possible to use “*” and “?” in the entries you make in the Filter window.
Example: AC* to list all parts from companies beginning with “AC” .
Example: 4??? to list all wire numbers with four digits starting with 4.
For the “equal to” and not equal to”, multiple entries are possible in the Filter
window; they must be separated by a pipe “|” (OR).
Example: ABLE | BAKER to display only Able or Baker manufacturers. Up to

sixty characters may be entered on one line for multiple manufacturers names,
separating each name by a “|” character.
For “not equal to” (!=) suppression is implemented, i.e. the list is output with the
exception of the entries listed in the Filter window.
Example: I:000/??|O:000/?? to list all wire numbers except the I:000/ and O:000/
I/O addresses.
List Filter Restrictions – In the filter statement the user must indicate the manner in
which the list for this variable is to be restricted. The following modes may be
specified.
= equal to
!= not equal to
< less than
> greater than
<= less than or equal to
>= greater than or equal to
14-25
Example: to filter for a specific quantity of parts (quantity of 3).
!filt !d1 & ?quant 4 > 2

!filt !d1 & ?quant 4 <= 4
After the list generator has been modified with the filter statement, the filter
function must be selected by picking Tools > System Settings from the pull–down
menu, and Report Settings tab. Select the On toggle in the Filter field. Save this
setting for future work sessions by selecting the Save button.
System Settings X
Filter Sort Output

OFF OFF Screen
Printer
File
Filter Toggles ON ON Project
Interactive
Graphic Output
When filter statements are present that require variable entries, the Filter dialog box
will appear when a list is generated. The entry fields will be labeled as specified in
the filter statement. For example, if the following pair of filter statements was added
to the list generator file:
!filt !h2 & ?manufact 0 = * “Manufacturer name”

!filt !h2 & ?ordno 6 = * “Part number”
14-26
Then the Filter dialog box would appear as follows:
Filter
Manufacturer name =
Part number =
OK Cancel Help...
Note Due to the number of variables used to extract wire numbers, wire labels cannot be
filtered using the filter function.
14-27
Tab Formatting in Lists
You can format tab stops in lists so that information appears in columns.
Tabs are specified in the data block portion of the list generator file following the
sort constant value (see following example). The tab values represent distance from
the left edge of the page in the default units (inches or millimeters) of the system.
On the next line of the list generator file, place the variable names whose values are
to appear at each tab stop. After each variable name, press the <Tab> key (this will
not be visible in the file, but must be present. Do not enter a tab character before the
first variable name. After each variable name you must also enter a sufficient
number of spaces to account for the maximum length of data that will be placed in
the list. If this is not done, information for one variable could overwrite the
information of the previous variable.
Example tab format instruction

!d1 2 1 3 5
?install ?page ?pagedescr01
!d1 2 1 3 5
Data Sort Tab values (represent inches or

block constant millimeters depending on default units)
?install ?page ?pagedescr01
Variable Include spaces and at

names least one tab between
each variable name
14-28
List Generator Variables

This section describes the variables that are used in list files to represent various
pieces of RSWire project data.
Each variable has been assigned a name consisting of an alphanumeric string. This
variable is entered in a list file as a question mark (?) followed by the variable name.
For example: use ?project to get the name of the current project in a parts list.
Note Under MS–Windows the lists are printed on screen using the OEM_FIXED_SYS –
font. This font may be smaller than the standard Windows font. Dimensions of the
window are set by MS–Windows only: lines and screen output:columns. The number
of lines per page is set by screen output: lines. Correct the number of output lines
per page (screen output: lines) by using a list including page filler and list settings:
scrolling by page.
Graphic Characters (All Versions) – Some lists contain the extended IBM graphic
characters for borders. These signs can be transformed to Pipes and Dashes (| and –)
by switching off the Graphic Output toggle in the Tools > System Settings
function, and the Report Settings tab.
14-29
All Lists
?host Workstation name
?user User name
?date Current date
?inst Current installation
?loc Current location
?page Current project page
?pgno Current list page
?nextpgno Next list page
?ix1 Index 1 (used for item numbers)
?ix.1 Index .1 (used for item numbers)
?ix..1 Index ..1 (used for item numbers)
?path Directory path
?sins Sign: Installation (=)
?sloc Sign: Location (+)
?sdid Sign: Device ID
?addr03
Address file: line 03
etc.
14-30
Parts Database Data Variables
?partno Part number
?descr Description
?manufact Manufacturer
?prefgrp PMG
?ordno Catalog #
?price_b List price
?price_s Selling price
?units Units
?discount Discount
?devtype Device type
?date_cr Date created
?date_ch Date changed
?symb_ref Reference symbol
?symb_wir Wiring diagram symbol
?symb_lay Layout symbol
?dbloc On (C)over or (P)anel
?dim_x Dimension[in] X
?dim_y Dimension[in] Y
?dim_z Dimension[in] Z
?weight Weight[lb]
?power Power[VA]
?time1 Assembly Time [min]
?time2 Wiring Time [min]
?tech01 Technical Description 1
?addpart01 Additional Data 1
Note If the database has been customized by the user, the above variable names (keys)
may be different.
14-31
Project Lists
All Project–Related Lists
?project Current Project
?prdescr01 Project Description 1
etc.
?addrfile Address File
etc.
Project List
?project Project name
?title_blk Page title block
?catalog Symbol catalog (active)
?tablet Tablet overlay file
?devid Device ID (default)
?xgrid x-grid
?ygrid y-grid
?devidsz Device ID text size
?connpntsz Connection point text size
?prpgno Total drawing pages in project
?xrefsz Cross-reference text size
?termsz Terminals text size
?lang1 1st language
?lang2 2nd language
?lang3 3rd language
14-32
Installation List
?inpgno Total drawing pages in installation
?install Installation name
Page List
?ingpno Total drawing pages in installation
?page Page
?install Installation
?location Location
?cont Online control checking (Y/N)
?scale Page scale
?form Page format number
?titblk Title block
?termpl Is page a terminal plan (Y/N)
?crdate Creation date
?crname Creation user
etc.
?path File path for page
14-33
Page Format List
?format Format
?formno Format number
?descr Description
?xmin Dimension: xmin
?ymin Dimension: ymin
?xmax Dimension: xmax
?ymax Dimension: ymax
?lrmin Line range: min
?lrmax Line range: max
?lrinc Line range: increment
?macro Macro
?lpos1 Line position: 1
Database Lists
Macro List
?path Macro path
?macro Macro name
?descr Macro description
?term Terminal macro symbol
Symbol List
?path Symbol path
?symbol Symbol name
?descr Symbol description
?type Symbol type
14-34
Device Type List
?path Device path
?device Device name
?xrefsym Cross-reference symbol
?xrefdx dx
?xrefdy dy
?parsym Parent symbol
?parcpnt Connection points parent symbol
?descr Device Description
?contact01 Contacts
?contact02 Contacts
?contact03 Contacts
etc
?contact16 Contacts
?cpnt01 Connection points of contacts
etc
Device Type List Brief
?path Device path
?device Device name
?descr Device description
Language List
?textno Text number
?crdate Date of creation
?text Text
?lang Language
?pattern Search string
14-35
Wire Lists
Wire List (Connection List)
?location Location
?t1p Internal - page/line number
?t1i Internal - installation
?t1l Internal - location
?t1d Internal - device ID
?t2p External - page/line number
?t2i External - installation
?t2l External - location
?t2d External - device ID
?diffinst * (asterisk) for different instal.
?t1sym Internal - symbol
?t2sym External - symbol
?pot1 Internal - potential string 1 (Wire Number)
?pot2 Internal - potential string 2 (Gauge)
?pot3 Internal - potential string 3 (Color)
?pot4 Internal - potential string 4 (Additional)
Wire Labels
?did01 Device ID 1
etc
?did20 Device ID 20
14-36
Programmable Controller List
?descr I/O address description
?devid Device ID
?install Installation where child symbol is located
?location Location of child symbol
?pglnno Page/line number where child symbol is located
?ftext PLC function text
?targ1 1. target after PLC (only child)
?targ2 2. target after PLC (only child)
See also Symbol Attribute Text variables.
Parts Lists
Master Parts List
?location Location
?devid Device ID
?pglnno Page/Line number
?partno1 Part number 1st line
?partno2 Part number 2nd line
?ftext Function text
?instdraw Installation where device ID is drawn
See also Parts Database Data variables.
14-37
Bill of Material
?devid Device ID
?location Location
?pglnno Page.Line number
?partno Part Number
?ftext Function Text
Purchase Order List
?partno Part Number
?quant Quantity
?ins01 Installation 1
etc.
?loc01 Location 1
etc.
?loc20 Location 20
?did01 Device ID 1
etc.
?did20 Device ID 20
14-38
Job Costing List
?hour_cost Hourly cost
?mark_up Mark up
?partno Part number
?quant Quantity
etc.
?loc01 Location 1
etc.
?loc20 Location 20
?did01 Device ID 1
etc.
?did20 Device ID 20
Dimension List
?devid Device ID
?location Location
?partno Part Number
?ftext Function Text
14-39
Symbol Attribute Text
Attribute text entered for symbols can be accessed in the Master Parts list and Bill of
Material. These variables correspond to the numbered items in the
RS\MENU\DIALOG\ATT_ENG.TXT file.
?stxt001 Function text
?stxt002 PLC function text
?stxt003 Rack
?stxt004 Module
?stxt005 Combination of attributes
?stxt006 Reserved
?stxt007 Reserved
?stxt008 Wire diagram, CP
?stxt009 Device ID, panel layout, wire diagram symbol
?stxt010 Part number
?stxt011 Reference symbol name
?stxt012 Horsepower
?stxt013 Revolutions per minute
?stxt014 Voltage
?stxt015 VA
?stxt016 Full load current
?stxt017 Frequency
?stxt018 Temperature range
?stxt019 Pressure
?stxt020 Resistance
?stxt021 Velocity
?stxt022 Density
?stxt023 Quantity
?stxt024 Capacitance
?stxt025 Inductance
?stxt026 Seconds
?stxt027 Minutes
?stxt028 Hours
?stxt029 Channel
?stxt030 Manufacturer
?stxt031 Type
?stxt032 - ?stxt041 reserved
?stxt042 - ?stxt120 free for user entries
14-40
Field Wiring Lists
Terminal Strip List
?location Location
?strip Strip
?count Number of terminals
Terminal Connections List
?location Terminal Strip - location
?strip Terminal Strip
?term Terminal
?termtxt Terminal CP Text
?termftxt Terminal Function Text
?termpno Terminal Part no.
?xpos Terminal X Position
?ypos Terminal Y Position
?termt1txt Terminal side t1: CP Text
?termt1cpno Terminal side t1: CP No.
?termt2txt Terminal side t2: CP Text
?termt2cpno Terminal side t2: CP No.
?instdraw Installation of page
?pagedraw Page
?lineno Line no.
?t1_pot1 Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
?t1_pot2 Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?t1_pot3 Wire description 3 (Color)
?t1_pot4 Wire description 4 (Additional)
?t2_pot1 Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
14-41
?t2_pot2 Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?t2_pot3 Wire description 3 (Color)
?jumper Jumper
?t1inst Internal: installation
?t1loc Internal: location
?t1did Internal: device ID
?t1cp Internal: connection point
?t1cptxt Internal: connection point text
?t1cpno Internal: connection point no
?t1sym Internal: symbol
?t1ftxt Internal: function text
?t1cab Internal: cable
?t1cond Internal: conductor
?t2inst External: installation
?t2loc External: location
?t2did External: device id
?t2cp External: connection point
?t2cptxt External: connection point text
?t2cpno External: connection point no
?t2sym External: symbol
?t2ftxt External: function text
?t2cab External: cable
?t2cond External: conductor
14-42
Project Cable List
?location Location
?name Cable name
?wireno Number of wires (database)
?used Number of wires being used
?device Device type
?devtxt1 Device type: description 1
?partno Device: partnumber
?devtype Device: type
?gauge Device: gauge
?t1ins Target1: =installation
?t1loc Target1: +location
?t1did Target1: -device ID
?t1no Target1: terminal No./Conn. Point
?t1txt Target1: terminal text
?t1ftxt Target1: function text
?cabtxt01 Cable text 1
14-43
Field Wire List
?location Location
?name Cable name
?wire Number of wires (database)
?used Number of wires being used
?device Device type
?partno Device: part number
?devtype Device: type
?gauge Device: gauge
?pot1 Wire description 1 (Wire Number)
?pot2 Wire description 2 (Gauge)
?pot3 Wire description 3 (Color)
?pot4 Wire description 4 (Additional)
etc.
14-44
Error Checking Lists
Signal List, Unreferenced Signal List
?devid Device ID
?inst Installation
?page Page
?lineno Line number
?xpos X Position
?ypos Y Position
?type Signal type
Device Without Parent List
?device Device
?instdraw Installation of page
?locdraw Location of page
?devi Device ID
?inst Installation
?loca Location
14-45
14-46
Alternate Search Paths
15 Alternate Search Paths
Ordinarily, RSWireTM Designer uses a default directory structure (established during

installation) to access the files it needs.
The Alternate Search Path sets a different search path that the system can use to
locate RSWire files. More than one set of directories can be specified in the
alternate path, and a search priority is established. This is useful, for example, when
working with several symbol catalogs (electrical, pneumatic, etc.) in a single
project, or if every user on a network operates with his or her own symbol or macro
library or has otherwise customized RSWire.
When RSWire is used on a network, an alternate search path allows standard files
(symbol libraries, etc.) to be shared over the network while customized files located
at each workstation can be accessed by the local user.
Alternate search paths can be set for dialog boxes, list descriptions (.LST files),
catalog libraries (symbols–macros–devices), and configuration files.
You set alternate search paths by editing the ECSCAD.CFG file in the RS\WORK
directory (default). With a default install to the C drive this file appears as follows.
The statements that can accept alternative search paths are shown in bold.
WORK_PATH=C:\RS\PROJECT\
PROGRAM_PATH=C:\RS\
CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\
TMP_PATH=C:\RS\
LIST_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\LIST\
CONFIG_PATH=C:\RS\SYSCON\SYSTEM\
TEXT_PATH=C:\RS\DB\
PLOT_PATH=C:\RS\PLOT\
It contains a number of path statements telling RSWire where to find various system
files. These paths are described below.
15-1
Path Descriptions
WORK_PATH=
This variable points to the directory where RSWire will store all projects. (Cannot
use alternate search path.)
PROGRAM_PATH=
This variable points one directory above where the program is stored. This is the
promise program path. (Cannot use alternate search path.)
CATALOG_PATH=
This variable points directly to the directory where RSWire stores all of the various
symbol catalogs which can be loaded. The question mark at the end allows the
system to load the symbol catalog defined in the project parameters dialog box.
TMP_PATH=
This variable points one directory above where RSWire stores the temporary files.
This is a temporary file path for lists and file imports and exports. This path must be
the same as the program path. Each user must have their own TMP directory.
(Cannot use alternate search path.)
LIST_PATH=
This variable points to the directory where the list generator files are stored. These
files determine the format of lists and reports.
CONFIG_PATH=
This variable points directly to the directory where the configuration and settings
files for various RSWire functions are located.
15-2
TEXT_PATH=
This variable points to the directory that contains subdirectories for the language
database and the address files. (Cannot use alternate search path.)
PLOT_PATH=
This variable points to the directory where the software files generated by the plot
functions. (Cannot use alternate search path.)
Alternate Search Paths – You create an alternate search paths by adding additional
paths to the path statements shown in bold above. This allows the software to search
through more than one directory to find the files for which it is searching. The first
path listed is the first directory to be searched. Added directories are searched in the
order that they appear in the declaration. When files are saved they are always
placed in the primary (first) directory. This occurs even if the file originated in
one of the secondary directories.
A question mark wild card may be used in paths. The “?” will be replaced by the
catalog loaded for the project that is active.
Question Mark Variable Example:
CATALOG_PATH=C:\RS\CATALOG\?\ H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\
Assume that the catalog for the project is “USER.” When a symbol is selected for
placement the C:\RS\CATALOG\USER directory is searched first. If the file is not
found in the USER directory, the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory is searched. If a
symbol from H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ is re–created, it will be read from
H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ and stored in C:\RS\CATALOG\USER. The original version
of the symbol is left in the H:\RS\CATALOG\JIC\ directory.
Alternate search paths allow for a great deal of flexibility in a network environment.
By making the shared network directory a secondary directory, users cannot modify
the “company standard” symbols, but symbols that they create in the course of
creating a new project can be stored as needed (in the user’s first directory). These
symbols can then be reviewed by the “RSWire administrator” and placed into the
“company standard” directory if they are of use to other users. Another application
of alternate search paths is to allow a catalog of symbols specific to only one project
to be kept in a separate symbol catalog that can be archived with the project.
In a similar way, list formats, dialog boxes, and configurations can be customized by
individual users and saved in the first path, while “standard” files remain unchanged
in the secondary directories.
15-3
15-4
Appendix A – RSWire Error Messages
A RSWire Error Messages
This sections lists error messages that are displayed by RSWireTM Designer for
various conditions.
Error 0: Page not stored.

Remedy: You may not leave this page because an error condition exists which must be
corrected. Correct the error condition, or turn off the page error checking function.
Use the Tools > Error Checking > Page Error Check function to set or disable
page error checking functions.
Error 1: The file does not exist in the Path as is listed in the Environment Variable
LIST_PATH
Remedy: Check file name or add the name to the Environment Variable LIST_PATH
Error 2: The file list.vz" on the 1st path of the Environment Variable LIST_PATH is
missing.
Remedy: Check the RSWire installation.
Error 3: Project already exists.
Remedy: Select a new project name or delete the existing project.
Error 4: The ASCII-Project file in the 'TMP' directory cannot be opened.
Reason: The file does not exist. No read/write permission on file for user. Incorrect file
beginning (PN<Blank> is expected in the first line)
Error 5: Error in one of the ADS-Function callups.
Remedy: Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly. Reinstall the AutoCAD
software selecting to install ALL files.
Error 6: No color configuration setup file existing.
Remedy: Check the RSWire installation.
Error 7: Search path or file name incorrect.
Remedy: Enter the correct search path or correct file name.
Error 8: No symbol library active.
Remedy: Read page from a project in which the symbol library is defined.
Error 9: No RSWire Menu found.
Remedy: Verify the installation process and input selections.
Error 10: The address file cannot be read or written to.
Remedy: Verify that the path setting is correct.
Error 11: The configuration file cannot be read or written to.
Remedy: Verify that the path setting is correct. No read/write permission on file for user.
Error 12: The Text function is locked.
A-1
Remedy: Verify that the text function is not being accessed at another location.
Error 13: Hard drive is full.
Remedy: Back up and/or delete files.
Error 14: Error in calling up the ADS-Function.
Remedy: Verify the ADS module of AutoCAD is installed correctly.
Reinstall the AutoCAD software selecting to install ALL files.
Error 15: The desired symbol is not in the Library.
Remedy: Verify that correct symbol name is entered.
Error 16: The device already exists in the working Device directory path
Remedy: Use new name.
Error 17: The page already exists.
Remedy: Use new page number.
Error 18: Application presently in use.
Remedy: Close use by other application and try again.
Error 19: The file is write protected.
Remedy: Remove write protection (e.g. DOS command ATTRIB)
Error 20: The Installation name already in use.
Remedy: Use new Installation name.
Error 21: There is not enough RAM memory available.
Remedy: Close any other open applications, or install additional RAM memory.
Error 22: The requested project does not exist.
Remedy: Enter the correct project name.
Error 23: No page active.
Remedy: Select a page using the File > Open Page > Select function.
Error 24: No files exist for plotting.
Remedy: Call up the Plot function again.
Error 25: No Plot list exists.
Remedy: Verify installation of RSWire.
Error 26: Browse copying not possible.
Reason: Incorrect screen viewports used.
1. Copied objects can only be placed in view 0 (lower left quadrant).
2. The subject and reference point not in the same viewport.
3. An attempt was made to place the subject into viewport 1, 2 , or 3.
Error 27: The password file cannot be read.
Remedy: Check password input for correctness, or no password existing.
Error 30: Device ID for symbol exists
Remedy: Use another device ID - verify checking logic.
Error 31: Part number not available.
Remedy: The part is not in the database
Error 32: Wire number already exists.
A-2
Remedy: Enter a different wire number.

Error 33: Device cannot be on-line checked.
Remedy: Please call Hot Line.
Error 34: Page Without Control
Remedy: The current page is offline; no error checking or cross referencing will be
performed. If you need these functions, select the Manage > Page > Modify
function and turn on the Online toggle.
Error 35: Wrong part number entered when placing or modifying.
Remedy: Part number already exists in database or the part number input field is empty.
Error 36: Description phrase not found
Remedy: Enter description or change the search criterion.
Error 40: Address description already exists using present PLC control switch
settings
Remedy: See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.
Error 41: Module description already exists using present PLC control switch settings
Remedy: See Tools> Project Settings > Programmable Controller Settings function.
Error 42: A temporary file cannot be created
Remedy: Verify the path or the user rights to the file.
Error 43: The selected list generator file is formatted incorrectly.
Reason: It does not begin with the control sequence identifier !lh
Error 44: The requested data block is missing in the list generator file
Remedy: Check the list generator file and correct the situation
Error 45: The requested file cannot be opened (read)
Remedy: Verify the path or the user rights to the file
Error 46: The requested file cannot be saved
Remedy: Remove the write protection or the path is not available
Error 47: The requested sort format is incorrect
Error 48: Warning: Device does not exist in device list or device data.
Error 49: Description data does not match with device.
Remedy: The selected device does not match the part device.
Error 50: Data format incorrect. The function is expecting a different format.
Error 51: Selected text font is not available. The STANDARD" text font will be used.
Error 52: The revision number of the data to be read in does not match.
Error 53: Symbol does not exist.
Remedy: Verify existence of desired symbol.
Error 54: Font configuration file in config file - does not exist
Error 55: Child symbols are missing in the device type definition in order to place the
PLC function text
A-3
Error 56: After reading in ACAD file (DXF or DWG), blocks must be exploded in for
RSWire to recognize and take over the graphical elements.
Remedy: Execute the EXPLODE command multiple times until no additional blocks exist.
Error 57: An attempt was made to attach a wire number to a wire that has one existing
through a signal cross reference symbol at another location
Error 58: SQL cannot be initialized when ASE was initialized, an error resulted.
Reason: ASE (AutoCAD SQL extension) was not installed completely or correctly.
Error 59: SQL driver cannot be initialized. The error message contains ? text from the
ASE environment.
Error 60: Logging into the database is not possible. The error message contains ?
text from the ASE environment.
Error 61: Error in accessing the database. The error message contains ? text from the
ASE environment.
Error 62: An attempt was made to change a wire number to a wire that also exists at
another location through a signal cross reference symbol.
Suggestion: After selecting OK, other wire parameters such as text size and position can be
changed. If you must change the number itself, use the Edit > Wire/Line >
Change Number function.
Error 63: Text with question mark.
Error 64: Device ID with question mark.
Error 65: Connection point text with question mark.
Error 66: Symbol text with question mark.
Error 67: Wire number with question mark.
Error 68: Connection between terminals.
Error 69: The symbol is not connected.
Error 70: Wire is not connected.
Error 71: Page offline.
Error 72: Logical line (wire) without a connection.
Error 73: The entered wire description does not exist in the cable definition (device
type).
Suggestion: Allow the wire name choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.
Error 74: Wire number already assigned.
Suggestion: Allow the wire number choices to be prompted and select the next available wire.
Error 75: Cable not yet placed. This is why no cable listing can be made and the next
available wire cannot be found.
Error 76: Error in EED Structure. EED structure not set correctly in DWG file.
Error 77: Line number positions and the line numbers actually used in a page do not
match.
Suggestion: Set the Digits in Line Numbers value correctly in the Tools > Project Settings >
General Defaults function. You may need to be manually correct the device IDs.
Error 78: Page format not found, system will refer to default page format number 0.
A-4
Error 79: Wire number not found.

You have entered a wire number that does not exist in the current project.
Error 80: Catalog cannot be imported into the first search catalog.
First string in CATALOG_PATH has no question mark in the config file.
Suggestion: Add a question mark to CATALOG_PATH in the config file.
Error 81: Symbol definition cannot be activated.
Symbol already on page.
Suggestion: Delete all symbols on page or activate new page".
Error 82: Clip jumper not possible.
Number of terminal blocks connected by a clip jumper exceeds the predefined
maximum.
Suggestion: Change Target Modify selection in the Terminal Plan Editor dialog box from Clip
Jumper to Wire Connection.
Error 83: Terminal jumper is neutral.
No Internal/External/Jumper defined for the terminal block center point.
Suggestion: Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in the Tools> Project Settings > Con
figuration Terminal and Plug IDs function. Change target in Terminal Connection
Point Definition dialog box .
Error 84: Short circuit found.
Two lines with different wire numbers are connected.
Suggestion: Delete one of the wires to remove one of the wire numbers.
Error 85: Page should be reorganized.
RSWire page was modified with AutoCAD.
Suggestion: Reorganize the page by selecting OK in the Error dialog box.
Error 86: Wire couldn't be connected.
No Internal/External target available.
Suggestion: Delete Internal/External wire. Check the Internal/External/Jumper toggle in the
Tools> Project Settings > Configuration Terminal and Plug IDs function.
Change target in Terminal Connection Point Definition dialog box .
Error 87: Open drawing limit exceeded.
Suggestion: Restart your computer.
Error 88: Error in ODBC: text from ODBC driver.
ODBC exception caught ODBC runtime system or driver couldn't execute function.
Error 89: Error in ODBC: can't update/append current record.
File system write protection or ODBC driver does not support changes.
A-5
A-6
Appendix B – RSWire Files
B RSWire Files
This sections lists the directories and files included when RSWireTM Designer is
installed.
The default setup of files and subdirectories under the RS\ directory is as follows:
RS\
BMP Directory of bitmap files for toolbar buttons (not available in Standalone)
CATALOG Symbol, device, and macro catalog directories
DB Text database, custom data files (i.e. address files, and logos)
DBS Parts database directory
FONTS Additional fonts directory (not available in Standalone)
MENU Directory containing menu, dialog, and help files
PLOT Directory containing plot scripts for RSWire
PROGRAM Directory containing EXE files
PROJECT Project directory and DWG files
SYSCON System configuration files, and list generator files
TMP Temporary file directory
USER User customized files
WORK Default DWG file for the startup of RSWire. Also configuration files for
printer and alternate search paths
The following pages list the subdirectories and major files included in each
directory.
B-1
BMP
The BMP directory contains bitmap files used for toolbar function buttons.
CATALOG
Sub Directories:
JIC (or IEC or other symbol catalog)
Sub Directories:
BLOCK Symbol files

DEVICE Device type files, Cable device type files
MACRO Macro files
WMF WMF format files for symbol select icon groups
DB
Sub Directories:
CUSTOM Address files.
RSI Rockwell Software address file
LG Text database.
TDB.MDB Text Access file (only if converted to MS Access)
LOGOS Title block logo information.
B-2
DBS
Sub Directories:
DB Parts database files
ARTICLE.MDB Article parts database file
FONTS
Additional font files (.SHX)
MENU
Sub Directories:
DIALOG Dialog prompts and help files: All files can be renamed through
configuration settings.
ATT_ENG.TXT Symbol attribute file (English)

DCL_ENG.TXT Symbol attribute file (English)
DIA_ENG.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (English)
ATT_FRA.TXT Symbol attribute file (French)
DCL_FRA.TXT Symbol attribute file (French)
DIA_FRA.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (French)
ATT_GER.TXT Symbol attribute file (German)
DCL_GER.TXT Symbol attribute file (German)
DIA_GER.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes the Command Line (German)
ATT_ITA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Italian)
DCL_ITA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Italian)
DIA_ITA.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Italian)
ATT_SPA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Spanish)
DCL_SPA.TXT Symbol attribute file (Spanish)
DIA_SPA.TXT Dialogs and prompts for dialog boxes and the Command Line (Spanish)
RSWIRE.HLP RSWire help file
RSWIRE.CNT RSWire help table of contents file
B-3
MNU Menu files and command files.
ACAD.MLN AutoCAD multiline definition files (not available in Standalone)

ACAD.MNC Compiled AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire
ACAD.MNS Source file for AutoCAD menu supplied with RSWire
ACAD.PGP AutoCAD program parameters file (short cut commands) supplied with
RSWire add-on
ECSCAD.LIN AutoCAD line type definition file for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNL RSWire command file, all program commands
ECSCAD.MNC Compiled application menu for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNR Resource file for application menu for RSWire
ECSCAD.MNS Source file for application menu for RSWire
ECS_ENG.MNS Source file for application menu (English source)
ECS_FRA.MNS Source file for application menu (French source)
ECS_GER.MNS Source file for application menu (German source)
RSWi.PGP Parameters file (short cut commands) supplied with RSWire standalone
PLOT Plot spool directory.
Directory where “Plotting to File” files are stored.
B-4
PROGRAM Directory where all linking library and executable files are located for the RSWire
software.
ECSCAD.ARX RSWire executable

ECSAPI.DLL Combined linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
ECSDRSET.DLL Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSDRSET.TLB Drawing set linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSEVALUATION.DLL Evaluation linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSFIELD.DLL Field linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSMACRO.DLL Macro linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSPAGE.DLL Page linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSPROJECT.DLL Project linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSSYMBOL.DLL Symbol linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECS TEXT.DLL Text linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSWIRE.DLL Wire linking library (Version 4.0 only)
ECSWIRENO.DLL Wire number linking library (Version 4.0 only)
WKSVMON.EXE Wibu key server monitor executable
WKSVW32.EXE Wibu key license manager executable
RSW.HLP RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.0 only)
RSWi.HLP RSWire help file (Standalone Version 4.1only)
SYSTEM Directory where system linking library and executable files are
located.
DAO350.DLL linking library (Version 4.1 and later)

DDAO35.DLL linking library
DDAO36.DLL linking library (Version 4.1 and later)
DUNZIP32.DLL linking library
DZIP32.DLL linking library
MSORCL10.CNT linking library
MSORCL10.DLL linking library
MSORCL10.HLP linking library
MSRDC20.OCX linking library
ODBCINT.DLL linking library
RDOCURS.DLL linking library
B-5
PROJECT Directory for the user’s projects.
Sub Directory:
WORK Under WORK a subdirectory is created for each project. The

NAMES.EC2 file identifies the contents of each subdirectory.
SYSCON System configuration directory
Sub Directories:
LIST List generator files
(The LIST.VZ file contains all the names of the list generator files being used
for a given session of RSWire. These file names are assigned through the Tools
> System Settings > Reports: Description Files function.)
CABLE.LST CSPAGE2.LST DEVICE2.LST PAGE4.LST
CSCABLE.LST CSPARTS.LST DEVWP.LST PARTS.LST
CSDEVIC1.LST CSPLC.LST DIM.LST PLC.LST
CSDEVIC2.LST CSPROJE1.LST FLDWIRE.LST PROJECT1.LST
CSDEVWP.LST CSPROJE2.LST
FORMAT.LST PROJECT2.LST
CSDIM.LST CSSIGNAL.LST
INST.LST SIGNAL.LST
CSFLDWIR.LST CSSYMBOL.LST
JOB.LST SYMBOL.LST
CSFORMAT.LST CSTERM.LST
LIST.VZ TERM.LST
CSINST.LST CSTSTRIP.LST
MACRO.LST TEXT1.LST
CSJOB.LST CSWIRE.LST
MASTER.LST TEXT2.LST
CSMACRO.LST CSWIRELA.LST
CSMASTER.LST DB1.LST P_O.LST TSTRIP.LST
CSMASTER1.LST DB2.LST PAGE1.LST USER.MDB
CSP_O.LST DEFAULT.MDB PAGE2.LST WIRE.LST

CSPAGE1.LST DEVICE1.LST PAGE3.LST WIRELAB.LST
B-6
SYSTEM System configuration files
BACKUP.CFG Backup/Restore function path settings

BANGLE.CFG Symbol angle settings configuration file
BSCALE.CFG Symbol scale settings configuration file
COLOR.CFG Color mapping configuration file
CONNLIST.CFG Default setting for Create Connection List When Saving Page"
CP.CFG Command protection configuration file
DEVSTY.CFG Device ID style configuration file
DID.CFG Terminal settings configuration file
DLG_TABS.CFG Project Settings and System Settings tabs
DWG.CFG Drawing format configuration file
DWGCTL.CFG Page control settings configuration file
GENERAL.CFG General default settings configuration file
GRID.CFG Grid settings configuration file
HW.CFG Report settings configuration file
LAYER.CFG Layer names
LNG.CFG Language settings configuration file
MANGLE.CFG Macro angle settings configuration file
MARK.CFG Marking settings configuration file
MSCALE.CFG Macro scale settings configuration file
NAVIGA.CFG Navigation scale settings configuration file
PLC.CFG PLC symbol settings configuration file
PPLAN.CFG Pin-Plug plan configuration file
PRESET.CFG Sets LT scale (dash line size)
PRT.CFG Printer settings configuration file
PT.CFG Terminal/Pin-Plug default configuration filenames
SAVEAS.CFG Save settings configuration file
SODDEF.CFG Project definition default configuration file
SODSETT.CFG Project parameters settings configuration file
SSETUP.CFG Device ID delimiter configuration file
STYLE.CFG Font style configuration file
TANGLE.CFG Text angle settings configuration file
TERM.CFG Terminal settings configuration file
THEIGHT.CFG Text height settings configuration file
TLORG.CFG Text label origin settings configuration file
TPLAN.CFG Terminal plan configuration file
TPMAC.CFG Terminal plan macro configuration file
TRATIO.CFG Text ratio settings configuration file
B-7
TSLANT.CFG Text slant settings configuration file

TSTYLE.CFG Text font style settings configuration file
TXTOD.CFG Text on drawing settings configuration file
UNDEF.CFG AutoCAD undefined commands configuration file
VERSION.CFG Indicates default to DWG or non-DWG drawing format
WIRE.CFG Automatic wire numbering configuration
WIRE1.CFG Manual wire numbering configuration
TMP Temporary swap files (delivered empty)
USER Backup of files that the user may have customized. Directory is automatically
created when an update install is performed.
DOCUMENT.MDB
WORK Default DWG files used on start–up of program.
ACAD14.CFG AutoCAD R14 configuration

ACAD2000.CFG AutoCAD 2000 configuration
ADD_CU.BAK Backup of registry files
ADD_CU.REG Registry files (modified at install)
ECS.DVB Default VBA project
ECS_$$$.DWG Temporary files
ECS_CAD.MSG Message file
RSWIRETAB.DWG Tablet overlay drawing (JIC symbols)
PASSWD.TXT RSWire password file
PRINTER.BAT Printer batch file
RSWire.ARG Registry data
RSWire.DWG Default drawing file
RSWire.ICO RSWire icon file
SAMPLE.DVB Sample VBA project
TYPELIB.BAK Backup to registry
TYPELIB.REG Registry files (modified at install)
UI.MDB User interface database file
B-8
Appendix C – Creating Symbol Icon Groups
C Creating Symbol Icon Groups
This sections describes how to make custom graphical symbol selection groups for
use with the Insert > Select Icon function.
Selection groups are provided for the symbol catalog that is included with the
software. However the user may wish to create new groups to arrange commonly
used symbols in one group or to allow selection of new symbols that the user has
created. Macros can also be selected from these groups.
C-1
Each new selection group is drawn in RSWireTM on a drawing page. The page is
then converted to the WMF (Windows Metafile) format. This WMF file is stored in
a WMF subdirectory under the symbol catalog directory selected for the current
project (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF).
Icon Group Creation Procedure:

Note You must use a white drawing background when creating icon groups in order for
the icons to work properly.
1. In RSWire, create a blank drawing page. This page can be online or offline.
Most of the groups provided with the software were created using the B–1COL
page format although this format is not required. Use a separate page for each
group you create.
When creating the page, select the page parameter 1 button and enter the name
that you wish the group to have as page parameter number 1. The groups
provided with the software follow a group naming format where the first three
letters are the symbol catalog name (example: JIC_Relay1). Although this
format is not mandatory it helps organize the groups if you have multiple
symbol catalogs
2. On the new page, draw a box to define the total area for the new symbol group.
This box can be any size; it will be scaled to fit in the Select Icon dialog box.
(Most of the groups provided with the software were drawn in a box 3 inches
high by 8 inches wide – 7.6 x 20.3 cm). Do not use the logical box drawing
function.
C-2
3. Inside the box draw smaller boxes. Each smaller box defines the pick area for
one symbol. These boxes can touch (share sides) as shown in the following
figure, but the reference points for two boxes must not occupy the same
point. Allow a margin of at lease 1/2 inch (1.3 cm) between the smaller boxes
and the edge of the larger box.
4. Inside each small box, place the desired symbol using the Insert > Symbol by
Name function. All parts of the symbol (reference point, connection points,
text) must fit inside the box to ensure proper operation.
CB125
PB125
LS128
If the symbol is too large to be conveniently shown in a box you can instead
place a text string in the format S=SYMBOLNAME. For example, place the
string S=1771–IAD in the selection box for the symbol 1771–IAD.
Note If you wish to select a macro, place the desired macro in the box. For macros, the
box must also contain a text string in the format M=MACRONAME. For example,
place the string M=MOT1 in the selection box for the macro MOT1.
C-3
5. Modify the symbol to the appearance you wish it to have in the selection box.
For example, you might wish to remove the device ID or function text by using
the Modify > Symbol function. You must turn off displayed symbol reference
and connection points (use the Tools > System Settings > Display Settings
function).
6. Add any other elements you wish to appear in the selection window such as text
or borders. The symbol groups included with the software have text giving the
symbol name and symbol group (PS1, etc.) in each selection box. Place nothing
outside the large box drawn in step 2.
CB3M
PBNO
LSNO G
7. Save the drawing page (File > Save).
8. Select the Tools > Create Icon function (or enter the command
CREATE_WMF on the command line).
9. You will be prompted to select objects. Select the large box and everything
inside it. Press <Enter>. The WMF file will be created. It will be stored in the
WMF directory for the symbol catalog that you have selected for the current
project.
C-4
10. To verify that the new selection group exists, select the Insert > Select Icon
function. If the group name does not appear in the list, select the Edit > Refresh
function from the menu inside the Select Icon dialog box.
The WMF files are stored in the WMF subdirectory for the symbol library that was
selected in the New Project dialog box for the project in which the symbol group
drawings were created (example: \RS\CATALOG\JIC\WMF).
If you wish to move or copy WMF files from one symbol library to another, you can
copy the WMF files to the appropriate directory. However, you must then edit the
WMFLIST.INI file to add or delete the names of the symbol groups (see following
paragraph).
If you wish to change the names of existing groups you can edit the WMFLIST.INI
file located in the appropriate WMF directory. The group names are listed as folders
(example: FOLDER=JIC_Motor). Be careful not to alter any other information in
this file.
It is a good idea to keep the original drawing page after the WMF is created in case
you wish to modify the symbol group in the future. You can add or delete items on
the original page and then run the CREATE_WMF function again. You should
delete the existing WMF file before running the Tools > Create Icon function,
otherwise you will have two selection groups with the same name. The name of the
relevant WMF file is shown in the WMFLIST.INI file two lines above the group
(folder) name.
C-5
C-6
Index
Index
A Symbol Catalogs, 3-21
Backup/Restore, Function, 3-21, 6-5
ACAD.PGP File, 1-6
Bill Of Materials
Access Dialog Box, 9-23
Database Files, 13-2 Function, 9-23
Full Version, 13-19
Blank Drawing Pages, 7-35
Run–Time Version, 13-19
Block, 6-21, 6-82
Active Input File, 7-38
Box, 5-47
Address File, 3-6
Drawing, 5-49
Edit, Select, 7-17
Function, 5-47
Aerial View, 4-33 Logical, 5-47
Aliases, 1-6 Settings, 5-50
Alternate Search Path, 15-1 Box: Connection Point Parameters, Dialog Box,
5-48
Angle, Dialog Box, 5-35
Break, 4-16
Angular, Function, 5-84
Browse Copy, 4-35
Arc, 5-56
Filled Arc, 5-56
Article, Form, 10-11, 13-19 C
Assign Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-81, 5-118
Cable, 12-1
Attributes Assign, 11-18
List of, 6-15 Assign in Schematic, 12-2
Text, 5-16, 6-14, 14-40 Conductor Designations, 5-98
User Created File, 5-117 Cross Reference Symbol, 12-14
Visible/Hidden, 6-15 Delete, 11-19
Automatic, Function, 5-66 Device Type, 12-11
Hidden Symbol, 7-16
Automatic Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-66 List, 9-18, 12-21
Multiple Assignment Check, 7-28
Part Number, 12-12
B Symbol Create, 12-8
Terminal Editor, 11-18, 12-7
Backup Text, 5-100
Device Type, 3-21 Wire Numbering, 5-72
Macro, 3-21
Projects, 3-21 Cable Text, Dialog Box, 12-4
Selected Symbols, Macros, Device Types, 3-23 Character Sets, 7-10
I–1
Index
Character Size, 3-10 Connection Search Priorities, 9-15, 11-4

Characters, Reserved, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54 Connections, 9-16
Child Symbol, 5-18, 5-25, 6-28, 6-34 Search Priorities, 9-15
Reports, 9-10
Circle, 5-56
2 Points, 5-56 Connections Point, Dialog Box, 12-3
3 Points, 5-56 Contacts, Form C, 6-72
Filled Circle, 5-56 Continuous Wire, 5-8
Tan Tan Radius, 5-56
Copy, 5-105
Clear Page, 4-17 Device Type, 6-95
Clip Jumper, 11-16 From Page to Page, 4-35
Remove, 11-17 Function, 3-16, 4-20, 4-40
Close Page. See Quit Page Installation, 4-40
Macro, 6-95
Color, Wire, 5-101 Page, 4-20
Comma Separated, List, 14-5 Project, 3-16
Symbol, 6-95
Load Editor, Function, 1-5 Wire Numbers, 4-22, 4-41
Command Dispatch, 4-34 Copy Installation, Dialog Box, 4-40
Command Protection, 7-11 Copy Project, Dialog Box, 3-16
Commands Copy To Clipboard, Function, 5-93
Aliases (Shortcuts), 1-6
List of, 4-34 Create
Device Type, 6-89
Comparison Check, Panel Layout With Schematic, Field, 5-52
10-8
Function, 5-47
Compile Connections, 9-10 Icon
Compile Parts File, Function, 9-21 Macro, C-3
Symbol, C-2
Configure, Lists, 14-1 Language, 5-45
Connection List, 9-10 Macro, 6-81
Delete, 9-12 Page, 4-11
Dialog Box, 9-10 Project, 3-5
With Page Save, 7-25 Symbol, 6-6
Connection List Parameters, Dialog Box, 9-13 Cross Reference
Cable, 12-14
Connection Point, 6-3, 6-11
Device Definition, 6-34
Designations, 5-18
Distance from Device ID, 7-21
Display, 7-16
JIC or IEC, 7-21
Function, 5-47
Position, 7-21
Modify, 5-98
Signal
Text, 6-3, 6-11, 6-36, 6-91, 7-23
IEC, 5-65
Connection Points, Dialog Box, 5-17 JIC, 5-58
I–2
Index
Suppress, 5-100, 7-25 Definition of Text Attributes, Dialog Box, 10-9

Symbol, 6-31 Delete, 5-104
Toggle, 5-100 Device Type, 6-93
with Child Symbol, 6-27, 6-30, 6-54, 6-60, 7-25 Function, 3-14, 4-18, 5-77, 5-120
Zone, 7-22, 7-36 Installation, 4-39
Cross Reference Point , Function, 6-16 Macro, 6-93
Current Pages, Function, 8-2 Page, 4-18
Project, 3-14
Custom Symbol, Stored, 6-17 Symbol, 6-93
Cut, 5-93 Wire Number, 5-77, 5-120
Cut & Paste, 4-35 Delete Connection Point, Function, 5-47
Delete Language, Function, 5-46
D Delete Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-18

Delete Unused Text, 7-38
Dashed Lines, 5-102 Delete Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-77, 5-120
Data Source Name, 3-10 Device. See Device Type
Database Device and Default Selection, Dialog Box, 8-6
Accessing, 13-18
Add New Record, 13-23 Device ID, 6-2, 6-9
Adding Fields, 13-34 1, 2, or 3 Lines, 7-43
Delete Record, 13-24 Angle, 5-101
Field Sizes, 13-32 Color, 5-100, 6-10
Manipulation, 13-29 Display with Installation, Location, 7-44
Parts, 5-79, 13-1 Duplicate, 5-15, 5-30, 5-32, 5-55
Edit Form Function, 13-19 Find/Replace, 5-114
Edit Table Function, 13-28 Height, 5-101, 6-10
Print, 13-39 Label Origin, 5-101, 6-10
Restructure, 13-36 Macro, 5-30
Table View, 13-28 Modify, 5-97
Nested, 7-44
Database Data Prompt, 7-23
Dialog Box, 13-37 Renumber, 5-110
Record, 13-19 Replace, 5-110
Date, General Default, 7-21 Repositioning, 5-99
Reserved Characters, 5-15
DDINSERT, Command, 6-21
Search, 5-20
Default Suppress, 5-15
Device ID Format, 3-9 Symbol, 5-14
Font, 7-49 Tag, 6-2
Default Settings, 7-4 Device ID Assignment, Dialog Box, 5-14
Define Names, Dialog Box, 8-31 Device ID Sign (–), 5-24
I–3
Index
Device Type, 5-17, 5-25, 13-21 Draw

Backup, 3-21 Arc, 5-56
Cable, 12-11 Box, 5-47
Copy, 6-95 Empty, 5-49
Create, 6-89 Filled, 5-49
Definition, 6-34 Circle, 5-56
Delete, 6-93 Dimensions, 5-83
Dialog Box, 5-17, 12-3 Field, 5-52
List, 9-6 Line, 5-10
Modify, 5-97, 6-99 Polyline, 5-10
Rename, 6-96 Single, 5-10
Without Parent, 9-30 Logical Box, 5-47
Device Type Brief, Report, 9-7 Connection Point, 5-47
Create, 5-47
Device Type Full, Report, 9-6 Delete Connection Point, 5-47
Diagonal Wire Connection, 7-24, 9-16 Macro, 5-27
Symbol, 5-11
Dialog Boxes, Customize, 2-13 Text, 5-31
Dialog Language, 7-4 Undo, 5-92
Digitizer, 1-7 Wire, 5-3
3 Phase, 5-6
Dimension List, Function, 9-27 90 Degree Down, 5-9
Dimensions 90 Degree Up, 5-9
Align Text, 5-85 Continuous, 5-8
Alternate Units, 7-60 Repeat Last, 5-8
Angular, 5-84, 5-87 Single, 5-4
Annotation, 7-58 Wire Number, 5-72
Drawing, 5-83 Automatic, 5-66
Family, 7-54 Manual, 5-72
Format, 7-57 Wire/Line, 5-3
Geometry, 7-54 Drawing Box, 5-49
Leader, 5-84, 5-87
Linear, 5-84, 5-85 Drawing Entity List, 5-132
Ordinate, 5-84, 5-86 Duplicate Device ID, 5-15, 5-30
Radial, 5-84 DW Symbol, 9-16
Radius, 5-86
Settings, 7-52 DWF Files, Plot to, 8-22
Style, 7-54 DWG File, 4-3, 4-9, 6-82
Tolerance, 5-84 Plot To, 8-23
Directory, RSWire Directories, 1-2 Symbol Import, 6-21
Disable Settings, 5-33 DWT File, 4-9
Display Only Attribute Text, 5-16 DXF File, 4-9
Plot to, 8-24
Display Settings, 7-15
I–4
Index
DXF Import, Function, 6-22 Field Wire, Report, 9-18

Field Wire List, 12-21
E File
Backup/Restore, 6-5
Edit New Page, 4-11
Copy To Clipboard, 5-93 New Project, 3-5
Cut , 5-93 Open Page
I/O Device ID, 5-121 Previous, 4-7
Part Number Refresh, 4-6
Multiple, 5-119 Select, 4-4
Single, 5-118 Plot
Replace Symbol, 5-108 Current Pages, 8-2
Text Multiple Pages, 8-2
Find/Replace, 5-114 Preview, 8-2, 8-3
Modify, 5-103 Break, 4-16
Wire Number Save, 4-8
Delete, 5-77, 5-120 Save As, 4-9
Modify, 5-104 File Locking, 3-13
Edit Menu, 5-92 Files, B-1
Edit Phrases, Function, 5-44 Filled Circle, Function, 5-56
Edit Symbol, Dialog Box, 5-97 Filter, 7-6
Edit Wire/Line Type, Dialog Box, 5-101 Dialog Box, 14-27
Lists, 14-23
Enable Settings, 5-33
Find/Replace, Function, 5-114
Entity List, 5-132
Find/Replace Text, 5-114
Error Checking, List, 9-30
Font
Exchange Title Block Text, Dialog Box, 4-25 Default, 7-49
Exit, Without Saving, 1-4 Selecting, 5-39
Explode Function, 6-21, 6-82 Foreign Languages. See Language Text
Form C Contacts, 6-72
F Format
Color, 5-101
Field Layers, 5-123
Delete, 5-55 Linetype, 5-101, 5-122
Draw, 5-52 Multiline Styles, 6-100
Function, 5-52 Page, 4-12
Mixed device IDs in, 5-54 Text Style, 5-39
Modify, 5-103 Formats Available For All Projects, Function, 7-36
Rules, 5-52 Function, DXF Import, 6-22
Field Parameters, Dialog Box, 5-53
I–5
Index
Function Text, 5-32, 6-14 Definition of, 3-2

Functionality, 2-2 Delete, 4-39
Device ID Format, 7-43
NO_INST, 3-4
G Rename, 4-42
Installation (of Software), 1-2
General Defaults, Settings, 7-19 Installation and Location, 3-2
Generate Graphical Plans, Function, 11-30 Installation Guide, 1-1
Graphical Terminal Plan Installation List, 9-4
See also Terminal Plan
Configuration, 11-24 Installations, Function, 9-4
Create, 11-30 Internal/External Connections, 7-41
Grid, 3-10 Definition, 11-3
Draw/Hide, 7-23 Display Format, 11-27
Grid Settings, 7-2
Group, Device ID, 3-9 J
Job Costing, Function, 9-25
H Job Costing List, 9-25
Dialog Box, 9-25
Height, Dialog Box, 5-34
Job Number, 3-6
Help Screens, 2-11
Jumper, 11-3
Hidden Symbol, Display, 7-16 Clip, 7-42, 11-16
Hourly Cost, 9-25 Wire, 11-17
I L
I/O Device ID, Function, 5-121 Label Origin, 5-38, 5-101
Icon, Create Label Origin Text Justification, Dialog Box, 5-38
Using Macro, C-3 Ladder
Using Symbol, C-2 Line Number, 7-21
IEC, Connection Search, 9-16 Two Line, 7-33
Import, Text File, 5-88 Ladder Line Number
X Direction, 7-33
Insert, Symbol/Macro From Icon, 5-27
Y Direction, 7-33
Insert Spare Terminals, Dialog Box, 11-13
Ladder Macro, 7-33, 7-35
Installation
Language, Of Dialogs, Menus, etc., 7-4
Copy, 4-40
I–6
Index
Language Text, 3-9, 5-41 List Generator, 14-1

Create, 5-44 Assigning Files, 14-3
Font, 5-45 File Structure, 14-6
Replace, 9-22 Filenames, 14-4
Report, 9-7 Path to, 15-2
Search, 5-32 Variables, 14-29
Language Text Database, Dialog Box, 9-7 List Generator Settings, Function, 7-5
Layer Control, Dialog Box, 5-123 List Object Function, 5-132
Layer Printing Control, Dialog Box, 8-26 Lists, 9-1
Layers Bill Of Materials, 9-23
Function, 5-123 Cable, 9-18
Plotting, 8-26 Comma Separated, 9-29
Connection, 9-10
Layout Function, 10-3 Customizing, 14-1
Leader, Function, 5-84 Device Type, 9-6
Device Without Parent, 9-30
Leader Lines, 5-87 Dimension, 9-27
Line, 5-3 Field Wire, 9-18
Adjusting Length, 5-5 File Assignment, 14-3
Change Type, 5-101 File Structure, 14-6
Draw, 5-10 Filtering, 7-6, 14-23
Edit, 5-101 Foreign Text, 9-7
Logical, 5-3 Graphics, 7-6, 7-8
Numbers, 7-31 Installation, 9-4
Stretch, 5-107 Job Costing, 9-25
Line Numbers, 7-21, 7-31 Macro, 9-6
Columns, 7-35 Master Parts, 9-22
With Page No., 7-24 On Drawing, 5-88
Open Connections, 9-11, 9-12
Linear, Function, 5-84 Output, 7-6, 7-8
Linetype, 5-101 Page, 9-4
Properties, 5-122 Page Format, 9-9
Parts Dimension. See Lists, Dimension
List, Comma Separated, 14-5 PLC, 9-20
List File Printing, 7-6, 9-3
Arithmetic, 14-17 Project, 9-4
Assigning, 14-3 Error Checking, 9-30
Data Formatting, 14-15 Purchase Order, 9-24
Rules, 14-9 Signals, 9-18
Sort Function, 14-11 Sort Function, 14-11
Strings, 14-22 Sorting, 7-6
Structure, 14-6 Symbol, 9-6
Using Variables, 14-14 Terminal Connections, 9-19
I–7
Index
Terminal Strip, 9-19 Manage

Variables, 14-29 Installation
Wire, 9-10 Copy, 4-40
Load Project, Function, 1-5 Rename, 4-42
Page
Location Copy, 4-20
Device ID Format, 7-43 Delete, 4-18
NO_LOC, 3-4 Modify, 4-23
Lock Project, 3-13 Move, 4-30
Page Variables, 4-25
Logical Page , Rename, 4-28
Box, 5-47 Project
Line (Wire), 5-3 Copy, 3-16
Online Control, 4-14 Delete, 3-14
Logical Box Modify, 3-17
Function, 5-47 Page Count, 4-49
Nested Symbols, 5-49 Rename, 3-19
Logo file, 7-18 Manual, 2-3
Conventions, 2-4
Function, 5-72
M Organization, 2-3
Master List, 9-22
Macro Report, 9-22
Backup, 3-21
Copy, 6-95 Master Parts List, Dialog Box, 9-21
Create, 6-81 Menu, 2-4
Delete, 6-93 Functions, 2-4
Device IDs, 5-30
Menus, 2-6
Edit, 6-97
Ladder, 7-33, 7-35 Mirroring, 5-24
List, 9-6 Modify
Modify, 6-97 Connection Point, 5-98
Page, 4-14 Device Type, 5-97, 6-99
Placing, 5-29 Field, 5-103
Rename, 6-96 Function, 3-17, 4-23
Report, 9-6 Line, 5-101
Select, 5-27 Macro, 6-97
Settings, 7-48 Move, 5-106
Terminal Plan, 11-20 Page, 4-23
Title Block, 6-83 Project Parameters, 3-17
Wire Numbers, 5-30, 6-83 Properties, 5-107
Macro by Name, Function, 5-27 Stretch, 5-107
Symbol, 5-96, 6-97
Macro Settings, 5-29
Symbol Text, 5-95, 5-99, 5-115
Maintenance Agreement, 1-1
I–8
Index
Terminal Destination, 5-99 90 Degree Down, Function, 5-9

Text, 5-103 90 Degree Up, Function, 5-9
Wire, 5-101
Modify Device Type, Dialog Box, 5-98
Modify Groups, Dialog Box, 8-27 O
Modify Page, Dialog Box, 4-23 Oldb.mdb File, 3-25
Modify Project, Dialog Box, 3-17 Online, Set Page Online, 4-23
Move Online Function, 4-14, 5-16
Function, 4-30, 5-106
Page, 4-30 Online function, Change, 4-23
Symbol, 3-10 Open Connections, List, 9-11, 9-12
Move Page(s), Dialog Box, 4-30 Options for RSWire, 2-14
MS Access, Reports, 9-28 Ordinate, Function, 5-84
MS–Access, Database Files, 13-2 Overview, 2-1
Multi–language Text, 5-41
Multi–Line Text, Replace, 9-22
P
Multi–Page View, 4-35
Multiline Styles, 6-100 Page
Break, 4-16
Multiple Pages, Function, 8-2 Browse, 5-79
Multiple Placement, of Cable Conductors, 12-2 Browse Copy, 4-35
Close (without save), 4-16
Copy, 4-20
N Count, 3-26
Create, 4-11
Navigator Delete, 4-18
Function, 4-43 Displaying, 4-4
Zoom Setting, 7-13 DWG File, 4-3, 4-9
EC1 File, 4-3
Navigator Function, 4-43 Erase. See Page – Clear Page
Nested Device ID, 7-44 Error Checking, 7-27
Filenames, 4-3
Nested Symbols, in Logical Box, 5-49
Format, 4-12
New Language, Function, 5-45 Macro, 4-14
New Page, 4-11 Management, 4-1
Dialog Box, 5-91 Modify, 4-23
Function, 4-11 Move, 4-30
Name Field, 4-6
New Project, Dialog Box, 3-5 Clear Page, 4-17
Next Page Function, 4-7 Next Page, 4-7
I–9
Index
Page Count, 4-49 Modify in title block, 4-27

Parameters, 4-25 Pan, 4-33
Open, 4-4
Refresh, 4-6 Panel Layout, 10-1, 13-21
Rename, 4-28 Comparison With Schematic, 10-8
Save, 4-8, 7-24 Dialog Box, 10-3
Save As, 4-9 Function, 10-3
Save Automatic, 4-8 Item Placement, 10-6
Scale, 4-14 Preliminary Steps, 10-2
Storage, 4-3 Procedure, 10-3
Variables, 4-25 Symbol Create, 10-9
View, 4-32 Text Parameters, 10-6
Without Control, 7-28, A-3 Parent Symbol, 5-25, 6-24, 6-34
Page – Parameter 2, Dialog Box, 4-15, 4-26 Parent/Child, 5-17, 5-25
Page Brief, Function, 9-5 Device Without Parent, 9-30
Search, 5-20
Page Control Function, Settings, 7-27
Part Number, 5-79, 13-20
Page Count Additional, 13-22
Dialog Box, 4-49 Automatic Assignment, 6-18
Function, 4-49 Check, 7-23
Page Count Function, 3-26 Copied Pages, 4-22
Page Format Display, 7-16
Default, 7-21 Duplication, 5-55
List of, 4-12, 9-9 Entering, 5-15
Saving, 7-36 Edit, 5-118
Settings, 7-29 Modify, 5-82
Multiple, 5-15, 5-80
Page Formats, Report, 9-9 Multiple Replace, 5-119
Page Full, Function, 9-4 Replace Globally, 5-119
Search, 5-82
Page List, 9-4 Symbol Create, 6-18
Page Macro, 4-14 Symbol without, 7-28
Default, 3-6 Terminal, 7-41
Page Name Field, 4-6 Text, 6-3
Page Number, With Line No., 7-24 Parts Database, 5-79

See also Database
Page Parameters Button, 3-10
Modify, 4-23, 4-25 Reports, 9-7
Modify in title block, 4-27
Parts Dimension List, 9-27
Page Type Field, 4-14
Parts File, Create, 9-21
Page Variables
Dialog Box, 4-25 Password Protection, 7-11
Function, 4-25 Pin Charts, 6-66
I–10
Index
Pin–Plug Plan, 11-31 Polyline, Function, 5-10

PLC Position
Address Separator, 7-39 Cross Reference, 5-99
Addressing, 7-39 Device ID, 5-99
Attribute, 6-43 Power–Editor, 5-94
Child Symbol
IEC, 6-57 Preferences
JIC, 6-52 AutoCAD 2000 Version, 7-61
Duplicate Checking, 7-39 AutoCAD R14 Version, 7-64
Input File, 7-38 Standalone Version, 7-69
List, 9-20 Preferred Direction, 6-7
Octal Address, 7-39
Parent Symbol, 6-39 Preferred Manufacturer’s Group, 5-82, 13-20
Placing Symbol in a Drawing, 6-49 Preview, Function, 8-2
Replace Text, 7-38 Previous, Function, 4-7
Text, 5-99, 6-50, 7-38
Wire Numbering, 5-71 Previous Page Function, Next, 4-7
PLC Online File, 7-38 Primary Units, 7-59
PLC Text, 6-50 Print/Plot Configuration, Dialog Box, 8-5
Input File, 7-38 Printer
Modify, 5-99 Configuration, 7-9
Plot, 8-1 Select, 7-9
Configuration, 8-5, 8-10 Printing Lists, 9-3
Current Page (ACAD 2000), 8-10
Current Page R14, 8-5 Programmable Controller
Dialog Box, 8-10 See also PLC
DXF File, 8-24 Report, List, 9-20
Layers, 8-26 Settings, 7-37
Multiple Pages (ACAD 2000), 8-18 Programmable Controller Settings, Function, 7-37
Multiple Pages (R14), 8-15 Programmable Controller Text Definition, Dialog
PLT File, 8-21 Box, 5-99
Preview, 8-3, 8-9
Scale, 8-9 Project
Sequence, 8-17, 8-20 Backup, 3-21
To File, 8-21 Copy, 3-16
Create, 3-5
Plotting, Dialog Box, 8-16, 8-19 Data, 3-25
PLT File, Plot to, 8-21 Default Character Size, 3-10
Default Symbol Library, 3-5
Plug, 6-66
Default Title Block, 3-6
Device IDs, 7-41
Delete, 3-14
Plug ID, Settings, 7-40 Description, 3-6
PMG, 5-82, 13-20 Device ID Format, 3-9
I–11
Index
Directory Names, 3-4 Open, Page, 4-4

Grid, 3-10 Real Time Pan, Function, 4-33
List, 9-4
Lock and Unlock, 3-13 Record, Parts Database, 13-19
Management, 3-1 Redraw, 4-32
Modify Parameters, 3-17
Organization, 3-2 Reference Guide, VBA, 1-5
Page Count, 3-26 Reference Point, 6-2, 6-9
Parameters, 3-6, 3-7, 3-17 Display, 7-16
Preselect, 3-12 Refresh, Function, 4-6
Rename, 3-19
Renumber, 5-110 Regen, 4-32
Reorganize, 3-25 Rename
Reports, 9-4 Device Type, 6-96
Settings, 3-10, 7-19 Function, 3-19, 4-28, 4-42
Project Brief, Function, 9-4 Installation, 4-42
Macro, 6-96
Project Cable List, 12-21 Page, 4-28
Project Full, Function, 3-20, 9-4 Project, 3-19
Project Preselect, Dialog Box, 3-12 Symbol, 6-96
Project Settings Rename Page, Dialog Box, 4-28

Backup, 3-22 Renumber, Terminals, 5-111
Grid, 7-2 Device ID, Formats, 3-9
Properties, Function, 5-107 Renumber Terminal Strip, Dialog Box, 11-11,
Purchase Order, Function, 9-24 11-12
Purchase Order List, 9-24 Reorganize, Project, 3-25
Dialog Box, 9-24 Repeat, Last Wire, 5-8
Repeat Last, Function, 5-8
Q Replace
Device ID, 5-110
Quadrant Function, 4-34 Part Number, 5-119
Question Mark, Alert, 7-28 Symbol, 5-108
Symbol Text, 5-115
Quit, Page, 4-16 Wire Number, Replace, 5-76
Quit Page, 4-16 Replace Part Number, Dialog Box, 5-119
Replace Symbol
R Dialog Box, 5-108
Function, 5-108
Radial, Function, 5-84 Replace Symbol Text, Function, 5-115
Ratio, Dialog Box, 5-37 Replace Text, Dialog Box, 5-114
I–12
Index
Replace Wire Numbers, Dialog Box, 5-76 RSWire

Report Settings, Tab, 5-88 Base System, 2-14
Concept, 2-1
Reports Exiting, 1-4
See also Lists Optional Modules, 2-14
Cable, 9-18 Starting, 1-3
Cable List, 12-21 VBA, 1-5
Comma Separated, 9-29
Connections, 9-10 Run Macro, Function, 1-5
Device Type Brief, Device Brief, 9-7
Device Type Full, Device Full, 9-6
Field Wire, 12-21 S
Field Wire, Field Wire List, 9-18
Foreign Languages, Language, 9-7 Save, Page, 4-8
Library, 9-6 Save As Function, 4-9
Macro, Macro, 9-6
Save Function, 4-8
Master List, 9-22
MS Access, 9-28 Scale
Parts, 9-21 Drawing, 4-14
Bill Of Materials, 9-23 Symbol, 5-23
Compile Parts File, 9-21 Scan Direction, 6-7
Dimension List, 9-27
Job Costing, 9-25 Schematic Elements, 5-1
Purchase Order, 9-24 Search, Device ID, 5-20
Parts Database, 9-7
Search Device ID, Dialog Box, 5-21
PLC List, Compile, 9-20
Project, 9-4 Select, Project, 3-12
Installations, 9-4 Select Color, Dialog Box, 5-39
Page Brief, 9-5
Page Full, 9-4 Select Devices, Dialog Box, 10-4
Project Brief, 9-4 Select Icon, 5-11
Project Full, 3-20, 9-4
Select Page, Dialog Box, 4-46
Settings, 7-5
Signals, 9-18 Select Quadrant, Dialog Box, 4-34
Symbols, Symbol, 9-6 Settings, 3-10, 7-1
Table of Contents, 9-5 Display, 7-15
Terminals, 9-19 Grid, 7-2
Wire, Wire List, 9-10
Wire Labels, 9-18 Short Circuit, 7-28
Wire List, Compile Connections, 9-10 Shortcuts, 1-6
Reserved Characters, 4-12, 5-15, 5-54 Signal Analysis Type, 3-9
Restore, Projects, Symbols, 3-24 Signal Cross Reference
Rotate, Symbol, 5-23 Analysis Types, 5-61
I–13
Index
Device ID, 5-61 Libraries, 6-4

in the Wire List, 5-60 List, 9-6
Include Page/Line, 7-22 Mirroring, 5-24
Notation Formats, 5-60 Modify, 5-96, 6-97
Star Type, 5-62, 5-63, 5-64 Move, 3-10, 5-106
Symbol Create, 6-77 Multiple Placement, 5-19
Symbols, 5-59 Nested, 5-49
Wire Numbering and, 5-66 Panel Layout, 10-9
Signals, Report, 9-18 Parent, 6-24, 6-34
Placement Rules, 5-13
Single, Function, 5-4, 5-10 PLC Child
Slant, Dialog Box, 5-36 IEC, 6-57
JIC, 6-52
Snapmode, 6-7 PLC Parent, 6-39
SODSETT.CFG, 7-47 Power–Editor, 5-94
Software Modules, 2-14 Reference Point, 6-9
Rename, 6-96
Sort Function, 14-11 Replace, 5-108
Standalone, Version of software, 2-1 Report, 9-6
Rotate, 5-23
Stretch, Function, 5-107 Rotation (Automatic), 5-13, 6-13
Suppress Device ID, 5-15 Scale, 5-23
Suppress Device Sign (–), Toggle, 7-44 Selecting, 5-11
Settings, 5-23
Symbol Signal Cross Reference, 6-77
Alternate search, 15-1 IEC, 5-65
Attribute Text, 6-15, 14-40 JIC, 5-58
Backup, 3-21 Terminal, 6-63
Cable, 12-8 Text, 5-99, 6-3
Catalog, 6-4, 6-17 Without Connection, 7-28
Catalog Path, 5-109, 6-5 Without Part Number, 7-28
Child, 6-28, 6-34
Connection Point, 6-11 Symbol By Name, Function, 5-11, 5-12
Copy, 6-95 Symbol Sets, 7-10
Create, 6-6 Symbol Text, 6-3
Cross Reference Symbol, 6-31 Angle, 5-101
Delete, 6-93 Assign, 6-13
Device Definition, 6-34 Color, 5-100
Device ID, 3-9, 5-14 Dialog Box, 5-16
Dialog Box, 5-23 Find/Replace, 5-114
DWG Import, 6-21 Height, 5-101
Elements of, 6-2 Label Origin, 5-101
Example Creation, 6-24 Modify, 5-95, 5-99
Groups, 6-8 Replace, 5-115
Layout, 10-9
I–14
Index
Window, 5-30 Configuration File, 11-25, 11-33

Symbol/Macro From Icon, Function, 5-27 Editor, 11-6
Functions, 11-5
SYMBOL_REF, 5-82 Graphical, 11-20
Internal vs. External, 11-3
Jumper, 11-16, 11-17
T Macro, 11-20
Overview, 11-2
Table, Text, 13-27 Update Existing Pages, 11-29
Table of Contents, 9-5 Terminal Plan Editor, Dialog Box, 12-7
Tablet, 1-7 Terminal Strip, Report, 9-19
Tabs, 14-28 Terminal Strip Selection, Dialog Box, 11-6
Terminal Terminal=Wire Number, 5-72, 6-65
Assign Cable, 11-18
Text
Branch Between, 7-28
Alignment, 5-38
Change Number, 11-9
Angle, 5-35
Connection Report, 9-19
Attributes, 6-14, 6-15, 14-40
Connection Search, 9-15
Color, 5-39
Delete Spare, 11-14
Dialog Box, 5-31
Device IDs, 7-41
Edit, 5-103
Editing Functions, 11-9
Entry, 5-31
Editor Mode, 11-6
Find/Replace, 5-114
Equals Wire Number, 5-72
Font, 5-39
In Macro, 6-82
Foreign Language, 5-41, 9-7
Internal vs. External Connection, 11-3
Function, 5-31
Modify Destination, 5-99
Function Text, 5-32
Move, 11-13
Height, 3-10, 5-34, 7-23
Multiple Placement, 5-19
Hidden, 5-40
Part Number, 11-18
Invisible, 5-40
Part Number Enable, 7-41
Label Origin, 5-38, 6-42
Renumber, 5-110, 5-111, 11-10, 11-11
Language, 3-9, 5-41
Settings, 7-40
Modify, 5-103
Sort, 11-12
Multi–line, 5-32
Spare, 11-13
On Drawing, 5-88
Switch Targets, 11-15
Ratio, 5-37
Symbol, 6-63
Settings, 5-34
Target Setting, 5-99
Size, 5-34
Terminal Connections, Priorities, 11-4 Size (Default), 3-10
Terminal Editor, Dialog Box, 11-7 Slant, 5-36
Styles, 7-49
Terminal Plan, 11-1 Table, 13-27
Basic Steps, 11-2
Configuration, 11-24 Text File on Drawing, 5-88, 7-6
I–15
Index
Text On Drawing, Dialog Box, 5-89 Unreferenced Signals, Function, 9-30

Text Style, Default, 7-23 Update Existing Pages, 11-29
Text Styles, 7-49 Upper/lower case, 7-4
Text Window, 2-10 User Name, 7-21
3 Phase, Customize, 6-100
3 Phase, Function, 5-6
V
Title Block, 4-15
Address in, 7-17 Variables
Create, 6-83 Database, 14-31
Default, 3-6 List, 14-29
Display/Hide, 7-22 Terminal Plan, 11-22
Logo File, 7-18 Title Block, 6-87
Modify Page Variables, 4-27 VBA
Reassign, 4-23 Load Editor, 1-5
Variables, 6-87 Load Project, 1-5
Tolerance, 7-60 Reference Guide, 1-5
Run Macro, 1-5
Toolbar, 2-9
Unload Project, 1-5
Set Position, 2-10
View, 4-32
Toolbars, 4-34
List, 5-132
Tools Navigator, 4-43
Error Checking Quadrant, 4-34
Device Without Parent, 9-30 Redraw, 4-32
Unreferenced Signals, 9-30 Regen, 4-32
Panel Layout, 10-3 Toolbars, 4-34
Project Settings, 11-24, 11-32
System Settings
Grid Settings, 12-8
Report Settings, 14-3
W
Terminal/Pin–Plug Plan Windows, Using, 2-12
Edit Terminals, 11-31
Generate Graphical Plans, 11-20, 11-30 Wire, 5-3
Change Type, 5-101
Two Line Ladder, 7-33 Color, 5-71
Continuous, 5-8
Draw, 5-3
U Gauge, 5-71
Modify Number, 5-104
Undo, 5-92 Multiple Cable Check, 7-28
Undo Delete, 5-104 90 Degree, 5-9
Numbers, 5-66
Units, 7-23 Repeat, 5-8
Unload Project, Function, 1-5 Reports, 9-10
I–16
Index
Size, 5-71
Without Connection, 7-28
X
Wire Labels, Function, 9-18 X–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33
Wire List, Function, 9-10
Wire Number, Display, 7-16 Y
Wire Number Manual, Dialog Box, 5-73
Y–Direction, Ladder Line Number, 7-33
Wire Numbers, 5-66
Automatic, 5-66
Before/After Terminal, 3-10
Color (Display), 5-71 Z
Copied Pages, 4-22, 4-41
Zone
Delete, 5-77, 5-120
Configuration, 7-36
Duplicate, 5-73, 5-75
Select, 7-22
Height, 5-71
Invisible Text in, 5-75 Zoom
Macro, 5-30, 6-83 All, 4-33
Manual, 5-72 Center, 4-33
Modify, 5-104 Dynamic, 4-32
Page select, 5-67 Extents, 4-33
Position, 5-71 In, 4-33
Replace, 5-76 Out, 4-33
Repositioning, 5-78 Previous, 4-32
Same as PLC Address, 5-71 Real Time, 4-32
Same Over Terminal, 3-10 Scale, 4-33
With Color/Gauge, 7-26 Window, 4-32
Wire/Line, Function, 5-101 Zoom Off, Function, 7-13
Wires, (Logical Lines), 5-3 Zoom Parameters, System Settings, 7-13
Wiring Diagram, 13-21
I–17
Index
I–18

Designer User&#39;s Guide v4x

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Designer User&#39;s Guide v4x

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RSWire Designer

Rockwell Software provides technical support to RSWire Designer users

Phone (440) 646–7800 Fax (440) 646–7801

For Additional Support Services such as support contract renewal and

440–646–7700 SW Services Phone

Information on RSWire training courses is available by contacting:

414–321–8000 Chris Sessions

1 Installation and Start–up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2 Introduction to RSWire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

3 Project Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Rename Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

4 Page Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

5 Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Multiple Placement of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19

Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-124

6 Create Schematic Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Printer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

10 Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

11 Terminal Plan and Pin–Plug Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

13 Parts Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Find a Parts Database Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-25

14 List Generator Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

15 Alternate Search Paths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

A RSWire Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

B RSWire Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1

C Creating Symbol Icon Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1

1 Installation and Start–up

Rs Bmp (not applicable to RSWire Standalone) toolbar button bitmap files

Catalog JIC Block block definitions

Db Custom address files

Dbs Db parts database files

Fonts font directory

Menu Dialog dialog (prompt) & help files

Plot DWG and PLT plot files

Program System executables and DLL files

Project Work user’s project files

Syscon List list generator files

Tmp temporary (scratch) files

User user interface files (upgrades only)

Work working directory

Exiting From RSWire

Select the Exit function in the File pull–down menu.

You will then exit from RSWire.

Tools VBA Load Project

Provides access to VBA.

Takes the user out of VBA

Command Aliases (AutoCAD Add–On Version)

Graphics Tablet Configuration (AutoCAD Add–On Version)

A tablet template drawing named RSWIRETAB.DWG is provided in the

Configure the Template:

1. Mount the template drawing on your tablet.

2. Open a new or existing drawing in AutoCAD (not RSWire).

3. On the command line enter the command: TABLET

4. When prompted for an option (ON/OFF/CAL/CFG), enter: CFG

5. When prompted for the number of tablet menus desired, enter: 4

Refer to the AutoCAD manual for additional information on configuring tablets.

The RSWire Concept

RSWireTM Designer is an advanced productivity tool for designers of electrical

RSWire allows schematic diagrams to be rapidly constructed using pre–defined

RSWire recognizes logical interconnections between devices in a schematic. A wire

The AutoCAD add–on version of RSWire runs as an application inside AutoCAD to

RSWire Standalone is a self–contained software system: it does not run inside

This chart shows the interrelationship of RSWire functions.

SCHEMATIC DRAWINGS LISTS

Designer User's Guide v4x

Designer User's Guide v4x